Petrol, Diesel Price On March 17: Check City-Wise Rates Across India Including In Delhi, Mumbai And Chennai.
Petrol, Diesel Prices On March 17
Petrol, Diesel Prices Today On March 17, 2025: Oil marketing companies (OMCs) update petrol and diesel prices every day at 6 AM to maintain transparency and account for changes in global market conditions. These daily revisions take into account shifts in international crude oil prices and currency exchange rates, ensuring that consumers get the most accurate and up-to-date fuel price information.
Petrol Diesel Price Today In India
Check city-wise petrol and diesel prices on March 17:
City
Petrol Price (Rs/litre)
Diesel Price (Rs/litre)
Delhi
94.72
87.62
Mumbai
103.44
89.97
Chennai
100.85
92.44
Kolkata
103.94
90.76
Noida
94.66
87.76
Lucknow
94.65
87.76
Bengaluru
102.86
88.94
Hyderabad
107.41
95.65
Jaipur
104.88
90.36
Trivandrum
107.62
96.43
Bhubaneswar
101.06
92.91
In India, fuel prices have remained steady since May 2022, after the central government and various state governments reduced fuel taxes.
Oil marketing companies (OMCs) revise fuel prices daily at 6 a.m., based on global crude oil prices fluctuations. The government regulates these prices through mechanisms like excise taxes, base pricing, and price caps.
Factors Influencing Petrol and Diesel Prices in India
Crude Oil Prices: As the key raw material for producing petrol and diesel, fluctuations in global crude oil prices have a direct impact on fuel costs in India.
Exchange Rate: India imports a significant portion of its crude oil, so changes in the exchange rate between the Indian rupee and the US dollar influence fuel prices. A weaker rupee generally leads to higher fuel costs.
Taxes: Petrol and diesel prices are subject to various taxes imposed by both the central and state governments. These taxes can vary from state to state, contributing significantly to the final price consumers pay at the pump.
Refining Costs: The process of refining crude oil into petrol and diesel incurs costs that influence fuel prices. These expenses can vary based on factors such as the type of crude oil processed and the efficiency of the refinery.
Demand: The balance of supply and demand plays a crucial role in determining fuel prices. Increased demand for petrol and diesel typically results in higher prices, as suppliers adjust to market conditions.
Check Petrol and Diesel Prices via SMS
You can easily check the latest petrol and diesel prices in your city through SMS. For Indian Oil customers, text the city code followed by “RSP” to 9224992249. BPCL customers can send “RSP” to 9223112222, and HPCL customers can text “HP Price” to 9222201122 to receive the current fuel prices.
News business Petrol, Diesel Fresh Prices Announced: Check Rates In Your City On March 17
On March 15, 2025, Kaito AI, an artificial intelligence-powered platform for crypto market analysis, and its founder, Yu, fell victim to a social media hack on X (formerly Twitter). The attackers gained control of the account and falsely claimed that Kaito AI’s wallets had been compromised, warning users that their funds were at risk.
According to blockchain investigator Defi Warhol, the attackers also reportedly opened a short position on Kaito tokens before posting the false alerts. Their goal appeared to be manipulating the token’s price downward so they could profit from the artificial decline.
However, Kaito AI’s team quickly regained control of the compromised account and reassured users that their wallets remained secure. The team also said that they had implemented robust security measures to prevent such incidents in the future, noting that the attack seemed similar to other recent breaches targeting crypto-related accounts.
The company wrote, “This account and @Punk9277 were just compromised. The KAITO wallets were NOT and are NOT compromised. We now have regained access to the twitter accounts. Please bare with us as we investigate how this happened. We had high standard security measures in place to prevent it – so it seems to be similar or the same to other recent Twitter account hacks. We’ll update as soon as we can. To reiterate – KAITO token wallets have not been compromised.”
The rise in such cyberattacks has led to an alarming increase in losses within the crypto ecosystem. According to a report by blockchain security platform Immunefi, losses in February 2025 were 20 times higher than in January 2025, with a sharp increase in scams targeting investors.
The tragic incident of a girl student’s suicide at KIIT University and the subsequent unrest in the eastern part of the county has underscored the importance refining administrative frameworks.
Students should have access to channels for voicing concerns and those grievances must be addressed with sensitivity and fairness.
The unfortunate incident at KIIT University and Ashoka University has led to grief and calls for reform, it also provides an opportunity to reflect on the broader responsibilities of universities in ensuring student well-being.
Universities should ensure that the decision-making processes are transparent and always aligned with the best interests of students.
Educational institutions must anticipate and mitigate risks related to student safety, mental health and campus security.
Unlike corporations that are regulated by external bodies such as the RBI or SEBI, universities operate with greater autonomy, making it essential for them to self-regulate through well-defined governance structures.
To achieve this, universities across India could benefit from adopting the best practices from corporate governance, while still preserving the unique ethos of academia. One effective approach is to establish independent oversight committees comprising of individuals with diverse expertise. Such measures can help ensure greater accountability while preventing insular decision-making.
KIIT’s existing governance framework can be further strengthened through periodic reviews and external assessments, ensuring that it remains aligned with the best global practices.
Additionally, standardised policies for handling student grievances and disciplinary matters must be clearly defined and easily accessible.
Regular audits—covering not just financial aspects but also student welfare, academic quality, and campus climate—are crucial for ensuring that governance remain effective.
KIIT University, with its long-standing commitment to student welfare, can take this as an opportunity to lead the way in setting higher standards for governance in Indian education. By refining policies, enhancing oversight, and reinforcing its student-first approach, KIIT can further solidify its reputation as a forward-thinking institution that prioritises both academic excellence and student well-being.
Satyadeep Mishra, parent of a KIITian and Senior HR Leader, said while KIIT University is a progressive and matured university, the first generation institutions always grapple with balancing growth versus process orientation.
In hindsight, this is an opportunity for KIIT to evolve and streamline certain processes, he said.
CNET recommends AT&T and Spectrumas the two main internet providers in Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Between the two, AT&T Fiber stands out for offering faster speeds and fiber internet access (plans start at $55 a month and go up to $245). All of this at a pricing comparable to Spectrum, which comes in as our second choice.
For those who rely heavily on the internet — whether working from home, browsing or keeping kids entertained — Milwaukee has several solid options. Reliable speeds, reasonable pricing, extensive coverage and good customer support are essential. While AT&T and Spectrum are the primary choices for many residents, other providers like T-Mobile, Verizon and EarthLink might also be available, depending on your address. The rates for these start at $50 a month.
Best internet providers in Milwaukee
Internet providers in Milwaukee overview
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
$10 (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50 ($30-$50 with eligible mobile plans)
72-245Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60-$80 ($35-$45 with eligible mobile plans)
50-1,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other Milwaukee residential internet providers
Internet service providers in Milwaukee range from large telecom companies to satellite providers. When deciding which internet service provider to choose, knowing your options and how to get the fastest and most reliable service for your home is important.
EarthLink is available in 45% of Milwaukee, has speeds up to 5,000Mbps, and has DSL, fiber and satellite connections.
T-Mobile Home Internet also offers 5G wireless internet in Milwaukee. It has one plan for $50 a month and speeds ranging from 72Mbps to 245Mbps.
Satellite internet is available virtually everywhere, including Milwaukee, thanks to providers like Hughesnet, Starlink and Viasat.
Joe Daniel Price/Getty Images
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Milwaukee?
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
The best internet deals and top promotions in Milwaukee depend on what discounts are available during that time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Milwaukee internet providers, such as Spectrum may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Many providers, including AT&T Fiber and Verizon 5G Home Internet, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
Fastest internet providers in Milwaukee
Speed test results for the Brew City put the median fixed download speed at 278Mbps. Remember that several factors go into speed test results, such as the time of day it’s run and whether you run it from an Ethernet connection or using your Wi-Fi.
Several internet service providers in Milwaukee offer fast speeds throughout the city. Spectrum offers speeds up to 1Gbps, with AT&T’s Fiber offerings featuring up to 5Gbps in some areas. These speeds allow you to work remotely, game online and have multiple people on the network streaming.
What are the fastest internet plans in Milwaukee?
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Milwaukee?
Many fast, affordable and available options exist throughout the city of Milwaukee. Most importantly, you can find home internet plans without contracts or data caps, like AT&T, Spectrum, T-Mobile Home Internet and Verizon 5G Home Internet.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Milwaukee
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. What’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there. We use the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we’re considering every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. To evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service, we look at sources including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of the time of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answer to those questions is often layered and complex, but the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
To explore our process in more depth, visit our page on how we test ISPs.
Milwaukee internet provider FAQs
Which is the best internet service provider in Milwaukee?
Overall, AT&T Fiber offers the best home internet service in Milwaukee. Where available, the company’s plans offer speeds from 300Mbps to 5Gbps. The service also boasts no annual contracts and no additional equipment rental charges.
Milwaukee offers free Wi-Fi in its parks using the “City of Milwaukee Wi-Fi” network. There is no free Wi-Fi in your home. You’ll need to purchase an internet plan with one of the providers mentioned in this guide.
Cat owners have been alerted to a potential health threat.
Savage Pet of El Cajon, California, is recalling 66 large chicken boxes (84 oz.) and 74 small chicken boxes (21 oz.) with the lot code/”best by” date of 11.15.2026, as these products have “the potential to contain H5N1, also known as bird flu,” according to the U.S. Food & Drug Administration (FDA).
The Savage Cat food products were distributed to retailers in five states: California, Colorado, New York, Pennsylvania and Washington, the FDA’s website says.
FARMERS IN 6 STATES TOLD TO STOP USING CERTAIN ANIMAL FEED AS FDA ANNOUNCES RECALL
“People who fed [their] cats the recalled products should watch for symptoms of bird flu, including fever, lethargy, low appetite, reddened or inflamed eyes, discharge from the eyes and nose, difficulty breathing, and neurological signs like tremors, stiff body movements, seizure, lack of coordination or blindness,” the notice says.
Anyone whose felines exhibit these signs after consuming the product “should immediately contact their veterinarian,” the FDA advises.
Anyone whose cats exhibit certain symptoms, including fever, lethargy and low appetite, “should immediately contact their veterinarian,” the FDA’s website says. Pet owners need to protect themselves from possible infection as well, the site indicates.(iStock)
The FDA indicates that “while no human infections have been identified among people handling raw pet food products, humans can become infected if [the] live virus gets into a person’s eyes, nose or mouth.”
TWO FOOD PRODUCTS INCLUDING MACARONI AND CHEESE BITES RECALLED FOR ‘UNDECLARED EGGS’
Regular handwashing and cleaning of contact surfaces is highly recommended, the notice also indicates.
“People who handled the recalled products should watch for symptoms of bird flu.”
“People who handled the recalled products should watch for symptoms of bird flu, including eye redness or irritation (conjunctivitis), cough, sore throat, sneezing, runny/stuffy nose, muscle/body aches, headaches, fatigue, fever, trouble breathing, seizures, rash, diarrhea, nausea and/or vomiting.”
The New York City Health Department issued a statement about three cats (not pictured) potentially becoming infected with bird flu.(iStock)
The notice also says, “People exhibiting these signs after having contact with this product should contact their healthcare provider and local health department.”
In February, Savage Pet said it was “made aware of one cat in Colorado that contracted H5N1, got sick and recovered.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
The laboratory at Colorado State University “tested sealed packets of Savage Cat Food using PCR testing for H5N1,” the FDA’s site says.
The PCR test results were “non-negative,” according to the same source.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“The product with ‘non-negative’ PCR results was sent to the National Veterinary Services Laboratory in Ames, Iowa, for virus isolation testing” — and the product was taken off the market pending final test results, the site says.
The company added, as the FDA site indicates, “To ensure maximum safety, we are modifying our market withdrawal to a recall … The product with lot code/’best by’ date of 11.15.2026 was distributed in November 2024.”(REUTERS/Andrew Kelly/File Photo)
The virus isolation testing was found “to be negative,” it also says.
On March 13, “Savage Pet was made aware of an additional case in New York of a kitten” that ate from lot 11.15.2026 and “contracted avian flu. Further testing is ongoing.”
Previous studies have suggested that H5N1 could be transmitted among cats.
The company added, as the FDA site indicates, “To ensure maximum safety, we are modifying our market withdrawal to a recall … The product with lot code/’best by’ date of 11.15.2026 was distributed in November 2024.”
“The boxes are cardboard and contain individual plastic packets inside. The lot code/’best by’ date is stamped on the bottom and on each packet.”
Potential cat-to-cat transmission
Previous studies have suggested that H5N1 could be transmitted among cats, and a March 15 statement from the New York City Health Department seems to support that possibility.
The statement provided details of two cats that contracted bird flu and a third cat suspected to have it.
“Avian influenza (bird flu) virus was detected in two cats and a suspected third cat over the past two months, all connected to Savage Cat Food, poultry packets lot number 11152026,” the alert read.
“Avian influenza (bird flu) virus was detected in two cats and a suspected third cat over the past two months, all connected to Savage Cat Food, poultry packets lot number 11152026,” read an alert from the New York City Health Department.(iStock)
The first cat, cat A, became ill and died after eating chicken packets from Savage Cat Food.
“Testing for H5 bird flu was performed at the Cornell Veterinary Diagnostic Laboratory, and confirmatory H5N1 testing by the U.S.D.A. National Veterinary Services Laboratory (NVSL) is pending.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
A second cat, cat B, was diagnosed with H5N1 and also died as a result of infection, health officials said – but “this cat did not consume the raw food product but was exposed to a sick cat, cat C. Cat C became ill with fever after consuming Savage Cat Food lot number 11152026.”
“Cat C survived and H5 testing was not performed and cannot be performed, as too much time has passed.”
This suggests that cat B may have been infected after contact with cat C.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Eating home-cooked meals is often considered the best way to maintain a healthy diet. You are avoiding processed foods, preservatives, and unhealthy fats – yet you still experience bloating after meals. What is going on? Bloating, characterised by a swollen or tight feeling in the abdomen, is a common digestive issue. While it is often linked to processed foods, even homemade meals can sometimes cause discomfort due to specific ingredients, portion sizes, and eating habits. Below are the most common reasons your home-cooked food might make you feel bloated.
Here Are 6 Reasons Why You Feel Bloated After Eating Home-Cooked Food:
1. Overuse of Masalas and Spices: Irritating the Digestive System
Indian and other traditional cuisines rely heavily on a variety of spices. While spices like cumin, turmeric, and ginger aid digestion, some spices can irritate the gut lining or cause gas formation when consumed in excess. Food with excess red chillies may irritate the stomach lining and cause acid reflux and bloating. Hing (asafoetida) is used for reducing gas, but in some people, it may trigger the opposite effect. Garlic and onion, which are essential to many curries, contain fructans, a type of fermentable fibre that some individuals struggle to digest, leading to bloating and gas formation.
How to Fix It: Avoid excess chillies and use more cumin, mint, and coriander, which aid digestion. Saunf (fennel) and cardamom after meals can help improve digestion.
Also Read:5 Expert-Suggested Food Combinations That Make Your Meal A ‘Super Meal’
2. High-Sodium Meals: Water Retention and Puffiness
Eating high-salt meals may lead to water retention and puffiness, even if they are made with fresh ingredients. Extra salt intake draws water into the tissues, causing a bloated feeling. A study in the American Journal of Gastroenterology (2019) found that high sodium intake can alter gut microbiota and increase fluid retention, contributing to bloating.
How to Fix It: Gradually reduce salt to adjust your taste preferences. Instead of table salt, use natural herbs and lemon juice to enhance flavour. Drink plenty of water to flush out excess sodium.
Also Read:Anushka Sharma’s Dietitian Shares 3 Key Nutrients For Women Over 40
3. Gas-Producing Vegetables: Cruciferous Veggies and Legumes
Cabbage, cauliflower, and broccoli contain raffinose, which remains undigested and produces gas when fermented in the gut. Beans, lentils, and chickpeas are rich in oligosaccharides, another fermentable sugar that can cause bloating. Radish and onion contain sulphur compounds that also produce gas.
How to Fix It: Soaking beans and lentils overnight and discarding the water before cooking helps break down gas-producing compounds. Cook cruciferous vegetables with digestive-friendly spices like cumin, ginger, or fennel to reduce bloating. Increase fibre intake gradually to allow your digestive system to adjust.
4. Eating Too Fast or Poor Meal Timings
How you eat also affects digestive health. Eating too quickly, keeping irregular meal times, not chewing properly, eating in bed, or lying down immediately after eating can all disrupt digestion. Eating too quickly or gulping food may lead to swallowing excess air (aerophagia), causing bloating. Irregular meal times disrupt the body’s natural digestive rhythm, making digestion less efficient. Eating large meals late at night and sleeping soon after can slow digestion and cause acid reflux and bloating.
How to Fix It: Chew food slowly and mindfully to reduce swallowed air. Eat at regular intervals to maintain a stable digestive system. Avoid large, heavy meals late at night-keep dinner light and eat at least two to three hours before sleeping.
5. Dairy Sensitivity: Lactose Intolerance and Digestive Issues
Some people are lactose intolerant, or even if you consume dairy regularly, you may still experience mild lactose intolerance, leading to bloating, gas, and stomach discomfort. If you feel bloated or experience stomach cramps and indigestion within 30 minutes to two hours of consuming dairy-based foods like milk, paneer, curd, or kheer, you may need to reduce your intake. Some people lose the ability to produce lactase (the enzyme that breaks down lactose) as they age, leading to digestive issues.
How to Fix It: If dairy is causing bloating, try lactose-free milk or plant-based alternatives like almond or soy milk. Fermented dairy products like yogurt and buttermilk are easier to digest and may cause less discomfort.
6. Cooking Oils and Fats: Impact on Digestion
Cooking oils and fats are important for a balanced meal, but both the quality and quantity matter. Too much oil, butter, or ghee can slow digestion and cause bloating. High-fat meals delay gastric emptying, meaning food stays in the stomach longer, leading to discomfort. Fried or oily foods require more energy to digest, increasing bloating.
How to Fix It: Moderation is key. Reduce the amount of oil used in cooking and opt for grilling, roasting, or steaming instead of deep-frying.
The Bottom Line
Bloating after eating home-cooked food is often due to a combination of certain ingredients, portion sizes, and eating habits rather than the food itself. By making small adjustments, you can enjoy your meals without discomfort.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-16/VOA-staff-put-on-leave-Trump-ally-says-agency-not-salvageable–1BN34ISDt5K/img/e1fb24bcc5fa4220bedd696abe38b36e/e1fb24bcc5fa4220bedd696abe38b36e.jpeg' alt='The Voice of America headquarters in Washington, D.C., U.S., March 15, 2025. /VCG'
Hundreds of staffers at Voice of America (VOA), Radio Free Asia, Radio Free Europe and other outlets received a weekend email that they will be barred from their offices and should surrender press passes and equipment, local media reported Saturday.
The cuts followed an executive order by U.S. President Donald Trump on Friday, which listed U.S. Agency for Global Media (USAGM) as part of “unnecessary” federal bureaucracy.
USAGM, VOA’s parent agency, employs about 3,500 staff and has an $886 million budget for 2024, according to its latest report to Congress.
The agency has severed all contracts for the privately incorporated international broadcasters it funds, including Radio Free Europe and Radio Free Asia, local media reported.
More than 1,300 Voice of America employees were reportedly placed on administrative leave on Saturday.
Kari Lake, the former news anchor and Trump loyalist nominated to be director of VOA, issued a statement describing USAGM as “a giant rot and burden to the American taxpayer,” adding that it was “not salvageable.” Lake said she would shrink the agency to a minimum possible size under the law.
Meanwhile, some Republicans have accused VOA and other publicly funded media outlets of being biased against conservatives, and have called for them to be shuttered as part of the efforts by tech billionaire Elon Musk and his Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) to shrink the government.
So far, Musk’s DOGE has cut more than 100,000 jobs across the 2.3 million-member federal civilian workforce, frozen foreign aid and cancelled thousands of programs and contracts.
In addition to USAGM, Trump’s order also targeted the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service, the Woodrow Wilson International Center for Scholars, the Institute of Museum and Library Services, the U.S. Interagency Council on Homelessness, the Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, and the Minority Business Development Agency for cuts that would limit them to “the minimum presence and function required by law.”
In a statement, the White House said his executive orders “will ensure that taxpayers are no longer on the hook for radical propaganda,” before listing various criticisms of VOA, including allegations of left-wing bias.
However, reports indicate that the decision is expected to face challenges, as Congress, not the president, has the constitutional power of the purse.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
BOJE inspirirane hranom već su dugo popularne u dizajnu, od crvene poput trešnje, do losos ružičaste i maslac žute. A sada je na red došla pistacija zelena, koja će biti hit u uređenju interijera u proljeće i ljeto 2025. godine.
Pistacija zelena brzo je postala omiljena među dizajnerima, ali i poznatim osobama. Jedna od njih je modna ikona Victoria Beckham, koja uvijek prati najnovije trendove. Nije iznenađujuće što je pistacija zelena našla svoje mjesto u njezinoj garderobi. Ova boja je idealna za one koji žele unijeti sofisticiranost u svoj prostor, a istovremeno stvoriti smirujući, prirodni ugođaj.
Boja koja podiže raspoloženje
Pistacija zelena je elegantnija od limeta zelene, ali svjetlija i življa od tamnog tirkiza. Savršena je za dodavanje boje bilo kojem dijelu vašeg doma.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pistacija zelena nije samo lijepa već i pozitivno utječe na raspoloženje. Dizajneri je obožavaju jer je svestrana i dobro se slaže s mnogim drugim bojama. Možete je kombinirati s nekim neočekivanim tonovima, poput tamnoljubičaste.
Možete početi s manjim detaljima u ovoj boji, poput jastučića, vaza ili fotelja. Ova boja, koja je do sada bila pomalo zanemarena, sada zasluženo zauzima središnje mjesto u dizajnu interijera.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
April 6 is the day the newest class of City Section Hall of Fame sports selections will be inducted during a ceremony at the Odyssey Restaurant in Granada Hills.
2025 CIF LA City Section Hall of Fame RSVP and Event Info!
Induction of the Class of 2025 is on April 6 at the Odyssey Restaurant in Granada Hills. 11 am – 4 pm.
The class includes football standouts Steve Smith (Taft) and Wendell Tyler (Crenshaw) along with baseball standouts Randy Wolf (El Camino Real) and Ryan Braun (Granada Hills) as well as softball standout Laurie Romero Healy (El Camino Real).
Corona (4-0), ranked No. 1 by The Times in high school baseball, begins its Big VIII League season Monday at Norco. The teams play each other three times this week, including Tuesday at Corona and Thursday at Norco. …
This is a daily look at the positive happenings in high school sports. To submit any news, please email [email protected].
Avert your eyes, long-term planners: We’re here to tell the rest of you that it’s not too late to plan a spring break trip. In fact, ’tis the season for last-minute travel, as northerners’ patience for dreary weather starts to lapse and longer days leave us pining for warmer ones.
Spring fever? These warm-weather destinations are perfect right now.(Image by Pixabay)
Below, we’ve compiled a list of six perfectly seasonal escapes, all inspired by our annual list of where to go in the year ahead. These places are especially wonderful to visit in the months of March, April and May, according to our network of travel advisers and exclusive price data from Kayak. Not only do they offer great vacation vibes, but you’ll also find excellent value.
For insights on what you might spend on both hotels and airfare to each of these places—all customized based on where you’re coming from—check out our interactive 2025 travel tool here.
Antigua & Barbuda
In April and May, luxury hotel rates fall from a high of $561 per night to just around $320—which is roughly what you’d pay during the hurricane-prone months of July, August and September. One place we’re jonesing to stay? The all-inclusive Hermitage Bay, which admittedly costs a lot more. (Rooms start at $2,899 for two people, including meals and drinks.) Shortly after we finished our annual “Where to Go” feature for 2025, the hotel finished a multimillion-dollar renovation that made the 20-year-old icon feel fresh again. The additions include new villas stilted over the sandy shore and a new restaurant run by a Nobu protégé. But the amenity that has us booking airfare is a new beachfront “tree bar,” with seating built around a giant trunk and bohemian wicker lanterns hanging from the branches above. Rum punches for two, please.
Los Angeles
We told you Los Angeles would be a hot spot for its dining scene this year, but we couldn’t have predicted what the city would go through in January—and how urgently those restaurants would need you to pay them a visit. Tourism began to bounce back just weeks after catastrophic wildfires caused $164 billion in destruction across the city. And that’s largely because Tinseltown’s main sights and tourist attractions were unaffected by those early January fires. Still, the city has seen a portion of its population decamp while it begins the long process of rebuilding homes, leaving out-of-towners to fill the gap for local businesses. One way to do it is by staying at the Fairmont Breakers Long Beach, a 100-year-old institution fresh off a $150 million face-lift; its penthouse has just reopened as the Sky Room, a rebirth of an Old Hollywood icon where you can dine on passionfruit-topped hiramasa kingfish crudo in a dining room once frequented by Rita Hayworth and Clark Gable. Then stop by Santa Monica’s Seline and West Hollywood’s Somni—the boldface restaurants we told you about in December—before wrapping your food tour at modern Korean temple Ki, which serves a highly inventive multicourse tasting menu for $285 to just 12 diners per night.
San Diego
By May the storied, 938-room Hotel Del Coronado will put the finishing touches on its $500 million renovation—one of the most expensive hotel overhauls in US history. Most of the work is already done; just two restaurants, including a Nobu outpost, have yet to open. But its new seaside villas are taking reservations, and the meticulous reconstruction of the historic Victorian lobby and its front porch have already won architectural preservation and design awards.
If you’re looking for something more intimate, the Granger, with one-tenth of the Del’s total capacity, is newly opened in a 1904 Romanesque building with dramatically tall windows; its location in the Gaslamp district puts it within easy walking distance of many of the city’s best rooftop bars, restaurants and microbreweries. The destination is a good one for points hounds: You can book the Del with Hilton points, and the Granger through Marriott Bonvoy.
Seville
It can be tricky to explain why some places appear to become trendy overnight, but we knew Seville would have an “it” factor this year even before it started bubbling up all over our social feeds. Among the things that are working in favor of the Andalusian capital: Its compact size means you can see it in a long weekend, a spate of new hotel openings has brought a much-needed influx of chic-yet-affordable places to stay, and the weather is consistently mild and balmy. The city also has great culinary range: You’ve got Moorish tavernas like El Rincón that date to the late 1600s and modernist tapas bars such as Eslava. Extend your stay with a few days at Kukutana, a family estate that was converted into a six-room, all-inclusive resort three years ago. It’s less than an hour’s drive southwest of Seville in the 247,000-acre Doñana National Park, where you can spot Iberian lynx roaming the grounds or go horseback riding on dune-lined beaches.
Lexington, Kentucky
April is track month in this horse racing capital, which is second only to Louisville for equestrian sports and every bit as exciting a city to visit. Keeneland, Lexington’s answer to Churchill Downs, hosts races from April 4 to 25; after that come the thoroughbred sales events, where people bid upwards of $10 million for the most promising racehorse colts. Tailgating is part of the fun, though here it’s less parking-lot-beer-fest and more gracious-Southern-hospitality (think a manicured gardenlike setting flanked by flowering crabapple trees). Complementing that scene is a restorative dose of rugged nature: The Raven Run nature sanctuary has rambling hiking trails and bluegrass meadows hugging the Kentucky River, all less than 20 miles from the center of downtown. Bonus: At publication time, you could still find prime hotel rooms for under $200, even in the thick of race season.
Out Islands, Bahamas
Spring isn’t typically the moment for hotel openings in the Bahamian Isles (the pricey “festive” season, aka Christmas and New Year’s, is the big moment for swish new resort openings), but one exception quietly popped onto our radar recently: the just-opened Coral Sands Inn & Cottages on Harbour Island’s Pink Sands beach. (The redundancy in those names should give you a sense of what makes the place so special.) The vibe is retro maximalism, yielding such a fun blend of whimsy and kitsch you’d think the design team went on a side quest to find the island’s best Bahama Mama. Counter stools and patio chairs have seashell-shaped seat backs; the lobby furnishings sport boldly patterned upholstery and tassels and nautical rope; and bedrooms have whimsical splashes like pink claw-foot bathtubs and elaborate canopy beds. At the main Pink Mermaid bar, shell- and coral-covered light fixtures look like they were assembled by talented seagulls combing the shore. Sleepy beach relaxation this is not; creative fever dream, it absolutely is.
Another Nintendo Switch 2 game may have been revealed ahead of schedule.
Developer FuturLab recently unveiled PowerWash Simulator 2, which will launch for PS5, Xbox Series X|S and PC in 2025. The sequel to the surprise 2022 hit includes a host of additional multiplayer options, as well as a new campaign and central hub for your powerwashing business.
In what is perhaps more proof that the 2025 Nintendo Switch 2 games line-up will be absolutely epic, FuturLab may have accidentally spilled the beans on a possible Switch 2 port for PowerWash Simulator 2.
Covering the announcement of the game, Eurogamer confirmed that PowerWash Simulator 2 would be released for Nintendo Switch 2.
“We do plan to release on Switch 2, but will share more on that when we are ready,” a FuturLab spokesperson told the website.
However, FuturLab would subsequently claim the reports were premature and that there are currently no firm plans.
“Whilst we would like to release on Switch 2, there are no current firm plans,” a spokesperson continued. “We have no timeframe or news there.”
Despite the comments, it’s been speculated that a Switch 2 port is in development, but was announced ahead of schedule. Fingers crossed.
Sadly, it looks like a virtual reality version won’t be released, despite the first game getting a solid VR port.
As for the potential Nintendo Switch 2 port, it’s possible PowerWash Simulator 2 will be unveiled during the upcoming Nintendo Direct conference in April.
Taking place at 2pm GMT UK time on April 2, the Nintendo Direct conference will shed light on the Switch 2 release date and price.
Current estimates suggest the console will cost around $399, although some believe US tariffs could impact the price in certain regions.
Either way, analysts are certain the console will sell big numbers and won’t experience similar stock shortages to the PS5.
Toyota is no longer alone in the world of affordable hybrid hatches.
For years the Japanese manufacturer boasted hybrid power as a USP of its Yaris and Corolla nameplates, but that all changed last year with the introduction of three new rivals in Australia – the mild-hybrid Hyundai i30 N Line, the Suzuki Swift Hybrid and this, the new MG 3 Hybrid+.
Electrification is well and truly in vogue, and MG has gone the whole hog by offering the second-generation of its entry-level hatchback with a full-fat hybrid system rather than mild-hybrid tech. It’s a punchy little powertrain too, producing a combined 155kW.
Then there’s the price – the flagship Essence Hybrid+ on test here still comes in comfortably cheaper than a mid-spec Yaris. What’s not to love, right?
Well, potential buyers are still likely to be put off by the new price point of the MG 3, considering the previous model was a sub-$20k proposition. Likewise, many will recall the countless unfavourable reviews aimed at the old car.
WATCH: Paul’s video review of the 2024 MG 3 Essence Hybrid+
So, has MG done enough with the new top-spec MG 3 to earn the trust and hard-earned cash of Australian new car buyers?
Read on to find out…
How does the MG3 compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the MG3 against similarly sized vehicles.
MG
MG3
How much does the MG 3 cost?
The flagship MG 3 Essence Hybrid+ sneaks in just under $30,000 before on-road costs – making it $1970 cheaper than a mid-spec Yaris Hybrid but dearer than other rivals including the Swift Hybrid, Mazda 2, and the base Volkswagen Polo.
Model
Price before on-road costs
Drive-away pricing
2025 MG 3 Excite
$23,990
$21,888
2025 MG 3 Essence
$25,990
$26,990
2025 MG 3 Excite Hybrid+
$27,990
$28,990
2025 MG 3 Essence Hybrid+
$29,990
–
Worth noting is MG recently slashed pricing of the base MG 3 Excite, now priced from $21,888 drive-away until the end of March 2025. Previously, it was listed for $24,990 drive-away.
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What is the MG 3 like on the inside?
The MG 3 is now a $30k light car in Essence guise, and we wouldn’t necessarily say it feels like one inside.
I’m well aware that $29,990 before on-road costs isn’t a lot of money by modern new car standards, but the materials used here feel particularly cheap.
The door cards, centre tunnel, and dash top are all finished in scratchy black plastic, while the silver plastic gear selector is a flimsy, rattly item that feels a bit low-quality.
Toggles on the steering wheel, another common interior touchpoint, are likewise unsubstantial. Gloss black plastic is notorious for wearing poorly, yet MG has chosen to trim the shifter surround and steering wheel buttons in the stuff.
It’s a shame as there’s plenty to like about the design of the wheel, and indeed the rest of the interior. Like other MG models, the MG 3 features a leatherette two-spoke steering wheel that sits nicely in the hands. The bottom centre marker looks cool, too.
Other high-traffic areas including the armrests and seats are finished in black leatherette with brown stitching.
The aforementioned seats present in a mix of leatherette and cloth, with manual adjustment and no special features to note. Both front chairs lack sculpting, but they’re well-cushioned and comfortable on long road trips.
While the materials in the new MG 3 Hybrid+ aren’t likely to wow potential buyers, the interior tech has plenty of showroom appeal.
All variants – both petrol and hybrid – feature a 10.25-inch infotainment touchscreen and 7.0-inch digital instrument display, both of which are slick and functional.
The rectangular infotainment screen boots up quickly revealing sharp graphics and a choice of two simple layouts – large tiles or a smartphone-style app grid.
Both setups are easy to navigate, but I preferred the default tiled layout with direct access to Apple CarPlay, climate control, navigation, and native audio. Various shortcut icons are permanently located on the right-hand side of the screen for quicker access.
Wireless smartphone mirroring isn’t available in the new MG 3, but there’s a USB-A outlet to connect your phone, as well as USB-C and 12V outlets under the centre stack for charging. The wired connection was reliable throughout our test period, offsetting the lack of wireless connectivity.
Just about all functions in the MG 3 are focused within the responsive touchscreen, with a small strip of physical buttons allocated to volume controls and demister functions, as well as a shortcut to the home screen.
It’d be nice to have a traditional climate control panel, as the climate menu is hassle to access while using smartphone mirroring. Steering wheel toggles for the instrument display and MG Pilot system can also be fiddly to operate on the move too, but I’ve definitely experienced worse.
The small instrument cluster screen is a simple item that provides all the necessary information in an easily digestible way.
There’s a decent amount of storage space available up front; from a configurable centre console to a wide glovebox and narrow door bins. Two large central cupholders will swallow just about any takeaway coffee, or a pair of large drink bottles.
While the front row is roomy, the second row is tight on space which is no surprise for a car of this size. Leg room and head room are limited, although the seats themselves are relatively comfy and toe room is plentiful.
A couple of average-sized adults can squeeze in for short trips, but the back seats should be treated as a kids zone or storage shelf. That’s especially true of the middle seat, which is best saved for emergencies.
Small windows and dark headlining make the second row feel even more cramped than it is, despite the presence of the sunroof up front.
While space is limited, the MG 3 still offers some handy second row amenities including a single USB-A outlet and dual air vents, plus storage in the form of map pockets and tight door bins. No centre armrest or cupholders though – a disappointing omission.
The MG 3 makes up for its lack of rear legroom with 293 litres of boot capacity – more than the Suzuki Swift Hybrid (265L), Toyota Yaris Hybrid (270L), and Mazda 2 (250L).
Volkswagen’s Polo (351L) and the BYD Dolphin (345L) lead the way, but the MG 3 still offers a deep storage area, albeit with a steep load lip.
There’s a chunky step up to the bench storage area too, which makes it harder to load bulky items. The bench itself folds as a single piece.
Other features of the boot include a tyre repair kit – no spare here – and a trio of top-tether points for securing child seats.
Dimensions
MG 3 Essence Hybrid+
Length
4113mm
Width
1797mm
Height
1502mm
Wheelbase
2570mm
Cargo capacity
293L (rear seats up) 983L (rear seats folded)
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
Hybrid tech is the headline update for the new MG 3 range, increasing power output to 155kW on Hybrid+ models. The hybrid powertrain in the MG 3 packs more punch than the Toyota Yaris Hybrid and mild-hybrid Suzuki Swift Hybrid, but both rivals are more fuel efficient.
Specifications
MG 3 Essence Hybrid+
Engine
1.5-litre 4cyl petrol-electric
Engine outputs
75kW
Electric motor outputs
128Nm
System outputs
155kW
Battery
1.83kWh
Transmission
3-speed automatic
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
Weight
1308kg
Fuel economy (claimed)
4.3L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
5.7L/100km
Fuel tank capacity
36L
Fuel requirement
95 octane premium unleaded
CO2 emissions
100g/km
Emissions standard
Euro 5
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How does the MG 3 drive?
The new MG 3 Hybrid+ offers a unique set of driving characteristics compared to its peers, setting it apart from the competition.
The hybrid system doesn’t feel like an afterthought or a marketing gimmick. Rather, it brings a new level of refinement to the segment – a trait that hasn’t traditionally been associated with the carmaker Down Under.
On pressing the start/stop button you’re greeted by… peaceful silence. Hybrid versions of the MG 3 happily complete low-speed suburban trips in EV mode, zipping around without a sound.
It’s a relaxing way to get around town, and your wallet will thank you. We didn’t quite match MG’s fuel consumption claim, but 5.7L/100km in the real world is still better than just about any petrol-only competitor.
Electric power has turned the MG 3 into a nippy little thing, too, with instantaneous throttle response and plenty of torque – plenty of fun in even the least conducive driving situations.
The throttle and brake pedals have a nice weight to them, and the MG 3 changes direction with conviction when steered via an ergonomic squared-off wheel.
The petrol engine kicks in under hard acceleration and at higher speeds, and the transition between EV and hybrid driving is seamless.
MG says the hybrid will complete the 0-100km/h sprint in 8.0 seconds and I don’t doubt that claim – it feels genuinely quick both off the line and in terms of ‘in-gear’ acceleration.
A three-speed automatic transmission cycles through the gears with CVT-like smoothness.
In hindsight it’s surprising how well-sorted the MG 3 Hybrid+ feels on the road, having had a vastly worse experience behind the wheel of a new MG ZS with the same powertrain.
The ZS seemed confused by its lack of ratios, easily becoming ‘stuck’ at 3000-4000rpm during everyday driving. That wasn’t the case in the MG 3, which leaned on electric power when possible and shifted confidently under the load of the petrol engine.
While the hybrid powertrain passes with flying colours, ride comfort in the new MG 3 is just average. It’s hardly an achilles heel, but you feel imperfections in the road and the car has a tendency to bounce over speed humps and potholes. Not that many vehicles in the small car segment are going to ride like a Rolls-Royce, though.
The small dimensions of the MG 3 are a blessing when it comes to parking, and the Essence Hybrid+ is equipped with a solid 360-degree camera make life that little bit easier.
All in all, the new MG 3 Hybrid+ does a fantastic job as an entry-level city car, and it doesn’t fall apart when you hit the highway, either.
As you’d expect, 155kW comes in handy when merging and overtaking at speeds exceeding 80km/h. Manoeuvres that you wouldn’t dare considered in the underpowered Swift Hybrid are easily completed in the MG 3 Hybrid+ – a win for safety and the driving experience alike.
Once up to speed, the MG Pilot semi-autonomous driving system comes into its own. While many rivals make do with basic adaptive cruise control, MG Pilot will also take steering duties off your hands.
It’s one thing to offer such tech, but another thing entirely for it to function as intended. And after a week of highway commuting, I can safely say that MG Pilot is an excellent system for a vehicle at this price point.
I quickly trusted the MG 3 to maintain consistent speed and lane positioning in a smooth manner, although it sometimes feels like you’re rocking back and forth a little while cruising at triple figure speeds.
The cabin also remains relatively quiet when touring cross country – we encountered no issues with excessive road or wind noise throughout our test.
Like many new cars on our roads, the advanced driver assist systems (ADAS) are overly sensitive in their default settings, although the warning chimes emitted by the speakers aren’t too loud or annoying.
Configurable ADAS settings can be found within the infotainment menus, enabling owners to set the car up to their liking.
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What do you get?
The MG 3 range is split into base-model Excite and top-spec Essence grades, with a few minor differences between the petrol and hybrid versions.
2025 MG 3 Excite equipment highlights:
16-inch alloy wheels
Space-saver spare wheel
Halogen headlights
LED daytime running lights
Automatic headlights
Rear fog light
Push-button start
Electronic parking brake
Auto hold
10.25-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wired Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
7.0-inch instrument cluster screen
6-way manual driver’s seat adjustment
4-way manual passenger’s seat adjustment
Tilt steering wheel adjustment
Air-conditioning with rear vents
MG 3 Excite Hybrid+ adds:
Tyre repair kit (in lieu of spare tyre)
Auto climate control
Dial type gear selector
Drive modes
Pedestrian warning sound – external speaker
MG 3 Essence adds (over Excite):
Projector LED headlights
Keyless entry
Rain-sensing wipers
Sunroof
Leatherette and cloth trim
Leather-wrapped steering wheel
Sunglass compartment
Rear map pockets
Satellite navigation
DAB digital radio
Connected mobile services (iSmart compatibility)
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
Is the MG 3 safe?
The new MG 3 wears a three-star ANCAP safety rating, based on tests conducted in 2024.
Category
MG 3
Adult occupant protection
72 per cent
Child occupant protection
74 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
76 per cent
Safety assist
58 per cent
Standard safety equipment includes:
6 airbags
Dual front
Dual front-side
Dual side curtain
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Lane departure warning
Lane-keep assist
Emergency lane-keep assist
Adaptive cruise control
Intelligent cruise assist
Traffic jam assist
Steering, acceleration, braking assistance
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic alert
Intelligent speed assist
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
Tyre pressure monitoring
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How much does the MG 3 cost to run?
MG Australia offers an industry-leading, unconditional 10-year/250,000km warranty for its model range, including the MG 3.
Servicing and Warranty
MG 3 Essence Hybrid+
Warranty
10 years or 250,000km
Roadside assistance
7 years
Service intervals
12 months or 10,000km
Capped-price servicing
7 years or 70,000km
Total capped-price service cost (5 years)
$2045
To see how the MG 3 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the MG 3
The new MG 3 is a massive step up over the old model, but it ought to be given the price premium you’re now expected to pay.
At $30,000 before on-road costs, the flagship Essence is playing in a new ballpark, and to MG’s credit it hasn’t brought a lemon to a knife fight.
With the hybrid powertrain, the new MG 3 is far more sophisticated on the road than rivals lacking any form of electrification. It’s quiet at city speeds, with oodles of silent torque to make swift progress.
When the petrol engine kicks in the Essence remains quiet and composed, unfazed by busy highways.
On top of a thoroughly improved powertrain, you also get a solid suite of tech and a market-leading 10-year, 250,000km warranty.
However, the interior still feels very cheap, there are question marks over safety, and the lack of wireless smartphone mirroring will be noted by younger buyers who are more likely to be in the market for an affordable small car.
And it’s impossible to ignore that inflated price tag. You can really shop around with a $30-35k budget, from familiar rivals to left of centre options such as the Volkswagen Polo and upcoming BYD Dolphin Essential.
For its fully electric powertrain, I’d be seriously considering the Dolphin, while the Toyota Yaris is king from both a build quality and depreciation perspective.
If neither tickle your fancy, the MG 3 is a decent little package. The Essence is definitely the pick of the hybrid variants, with extra equipment that easily justifies the $2000 premium over the standard Hybrid+.
Interested in buying an MG 3? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
The RBI announced the premature redemption schedule for SGB tranches maturing between March and September 2025. The SGB 2016-17 Series IV redemption price is set at Rs 8,624 per unit.
Sovereign Gold Bonds (SGB) Premature Redemption: RBI releases the calendar
SGB: The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has announced the premature redemption schedule for specific Sovereign Gold Bond (SGB) tranches maturing between March 2025 and September 2025. Investors holding the first tranche of the SGB 2017-18 Series III can opt for premature redemption on March 17, 2025. Redemption requests must be submitted between March 17, 2025, and April 7, 2025.
Redemption of SGB 2016-17 Series IV
The RBI has set the redemption price for the SGB 2016-17 Series IV at Rs 8,624 per unit. This tranche, issued on March 17, 2017, will reach maturity on March 17, 2025.
The redemption price is determined based on the simple average closing gold price from March 10-13, 2025, as published by the Indian Bullion and Jewellers Association.
SGB Maturity And Premature Redemption
Standard SGBs mature eight years from the issuance date, leading to the March 17, 2025, redemption date for the 2016-17 Series IV.
The SGB 2019-20 Series IV, issued at Rs 2,943 per gram on September 17, 2019, is now eligible for premature redemption, despite its eight-year maturity period.
Total Return Of SGB 2017-18 Series III Tranche
The total return on the Sovereign Gold Bond (SGB) issued at ₹2,943 per gram in 2019 and redeemable at ₹8,624 per gram in 2025 is:
Total Return = ((Finall al Value – Initial Value) / Initial Value) * 100
= ((8,624 – 2,943) / 2,943) * 100 = 193.1%
So, the total return over 5.5 years is approximately 193%.
Will SGB Returns be Taxed?
The interest on SGBs shall be taxable as per the provision of the Income Tax Act, 1961 (43 of 1961). The capital gains tax arising on redemption of SGB to an individual is exempted. The indexation benefits will be provided to long-term capital gains arising to any person on transfer of the SGB.
What Are Sovereign Gold Bonds?
Introduced In November 2015, sovereign gold bonds (SGBs) are government securities denominated in grams of gold. They substitute for holding physical gold. Investors have to pay the issue price in cash and the bonds will be redeemed in cash on maturity. The SGBs are issued by the RBI on behalf of the government.
The table below details the tranches eligible for premature redemption during the specified period:
S No
Tranche
Issue Date
Date of premature redemption
Dates for submitting the request for premature redemption by the investors to the Receiving Offices/NSDL/CDSL/RBI Retail Direct
In case, you are looking for a cool and interesting way to earn a quick buck, Here’s a platform that pays you for filling out simple surveys. Toluna Group lets you take surveys for forming a database for market research.
Toluna is a worldwide survey technology provider and claims to be the “ World’s Largest social voting community” which has more than nine million survey takers.
In this review, you will get a detailed insight into Toluna, Let’s look into this review article now:
Overview
Name
Toluna
Owner
Frederic-Charles Petit
Founded Year
2000
Headquarters
Paris, France
Type
Online Surveys
Apps
iPhone & Android Devices
Support
Email, Phone
Website
www.toluna.com
What is Toluna?
Toluna is a community survey platform that offers online surveys in return for rewards. This is a Paris( France) based company, managed by the Toluna Group and a well known market research company preferred by brands around the world. With more than 9 million survey takers, for the people who want to make money by taking surveys, Toluna is a preferred option.
The users that register on Toluna and take up these surveys are known as “Toluna Influencers”. These surveys completed are used by the major brands to help them figure out their business plan. It is one of the world’s most popular survey sites which has a very strong subscriber base and an effective portfolio of clients.
With 16+ offices globally, Toluna team aims to provide better products and quality to the consumers. They do it by surveying for the brands and thus it helps in dealing with customer satisfaction and to improve their business plan.
How to Register on Toluna?
Toluna provides its membership to 49 countries. The number of surveys that are available depends on your location.
Step 1: You can fill up the registration form online and sign up for Toluna.
Step 2: After the Toluna login, you will be asked to verify your account by providing your personal details. Further, you are good to take the online surveys.
Toluna Influencers are paid in the form of points which can be redeemed further in the form of gift cards, vouchers, etc. There are two types of Toluna surveys available listed below:
Profile Surveys: These surveys take a short period of time to complete where you are rewarded with 100 points.
Longer Surveys: These surveys take a longer duration to complete typically about 10 to 30 minutes with much higher rewards
You can update your personal information by logging into your account. Select “Account” in the top right corner and then click the Edit option. You can also view your account activity such as credits purchased, surveys launched, and the current status of your subscription.
In cases where you forget your password, you can do it by Clicking the Sign in button at the top right side. Then click the “forgot your password” option and follow the instructions further which you will be able to retrieve your password.
How to make money in Toluna?
There are 8 ways to earn in Toluna which are as follows:
Toluna Surveys: They are the most effective way of earningToluna points. There are multiple surveys available online to complete at any point of time. Usually the majority of the surveys pay 1000-2000 points which lasts for about 20 minutes. 5500 Toluna points are roughly equivalent to 1 pound.
Completing Profile Surveys: You will find the “Profile Surveys” under the surveys option at the top of the screen. Each profile consists of 14 Surveys each and you will get 100points for each survey.
Participate in Polls: In this you will usually earn a points reward of 15 points per poll, usually takes seconds to complete
Post in the Toluna community: You can also earn points by posting your content in the Toluna Community. You may win up to 1000 points per post if your post gets qualified.
Participate in the Contest: Toluna offers launch contests to encourage the users to post more in the community. Inreturn they are rewarded with some points and other prizes.
Start your own contest: you will also be rewarded with points and prizes if you start your own contest.
Refer a friend to Toluna: you can share your referral link with your friends and you will get 500 bonus points for each friend upto 10 months
Play Toluna Games:You can also win points by playing games. You can win about 80-1000 points by spinning the wheel.
How to redeem points in Toluna?
There are 3 ways to redeem the points in Toluna which are listed below:
Rewards:It offers a variety of gift cards with an option to cashout by Paypal. The cheapest gift card costs around 30,000 points
Gifties: These are the tickets you can buy to win a range of rewards
Sweepstakes: You can also exchange your points to get a chance to join the monthly sweepstakes where you can buy branded items
You need to reach of minimum of 30,000 points which are listed below:
$10 gift card for Starbucks- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Cheesecake factory- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Redbox- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for JiffyLube- 30,000 points
$25 gift card for Restaurants.com-45,000 points
$25 gift card for Walmart- 45,000 points
$25 gift card for Fandango- 45,000 points
Toluna is it Legit or Scam?
As per the Toluna reviews, it has been found that Toluna is a legitimate business. Despite its long wait times, it has a noted record of paying its clients and further issuing them good rewards.
It is a company that offers to pay on each survey you take. It has been very popular and has become one of the people’s number one choices regarding online surveys. They also have a base of around 13 million users and is on a rapid expansion
Toluna also has an A+ rating in the Better Business Bureau(BBB) with only around 31 customer complaints. Further, it has a 3.8 rating on the Trustpilot with more than 2,100 Toluna reviews.
There are a lot more positive reviews compared to the criticism. It has great customer service for which it accounts as one of the legit organizations that pay people in response to the online surveys.
Conclusion
It is to be acknowledged that Toluna is a legitimate business which pays its users based on the surveys they take.It is one of the top rated companies with a trusted community of 1+ million members which make it highly recommended.
It is an honest way to make full time income on the internet by taking surveys. It has no hidden costs and in turn you will learn how to build a flourishing business online in Toluna. It also allows you to choose surveys in categories which you are interested in.
Thus finally it is advisable that Toluna is worth giving a try. You can take it as a fun experience and further you will enjoy it a lot. If you are looking to earn income by taking up online surveys, then Toluna is definitely on the top lists which are trusted.
FAQ
How much does it cost to join Toluna?
No, Signing up for Toluna is completely free. Sign up today and access its features free of cost
Does Toluna pay in cash?
Toluna Influencers are compensated in points, which can be exchanged for a variety of items such as gift cards, competition entries, or plain old cash.
How long do the surveys take to complete?
It is dependent on the targeting and the screening questions. The more of these questions you have, the longer your survey may take to complete.
How do I cash out my Toluna points?
You need to have at least 60000 points. Go to rewards, convert your points into cash through, 60000points=$20.
Is Toluna Survey Legit?
Toluna is a safe and reliable platform. It is not a scam, and millions of people from all over the world have taken their surveys for over ten years. However, your experience with the site may vary from that of other survey takers.
Toluna Ratings
User Review
1.12 (354 votes)
Pros
It is a very reputed company which is operating.
It is completely free to join and features are free to use
Modern and user-friendly interface
You can earn money by answering the surveys on the go while on the phone
Interesting Surveys
Get a consolation prize even if any disqualified
Cons
The disqualifications can be frustrating
There is a minimum cashout of $30 which is hard to reach
Some of its surveys take time to complete
Some users complain about the long wait times for payments or rewards
Anna University and Nemetschek Group India, provider of software for digital transformation in the AEC/O (architecture, engineering, constructions/operations (AEC/O) and media industries, has signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) to establish an AEC Centre of Excellence aimed at enhancing industry readiness for engineering and architecture students.
The initiative is focused on raising awareness about emerging job opportunities and career advancements in core engineering fields such as Civil Engineering and Architecture, addressing concerns over the declining interest in traditional engineering disciplines amidst the rise of Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine Learning (ML), and Information Technology (IT), says a release.
Nirmalya Chatterjee, Managing Director, Nemetschek Group India, in the release said the goal is to equip students with the necessary technological expertise and practical knowledge to meet the evolving demands of the industry. The Centre of Excellence will serve as a hub for skill development, ensuring that future engineers and architects are job-ready from day one, says a release.
Professor Shanmuga Sundaram, Director, CUIC, Anna University, expressed his enthusiasm for the collaboration, stating, the MoU with Nemetschek Group India will enable students to gain hands-on experience with cutting-edge AEC technologies, thereby enhancing their employability and preparing them for global career opportunities.
When you keep your immune system healthy, your body can fight against infection that could cause illness. Some of the best ways to boost your immune system health is to eat a healthy diet with citrus fruits and fatty fish, and keep active through cold and flu season. However, it doesn’t hurt to add some immune-boosting supplements to help with that, as well as any vitamin C and vitamin D deficiency.
We’ve rounded up the best immunity-boosting supplements packed with essential vitamins.
Which vitamins are good for boosting immunity?
When deciding on the best multivitamin or immunity supplement, pay attention to which vitamins and nutrients are included on the label. The best vitamins, minerals and herbs for immunity include:
The following supplements contain high amounts of the above immunity vitamins.
Photo Gallery1/1
Dosage: 2 softgels, taken daily with a meal
Nature’s Bounty has been around for over 50 years and is a brand that constantly appears on our best vitamin lists. Its products are all non-GMO and contain no artificial colors, flavors, sugar, starch, milk, lactose, soy, gluten, yeast, sodium or fish.
Two softgels of its Immune 24 Hour Plus supplements contain 750 mg of vitamin A, 1,000 mg of vitamin C, 15 mcg of vitamin D, 2 mg of vitamin B6, 666 mcg of folate, 6 mcg of vitamin B12, 600 mcg of biotin, 10 mg of pantothenic acid, 25 mg of magnesium, 15 mg of zinc, 17 mg of elderberry, 16.5 mg of echinacea and 16.6 of astragalus. Other ingredients include rice bran oil, gelatin, vegetable glycerin and 2% or less of carob powder (color), natural caramel color, sunflower lecithin and yellow beeswax.
These immune boosting supplements rely on the immunity support of Ester-C, a version of vitamin C that lasts up to 24 hours in the body. Its high doses of vitamin A, zinc and B vitamins also support immune function.
Take two softgels daily, preferably with a meal. One bottle will last about 25 days.
Pros:
Contains Vitamin C that will stay in your white blood cells for up to 24 hours
Packed with 13 vitamins, minerals and herbal supplements
Cons:
Not vegan, contains yellow beeswax and gelatin
One bottle lasts only 25 days
Photo Gallery1/1
Dosage: 2 capsules, daily with a meal
The Vitamin Shoppe has brick-and-mortar stores across the country, as well as an online store. The familiar brand name offers a couple of immunity supplements, and we’ve included the best two on this list.
A serving of its Immune Essentials contains 1,000 mg of vitamin C, 50 mcg of vitamin D3, 50 mg of zinc and 250 mg of elderberry extract. Other ingredients include hypromellose (capsule), rice flour, magnesium stearate and silicon dioxide. The capsules are free of gluten, dairy, soy, nuts, sugar, salt and preservatives. Elderberry extract can support healthy immune system function during cold and flu season.
Take two capsules daily, preferably with a meal. One bottle will last about 30 days.
Pros:
Does not contain any sugar
High potency of vitamin C, vitamin D3 and zinc
Cons:
Contains only three vitamins and one herbal supplement
One bottle will last only 30 days
Photo Gallery1/1
Dosage: 1 gummy, daily with a meal
My favorite vitamins on this list are gummy supplements from The Vitamin Shoppe. I personally take these every day because of their high elderberry potency. On top of that, they’re delicious.
One elderberry gummy contains 90 mg of vitamin C, 1 g of total carbohydrates, 40 mg of elderberry extract, 1 g of total sugars and 1 g of added sugars. The other ingredients include sugar, organic tapioca syrup, purified water, MCT (medium chain triglycerides) oil, pectin, tapioca starch, natural raspberry flavor, citric acid, natural color, sunflower lecithin extract for color. The gummies are free of gluten, dairy, soy, nuts, gelatin, synthetic colors and artificial colors. In addition to the vitamin C and elderberry, the supplements contain propolis extract, which can be used as an anti-inflammatory. Echinacea extract also supports a healthy immune system.
Take two gummies daily, preferably with a meal. One bottle will last about 60 days.
Pros:
Raspberry flavor tastes amazing
Will last you about 60 days
Cons:
Each serving contains 4 grams of sugar
The sugary taste isn’t for everyone
Photo Gallery1/1
Dosage: 1 to 2 gummies
Olly is sold at Target, CVS, Walgreens and Amazon. The company’s products are also certified by the National Sanitation Foundation, which guarantees that products have met strict standards for public health safety. Olly is also B-Corporation certified, meaning that the corporation is transparent about environmental performance (such as its waste management) and social performance (like employee benefits).
Depending on the serving size, Olly’s Kids Immunity supplements contain 15 to 30 mg of vitamin C, 2.5 to 5 mcg of vitamin D, 1.5 to 3 mcg of zinc, 50 to 100 mg of acerola cherry extract (a rich source of vitamin C), 35 to 70 mg of Wellmune baker’s yeast beta glucan (a researched and lab-grown nutrient with multiple health benefits) and 12.5 to 25 mg of elderberry juice powder. The gummies are gluten-free and made with natural colors and no artificial flavors. The other ingredients include glucose syrup, beet sugar, water, gelatin, citric acid, natural flavor, pectin, coloring (from sweet potato, apple, radish, cherry, carrot and chokeberry juices) and lactic acid.
Olly recommends that children aged 2 to 4 should chew only one gummy a day. Those aged 5 and up can chew two gummies a day. Consult with your doctor before giving your children any supplements. One bottle will last anywhere from 25 to 50 days if taken daily.
Pros:
Easy for children to chew
Great taste that children will like
Cons:
Recommend seeking a doctor before giving any vitamins to children
Easy for children to confuse gummy vitamins with candy
Photo Gallery1/1
Liquid I.V. has gained popularity in the last couple of years. The company’s claim to fame is its Cellular Transport Technology, which combines sodium, glucose, potassium and water. This delivery system makes it easier for the body to absorb water and other nutrients directly into the bloodstream.
Liquid I.V.’s Hydration Multiplier Plus mix now includes added immune support. One stick contains 45 calories, 500 mg of sodium, 11 g of carbohydrates, 10 g of sugar, 370 mg of potassium, 504 mg of vitamin C, 24.4 mg of niacin, 2.5 mg of vitamin B6, 7.8 mcg of vitamin B12, 11.5 mg of pantothenic acid and 10.5 mg of zinc. The other ingredients include natural flavors and stevia leaf extract. In addition to the hydration and immune support, the B vitamins in Liquid I.V. will also supply your body with energy.
Choose between tangerine and wild berry flavor. Dissolve one stick of mix in two cups (16 ounces) of water. One package contains 14 sticks of drink mix.
Pros:
Comes in two delicious flavors: tangerine and wild berry
Faster hydration than water alone
Cons:
Most expensive on this list
One stick contains 10 g of sugar
How can I boost my immune system fast and naturally?
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the best ways to boost your immune system naturally is to eat well and maintain a balanced diet, engage in physical activity, maintain a healthy weight, get enough sleep, and don’t smoke or drink too much alcohol.
If you have low immunity, this is often due to certain diseases or genetic disorders. Additionally, it can be caused by poor diet. It can also be caused by certain medications such as chemotherapy.
If you find yourself getting frequent colds or infections such as pink eye, sinus infections, thrush or yeast infections, you could have a weak immune system. Speak with your doctor if you have a hard time recovering from simple infections or viruses.
Our expert, award-winning staff selects the products we cover and rigorously researches and tests our top picks. If you buy through our links, we may get a commission.
Reviews ethics statement
How we test
Caroline IgoEditor, Sleep
Caroline Igo (she/her/hers) is a wellness editor and holds Sleep Science Coach and Stress Management certificates from the Spencer Institute. She received her bachelor’s degree in creative writing from Miami University and continues to further her craft in her free time. Before joining CNET, Caroline wrote for past CNN anchor, Daryn Kagan.
ExpertiseSleep | Mattress Accessories | Vitamins and Supplements | Nutrition | Personal careCredentials
Carl R. Greer/Andrew D. Hepburn Award for Best Nonfiction Essay (Miami University, 2020)
The information contained in this article is for educational and informational purposes only and is not intended as health or medical advice. Always consult a physician or other qualified health provider regarding any questions you may have about a medical condition or health objectives.
Over half of Americans are lying through their teeth — about their teeth.
That’s according to a new survey conducted by Talker Research and commissioned by Aspen Dental, which asked 2,000 American adults about their dental hygiene, as reported by SWNS.
The study spoke to the mixed emotions Americans experience when it comes to dental visits, including fear, anxiety and discomfort, which can often lead to delayed care.
BRUSH, FLOSS, MOUTHWASH: DENTISTS REVEAL WHAT THEY BELIEVE IS THE CORRECT ORDER
In the poll, 60% of respondents confessed to wanting to impress their dentist during office visits, leading 57% of them to fib about their dental hygiene.
Over half of those in the study confessed to wanting to impress their dentist during office visits.(iStock)
And yet, 48% of people said they believed their dentists could see right through their lies, according to SWNS.
Sixty-four percent of respondents said they felt guilty about their dishonesty. Millennials and Gen Xers felt the least guilty about lying compared to older Americans.
‘I’M A DENTIST – HERE’S WHY YOU SHOULD NEVER KEEP YOUR TOOTHBRUSH NEAR THE TOILET’
A third of those who have lied to the dentist (33%) simply didn’t want their dentist to think less of them, while a fifth (19%) said they don’t mean to be dishonest, but that “panic lies” accidentally slip out, especially among Gen Zers (27%), per SWNS.
Obstacles to dental care
Anxiety is the biggest obstacle keeping Americans from visiting the dentist (24%), affecting 29% of women and 17% of men, the survey found.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Twenty-two percent said the actual dental work put them off, with baby boomers feeling the most uncomfortable in that regard. And 13% have avoided the dentist’s office because they were embarrassed about their poor dental hygiene.
The survey also revealed that nearly a quarter of Americans (22%) had discomfort or soreness in their mouths at least once per week, with millennials experiencing more discomfort than other generations (34%).
More women than men expressed feelings of anxiety when it comes to dental appointments.(iStock)
These factors may contribute to the 45% of respondents who have not visited a dentist in the last year and the nearly one in five Americans (19%) who haven’t seen the inside of a dentist’s office in five years.
Nearly one in five people haven’t seen the inside of a dentist’s office in five years.
“Maintaining adequate oral health can be overwhelming,” Dr. Taylor Sutton, multi-practice owner and practicing dentist at Aspen Dental in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, told SWNS.
“That’s why it’s so important to have a dentist you feel comfortable connecting with, who shows empathy and leaves all judgment at the door.”
After leaving the dentist, respondents reported following improved dental habits for eight days before slipping back into old routines.(iStock)
Dr. Tracy Redden, multi-practice owner and practicing dentist at Aspen Dental in Boston, echoed the importance of proper oral care.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Neglecting oral hygiene — whatever your reason — can lead to serious health issues,” she told SWNS.
“Your mouth is the gateway to your body that can affect your overall health. Maintaining oral health is not a choice, but a necessity for our overall well-being.”
Dental dos and don’ts
When leaving the dentist’s office determined to maintain better dental health, respondents said their good hygiene habits last only about eight days before they slip back into bad habits.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Over half of the survey respondents confessed they don’t regularly floss, and nearly seven in 10 said they brush their teeth for less than two minutes per session.
“You may not need to use dental floss as frequently as toothpaste, but it should still be a part of your daily dental cleaning,” Dr. Arash Ravanbakhsh of Inglewood Family Dental in Alberta, Canada, said in an email to Fox News Digital.
Millennials and Gen Xers felt the least guilty about lying to their dentists compared to older Americans.(iStock)
“While dentists recommend brushing your teeth twice a day, this is not the only cleaning method you should be using daily. Mouthwash and flossing also play a huge role in keeping your oral hygiene in top condition,” Ravanbakhsh added.
One mistake patients make when cleaning at home is using too much pressure when brushing, according to the doctor.
“You may not need to use dental floss as frequently as toothpaste, but it should still be a part of your daily dental cleaning.”
“Just because you brush your teeth harder does not mean you are giving them a more thorough clean,” he wrote. “In fact, this could damage your teeth and gums.”
To safely and properly clean your teeth, Ravanbakhsh recommends using a manual brush with soft bristles or an electric toothbrush.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
The main aim of Foodtainment, which is catching up with modern trends is to create memorable experiences that engage customers on multiple levels. So what all falls under the foodtainment category? Well, the term is such a broad concept that it covers various immersive activities like themed restaurants, cooking shows, culinary workshops, and food festivals.
Many digital food platforms and restaurants are coming up with various activities and ideas to keep up with the modern generation. Therefore, here are some extravagant brands that create an immersive experience whether you’re planning a date night, weekend get-together or more. Let’s take a look!
Also Read: 9 New Menus In Mumbai Restaurants To Try In March-April 2025
1. CaterNinja:
Your go-to digital catering assistance that is one click away to create a get-together with delightful restaurant-like food and experience right at your doorstep. Regardless of how big or small the celebration is, CaterNinja is always there to assist you with their variety of services. Offering a personalized catering experience consisting of CaterNinja has three unique services: NinjaBox, an on-demand meal service; NinjaBuffet, an informal buffet arrangement; and finally, NinjaLive, which provides customers with live cooking stations. All services help you create a perfect experience consisting of a restaurant-like ambience and mouth-watering food.
Representative image: Unsplash
2. MealPe:
This foodtech platform offers a wide variety of cuisines from traditional Indian food, to international dishes, and healthy options. If you need tasty meals for places like corporate cafeterias or university canteens, MealPe is there for you. This platform delivers to any kind of space including food courts, theatres, hospitals, and even coworking spaces. It also specializes in corporate catering with scalable order management and custom-branded ordering experiences for businesses. Therefore, forget your PG dabba and enjoy a fresh and tasty meal anywhere you are.
3. Food Festivals by The Pullman:
The Pullman New Delhi Aerocity is known for hosting a variety of food festivals that showcase diverse cuisines from around the world. The recent food festival hosted by Hotel Connoseisure was the Malaysian Food Festival in February 2025 at the hotel’s Pan-Asian restaurant, Honk. The festival featured authentic Malaysian dishes like nasi lemak, curry mee, chicken rendang and more that appealed to every foodie’s palette. Attending these food festivals creates an extravagant date idea and also provides opportunities to explore various cuisines around the world.
Representative image
4. Food Festivals by JW Marriott:
JW Marriott hotels across India host a variety of food festivals that showcase diverse cuisines and culinary traditions in various parts of India. Food festivals organised by JW Marriot not only provide the experience of consuming various cuisines but also feature some extremely talented chefs across India. The food festivals aims to promote various food and flavours of Indian cuisine, making it an immersive experience for food enthusiasts.
Also read:Exciting Food Festivals Happening In March-April 2025 That Are Not To Be Missed
So what do you think of these immersive experiences? Does it settle your date plan or weekend get-together? If you are a foodie or just someone who loves to experience new things, you should experience all these activities.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-15/Xi-Jinping-s-article-on-public-non-public-sectors-to-be-published-1BLn8ok0ikw/img/18ad7598822841d3a7e233d6a6d297b2/18ad7598822841d3a7e233d6a6d297b2.png' alt='Workers make yarn on an intelligent yarn manufacturing line at a private textile enterprise in Yichun, east China's Jiangxi Province, February 18, 2025. /VCG'
An article by Xi Jinping, general secretary of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee, on unswervingly consolidating and developing the public sector and unswervingly encouraging, supporting and guiding the development of the non-public sector will be published on Sunday.
The article by Xi, also Chinese president and chairman of the Central Military Commission, will be published in this year’s sixth issue of Qiushi Journal, the flagship magazine of the CPC Central Committee.
The article stressed that China’s basic economic system, which has been incorporated into the Constitution of the People’s Republic of China and the Party Constitution, will not and cannot be changed.
The Party and the country ensure that economic entities under all forms of ownership have equal access to factors of production in accordance with the law, can compete on a level playing field and are protected by the law as equals. This enables them to complement each other and develop side by side, facilitating the healthy development of the non-public sector and those working in it, according to the article.
The article emphasized that state-owned enterprises are a pillar supporting the Party in the governance and rejuvenation of China. It highlighted that these enterprises have made historic contributions to China’s economic and social development, the advancement of science and technology, the development of the national defense and the improvement of people’s livelihood.
For a long time, the rapid expansion of China’s private sector has played an important role in stabilizing growth, powering innovation, increasing employment, and raising living standards.
When private enterprises and private entrepreneurs encounter difficulties, the Party and the country give them support, and when confusion arises, guidance is offered, the article said.
Both the public and non-public sectors are important components of the socialist market economy, and an important basis for China’s economic and social development. The two sectors should complement each other and develop in tandem, it noted.
Based on the fact that China is still in the primary stage of socialism, the country should continue reforms to develop the socialist market economy, and unswervingly consolidate and develop the public sector and unswervingly encourage, support and guide the development of the non-public sector, according to the article.
In one of the biggest deals in India’s residential real estate sector, US-based alternate asset manager Blackstone will be acquiring a majority stake in Kolte-Patil Developers for close to ₹2000 crore, taking an initial stake of 14.3 per cent through a preferential allotment, buying 25.7 per cent from the promoter Patil family followed by an open offer for an additional 26 per cent.
Post the transaction, Blackstone will be the promoter of the company, while it will have joint control of the company along with the promoter family. This marks Blackstone’s first investment in residential real estate in the country.
In an exchange filing, the Pune-based real estate developer said it had approved a preferential issue of 1.27 crore shares to a Blackstone entity, BREP Asia III India Holding Co VII Pte, at ₹329 each for a total amount of ₹417 crore. This is the first leg of the transaction.
A share subscription agreement and a share purchase agreement between Blackstone, Kolte-Patil and its promoter family have also been signed. The promoter family held 69.45 per cent stake in the company at the end of December, exchange filings showed.
Under the share purchase agreement, Blackstone will acquire 25.7 per cent stake or 2.28 crore shares from the promoter family at ₹329 each for an aggregate amount of a little over ₹750 crore. This is the second leg of the transaction.
Subsequently it will be making an open offer to the public for a 26 per cent stake under the Securities and Exchange Board of India’s Takeover Code.
If for any reason the preferential allotment does not take place, then the number of shares that Blackstone will be acquiring from the promoter family will go up, the exchange filing said.
Shares of Kolte-Patil ended 1.58 per cent higher at ₹344.10 on the NSE on Thursday. Over a one-month period, the shares have risen 19.5 per cent. Its shares hit a 52-week low of ₹239 on March 3, 2025, having fallen over 58 per cent from the high it hit in April last year.
Under the terms of the agreement, the existing promoter group has the right to nominate two directors on the board, while Blackstone will have the right to nominate three directors. Either party have the right of first offer if the other plans to sell.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
KYLIE Jenner najavila je novo partnerstvo s britanskom modnom markom Poster Girl, a uz to je podijelila nekoliko zapanjujućih fotografija. Na njima je pozirala u pripijenim lateks haljinama koje će biti dio njene suradnje s Poster Girl i njenom modnom kućom Khy. Haljine će biti dostupne sljedeći tjedan, a Kylie je na Instagramu pokazala crni i crveni izgled, najavljujući svoju novu kolekciju.
Komentari preplavili Instagram
U objavi na Instagramu, Kylie je napisala: “Khy x Poster Girl – ikonična suradnja s londonskim dizajnericama Natashom i Francescom. Oduvijek sam obožavala Poster Girl, a zaljubila sam se u njihove komade od lateksa. Čine da se osjećam samopouzdano i seksi”.
Fotografije su brzo postale viralne, skupivši više od pola milijuna lajkova za manje od tri sata. Objava je izazvala veliko oduševljenje među obožavateljima, koji su komentirali: “Ludo… treba mi inhalator”, “To je žena mačka”, “Kakav je osjećaj biti tako savršen?” i “Izgledaš apsolutno fantastično.”
Kolekcija izlazi 18. ožujka i bit će dostupna isključivo na khy.com.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
SACRAMENTO — Clutching a folded white towel to wipe sweat, coach Stan Delus of Etiwanda takes it personally whenever his girls’ basketball team gives up a basket. He’s constantly exhorting players during timeouts to dig deep and play tough defense. He’s like a master teacher determined to get players to listen and learn.
It’s almost magical what his program has accomplished. On Saturday night, Etiwanda won a record third consecutive Open Division state championship with 75-59 win over San José Archbishop Mitty at Golden 1 Center.
It’s a three peat. Etiwanda wins its third consecutive state Open Division girls championship with 75-59 win over Mitty. pic.twitter.com/gpwPCNHiXS
The Eagles won the Southern Section Open Division championship in 2022 with a 29-1 record, then came the state titles.
“It’s the most amazing four-year run for a public school,” Delus said.
It’s three-peat time for Etiwanda winning a third straight Open Division girls basketball state championship.
(Greg Stein for The Times)
Etiwanda led 37-31 at halftime and extended its margin to 20 points in the third quarter. Arynn Finley, a junior guard, was magnificent all night. She scored 21 points and made eight of nine shots.
“That’s pretty good,” Finley said of her shooting prowess.
Etiwanda was efficient and effective on offense, making 31 of 52 shots (60%). Point guard Aliyahna Morris had 12 points and seven assists. Shaena Brew and Chasity Rice added 13 points each. Grace Knox had 10 points and 10 rebounds. The Eagles also held Mitty (27-4) to 30% shooting. Ze’Ni Petterson finished with 17 points for Mitty.
Delus yells, “Up, up, up” so many times during games, trying to get his players to increase their defensive pressure, that Morris says, “I dream about it” while sleeping.
The Eagles (28-5) started the season losing three of five games, with some thinking Etiwanda’s hold on No. 1 was over. Delus felt otherwise. The losses were a way to teach lessons and convince players they needed improvement. And improve they did.
They were beaten by Ontario Christian in the Southern Section Open Division final but came back to beat the Knights 67-62 in the regional final. Then Saturday night, they defeated Mitty for the third straight year with a performance so dominant that Delus was smiling at times in the second half.
“We trusted the process,” Morris said. “We had to grow as a team.”
Said Delus: “We kept saying, ‘Keep believing in ourselves.’”
Eighty-six participants from 11 countries will descend on Kolahalamedu in scenic Vagamon, nestled along the Western Ghats, for a five-day paragliding competition beginning on March 19.
Fly high, win big! Paragliders battle for lakhs in prize money at Kerala’s International Paragliding Festival.(File Photo by Pixabay)
The event, a highlight of the International Paragliding Festival, will see competitors vying for top honours in six categories, including the prestigious International Top Landing Accuracy Cup, an official release said here on Friday.
The March 19-23 mega event, which is being organised by the Kerala Adventure Tourism Promotion Society (KATPS) under the State Tourism Department in collaboration with Orange Life Paragliding School, will give away ₹1.5 lakh, ₹1 lakh, and ₹50,000 respectively as prize money for the first, second and third place winners in each category.
The five-day International Paragliding Festival enjoys the official recognition of the Fédération Aéronautique Internationale (FAI), which is the 1905-founded world governing body for air sports, the release issued by the Kerala Tourism said.
The FAI and the Aero Club of India are also lending technical support while Fly Vagamon provides local coordination.
The competitions at the Vagamon Adventure Park in Kolahalamedu are held in the following categories: Paragliding Accuracy (Overall), Paragliding Accuracy (Women), Paragliding Accuracy (Team), Paragliding Accuracy (Indian Overall), Paragliding Accuracy (Indian Women) and Paragliding Accuracy (Junior).
State Tourism Minister P A Mohamed Riyas said Kerala has a significant place in the country’s adventure tourism map.
“The state has been fully exploiting its potential of adventure tourism in the last three years,” he said, pointing to the new focus given to white-water kayaking, paragliding, surfing and mountain cycling.
Tourism Secretary K Biju said Kerala has come a long way in providing infrastructure with international facilities suitable for adventure tourism in prospective places. “The annual paragliding competition we hold in Vagamon is now internationally famous,” he pointed out.
Kerala Tourism Director Sikha Surendran said Kerala’s geographical advantages have benefited the state in developing its adventure tourism portfolio. “We have the sea, river, mountains and hills within a radius of just 60 km,” she noted.
“Vagamon is an ideal venue, which even the best paragliders across the world are eagerly waiting to explore. We are making efforts to find more such locations through the Kerala Adventure Tourism Promotion Society. The Tourism Department will provide all necessary support”, she added.
Kolahalamedu, located seven km from Vagamon near Peerumedu in Idukki district is among the best places for paragliding. Situated at an altitude of 3,000 feet, the place is particularly favourable for take-off and landing. Adding to its advantage are its cool climate, tea plantations, grasslands and woods.
The next wave of PlayStation Plus Extra and Premium games are about to be released by Sony. Available from the morning of March 18, the new PS Plus Extra games include EA UFC 5 and Prince of Persia: The Lost Crown. That’s on top of new Premium games like Armored Core and Arcade Paradise VR.
Unfortunately, however, it’s not all good news, because some big games are leaving the service on the same day. This includes a selection of Capcom games, including a remake of an iconic PS1 survival horror title.
Indeed, Capcom’s superb Resident Evil 3 Remake will depart PS Plus Extra on the morning of March 18.
The good news is that if you hurry, you can definitely play through the game before it leaves PS Plus Extra.
Resident Evil 3 Remake is one of the shorter games in the series, clocking in at around 6-hours if you focus exclusively on the main story.
The game stars Jill Valentine, who must explore Raccoon City and avoid being eliminated by the Nemesis monster. It’s not too dissimilar to the Mr. X concept first introduced in Resident Evil 2.
Capcom explains more: “Jill Valentine is one of the last remaining people in Raccoon City to witness the atrocities Umbrella performed. To stop her, Umbrella unleashes their ultimate secret weapon – Nemesis!”
Other titles leaving PS Plus on March 18 include fighting games such as Street Fighter 5, Mortal Kombat 11 and Jojo’s Bizarre Adventure All-Star Battle R.
That’s on top of Dragon Ball Z Kakarot, Life is Strange 2 and Life is Strange True Colours. Finally, consider this your final warning to download and play the likes of Final Fantasy Type-0 HD, Monster Energy Supercross The Offical Videogame 6 and Phoenix Wright Ace Attorney Trilogy.
Australia’s new car market houses an eclectic mix of automotive brands from all corners of the globe.
There are the Japanese staples – Toyota, Mazda and Mitsubishi, just to name a few – as well as European giants including Volkswagen, BMW, Mercedes-Benz, and Audi.
Then there’s the new wave of manufacturers arriving from China, led by MG, BYD, and GWM. South Korea has a significant stake Down Under through Kia and Hyundai, while Tesla and Ford represent the US.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Ford Ranger
Toyota RAV4
But while carmakers represent their country of origin on the global stage, not all of them produce vehicles on home soil.
In fact, many of the cars you laud for Japanese reliability or European build quality are likely assembled elsewhere. With that in mind, let’s breakdown where Australia’s best-selling vehicles are actually produced.
Make/model
Place of manufacture
Ford Ranger
Rayong, Thailand
Toyota RAV4
Aichi, Japan
Toyota HiLux
Samut Prakan, Thailand
Isuzu D-Max
Samut Prakan, Thailand
Mitsubishi Outlander
Aichi, Japan
Ford Everest
Rayong, Thailand
Toyota Corolla
Aichi, Japan
Mazda CX-5
Hiroshima, Japan
MG ZS
Either Jiangsu or Shanghai, China
Kia Sportage
Gwangju, South Korea
Ford Ranger
Australia’s favourite vehicle is manufactured in a variety of different locations, including South Africa, Argentina, and the United States, depending on the market in which the Ranger is sold.
However, the main production hub resides in Rayong, Thailand. Ford’s Thai manufacturing plant produces Ranger models for the Asia-Pacific, Australia, and Europe, as well as parts of Africa and the Middle East.
Among the Ranger vehicles built at the Rayong production facility is the Raptor flagship. However, the upcoming Ranger PHEV will come here from Ford’s Silverton plant in Pretoria, South Africa, where the Volkswagen Amarok is also exclusively produced.
Ford Australia sold a total of 62,593 Rangers in 2024 – making it the first Blue Oval model since the EB and ED Falcon (1992/93) to claim back-to-back national sales victories.
Designed and developed in Australia alongside its Everest SUV sibling, the latest generation Ranger was released in 2022 and is offered in a wide variety of body styles and (so far) four powertrains, including single- and twin-turbo 2.0-litre four-cylinder diesels and a 3.0-litre V6 turbo-diesel.
Pricing ranges from $36,880 before on-road costs for the base XL single-cab/chassis, up to $90,440 plus on-roads for the high-performance 3.0-litre twin-turbo petrol V6-powered Raptor.
Interested in buying a Ford Ranger? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Ford Ranger
Toyota RAV4
Like the Ranger, the Toyota RAV4 is built in a host of locations around the world to serve different markets.
Global production centres around the Toyota production hub in Aichi, Japan, more specifically the Tahara and Takaoka production plants. All Australian RAV4 models are built in Japan.
Sold over five generations since 1994 (with a sixth to come soon), the RAV4 generated 58,718 sales for Toyota in Australia last year, making it our most popular SUV and the country’s favourite mid-sized SUV, as well usurping the HiLux to become the brand’s top-seller for the first time.
All models are powered by a 2.5-litre four-cylinder hybrid drivetrain, after the remaining petrol-only variants were discontinued in 2024.
Nine RAV4 grades are available across five different trim levels, with a starting price of $42,260 before on-road costs for the front-wheel drive RAV4 Hybrid GX.
Interested in buying a Toyota RAV4? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Toyota RAV4
Toyota HiLux
While Toyota is known as a Japanese manufacturer, high-volume models such as the HiLux ute are actually built elsewhere.
The Australian-market HiLux is manufactured at the Japanese giant’s Samrong plant in Samut Prakan province, Thailand, as has been the case since 1975.
Other markets served by the Samrong plant include New Zealand, Southeast Asia, and Europe.
Toyota recorded 53,499 HiLux deliveries in Australia last year, significantly more than the country’s fourth best-seller.
Four engines are offered across the local range, all with four cylinders and three being turbo-diesels. Pricing ranges from $26,475 to $74,310 before on-road costs.
Interested in buying a Toyota HiLux? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Toyota HiLux
Isuzu D-Max
The Isuzu D-Max is produced in close proximity to the HiLux in the Samut Prakan province of Thailand.
Thailand is the largest production base for the D-Max, which is also assembled elsewhere for regional markets. Over 100 countries import the D-Max from Thailand, including Australia.
Isuzu sold 30,194 examples Down Under last year, making it the fourth best-selling model in the country.
The manufacturer offers 26 individual variants in Australia, with the off-road ready Blade and X-Terrain sitting at the top of the range.
Two four-cylinder turbo-diesel engines are available – 1.9-litre and 3.0-litre – while pricing ranges from $32,700 before on-road costs to $76,990 drive-away.
Interested in buying an Isuzu D-Max? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Isuzu D-Max
Mitsubishi Outlander
While Mitsubishi serves the Chinese market with a factory in Hunan, China, the lion’s share of Outlander production takes place in Aichi, Japan.
The Okazaki plant serves global markets including Australia, North America, Europe, and Asia, with both petrol and plug-in hybrid (PHEV) versions rolling off the production line there.
A versatile mid-sized family SUV, the Outlander was Mitsubishi’s best-seller in Australia last year and that appears unlikely to change anytime soon.
It’s available in both five- and seven-seat configurations, and starts from $37,740 before on-road costs for the base petrol variant powered by a 2.5-litre four-cylinder engine (135kW/244Nm).
PHEV variants are equipped with a 2.4-litre four-cylinder petrol/electric powertrain producing a combined 185kW and 450Nm, although all command a significant price premium.
Interested in buying a Mitsubishi Outlander? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Mitsubishi Outlander
Ford Everest
Like the Ranger on which it’s based, the Australian-market Ford Everest is built at the Blue Oval’s AutoAlliance facility in Rayong, Thailand.
Thailand is Ford’s production base for body-on-frame SUVs and utes, serving markets including New Zealand, Southeast Asia, and South Africa.
The Everest outsold the Toyota Prado to become Australia’s favourite large SUV in 2024, when it also proved more popular than other ute-based SUVs such as the Toyota Fortuner. It ain’t cheap, with price starting at $54,240 before on-road costs for the base Ambiente.
However, you get a choice of turbo-diesel powertrains and the option of seven seats. Add in optional four-wheel drive, and the Everest is well set up for the modern Australian family.
Ford recently launched the Everest Tremor, a more-capable off-roader fitted with Bilstein position-sensitive dampers, new springs, and General Grabber AT3 all-terrain tyres as standard.
Interested in buying a Ford Everest? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Ford Everest
Toyota Corolla
All Toyota Corollas sold in Australia are built in Aichi, Japan, alongside the RAV4 medium SUV.
Spanning 12 generations since 1966, the Corolla topped 50 million global sales in 2021, cementing its place as one of the world’s most popular auto nameplates, and the evergreen small hatch and sedan (which was once Toyota Australia’s best-seller bar none) remains the nation’s most popular passenger car, with 24,027 delivered in 2024.
All Corolla variants – not including the high-performance GR Corolla – are powered by a 1.8-litre naturally aspirated four-cylinder petrol-electric powertrain producing a combined power output of 103kW.
Approximately one year ago, Toyota transitioned to a hybrid-only Corolla lineup in Australia.
Pricing starts from $32,110 before on-road costs for the Ascent Sport Hybrid hatch and extends to $40,260 before on-road costs for the ZR Hybrid sedan.
Interested in buying a Toyota Corolla? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Toyota Corolla
Mazda CX-5
Once Australia’s favourite mid-sized SUV and still its maker’s biggest-volume model, the Mazda CX-5 is manufactured in Japan like many other models on this list, but this time it’s assembled at the carmaker’s head-office plant at Hiroshima, in the island nation’s far south.
Still in its second generation, the CX-5 generated 22,835 sales for Mazda in Australia last year, making it the seventh best-selling model in the country.
Prices start at $36,590 before on-road costs for the base G20 Maxx, and top out at $55,000 plus on-roads for the flagship Akera.
Buyers have the option of three four-cylinder engines, each mated to a six-speed automatic transmission. The Maxx, Maxx Sport and Touring are available with front-wheel drive, while the rest of the range is all-wheel drive.
The third generation of Mazda’s best-sellingfamily SUV is expected to launch later this year, bringing fuel-saving hybrid technology developed in-house.
Interested in buying a Mazda CX-5? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything Mazda CX-5
MG ZS
The MG ZS is the only Chinese-made vehicle on this list, and it’s manufactured in both Jiangsu and Shanghai.
Those SAIC Motor Corporation manufacturing facilities also serve the UK and European markets, among others.
After launching exclusively as a hybrid vehicle last November, the second-generation MG ZS range has been expanded to include purely petrol-powered variants.
Pricing starts from $26,990 drive-away for petrol-only models, with the hybrid commanding a price premium. Three four-cylinder powertrains are currently offered – naturally aspirated petrol, turbo-petrol, and a petrol-electric hybrid system shared with the MG 3 hatchback.
A combined 22,629 examples of the old ZS, previously Australia’s favourite small SUV, and its successor were sold Down Under last year.
Interested in buying an MG ZS? Get in touch with one of our trusted dealers here
MORE: Everything MG ZS
Kia Sportage
The sole South Korean-built car among Australia’s top 10 best-sellers is the Kia Sportage mid-sized SUV.
All Australian examples are assembled at the Gwangju production facility, as well as exports destined for North America, Europe, and other parts of Asia-Pacific.
The Sportage lineup comprises 12 variants across four trim grades. In base specification, it’s one of the few SUVs to still offer a manual transmission, while the flagship GT-Line HEV features hybrid power via a six-speed automatic transmission.
Pricing ranges from $32,995 to $55,420 plus on-roads.
Now in its fifth generation, the Sportage is easily Kia’s best-seller in Australia – the brand shifted 22,210 of them last year.
Interested in buying a Kia Sportage? Get in touch with one of trusted dealers here
Trump’s policies have triggered a retreat from US stocks, which for years attracted large amounts of investor cash, and that gold could be a beneficiary, at least in the short term, says an analyst.
On Friday, gold hit its latest record, at $3,004.86 an ounce, a gain of 14% since the start of 2025, following 27% growth in 2024.
Investors seeking shelter from political and economic volatility triggered by the new US administration are increasingly moving into gold Exchange-Traded Funds, adding momentum to the market’s record rally. Since US President Donald Trump took office in January, his radical policy shift, including trade tariffs, comments he aims to annex Greenland and his unconventional approach to diplomacy to try to end the war in Ukraine have driven gold prices to successive records.
Initially, an influx into gold exchange-traded funds, or baskets of securities that trade like a stock, was dominated by European investors, but analysts say the policy upheaval has begun to tempt even US investors who historically have favoured equities.
On Friday, gold hit its latest record, at $3,004.86 an ounce, a gain of 14% since the start of 2025, following 27% growth in 2024.
Gold holdings in Europe-listed exchange-traded funds, meanwhile, have increased by 46.7 metric tonnes, a rise of 3.6%, to 1,334.3 tonnes since the start of 2025, a contrast to the 2021-2024 period that was marked by big outflows, according to the World Gold Council (WGC).
Also Read: Gold Discounts In India Touch 8-Month High As Demand Hit Amid Record Prices
Further inflows could provide support as the market moves further into overbought territory.
“Investors, such as real money managers, especially those located in the West needed a growth and stock market scare big enough to persuade them back into gold. That is what we are seeing,” said Ole Hansen, head of commodity strategy at Saxo Bank.
“Since 2022 when the Federal Reserve began its rate-hiking cycle, these investors left gold… but with the other markets now showing signs of suffering and the potential for even lower funding rates in the future, they have returned,” Hansen said.
US retail investors have become wary of stock markets after Monday’s sell-off when the benchmark S&P 500 index registered its biggest drop this year. Analysts say that adds to demand for gold as a refuge from turbulence.
“In the US, some investors may be less concerned despite similar global risks, possibly due to stronger confidence in the domestic economy,” Alexander Zumpfe, a precious metals trader at Heraeus Metals. “However, recent inflows into North American gold ETFs indicate that interest in gold as a hedge is also growing in the US.”
In the United States, gold holdings in ETFs have climbed 68.1 tonnes, a gain of 4.3%, to 1,649.8 tonnes so far this year.
EQUITIES’ LOSS COULD BE GOLD’S GAIN
Saxo’s Hansen said Trump’s policies have triggered a retreat from US stocks, which for years attracted large amounts of investor cash, and that gold could be a beneficiary, at least in the short term.
Apart from the investor-led flow into exchange-traded funds, retail investors the world over are hungry for exposure to gold.
The number of people buying gold for the first time on BullionVault’s online market jumped in February to the highest since May 2021, said Adrian Ash, head of research at London-based BullionVault.
Gold investor demand at BullionVault exceeded customer profit-taking by 0.2 tonnes, the highest since June 2023, Ash said.
While supportive of the market, however, even all this may not drive the gold price higher, analysts say, given the signs the market is overbought.
To stay above the $3,000 per ounce mark, gold would need to see retail bar and coin demand in Europe and North America to step up further and/or central bank buying intensify, said John Reade, senior market strategist at WGC.
So far, only demand for physical gold bars and coins is rising in Germany this year after a slump of recent years.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – Reuters)
News business » markets Gold Surpasses $3,000: Donald Trump-Driven Turbulence Draws New Investors Into Bullion
In case, you are looking for a cool and interesting way to earn a quick buck, Here’s a platform that pays you for filling out simple surveys. Toluna Group lets you take surveys for forming a database for market research.
Toluna is a worldwide survey technology provider and claims to be the “ World’s Largest social voting community” which has more than nine million survey takers.
In this review, you will get a detailed insight into Toluna, Let’s look into this review article now:
Overview
Name
Toluna
Owner
Frederic-Charles Petit
Founded Year
2000
Headquarters
Paris, France
Type
Online Surveys
Apps
iPhone & Android Devices
Support
Email, Phone
Website
www.toluna.com
What is Toluna?
Toluna is a community survey platform that offers online surveys in return for rewards. This is a Paris( France) based company, managed by the Toluna Group and a well known market research company preferred by brands around the world. With more than 9 million survey takers, for the people who want to make money by taking surveys, Toluna is a preferred option.
The users that register on Toluna and take up these surveys are known as “Toluna Influencers”. These surveys completed are used by the major brands to help them figure out their business plan. It is one of the world’s most popular survey sites which has a very strong subscriber base and an effective portfolio of clients.
With 16+ offices globally, Toluna team aims to provide better products and quality to the consumers. They do it by surveying for the brands and thus it helps in dealing with customer satisfaction and to improve their business plan.
How to Register on Toluna?
Toluna provides its membership to 49 countries. The number of surveys that are available depends on your location.
Step 1: You can fill up the registration form online and sign up for Toluna.
Step 2: After the Toluna login, you will be asked to verify your account by providing your personal details. Further, you are good to take the online surveys.
Toluna Influencers are paid in the form of points which can be redeemed further in the form of gift cards, vouchers, etc. There are two types of Toluna surveys available listed below:
Profile Surveys: These surveys take a short period of time to complete where you are rewarded with 100 points.
Longer Surveys: These surveys take a longer duration to complete typically about 10 to 30 minutes with much higher rewards
You can update your personal information by logging into your account. Select “Account” in the top right corner and then click the Edit option. You can also view your account activity such as credits purchased, surveys launched, and the current status of your subscription.
In cases where you forget your password, you can do it by Clicking the Sign in button at the top right side. Then click the “forgot your password” option and follow the instructions further which you will be able to retrieve your password.
How to make money in Toluna?
There are 8 ways to earn in Toluna which are as follows:
Toluna Surveys: They are the most effective way of earningToluna points. There are multiple surveys available online to complete at any point of time. Usually the majority of the surveys pay 1000-2000 points which lasts for about 20 minutes. 5500 Toluna points are roughly equivalent to 1 pound.
Completing Profile Surveys: You will find the “Profile Surveys” under the surveys option at the top of the screen. Each profile consists of 14 Surveys each and you will get 100points for each survey.
Participate in Polls: In this you will usually earn a points reward of 15 points per poll, usually takes seconds to complete
Post in the Toluna community: You can also earn points by posting your content in the Toluna Community. You may win up to 1000 points per post if your post gets qualified.
Participate in the Contest: Toluna offers launch contests to encourage the users to post more in the community. Inreturn they are rewarded with some points and other prizes.
Start your own contest: you will also be rewarded with points and prizes if you start your own contest.
Refer a friend to Toluna: you can share your referral link with your friends and you will get 500 bonus points for each friend upto 10 months
Play Toluna Games:You can also win points by playing games. You can win about 80-1000 points by spinning the wheel.
How to redeem points in Toluna?
There are 3 ways to redeem the points in Toluna which are listed below:
Rewards:It offers a variety of gift cards with an option to cashout by Paypal. The cheapest gift card costs around 30,000 points
Gifties: These are the tickets you can buy to win a range of rewards
Sweepstakes: You can also exchange your points to get a chance to join the monthly sweepstakes where you can buy branded items
You need to reach of minimum of 30,000 points which are listed below:
$10 gift card for Starbucks- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Cheesecake factory- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Redbox- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for JiffyLube- 30,000 points
$25 gift card for Restaurants.com-45,000 points
$25 gift card for Walmart- 45,000 points
$25 gift card for Fandango- 45,000 points
Toluna is it Legit or Scam?
As per the Toluna reviews, it has been found that Toluna is a legitimate business. Despite its long wait times, it has a noted record of paying its clients and further issuing them good rewards.
It is a company that offers to pay on each survey you take. It has been very popular and has become one of the people’s number one choices regarding online surveys. They also have a base of around 13 million users and is on a rapid expansion
Toluna also has an A+ rating in the Better Business Bureau(BBB) with only around 31 customer complaints. Further, it has a 3.8 rating on the Trustpilot with more than 2,100 Toluna reviews.
There are a lot more positive reviews compared to the criticism. It has great customer service for which it accounts as one of the legit organizations that pay people in response to the online surveys.
Conclusion
It is to be acknowledged that Toluna is a legitimate business which pays its users based on the surveys they take.It is one of the top rated companies with a trusted community of 1+ million members which make it highly recommended.
It is an honest way to make full time income on the internet by taking surveys. It has no hidden costs and in turn you will learn how to build a flourishing business online in Toluna. It also allows you to choose surveys in categories which you are interested in.
Thus finally it is advisable that Toluna is worth giving a try. You can take it as a fun experience and further you will enjoy it a lot. If you are looking to earn income by taking up online surveys, then Toluna is definitely on the top lists which are trusted.
FAQ
How much does it cost to join Toluna?
No, Signing up for Toluna is completely free. Sign up today and access its features free of cost
Does Toluna pay in cash?
Toluna Influencers are compensated in points, which can be exchanged for a variety of items such as gift cards, competition entries, or plain old cash.
How long do the surveys take to complete?
It is dependent on the targeting and the screening questions. The more of these questions you have, the longer your survey may take to complete.
How do I cash out my Toluna points?
You need to have at least 60000 points. Go to rewards, convert your points into cash through, 60000points=$20.
Is Toluna Survey Legit?
Toluna is a safe and reliable platform. It is not a scam, and millions of people from all over the world have taken their surveys for over ten years. However, your experience with the site may vary from that of other survey takers.
Toluna Ratings
User Review
1.12 (354 votes)
Pros
It is a very reputed company which is operating.
It is completely free to join and features are free to use
Modern and user-friendly interface
You can earn money by answering the surveys on the go while on the phone
Interesting Surveys
Get a consolation prize even if any disqualified
Cons
The disqualifications can be frustrating
There is a minimum cashout of $30 which is hard to reach
Some of its surveys take time to complete
Some users complain about the long wait times for payments or rewards
Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras)-incubated deep-tech TuTr Hyperloop is partnering with multiple national and international stakeholders to drive hyperloop technology in India.
TuTr Hyperloop Pvt. Ltd. (THPL), the Technical University of Munich (TUM), and Neoways Technologies GmbH (NEO) have signed an MoU to drive the research, development, and deployment of hyperloop technology.
The signing ceremony took place during the recent Asia’s first global Hyperloop Competition at IIT Madras’ Thaiyur campus. This partnership integrates academic research, industrial expertise, and engineering solutions to accelerate the validation and commercialization of Hyperloop systems.
Read also: IIT Madras launches admissions to UG programs for students who excel in international olympiads
The primary objective of this MoU is to develop a structured framework for collaborative research and development in hyperloop technology, focusing on core areas such as propulsion, levitation, structural design, infrastructure and advanced control systems. The partnership will work toward establishing large-scale testing and validation sites, ensuring the technical feasibility and safety of hyperloop transit systems.
This MoU establishes a strategic partnership that integrates world-class academic research, industrial expertise and advanced engineering solutions to drive next-generation mobility innovations. Through this collaboration, the four entities will work together to accelerate technology validation, infrastructure planning, and real-world commercial projects for hyperloop systems, says a release.
In addition to the Indo-German collaboration, TuTr Hyperloop has signed an MoU with SYSTRA, a global leader in transportation engineering, to advance next-generation high-speed transportation technologies in India.
The partnership combines TuTr Hyperloop’s expertise in Hyperloop and high-speed transit solutions with SYSTRA’s experience in infrastructure planning, engineering, and implementation. As part of the collaboration, Tutr Hyperloop and Systra will work towards establishing a pilot project to demonstrate hyperloop’s viability in real-world conditions. This initiative will serve as a testbed for refining and validating the technology, offering insights into how the hyperloop can be integrated into India’s transportation network for both passenger and cargo transit, the release said.
Read also: IIT Madras partners with Veranda Learning for competitive exam courses
Hyperloop corridors
To ensure practical implementation, feasibility studies and route planning will be conducted to evaluate potential hyperloop corridors and urban mobility applications. This includes a detailed assessment of infrastructure requirements, safety measures, and environmental impact, ensuring that the solutions developed align with India’s long-term mobility goals.
What is the best internet provider in Grand Rapids?
AT&T Fiber is the best internet service provider in Grand Rapids, according to CNET. Not only does it have wide availability, it’s also got symmetrical upload and download speeds making it a great choice for avid gamers or users who do a lot of video conferencing. There are no hidden fees to be found, nor are there any data caps. Plans start at $55 and go up to $245 per month for the 5-gig plan.
Looking for a more affordable option? Look at Xfinity. The service provider has a wide range of plans that fit every need, starting at $35. Keep in mind that prices go up after a year or two, depending on the plan.
If you can’t get AT&T Fiber and don’t want to worry about Xfinity’s confusing pricing structure, T-Mobile Home Internet is a refreshingly straightforward option. The fixed wireless provider offers three plans that range from $50-$70 per month, and it guarantees it won’t ever raise your rates. Plus, you can get discounts on your internet if you also have a phone plan through T-Mobile.
Best internet in Grand Rapids, Michigan
Grand Rapids internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Read full review
DSL
$55
Up to 140Mbps
None
1.5TB on some plans
None
7.4
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for eligible Verizon Wireless customers)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Xfinity Read full review
Cable
$35-$95
150-2,100Mbps
$15 (included in most plans)
1.2TB
Optional
7
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Grand Rapids
Satellite internet: You can get satellite internet at virtually every address in the country, but it’s only your best option in rural areas without any other connection types available. HughesNet and Viasat are the traditional satellite ISPs, and both come with high prices, slow speeds and low data caps. Starlink is a newer option from SpaceX that provides faster speeds, but you’ll still pay a much higher price than AT&T, Xfinity and T-Mobile.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: It’s only available to around 1 in 5 Grand Rapids households, but Verizon 5G Home Internet is a solid option for fixed wireless internet in the area. Its speeds go up to 1,000Mbps at some addresses, and you can save an extra $15 to $25 a month when you bundle with an eligible Verizon Wireless plan.
Cheap internet options in Grand Rapids
Xfinity is by far the cheapest internet provider in Grand Rapids, with plans starting at $35 a month available almost everywhere in the city. However, currently, you can get the 400Mbps plan for just $30 a month. Those prices more than double by the third year of service, but when you factor in the savings from the first couple of years, they’re still a decent deal.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Grand Rapids?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Xfinity Connect Read full review
$35
150Mbps
$15 (optional)
Xfinity Connect More Read full review
$30
400Mbps
$15 (optional)
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
85Mbps
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
415Mbps
None
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Denis Tangney Jr / Getty Images
How to find internet deals and promotions in Grand Rapids
The best internet deals and the top promotions in Grand Rapids depend on what discounts are available during that time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Grand Rapids internet providers, such as Xfinity, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, including AT&T Fiber and T-Mobile Home Internet, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Grand Rapids broadband?
Nearly every address in Grand Rapids has access to fast internet. 99.7% of the city can get 250/25Mbps speeds, compared to 85.5% for Michigan and 87.3% for the country as a whole. That’s also ahead of other cities in the state, like Lansing (96.9%) and Detroit (98.9%).
Fastest internet plans in Grand Rapids
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Internet 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Internet 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit X2 Read full review
$95
2,100Mbps
306Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
AT&T Internet 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit Read full review
$65
1,100Mbps
170Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
Verizon 5G Home Plus Internet Read full review
$70 ($45 with qualifying Verizon 5G mobile plans)
250Mbps
20Mbps
None
Fixed wireless
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email and streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one person sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two people to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more people to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Grand Rapids
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. What’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary pricing, availability and speed database that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
This guide leverages an in-house artificial intelligence tool called RAMP, which is trained on our own writing and uses our database to generate content about specific internet service providers that our writers can use in determining and presenting our picks for a given guide. Check CNET’s AI policy for more information about how our teams use (and don’t use) AI tools.
Because our database is not exhaustive, we go to the FCC’s website to check the primary data for ourselves and make sure we’re considering every ISP that provides service in an area. Plans and prices also vary by location, so we input local addresses on provider websites to find the specific options available to residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of our prepublication fact-check.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answer to those questions is often layered and complex, but the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.).
To explore our process in more depth, you can visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Grand Rapids?
Almost every household in Grand Rapids has access to at least one high-speed internet provider, but some are still better than others. AT&T Fiber is the best of the bunch, with fast, symmetrical speeds, straightforward pricing and excellent customer satisfaction scores. If you can’t get AT&T Fiber at your address, Xfinity and T-Mobile Home Internet are good backup options, but they each have drawbacks.
Internet providers in Grand Rapids FAQs
What is the best internet service provider in Grand Rapids?
AT&T Fiber is the best internet service provider in Grand Rapids, offering symmetrical upload and download speeds, unlimited data, no contracts and the highest internet provider score in the 2024 American Customer Satisfaction Index survey. Speeds go up to 5,000Mbps in Grand Rapids, and you can also get discounts when you bundle with eligible cellphone plans.
Is fiber internet available in Grand Rapids?
Yes, fiber internet is available to 40% of households in Grand Rapids, almost entirely through AT&T Fiber.
Who is the cheapest internet provider in Grand Rapids?
Xfinity is the cheapest internet provider in Grand Rapids, with plans starting at $30 a month for 150/23Mbps speeds. The price increases in the second and third years of service.
Which internet provider in Grand Rapids offers the fastest plan?
The internet provider in Grand Rapids that offers the fastest plan is AT&T Fiber, with maximum upload and download speeds of 5,000Mbps.
Obesity and stress could magnify the risk of one of the most aggressive types of cancer, a new study suggests.
Researchers at University of California Los Angeles (UCLA) found that stress-related neurotransmitters and obesity-related hormones activated CREB (cyclic AMP response element-binding protein), which was shown to promote the growth of cancer cells in the pancreas.
In the study, mice that ate a high-fat diet were more likely to develop precancerous lesions. When stress levels were also raised through social isolation, the lesions grew even more.
EXPERIMENTAL VACCINE FOR COMMON CANCER SHOWS POTENTIAL IN CLINICAL TRIAL
The stress-related cancer risk was more pronounced in female mice.
Based on these findings, the researchers suggested exploring the use of existing medications to reduce the risk of obesity- and stress-related cancers.
Obesity and stress could magnify the risk of one of the most aggressive types of cancer, a new study suggests.(iStock)
“Since β-adrenergic receptors play a crucial role in stress-related cancer growth, commonly used beta-blockers, which are drugs prescribed for high blood pressure, could be repurposed to help mitigate these effects,” a press release stated.
Pancreatic cancer is one of the deadliest types in the U.S., with a five-year survival rate of just 13%.
PANCREATIC CANCER PATIENT SURVIVAL DOUBLED WITH HIGH DOSE OF COMMON VITAMIN, STUDY FINDS
One of the biggest challenges with the disease is that it’s often detected at a late stage when the disease is already advanced, according to Dr. Robert Den, a radiation oncologist, professor of radiation oncology, and chief medical officer at Alpha Tau Medical in Israel.
“Unlike some other cancers, there are no effective early screening tools, so by the time a patient is diagnosed, treatment options are often limited,” Den, who was not involved in the study, told Fox News Digital.
“Unlike some other cancers, there are no effective early screening tools, so by the time a patient is diagnosed, treatment options are often limited.”(iStock)
The study reinforces the strong connection between the mind and body as it related to cancer development, Den said.
“Stress and its associated pathways can exacerbate disease progression, and we know that obesity fuels certain cancers, potentially impacting a patient’s response to treatment,” he said.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“In this case, we’re seeing evidence that stress and obesity may contribute to the worsening of pancreatic cancer, which has major implications for both prevention and treatment strategies.”
Maintaining a heart-healthy diet and eating in moderation are essential, Den noted — not just for cancer prevention but for overall health.
Pancreatic cancer is one of the deadliest types in the U.S., with a five-year survival rate of just 13%.(iStock)
“Exercise is particularly crucial in addressing both obesity and stress,” he said. “Staying active is not only beneficial for physical health, but also an excellent way to reduce stress.”
Mindfulness can also play a key role in reducing cancer risk, the doctor advised.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Spending time outdoors can also improve both mental and physical well-being, so I always encourage patients to find ways to be active, connect with nature and prioritize their overall wellness,” he said.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Regarding pancreatic cancer treatment, Den noted that there have been some advancements in chemotherapy and surgical techniques, but “there hasn’t yet been a breakthrough.”
“Most immunotherapies, which have been revolutionary in other cancers, have not shown the same promise in pancreatic cancer,” he said.
“Spending time outdoors can also improve both mental and physical well-being, so I always encourage patients to find ways to be active, connect with nature and prioritize their overall wellness,” an oncologist said.(iStock)
“The key challenge is finding ways to help patients who are not candidates for surgery, as surgery remains the best line of defense.”
Fox News Digital reached out to the study researchers for comment.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
India is diversified, as is its culture, cuisine, and cooking style. Every region and subregion has something unique to offer, adding stars to the world map of gastronomy. What impresses us the most is the range of street-style delicacies, each with its unique characteristic and flavour profile. While some are loaded with oil and masala, some dishes are simple and soothing for your palate. Here, we will talk about one such dish that is spicy, flavourful and healthy at the same time. It is the street-style ghugni. Sounds interesting? Let’s get going.
Also Read: 5 Of The Most Popular Kolkata Street Foods Available For Under Rs. 50
What is Ghugni? What Is So Special About This Particular Recipe?
To begin with, ghugni is a popular dish from West Bengal and Bihar, made with white peas (safed matar). It is simple, loaded with masalas and is fulfilling at the same time. You can have it as a breakfast food, paired with roti, puri or bread. Or, you can also enjoy it as chaat, with extra lemon and sev on the top.
While the quintessential ghugni is cooked by mixing and sauteing boiled safed matar with oil, ginger, garlic, onion, and spices, this particular recipe makes the complete process easier. In fact, what we loved the most is the fact that this recipe includes zero drops of oil. You heard us right!
Also Read: How To Make Masala Pav: A Street-Style Delight From Mumbai
Zero-Oil Street-Style Ghugni Recipe: How To Make No-Oil Ghugni:
The recipe is super simple! And you can make it in just 15 minutes. All you need to do is soak the white peas the night before.
Next, boil the soaked matar with turmeric powder and a dash of baking powder. For the unversed, safed matar is hard in nature, so adding baking soda helps it cook in less time. Once done, mash a few matar to have the semi-thick texture.
Now, soak some tamarind in a bowl, and finely chop onion, green chilli, cucumber and coriander leaves. Some people also like adding shredded carrot, tomato and chopped coconut for added taste and texture. All you are left to do is now mix everything with the boiled peas, add salt, roasted cumin-coriander-red chilli as per your taste and garnish with sev. Pro tip: Have it fresh to enjoy the crunch of the veggies and sev.
Click here for the detailed recipe of ghugni.
The recipe is super simple, right? So, without wasting much time, prepare this dish at home and enjoy!
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-15/Is-Fentanyl-crisis-a-justifiable-reason-for-U-S-to-impose-tariffs–1BLcL79dUXe/img/a77a8261cd9f425ba47558c5fb0d9c51/a77a8261cd9f425ba47558c5fb0d9c51.jpeg' alt='Homeless people live in a tent encampment on South Hampton St. in the Newmarket section, which has has long been the site of open drug dealing, over doses and violence, Boston, Massachusetts, United States, October 19, 2021. /VCG
'
The United States has imposed tariffs on China and other countries including Canada and Mexico. The primary reason for the U.S. to target China is the fentanyl crisis. However, is the fentanyl issue truly a justification for these tariffs?
The Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs and numerous experts argue that the root of the U.S. fentanyl crisis lies in its own massive drug abuse issue and government regulatory failures. They also note that by using its fentanyl crisis as a pretext to impose tariffs, the U.S. government is shifting blame rather than addressing the issue.
According to the International Narcotics Control Board, the U.S. is the world’s largest producer and consumer of fentanyl-related substances, consuming 80 percent of the global opioid supply despite having only five percent of the world’s population. Data from the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) shows that fentanyl overdoses have become one of the U.S. biggest killers. More than 1,500 Americans per week die from taking some type of opioid, making the drug by far the leading cause of fatal overdoses in the country.
While the U.S. condemned countries including Canada, China and Mexico for its fentanyl crisis, analysts pointed out that the deeper issue lies in the growing social inequalities, wealth disparities, and systemic racism in the U.S., which have left many young people disillusioned and turning to drugs as a coping mechanism.
As one U.S. netizen said on social media, “Fentanyl is not the cause, but the result. Disheartened and helpless people doing disheartened and helpless things,” highlighting the underlying social and governance crises in the U.S.
Moreover, the influence of pharmaceutical companies on U.S. policymakers and weak government oversight have exacerbated the fentanyl crisis.
The Guardian revealed that U.S. drug manufacturers have spent heavily on lobbying Congress, with approximately 90 percent of House representatives and nearly all Senators receiving campaign donations from pharmaceutical companies. Despite bipartisan recognition of the severity of the fentanyl crisis, political infighting has hindered effective solutions. For instance, in May 2023, the Republican-controlled House voted on the “Halt All Lethal Trafficking of Fentanyl Act,” but 133 representatives, including 132 Democrats, opposed the bill.
A Gallup survey published in November 2023 found that 52 percent of U.S. adults believe the country has lost ground in addressing the illegal drug problem.
Unlike the U.S., China actively fulfills its obligations as a contracting state to UN’s Single Convention on Narcotic Drugs of 1961 and the Convention on Psychotropic Substances of 1971, according to the whitepaper titled “Controlling Fentanyl-Related Substances – China’s Contribution,” which was released by China’s State Council Information Office early March.
In accordance with relevant provisions of its Regulations on Administration of Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances and Measures on the Control of Nonmedical Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances, China expands its list of controlled substances in line with the United Nations control list in a timely manner, said the whitepaper.
In 2019, China became the first country to impose comprehensive control over fentanyl-related substances, effective from May 1, 2019. Since then, China’s Ministry of Public Security has launched annual campaigns to combat the illegal manufacturing and trafficking of fentanyl and other new drugs. In 2023, China intensified its efforts by collaborating with customs authorities to inspect exports at key ports, particularly those bound for high-risk countries.
China has also established a comprehensive regulatory system covering the entire lifecycle of fentanyl, from production to distribution and import/export. Any export of fentanyl-related precursors requires approval from the National Medical Products Administration and is tracked under the United Nations’ “Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals.”
In March 2022, the U.S. State Department’s International Narcotics Control Strategy Report acknowledged that since China’s wide control of fentanyl-related substances in 2019, U.S. authorities have detected or seized almost no shipments of fentanyl or fentanyl analogues coming from China. Additionally, China has actively cooperated with Mexico on anti-drug enforcement, and Mexican authorities have never seized precursor chemicals originating from China.
Despite these efforts, the U.S. continues to disregard China’s achievements in drug control and its stringent fentanyl regulations, using the crisis as a pretext to impose tariffs on China and Canada. Professor Li Haidong from the China Foreign Affairs University told CMG that the Trump administration’s decision to impose tariffs on China, shortly after taking office, was driven by political calculations.
He argued that the U.S. is fully aware of the difficulty in fundamentally solving the fentanyl crisis and is instead shifting blame to China to bolster domestic support and justify its tariff policies.
China’s Commerce Minister Wang Wentao criticized the U.S. for using the fentanyl issue as an unjustified excuse to impose tariffs, calling it a baseless move. He stated that the U.S. tariff policy is a unilateral and bullying action that runs counter to global trends and is a “classic case of harming others without benefiting itself.”
Realty firm Brigade Enterprises targets ₹2,700 crore revenue from its new housing project in Bengaluru.
In a regulatory filing on Friday, Brigade Enterprises said it has launched a residential project ‘Brigade Eternia’ in Yelahanka, Bengaluru.
The project, spread over 14.65 acres, will have 1,124 residential units with a total built-up area of about 20 lakh square feet.
Also read: Brigade Group plans to invest ₹1,500 crore in Kerala, signs MOU
“The project has a revenue potential of over ₹2,700 crores,” Brigade said.
The project will be completed by March 31, 2030.
Pavitra Shankar, Managing Director of Brigade Enterprises, said “North Bangalore, particularly Yelahanka, is emerging as a key micro market with immense growth potential.”
Also read: Brigade Enterprises PAT up threefold to ₹236 crore for Q3FY25
Established in 1986, Brigade Group is one of India’s leading property developers.
Brigade has developed many projects in South India.
As per the PropEquity data, housing sales in Bengaluru fell 9 per cent to 60,506 units in 2024, from 66,600 units in the preceding year.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
AKO ste u potrazi za svježim dekoracijama ili praktičnim predmetima za svoj dom, sada je pravo vrijeme da iskoristite sniženje u H&M-u. Ovaj popularni brend je prepolovio cijene svoje kolekcije za dom, a u ponudi ćete pronaći sve, od elegantnih vaza do funkcionalnih košara. Evo što se isplati uzeti po nižim cijenama.
Košare za organizaciju
Ako ste u potrazi za načinima kako poboljšati organizaciju u svom domu, H&M nudi predivne košare za pohranu svih vaših sitnica. Sniženje je odlična prilika da nabavite elegantne i praktične košare koje će vam pomoći da vaš prostor izgleda uredno.
Zavjese
Zavjese su jedan od najjednostavnijih načina da osvježite prostor. Na sniženju u H&M-u možete pronaći zavjese u različitim bojama i materijalima, idealne za svaki prostor – od spavaće sobe do dnevnog boravka.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Vaze
Dekorativne vaze mogu unijeti eleganciju u svaki prostor. Bilo da preferirate minimalistički ili bogatiji dizajn, u ponudi ćete naći vaze koje će se savršeno uklopiti u vaš interijer.
Ogledala
Ogledala nisu samo praktična već i odličan dekorativni element. Na sniženju možete pronaći ogledala različitih oblika i veličina koja će vašem prostoru dodati svjetlost i dubinu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
DENVER — Inside a locker room, geography matters and Friday night in Denver, Austin Reaves was in the big seat.
Using the space typically assigned to LeBron James inside the Nuggets’ visiting locker room, Reaves sat closest to the showers, players passing him on their way in and out after they’d fumbled a chance to stun Denver.
Cam Reddish, Christian Koloko, Jordan Goodwin — each one passed by the space only to briefly stop and get a quick word of encouragement from the lone Lakers starter who played Friday night.
It was, again, not hard to imagine for a team that was fully under Reaves’ watch, the unquestioned third member of the Lakers’ big three who nearly carried his team minus James and Luka Doncic to a win in Denver on the second night of a back-to-back minus 60% of its 10-man rotation.
But his 37 points, 13 assists, eight rebounds and four steals weren’t enough — numbers so unique that they’ve only been accomplished seven other times, joining Doncic, James, Michael Jordan, Larry Bird, Pete Maravich, Bernard King and Kenny Anderson as the only players to have done it.
Earlier this year, minus James and Doncic, Reaves scored 45 points with seven rebounds and seven assists, numbers equaled only 25 times in Lakers history by a list of the organization’s greats. Elgin Baylor did it 10 times. Kobe Bryant did it six. Jerry West had at least 45-7-7 four times. Magic Johnson did it once. And then there’s Reaves.
“Looks weird when you see my name up there,” Reaves said after that game against the Pacers.
Maybe it’s time to stop being so surprised.
For what it’s worth, Reaves isn’t that shocked, a player confident enough to tell people around him that he was going to matter for the Lakers as an undrafted rookie on a two-way contract after one day of minicamp.
“I’ve weirdly been confident for a long time,” Reaves said Friday night, his feet and ankles soaking in ice. “It’s just being on the stage for the world to see. But I tell you all the time, I just try to play the game the right way. And when shots fall, it looks good. And when shots don’t fall, everybody’s ready to kill me. Everybody in the locker room, did what they had to do to win. And unfortunately, we didn’t get it done.”
The Lakers, in all honestly, probably should’ve.
They lead by three in the final minute after back-to-back steals by Reaves led to transition points, starting with one where he ripped the ball away from annual MVP candidate Nikola Jokic.
The second steal led to a Dalton Knecht dunk, with Knecht landing scarily on his back and head after his grip slipped off the rim. JJ Redick ran to check on Knecht as Denver called timeout and was late back into his huddle.
The Nuggets came out and attacked Koloko, Jokic quickly scoring and drawing a foul to tie the game.
“I didn’t have time to really get us the right substitutions and matchups that I would have wanted,” Redick said. “And that’s not a knock on CK, but I just kind of put him in a tough spot knowing that Jokic was going to go quick.”
After Reaves’ jumper rimmed out, Denver created an open Jamal Murray three off a screen from Jokic, and like he’s done multiple times before, the Denver guard hit the game’s biggest shot.
“Losing sucks,” Reaves said. “But I’m happy with what these guys in the locker room did tonight.”
As the Lakers head back to Los Angeles on a four-game losing streak, Reaves’ last two games are one of the few slivers of encouragement after the 26-year-old-guard shook off any rust from a two-game absence due to a calf strain earlier this month.
He’s also been dealing with right wrist pain and wore a large ice pack on his shooting arm after he scored 28 against Milwaukee on Thursday.
Friday, James was courtside in Sacramento watching his son Bryce and Sierra Canyon win a state title while he recovers from a groin strain. Starters Jaxson Hayes and Rui Hachimura were also not with the team because of knee injuries. Doncic, who scored 45 against the Bucks, didn’t play because of calf and ankle injury management. Key bench players Gabe Vincent (knee) and Dorian Finney-Smith (ankle) also didn’t face the Nuggets.
Reaves admitted all the absences left him wondering whether he should get one too, with only James having played more minutes for the Lakers this season.
“They told me to go play, so I go play,” Reaves said afterward.
If the Lakers were Reaves’ team Friday, that won’t really be the case moving forward. The trade for Doncic ensured he’d be the team’s primary creator for the remainder of his contract — and beyond, if the Lakers keep him. James will also be back to dominate possessions as he has an All-NBA season, meaning Reaves will be taking a step back and tasked with making the biggest adjustment of the three.
Reaves is a critical part of all that, and finding lanes for him to lead like this — whether he’s in the big seat or not — is a major task for the final month of the regular season.
“I think Austin has done a great job throughout his career of just like figuring it out. And you don’t always figure it out in a week or a month,” Redick said before Thursday’s game, adding: “There’s a lot of stuff that has happened over the last six weeks. He’s been phenomenal this season. We have a lot of confidence in him as a player. We have a lot of confidence in the duo of him and Luca together. And X and O wise, he’s going to play on ball. He’s going to play off ball. We’ll have a ton of opportunities once we get LeBron back. Those two guys have such great synergy and chemistry. They’re incredibly intelligent players and really understand how to play off of each other.
“And then, I think you’ve seen it when we’ve been whole, the guys have really learned how to play with Luka. And we’ve gotten some good stuff when we’ve been organized.”
Planning a trip to Sikkim? Here’s all you need to know about the new tourist entry fee that the government has introduced.
The Sikkim government has started charging ₹50 as entry fees for tourists visiting the state, officials said on Friday.
Sikkim now charges tourists an entry fee. Here’s what you need to know!(Image by Unsplash)
The charging of entry fees came into effect from this month under the Sikkim Registration of Tourist Trade Rules 2025, they said.
The fees are being collected at hotels during check-in and are deposited into the Tourism Sustainability Development (TSD) Fund to improve tourism infrastructure and services across the state, the officials said.
All tourists, barring children under the age of five are being charged the amount for stay for up to 30 days, they said.
A tourist coming again after a month will be levied the charge again, the officials said.
The state government plans to use the revenue generated to enhance road connectivity, improve cleanliness, and develop tourism infrastructure, ensuring a better experience for visitors, they added.
Recommended Topics
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
See More
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
See Less
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
Apple TV+ has unleashed a gripping new crime drama, Dope Thief, that’s an absolute must-see for thriller aficionados, launching with a double-bill premiere that’s sure to hook viewers.
Every Friday, fresh episodes of the limited series featuring stars Bryan Tyree Henry and Wagner Moura hit the screens, plunging fans into a dark tale of criminal exploits and brutal gang rivalries.
The action-packed series unfolds with best mates Ray (played by Henry) and Manny (Moura) embarking on a risky charade as DEA agents to rip off unsuspecting drug peddlers.
But their plot spirals into pandemonium when they unintentionally steal from one of the most formidable underworld organisations in Philadelphia, triggering a perilous game of cat-and-mouse with both mobsters and the Feds hot on their trail.
Die-hard enthusiasts of Ridley Scott’s critically praised series shouldn’t miss out on diving into a selection of enthralling movies available for streaming without dishing out any extra dosh.
Yardie
Actor Idris Elba makes his directorial debut with Yardie, a film that’s taking the crime genre by storm and currently up for grabs on BBC iPlayer for crime drama devotees.
Starring Aml Ameen as Dennis “D” Campbell, we follow the Jamaican man through the ’70s who, after witnessing his brother’s murder, is thrust into London life only for his bygone days to haunt him a decade on.
Featuring Stephen Graham, well-known from celebrated drama Adolescence, in a pivotal role, Yardie has earned accolades from cinema buffs, with one Letterboxd user hailing it as a “perfect film” while another praises it as “a fantastic directorial debut” for Elba.
Yardie is available to stream on BBC iPlayer.
Gone Girl
The gripping crime drama Gone Girl, now over a decade old, remains as captivating today as it was upon its release in 2014.
Ben Affleck delivers a stellar performance as Nick Dunne, the husband of ‘Amazing’ Amy (played by Rosamund Pike), the muse for a popular children’s book series. Amy’s sudden disappearance triggers a media frenzy and all signs seem to point to Nick as the prime suspect.
Hailed as one of David Fincher’s finest directorial achievements, the film has garnered a plethora of five-star accolades from viewers. A Google review praises it: “The film is as meticulously crafted as anything.
“The characters in this twisty (and twisted) script dream up (no spoilers here), and the unhurried pace, relentlessly mounting tension, and spot-on performances will keep you watching till the end.”
Gone Girl is available to stream on ITVX.
Sicario
Moving on to another heart-stopping thriller, Sicario should be on the watchlist of any Dope Thief enthusiast. Directed by the acclaimed Denis Villeneuve of Dune fame and penned by Yellowstone creator Taylor Sheridan, this film delves into the grim realities of the Mexican drug trade.
Emily Blunt shines as FBI agent Kate Macer who joins forces with CIA operative Matt Graver (Josh Brolin) and the enigmatic hitman Alejandro Gillick (Benicio Del Toro) on a mission to dismantle a formidable cartel.
Sicario is often listed among Villeneuve’s most impressive works and is a must-see for fans of the celebrated crime series Narcos.
A Letterboxd user encapsulates the experience: “Pretty much just held my breath for two hours straight what a RIDE.”
One fan enthused: “This was absolutely epic, a lot better than I was expecting it to be, I was all set to give it 4 and a half stars then I thought, what could it have actually done any better?
“The answer I came to was nothing, from the first scene to the last this is a white knuckle ride full of tension and suspense, there were a few scenes where I was actually holding my breath.”
Sicario is available to stream on BBC iPlayer.
Bad Lieutenant
Step into the murky world of Bad Lieutenant, Abel Ferrara’s cult classic. This dark thriller echoes the story of Dope Thief, where two friends sink deep into corruption within Philly’s drug scene.
Starring Harvey Keitel as a New York cop battling his own demons of cocaine and gambling addiction while seeking redemption during a harrowing case, Bad Lieutenant is a stark portrayal of decay and the quest for atonement.
A relentless Letterboxd user gave it five stars, asserting: “Ferrara at his rudest and crudest best. It goes without saying that this isn’t for everyone. Keitel’s character has no redeeming virtues – he’s everything you don’t wanna cop to be – and he’s only going downhill further.
“Yet you care about him and can’t take your eyes away even if Ferrara takes him deeper and deeper into despair.
“This is certainly one of Keitel’s best performances, brilliantly embodying all the physical and spiritual pain life has to offer.”
Bad Lieutenant is available to stream on ITVX.
Training Day
Watch officers bend the rules in Training Day.
Film buffs hail Antoine Fuqua’s gripping film as one of the greatest police dramas ever made, and with good reason.
Ethan Hawke delivers a compelling performance as Jake Hoyt, a greenhorn LAPD officer who is teamed up with the notorious narcotics detective Alonzo Harris (Denzel Washington) for a day-long evaluation to see if he has what it takes to join the drug squad.
The rookie quickly finds himself in over his head as he uncovers Alonzo’s shady dealings and gets entangled in a dangerous skirmish with Russian gangsters.
One enthusiastic five-star Google review stated: “In my opinion this is Denzel’s best performance.
“Not that they are not all amazing but this particular character and his acting combine to make one of the best movies of all-time.”
Training Day is available to stream on BBC iPlayer.
Deliveries of the new-generation Toyota LandCruiser Prado finally commenced late in 2024, several months after stock of the previous-generation model had effectively dried up.
That had allowed the Ford Everest and Isuzu MU-X to storm past it in the sales charts, and we dare say some would-be Prado buyers defected to the popular off-roader’s arch-rivals.
Having now driven the new Prado, we’re in a position to validate those defecters’ decisions and determine whether those now in the market should buy the boxy Toyota.
And the Prado sure makes a good first impression, ditching the conservative design of the last model – which was an evolution of its predecessor – for something much bolder and boxier. It’s especially sharp in second-from-top VX trim with its black wheels, matched on our tester to black metallic paint.
WATCH: Paul’s video review of the 2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado Kakadu
Not only is the Prado’s design dramatically different, but it now rides the same TNGA-F architecture as the larger LandCruiser 300 Series, and gains mild-hybrid assistance.
Sadly, the turbo-petrol hybrid offered overseas hasn’t come here, at least not yet, and there’s nothing to directly rival the Ford Everest’s excellent turbo-diesel V6.
With competition from Ford and Isuzu tougher than ever, and even a fresh new rival from China, has Toyota done enough to ensure its LandCruiser Prado takes back the title of segment best-seller?
How does the Toyota LandCruiser Prado compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Toyota LandCruiser Prado against similarly sized vehicles.
Toyota
LandCruiser Prado
How much does the Toyota LandCruiser Prado cost?
Yikes. With the new generation, prices rose by as much as $12,500.
Model
Price before on-road costs
2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado GX
$72,500
2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado GXL
$79,990
2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado VX
$87,400
2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado Altitude
$92,700
2025 Toyota LandCruiser Prado Kakadu
$99,990
Sure, there’s a new platform and transmission and new features, but for something with the same power and torque and inferior packaging (more on that later), it’s a tough pill to swallow.
The new Prado is not only considerably more expensive than the old one, it’s also much more expensive than rivals.
Our Prado VX tester rings up at $87,400 before on-roads. That means you can get a top-spec Ford Everest Platinum, complete with a turbo-diesel V6, for less money ($81,200 before on-roads).
An Isuzu MU-X is even cheaper, with the top-spec LS-T priced at $73,990 drive-away.
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
What is the Toyota LandCruiser Prado like on the inside?
Where the Prado makes a case for itself over cheaper rivals is in its interior. Where it also falls down flattest against them is in its interior.
Let me explain, and let’s start at the rear first.
As mentioned, the new Prado now features mild-hybrid power, and in other markets is offered with a full-hybrid powertrain.
That means a high-voltage battery has to go somewhere and that somewhere is on the floor at the rear, so therefore the third row doesn’t fold flat into the floor. Instead, it sticks up significantly above the load floor.
The Prado isn’t the first vehicle to have this issue, mind you, and Toyota sought to go further than rival brands that just stick a carpeted board back there to create a consistent height for the load floor, instead incorporating a removable storage box.
While this is more useful than a simple board, it’s also surprisingly cheap and flimsy in feel. Shorter folk may also find the higher load floor makes it harder to load groceries and gear into the back.
There’s 182L of load space behind the third row, expanding to 906L with it folded and then 1829L with the second row folded. There are no straps for the third-row seats to easily drop or pull them into place.
The third row hasn’t gotten any more habitable with the new generation, at least not for adults. Despite the big, boxy body, my head was pressed up against the roof and my knees were pressed up against the seat; for reference, I’m 180cm tall.
At least it’s easy to get back here, with a simple pull of a lever tumbling one of the second-row seats forward. But with one hand Toyota giveth, and the other it taketh away – the second-row seats no longer slide, so you can’t free up extra space for those in the rearmost row.
Once you’re back there though, you’ll find a single USB-C outlet and a pair of cupholders on each side; there’s also a 220V/120W outlet just nearby in the boot area. There are also air vents in the roof, though you won’t find any child-seat anchor points.
You will find a pair of ISOFIX points plus three top tethers in the second row, which is much more hospitable. There’s also a 12V outlet, a pair of USB-C outlets, and a climate control array that allows passengers to adjust the temperature, mode and fan speed.
Up front in the cabin is where the Prado really shines. While the rival Everest and MU-X, even in their top-spec trims, feel too much like the utes they’re based on, the Prado has a cabin that’s more richly appointed.
There’s soft-touch trim across the top and front of the dashboard and on the doors, and huge padded leatherette inserts on the sides of the centre console for your knee to rest against. The centre console bin lid is also delightfully soft.
We welcome the availability of a tan (sorry, Chateau) interior colourway on the VX and Kakadu, though this particular shade of tan isn’t to my tastes… and I say that as somebody who actually owns a black car with a tan interior.
The chunky steering wheel feels good, though the switchgear is a bit plasticky. And why do you press left and right arrows to skip tracks, but use a bodgy up/down rocker switch to adjust the volume?
Ahead of the steering wheel you’ll find a fully digital instrument cluster. It’s quite customisable, with different views and the ability to toggle what information appears on either side. There are even animations of the vehicle when you change drive modes.
There’s a map you can display in the centre, though don’t expect Volkswagen Group levels of detail – sometimes if you’re on a minor road or in a tunnel, it won’t display anything. It will display when you’re at a set of traffic lights though. Go figure.
The climate control array is attractive and functional. There are no knobs, but there are plenty of physical controls including rocker switches to adjust the temperature.
Below this you’ll find a rather awkwardly placed volume knob and camera button, plus three USB-C outlets and a HDMI port.
Drive mode selection is done via a handy rotary dial on the right-hand side of the centre stack, while also near the shifter you’ll find switches for functions like the crawl control and low-range gearing.
Toyota has fitted a wireless charging pad on the centre console, while the cavernous centre console bin is actually a cool box – something I forgot when I put my sunglasses in there one day, only to take them out and have them instantly fog up. Yes, it gets quite chilly in there…
It’s not often you see a sticker inside a car that tells you not to put a fish somewhere, either.
Toyota’s latest generation of infotainment is a huge step up on what came before, with crisp graphics for the large 12.3-inch screen. There’s wireless Android Auto and Apple CarPlay, as well as satellite navigation.
Finally, the VX’s 14-speaker JBL sound system is hard to fault.
Dimensions
Toyota LandCruiser Prado 250 Series
Length
4990mm
Width
1980mm
Height
1925mm-1935mm
Wheelbase
2850mm
Cargo capacity
182L (7 seats) 906L (5 seats) 1829L (2 seats)
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
Power and torque is unchanged compared to the old model, but braked towing capacity is up by 500kg to 3500kg – finally matching the Everest and MU-X – and fuel economy has improved by 0.3L/100km.
Specifications
Toyota LandCruiser Prado 250 Series
Engine
2.8L 4cyl turbo-diesel 48V MHEV
Motor generator
8.4kW 65Nm
Total system outputs
150kW @ 3000-3400rpm 500Nm @ 1600-2800rpm
Battery
4.3Ahr li-ion
Transmission
8-speed auto
Drive type
Full-time 4WD
Fuel economy (claimed)
7.6L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
9.4L/100km (inner-city, suburban and highway loop) 11.6L/100km (over a week of mostly urban driving)
CO2 emissions (claimed)
200g/km
Emissions standard
Euro 5
Fuel tank
80L main tank 30L sub tank 17.4L AdBlue
Weight (kerb)
2570kg
Payload
580kg-615kg
Braked towing capacity
3500kg
Gross vehicle mass (GVM)
3180kg
Gross combination mass (GCM)
6600kg
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
How does the Toyota LandCruiser Prado drive?
The Prado’s turbo-diesel four-cylinder may have the same outputs as the previous-generation model, but it feels peppier than before.
Credit to this goes to the eight-speed automatic transmission, up two gears on the old model’s unit. It’s a smooth-shifting unit and is well-suited to this engine which, while not as powerful as an Everest V6, is well and truly competitive with four-cylinder rivals.
The Prado feels quite sprightly off the line, making the old model feel a bit sluggish in comparison. You don’t need to work this engine hard, at least not when it’s just you or a handful of people on board.
The transmission isn’t afraid to hold onto a gear instead of rushing up the ratios as quickly as possible, though if you do want to take manual control there are no paddle shifters.
Despite this, in testing of the Kakadu we recorded a 0-100km/h time of 11.27 seconds – slightly slower than the 10.5-11-second figures we recorded in the previous-generation model.
Another big change is the steering, which is now electrically power-assisted instead of hydraulically. It definitely feels lighter than the old car, which may be a bit of an adjustment, but it makes this big SUV an absolute doddle to park.
You can twirl the Prado around town, and the 500Nm of torque – available from just 1600rpm – makes this feel quite eager. But remember it’s now about the same size as the 300 Series, so it’s much bigger than the model it replaces.
The switch to electrically assisted power steering has also enabled the introduction of steering-based lane smarts, while the old Prado had only brake-based lane-keep assist.
Get onto the highway and the push of a single button will activate the adaptive cruise control and Toyota’s Lane Trace Assist, which helps keep the Prado centred in its lane. It even managed a curved bridge approach staying perfectly centred, without feeling jerky.
Altitude
These lane smarts make the Prado an even better road trip car than its predecessor. It also features a driver monitoring system, but unlike those in some rival brands it didn’t throw out any false warnings.
Ride comfort is quite smooth, including on unsealed surfaces. You get the occasional quiver through the structure, as you’ll often find in body-on-frame vehicles, but no harsh jolts.
On some patchy roads it gets just a touch fidgety in the standard drive mode, which also gives the Prado a touch on float and sees it take a moment to settle on some undulations.
Like the top-spec Kakadu, however, the VX has adaptive dampers so you can firm up the ride a bit. The Ford Everest has a well-judged ride without this trick technology, but we’d need to drive the two back-to-back to determine the winner in this category.
There are selectable Normal, Comfort, Eco, Custom, Sport and Sport+ drive modes.
This is still a tall, heavy vehicle on a ladder frame, so don’t expect handling like a similarly priced crossover. Nevertheless, the Prado handles quite well for a body-on-frame vehicle.
There’s the typical gruff engine note of a turbo-diesel four-cylinder, making the Prado sound like any ute. To be fair, Toyota has deadened engine noise quite well – and overall the cabin is quiet – but it’s not as pleasant to listen to as a V6 Everest.
We were unable to do much off-road driving in the Prado VX, though a modest trail drive revealed the Prado to feel stable and surefooted and easy to place even with the light steering.
One issue did present itself on our limited off-road drive, and that was Toyota’s ‘parking support brake’. When reversing to turn around on a flooded track, this feature slammed on the brakes twice when it detected tall grass.
The surround-view camera system with its transparent chassis mode, in contrast, was technology we welcomed off-road. This allows you to clearly see where the vehicle is on a trail, and we could see this being very useful.
Ground clearance is 221mm, with a quoted wading depth of 700mm.
Off-road hardware includes selectable low-range gearing, a locking centre differential, crawl control with five speed settings, hill descent control, and five selectable terrain modes: snow, mud, sand, dirt and auto.
Kakadu
If you want a locking rear differential or front stabiliser bar disconnect, your only choice is the Altitude which ditches the third row of seating and the adaptive suspension.
When you get back on bitumen, you can engage a full-time four-wheel drive mode that can be used on the road. This is something rivals like the Isuzu MU-X lack. However, there’s no two-wheel drive mode.
The Prado features automatic stop/start, though it’s not over-eager like in some rival brands’ vehicles. You need to brake firmly to activate it, and the Prado will display a message in the instrument cluster to tell you this.
It also features an electronic parking brake with an auto hold function, though this defaults to off.
Off-road dimensions
Toyota LandCruiser Prado 250 Series
Track front and rear
1664mm front 1668mm rear
Ground clearance
221mm
Approach angle
32 degrees
Departure angle
17 degrees
Wading depth
700mm
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
There are five members of the 2025 Prado lineup. The GX and Altitude have five seats, while the GXL, VX and Kakadu have seven seats.
Prado GX
LandCruiser Prado GX highlights:
5 seats
18-inch dark grey alloy wheels
Front grille with ‘TOYOTA’ lettering
LED headlights
LED daytime running lights
Folding body-coloured mirrors
Darkened front and rear bumpers, side sills, wheel arches
Manual tailgate
Fabric upholstery
Rubber floor mats
Six-way manual driver’s seat adjustment
7.0-inch multi-function instrument display
12.3-inch touchscreen infotainment system
10-speaker sound system
Wired and wireless Apple CarPlay, Android Auto
Four USB-C ports
Embedded satellite navigation
DAB+ digital radio
Toyota connected services
Dual-zone climate control
Downhill assist control
Crawl control with five speed settings
Prado GXL
LandCruiser Prado GXL adds:
7 seats
Roof rails
Rear privacy glass
Silver front and rear bumper trim
Power tailgate
Synthetic leather upholstery
Heated and ventilated front seats
Eight-way power-adjustable driver’s seat
Leather-accented steering wheel and gear knob
Auto-dimming rearview mirror
Wireless charging pad
Rear climate control
Two extra USB-C charging ports
Prado VX
LandCruiser Prado VX adds:
20-inch dark metallic alloy wheels
Bi-LED headlights with dynamic auto-levelling
Adaptive high-beam assist
Body-coloured front and rear bumpers
Over-fender (wheel arch) moulding
Rear guard trim
Leather-accented seats
Power lumbar and memory function for driver’s seat
4-way power-adjustable passenger’s seat
Power-adjustable steering wheel
Carpet floor mats
Refrigerated centre console
12.3-inch digital instrument cluster
14-speaker JBL sound system
Adaptive Variable Suspension
5 x drive modes
Multi-terrain select
Multi-terrain monitor
Prado Altitude
LandCruiser Prado Altitude adds:
5 seats
18-inch matte grey alloy wheels with all-terrain tyres
Locking rear differential
‘Stabiliser disconnect mechanism’
*Removes Adaptive Variable Suspension
Black door handles and tailgate trim
Black wheel arch moulding
Sunroof
Two-tone colours available
Digital rearview mirror
Heated steering wheel
Head-up display
Prado Kakadu
LandCruiser Prado Kakadu adds (over VX):
Panoramic sunroof
Illuminated side steps
Heated and ventilated rear seats
Heated steering wheel
Adjustable driver’s seat thigh support
Digital rear-view mirror
Head-up display
Torque-sensing limited-slip rear differential
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
Is the Toyota LandCruiser Prado safe?
The Toyota LandCruiser Prado has a five-star safety rating from ANCAP, based on testing conducted in 2024.
Category
Toyota LandCruiser Prado 250 Series
Adult occupant protection
85 per cent
Child occupant protection
89 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
84 per cent
Safety assist
82 per cent
Standard safety features include:
9 airbags
Autonomous emergency braking
Stability control with active traction control
Adaptive cruise control
Lane trace assist (lane centering)
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear parking support brake – stops if a static object is detected
Front and rear parking sensors
Trailer sway control
Trailer pre-wiring harness
360-degree camera
The VX, Altitude, and Kakadu grades gain tyre pressure monitoring.
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
How much does the Toyota LandCruiser Prado cost to run?
Visits to the Toyota dealership tend to cost less than rival brands, but with its off-roaders it asks you to go there more often.
Warranty and Servicing
Toyota LandCruiser Prado 250 Series
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres – vehicle 7 years, unlimited kilometres – extended engine, driveline
Roadside assistance
$99 per year
Service intervals
6 months or 10,000km
Capped-price servicing
3 years
Total capped-price service cost
$2340
Toyota has stuck with shorter six-month, 10,000km service intervals with the Prado 250 Series, unlike rivals which have 12-month, 15,000km intervals.
To see how the Toyota LandCruiser Prado stacks up against its rivals, check out our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Toyota LandCruiser Prado
The new Prado mightn’t have moved the needle much over the last one on paper, but it feels better to drive and looks more modern and handsome inside and out, with much-improved technology.
Still, it has received a sharp price hike for a vehicle with no extra power and torque and a heavier kerb weight. It has also gone backwards in terms of interior flexibility, which grates.
In a vacuum, the Prado probably looks like good value given the capability and equipment on offer. Unfortunately for Toyota, the large SUV segment isn’t a vacuum, and against key rivals the Prado looks overpriced.
You can get a top-spec Everest with a turbo-diesel V6 for a few thousand less than this. Sure, if you buy the Prado you’re getting that Toyota reputation, a nicer interior, adaptive dampers and a couple of other novel features, but you’re also getting a vehicle with less power and torque, a less practical interior, and shorter servicing intervals.
We’ve waited a long time for a new Prado and in that time its rivals have improved dramatically, so much so that we doubt Toyota has done enough to make its ‘Son of Landcruiser’ reign supreme in what’s a very competitive segment.
It’s a Toyota, though, so we fully expect it to sell like hotcakes regardless.
Interested in buying a Toyota LandCruiser Prado? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
The lawsuit is reminiscent of a famous 1994 lawsuit against McDonald’s in which a woman spilled hot coffee on her lap and suffered third-degree burns
The lawsuit accused Starbucks of breaching its duty of care by failing to secure the lid. (AFP photo)
A jury in California on Friday ordered Starbucks to pay $50 million in damages to a delivery driver who was severely burned by an improperly secured lid on hot beverages.
Michael Garcia was picking up drinks at a drive-through in Los Angeles when he “suffered severe burns, disfigurement, and debilitating nerve damage to his genitals when hot drinks ultimately spilled” onto his lap, according to the lawsuit filed in California Superior Court in 2020. The lawsuit accused Starbucks of breaching its duty of care by failing to secure the lid.
Michael Parker, Garcia’s lawyer, said his client was picking up three beverages and one of the hot drinks wasn’t fully pushed into the container. When the barista handed Garcia the order, a drink fell out of the container and onto Garcia, Parker said.
Garcia’s damages included physical pain, mental anguish, loss of enjoyment of life, humiliation, inconvenience, grief, disfigurement, physical impairment, anxiety and emotional distress, according to a recording of the verdict from Courtroom View Network.
Starbucks said it plans to appeal the verdict.
“We sympathize with Mr. Garcia, but we disagree with the jury’s decision that we were at fault for this incident and believe the damages awarded to be excessive,” a company spokesperson said in a statement. “We have always been committed to the highest safety standards in our stores, including the handling of hot drinks.”
The lawsuit is reminiscent of a famous 1994 lawsuit against McDonald’s in which a woman spilled hot coffee on her lap and suffered third-degree burns. The plaintiff in that case, Stella Liebeck, was originally awarded nearly $3 million.
News business Serving Burned Hot Coffee To Delivery Driver Costs Starbucks $50 Million: Here’s What Happened
Solana is becoming more popular nowadays with the growing optimism around the token. The main reason for the rising probability of a Solana ETF is ahead of all other filed ETF applications along with XRP. On the other hand, the chain has been outperforming the other platforms in terms of DEX activity and volume, hinting towards the growing popularity of the chain compared to others. Despite the positive outcomes and the current rebound in the SOL price, here’s why the token is feared to trigger a pullback to $125.
Drop in the Solana Market Data
The future markets have a massive impact on the upcoming price action as the traders bet on the future price movements. Currently, the Open Interest (OI), which is the total number of open contracts that are yet to be closed, has dropped significantly. With this, the volume is also dropped consistently.
This suggests that the spot traders have also become unsure of the upcoming price action as the OI remains lower. With this, the volatility remains lower, keeping the price consolidated within a narrow range. On the other hand, the traders seem to have become bearish on Solana as the short trades pile up to a large extent.
The above chart shows that the short trade has been increased heavily compared to that of the long trades. This hints that future traders believe the SOL price may plunge in the coming days, with the major price slabs at $130 and later at $128. After rising above $135, the bearish influence over the token has increased. This suggests the price may continue to remain within a consolidated range between $130 and $136 for a while.
Is Solana (SOL) Price Heading Back to $125?
The weekly chart of Solana appears to be extremely bearish, as the price has dropped below the rising parallel channel and failed to reclaim levels. The buying pressure has risen consistently while the bulls have intervened a couple of times. As a result, the price has remained within the range, but the technicals suggest the price may face a bearish action soon.
The weekly chart of Solana’s price suggests the token has stuck within a bearish range as the price is rising, but the weekly RSI is plunging. This hints towards a probable pullback that could be fast approaching. While the price has dropped below the support of the channel, if the token fails to reclaim the levels before the weekend, then the Solana price is feared to drop back to $125.
The students of Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras) Centre for Innovation (CFI) showcased around 60 tech innovations built by nearly 1,000 of them across 26 teams during CFI Open House 2025 held in the campus on Saturday.
CFI, a student-run innovation lab, houses 14 clubs spanning diverse technological domains. Conducted annually, CFI Open House features products completely designed and built by students. This event offers a platform for the projects to gain visibility and attract further support from the industry and IIT alumni.
Also read: IIT Madras startup TuTr Hyperloop enters into international partnerships to drive high-speed mobility commercialisation in India
As per a statement by the institute, this year’s CFI Open House witnessed standout exhibits such as ‘S.A.M.V.I.D,’ an AI-powered humanoid designed to assist visitors, ‘Supersyringe,’ a volume-gated syringe that ensures precise anaesthesia dosage and ‘Drone Swarm,’ a coordinated fleet of drones designed for payload lifting and delivery.
“A vast majority of our undergraduates and a growing number of graduate students participate in CFI and allied activities. I am glad to note that this year has seen stellar performances by CFI teams in reputed National and International competitions while also showcasing some exceptional innovations and enriching our IP base,” V. Kamakoti, Director, IIT Madras, said.
A number of CFI students are also taking entrepreneurship seriously with teams reaching out to the pre-incubator Nirmaan, he added.
Also read: IIT Madras launches admissions to UG programs for students who excel in international olympiads
“Interestingly, this year we filed 15 patents based on the innovations and we are probably looking for three potential startups. I strongly believe that this year, the CFI team is moving in the right path of protecting more intellectual property and converting ideas to a product,” Prof. Sathyanarayana N Gummadi, Dean (Students), IIT Madras, said.
“This year saw a number of teams from CFI embarking on an entrepreneurial journey, with Matterize (AI for 3D printing), Automagri (farm automation) among the first such to incubate their startups immediately upon graduation, while Nirmaan pre-incubated teams like Pravahan (shipping), CGG (drone logistics) and waterfly (mass transportation) are pushing the limits of innovation,” Prof. Prabhu Rajagopal, Advisor (Innovation and Entrepreneurship), CFI-IIT Madras, said.
Evansville has plenty of top internet providers, from fast multi-gig plans to cheaper cable options. AT&T Fiber is the best internet service provider overall in Evansville, Indiana, thanks to its widespread availability, straightforward plans and fast, symmetrical speeds. Prices start at $55 and go up to $245 for the 5-gig plan. Because AT&T Fiber isn’t available everywhere in Evansville, keep in mind that Spectrum and Astound are also solid picks, depending on what’s available at your address. T-Mobile is also available in some areas, offering three plans that range from $50 to $70 a month.
If you’re hunting for the lowest prices or fastest speeds, we’ve also found those top options. The cheapest internet in Evansville is Astound Broadband’s 300Mbps plan for $20 a month, although extra fees are involved. AT&T Fiber’s 5,000Mbps plan is the fastest available internet speed, though some AT&T Fiber neighborhoods max out at 1,000Mbps. If the 5-gig plan is more than you need, consider Astound’s 1,500Mbps plan for $55 a month.
Evansville internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
Astound Broadband Read full review
Cable
$20-$55
300-1,500Mbps
Free modem; $15 router (optional)
None
None
7
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Mainstream Fiber Networks
Fiber
$35-$89
150-1,000Mbps
None
None
3-year
N/A
Spectrum Read full review
Cable/fiber
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for eligible Verizon Wireless customers)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Evansville
AT&T Internet: AT&T Fiber’s network doesn’t reach everywhere in Evansville, so you might come across AT&T Internet instead. This legacy DSL service is likely to be very slow, even as slow as just 5Mbps for some addresses. It costs $60 per month, and most plans have a 1.5TB data cap. Look to other home internet options before signing up for DSL.
Mainstream Fiber Networks: Regional ISP Mainstream Fiber Networks focuses on rural and underserved areas. You’ll find it in some rural spots in Evansville. Plans start at $35 per month for 150Mbps and go up to $89 per month for a gig. A router is included. You may come across service coverage and infrastructure charges that add an extra $8 to your bill. The ISP has a standard three-year contract.
River City Wireless: A local fixed wireless ISP located next door in Newburgh, River City Wireless aims to reach rural homes in the area. Plans start at $60 per month for 10Mbps and top out at $100 per month for 100Mbps, with no data caps.
Satellite internet: Evansville has several fixed wireless options that may reach your rural home. Also, look for Spectrum Fiber or Mainstream Fiber Networks. If none of those ISPs work out, check out Starlink, Viasat or Hughesnet for satellite internet. It’s not cheap, and speeds may be variable, but satellite can get you online when other options fail.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Compare with T-Mobile Home Internet. Verizon’s service also has two plans. Expect speeds up to 250Mbps with the 5G Home plan for $50 per month or $70 per month depending on the extras you choose. Bundle with a phone plan to drop your monthly home internet price as low as $35. There are no data caps, contracts or equipment fees.
Watch Communications: Fixed wireless ISP Watch Communications specializes in servicing rural homes that have few other options. Prices start at $60 per month for 10Mbps download speeds. Top speeds will vary with location, but some addresses in rural Evansville may be able to get 100Mbps for $120 per month. Look into wired options like cable or fiber first.
Larrybraunphotography.com/Getty Images
Cheap internet options in Evansville
Astound leads the way when it comes to cheap internet in Evansville. Its 300Mbps plan has an introductory price of just $20 per month, though you also need to consider the $16 in additional monthly fees and the cost of either renting ($15 per month) or buying a router. Next is Spectrum’s 100Mbps plan that costs $30 a month. If you’re in a low-income household, check for eligibility for the federal Lifeline program and Spectrum’s Internet Assist option.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Evansville?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Astound Read full review
$20
300Mbps
Free modem; $15 router (optional)
Mainstream Fiber Networks
$35
150Mbps
None
Spectrum Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
318Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
85Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How to find internet deals and promotions in Evansville
The best internet deals and top promotions in Evansville depend on what discounts are available during a given time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Evansville internet providers, such as Spectrum and Astound Broadband, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, including AT&T Fiber and T-Mobile Home Internet, tend to run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Evansville broadband?
With two cable providers and AT&T Fiber covering most of the town, Evansville has some solid options for fast internet. A recent Ookla speed test report showed the city had a 300Mbps median fixed internet download speed, with AT&T Fiber delivering the fastest speeds. AT&T Fiber offers the fastest plan in town with its 5,000Mbps option, though some neighborhoods top out at 1,000Mbps. Astound offers a 1,200Mbps top speed, while Spectrum goes up to 1,000Mbps. Ookla reported the Indiana average to be around 239Mbps, so Evansville has a speed advantage compared to the state overall. (Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.) If fast home internet is important to you, look for fiber so you can enjoy equally fast uploads.
Fastest internet plans in Evansville
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Astound 1500 Read full review
$55
1,500Mbps
50Mbps
None
Cable
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Astound 1000 Read full review
$45
1,000Mbps
50Mbps
None
Cable
Mainstream Fiber Networks Unleashed
$89
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email and streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Evansville
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. What’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary pricing, availability and speed database that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Evansville?
Evansville is the rare city where there’s a considerable amount of ISP competition, especially when it comes to having two rival cable providers. Spectrum and Astound have the town covered in cable, but AT&T Fiber offers faster top speeds and uploads, making it a smart choice for home internet if available at your address. Bargain hunters can look to Astound and its low introductory rates. Both Spectrum and Astound will raise your rates eventually, but you can try negotiating a better price when that happens. With ISP options and no contracts from the big providers, you can try out different services to find the best price and performance for your home.
Internet providers in Evansville FAQs
What is the cheapest internet provider in Evansville?
Astound Broadband’s $20-per-month 300Mbps cable internet plan is the cheapest around, even when you add the additional $16 monthly fee. The only way to beat that is by bundling certain Verizon mobile or T-Mobile and home internet plans to get your broadband down to $35 or $30 monthly.
Which internet provider in Evansville offers the fastest plan?
AT&T Fiber blows away the competition with its 5,000Mbps fiber plan for $245 per month. Some parts of town can only get AT&T Fiber’s 1,000Mbps plan, not the ISP’s multi-gig options.
Is fiber internet available in Evansville?
AT&T Fiber is the main fiber provider for Evansville homes, although coverage is spotty to nonexistent in and around the downtown area.
What internet provider has the best coverage in Evansville?
Astound Broadband squeaks into the top spot for coverage. FCC data shows it reaches just over 92% of Evansville homes, while Spectrum reaches just over 90%.
As spring arrives and the weather warms, exposure to sunlight could have an immense impact on overall health.
Dr. Roger Seheult, a critical care physician, pulmonologist and associate clinical professor at the University of California and Loma Linda University schools of medicine, shared the benefits of sunlight exposure in an interview with Fox News Digital.
Seheult, who recently appeared on Dr. Andrew Huberman’s podcast Huberman Lab to discuss enhancing the immune system, noted that the light from the sun boosts our ability to regulate sleep, circadian rhythm and mood.
BOOST YOUR IMMUNE SYSTEM WITH THESE 8 SIMPLE STEPS
“So many people have seasonal affective disorder, and that’s a manifestation of the lack of sunlight during winter,” he said.
Children with tuberculosis were put into an outdoor solarium for periods of rest in 1946. This sanitarium accommodated 200 patients ranging from infants to 20-year-olds.(Alamy)
Sunlight’s healing properties
As far back as the 1920s, medical professionals leveraged light exposure to promote healing.
Hospitals made use of sundecks, where patients could be transported for periods of time to take in the sunlight and fresh air, according to Seheult.
JUST ONE NIGHT OF POOR SLEEP COULD HAVE THESE SURPRISING HEALTH EFFECTS
But then with the development of pencillin and other advancements in modern medicine, doctors relied less on holistic methods, he said.
The sun’s ultraviolet B (UV-B) light produces vitamin D in the body by causing a chemical reaction in the skin, Seheult noted.
Sunlight can boost the body’s ability to regulate sleep, circadian rhythm and mood.(iStock)
Vitamin D is a known anti-inflammatory and antioxidant that supports immune health, muscle and brain function, according to Mayo Clinic.
The sun also produces infrared light, which has been shown to relieve pain and inflammation.
Just 15 to 20 minutes of sunlight exposure can help boost the immune system and potentially even ward off chronic disease, according to Seheult.
Balancing risks and benefits
Warnings of sunlight leading to skin cancer may have caused decreased exposure, the doctor suggested.
“Certainly, if we go outside in the sun for too long for a period of time without protection, we can get those types of skin damage,” he said.
“There are some benefits to getting out into the sun, if it’s done in moderation and if it’s done smartly.”
But the doctor revealed that some recent studies have found that the more time spent outside in sunlight, the less likely people are to die of all causes, including cancer.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Dr. Richard Weller, a professor of dermatology at the University of Edinburgh, published a piece in the Journal of Investigative Dermatology in August 2024, discussing this data and the need to rethink the influence of the sun.
“UVR is a skin carcinogen, yet no studies link sun exposure to increased all-cause mortality,” Weller wrote in the study abstract.
Walking in green spaces can offer even more light exposure, as trees, leaves and plants are “highly reflective of infrared light.”(iStock)
“Growing evidence shows that sunlight has health benefits through vitamin D-independent pathways, such as photomobilization of nitric oxide from cutaneous stores with reduction in cardiovascular morbidity. Sunlight has important systemic health benefits as well as risks.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Seheult agreed, encouraging people to “rethink the idea that the sun is a deadly laser and that actually there are some benefits to getting out into the sun, if it’s done in moderation and if it’s done smartly.”
WHY THE END OF DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME CAN NEGATIVELY AFFECT YOUR HEALTH
People who are fair-skinned or sensitive to sunlight can wear clothing, hats and other protective gear while still getting the benefits.
“Infrared light, because it is a long-wavelength, low-energy light, is able to penetrate not only through your skin and deep down into your body, but it’s also able to penetrate very easily through clothes,” Seheult pointed out.
Vitamin D from sunlight acts as an anti-inflammatory and antioxidant, helping to support immune health, muscle and brain function.(iStock)
“If they’re still getting outside, they’re going to get quite a bit of infrared light, even in that setting, and not be susceptible to getting [burned]. So, you don’t need to have bare skin for sunlight exposure.”
Sunlight is also still present on cloudy and rainy days and in urban areas, Seheult noted.
WHY HIGHER UV INDEX NUMBERS ARE MORE DANGEROUS DURING SUN EXPOSURE
“The amount of light inside a building [is] usually no more than 100 lux,” he said. “When you go outside on a bright, sunny day, that’s 100,000 lux. That’s 1,000 times brighter.”
Although that exposure will be reduced on cloudy days or in the winter, it won’t be “nearly as low” as indoor lighting, Sehuelt added.
“Kids are spending so much more time inside,” Seheult said. “Any sort of movement that we make toward going outside will be very beneficial.”(iStock)
To reap the benefits of infrared light without the risk, Seheult recommends going outside and covering up for about 30 minutes, even in the morning or evening while the sun is setting.
“These are times when there is an abundance of infrared light, far more than you would get inside your home,” he said.
“All it takes is about 15 to 20 minutes of infrared light exposure … and we’re seeing effects that last for days.”
For those who work in an office and spend their daylight hours inside, Seheult suggested taking short breaks and stepping outside into the light or a green space.
“All it takes is about 15 to 20 minutes of infrared light exposure at the level of the mitochondria, and we’re seeing effects that last for days,” he said.
Blend of holistic and modern methods
Seheult shared his hope for a balance between modern medicine — including advancements like medical-grade oxygen and antibiotics — and holistic health trends.
“There are definitely modern inventions and things that are very beneficial to the human body,” he said. “What I would like to do is incorporate both together.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“There is a disadvantage to wholly depending on things that need and require supply chains, especially in pandemics,” he said.
“The sunlight and fresh air … are not things that depend on supply chains. We have sunlight accessible most times of the year.”
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
Eggs are a breakfast staple in many households. You can have them as soft-boiled, hard-boiled, poached, fried, or transformed into a fluffy omelette. These are versatile and packed with protein. Among the many ways to prepare them, scrambled eggs stand out as a classic favourite for many. Quick to make and super versatile, scrambled eggs with toast make for an outstanding breakfast, even if you are short on time. But to get that perfect texture, many people add a dash of milk or water to their scrambled eggs. But is there a difference that we notice later? Which one gets the perfect texture for your breakfast staple? Let’s find out which ingredient gets you your desired texture of scrambled eggs.
Also Read:Breakfast Special: How To Make Fluffy Scrambled Eggs
Photo: Pexels
What Happens When You Add Water?
Adding water to scrambled eggs might seem unusual, but it has a unique effect on the texture. As the eggs cook, the water turns into steam, which results in a lighter, fluffier consistency. The steam puffs up the eggs slightly, making them soft without weighing them down. This method works great if you like your scrambled eggs on the delicate, airy side. However, there’s only a small amount of water that is required. If you add too much water, it’ll make your scrambled eggs loose and watery. If you decide to try this method, a teaspoon of water per egg is usually the right amount to keep the texture just right.
Photo: Pexels
What About Milk?
Milk is commonly used to add richness to egg-based dishes. Adding milk to your scrambled eggs changes the texture but in a different way. Because milk contains fat, it makes scrambled eggs taste creamier and slightly richer. This is because the proteins in milk also interact with the eggs, which gives a softer texture. However, if you add too much milk to eggs, they might become dense or rubbery. Plus, if you notice, milk dilutes the natural flavour of the egg, which might ruin the purpose if you want a stronger egg taste. If you are someone who likes creamy scrambled eggs, just add a tablespoon of milk per two eggs and you’re good to go.
Also Read:Whole Milk Vs Skimmed Milk: Which One Is Better For You
So, the type of scrambled egg you want depends on what ingredient you add. Now that you know, go on and make the best scrambled eggs ever!
About Nikita NikhilMeet Nikita, a passionate soul with an insatiable love for two things in life: Bollywood and food! When she’s not indulging in binge-watching sessions, Nikita can be found behind the lens capturing moments or expressing her creativity through painting.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-14/China-s-top-legislator-vows-firm-action-against-separatist-activities-1BJygpvsck8/img/a7f09b1768874341a0e750b2a67ffe25/a7f09b1768874341a0e750b2a67ffe25.png' alt='Zhao Leji (3rd L), a member of the Standing Committee of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China Central Committee and chairman of the National People's Congress Standing Committee, addresses a symposium marking the 20th anniversary of the enforcement of the Anti-Secession Law in Beijing, China, March 14, 2025. /Xinhua'
China’s top legislator Zhao Leji on Friday emphasized resolutely combating “Taiwan independence” separatist activities and curbing interference from external forces.
Zhao, chairman of the National People’s Congress (NPC) Standing Committee, made the remarks at a symposium in Beijing marking the 20th anniversary of the enforcement of the Anti-Secession Law.
Zhao, also a member of the Standing Committee of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee, stressed the importance of unswervingly advancing the cause of national reunification.
Over the past 20 years, especially since the 18th CPC National Congress, the country has further enriched the legal framework for punishing “Taiwan independence” separatist activities, resolutely fought against separatism and countered interference, while improving systems and policies that contribute to the well-being of Taiwan compatriots, he noted.
These efforts have effectively upheld the one-China principle and made continuous progress in opposing “Taiwan independence” and promoting reunification, Zhao said.
“Resolving the Taiwan question and realizing China’s complete reunification is a shared aspiration of all the sons and daughters of the Chinese nation and a natural requirement for realizing the rejuvenation of the Chinese nation,” Zhao added.
Zhao emphasized the need to strengthen confidence and determination in advancing national reunification.
This includes resolutely safeguarding national sovereignty and territorial integrity to protect the shared homeland of the Chinese nation, facilitating cross-Straits exchanges and cooperation to jointly foster lasting prosperity of the Chinese nation, and promoting Chinese culture to forge a strong sense of community for the Chinese nation, he stated.
Speakers at Friday’s symposium included the director of the Taiwan Work Office of the CPC Central Committee and the Taiwan Affairs Office of the State Council, the head of the NPC Constitution and Law Committee, the commander of the Eastern Theater Command of the People’s Liberation Army, and a representative of Taiwan compatriots.
The agency is advising people to avoid misusing or inhaling the products that are marketed as whipped cream chargers but have been used as recreational drugs.
There has been a steady increase in the registration of documents and the revenue generated from it. This has been due to an increase in building permits issued over the years. After a major reform, the introduction of self-certification scheme in July 2024, there has been a sharp increase in issuing building permission, with permissions issued already reaching 59,910 in the current year, surpassing total permits issued in the previous fiscal, according to the State’s Economic Survey for 2024-25 released on Thursday.
The number of documents registered in Tamil Nadu has shown consistent growth over the years – from 25.88 lakh in 2019-20 to 33.23 lakh in 2023-24, and 33.24 lakh estimated for 2024-25. During the same period, the revenue generated from this service has increased from ₹11,028 crore to ₹18,825 crore, and is projected to be ₹22,814 crore for the current financial year, the survey said.
Real estate is one of the major components in the services sector in the State. The sector witnessed a real annual growth rate of 7.97 per cent from 2020-21 to 2023-24. During the same period, its sub-sector – real estate – grew at 9.41 per cent; trade, repair, hotels and restaurants at 7.98 per cent; transport and storage at 7.67 per cent; public administration at 5.74 per cent and financial services at 4.69 per cent, the survey said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
SET iz Zare postao je hit na TikToku i oduševio djevojke. Riječ je o kompletu koji se sastoji od dva komada – bodija i suknje, koje možete nositi odvojeno ili zajedno. Iako su mnogi već kupili ovaj set, bodi se rasprodao, dok je suknja još uvijek dostupna.
Kombinacija bodija s V-izrezom i podesivim naramenicama na leđima te kratke suknje visokog struka koja ima nabore sprijeda čini ovaj set savršenim za proljeće i ljeto, a zbog svoje svestranosti izuzetno je poželjan.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Reakcije na društvenim mrežama
Komentari na društvenim mrežama govore sve. “A baš vam hvala ljudi, top se već rasprodao”, “Želim!”, “Ovakve stvari imaju samo kad ja ne odem u Zaru”, “Top se rasprodao, niste fer”, samo su neki od komentara.
Bodi je već rasprodan, no suknja je još uvijek dostupna, pa ako želite barem jedan komad iz ovog seta, imate šanse da ga uhvatite.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
DENVER — Lakers coach JJ Redick often makes reference to a lyric from an old Jay-Z song: “It was all good just a week ago.”
Entering Friday’s game against the Denver Nuggets, things were not good for the Lakers. They entered on a three-game losing streak. They were down three starters in LeBron James, Rui Hachimura and Jaxson Hayes. A fourth, Luka Doncic, was sitting out on the second night of a back-to-back. Two more key rotation players, Dorian Finney-Smith and Gabe Vincent, also were unavailable as they managed long-term injuries.
A week ago, the Lakers were mostly healthy, flying to Boston on an eight-game winning streak. A week ago, they were climbing up the standings, not sliding.
But even if the personnel didn’t mirror the Lakers from a week ago, at least the energy did Friday, the team pushing the Denver Nuggets over four quarters before making one too many mistakes in a 131-126 loss.
Jamal Murray and Nikola Jokic ran a pick-and-roll, opening Murray up for a clean look at a three-pointer with 5.6 seconds left. Like he has so many times against the Lakers, the Nuggets point guard hit the big shot.
Austin Reaves, who capped his rookie season with a 31-point triple-double in Denver, nearly led the Lakers (40-25) to the upset, scoring 37 along with 13 assists and eight rebounds. Dalton Knecht, starting near his hometown, had his most points since mid-November with 32 and Shake Milton scored 16 off the bench.
But all five starters finished in double figures for Denver (43-24), the Lakers running out of time as much as they ran out of steam.
The Lakers had a chance to force overtime, but they couldn’t get the inbound pass to Reaves, with Russell Westbrook getting the steal and dunking in the final seconds.
Before the game, Redick again sounded optimistic about the Lakers’ getting more help over the next week, when the team plays five games in Los Angeles, including a pair of back-to-backs Sunday and Monday and Wednesday and Thursday to wrap a stretch where they’ll play six times in eight days.
They’re the first team since 2022 to have six games in eight days, the Lakers playing a makeup game with the San Antonio Spurs that was postponed during the wildfires in January.
Kieran Culkin revealed his four favourite films ever, including a film starring his older brother Macaulay – but it’s not Home Alone.
Culkin, 42, who won the Best Supporting Actor award at The Oscars earlier this month, was asked about his top pics during a red carpet interview with Letterboxed back in November.
The Succession star’s first choice was 1987 American fantasy adventure comedy film The Princess Bride, directed by Rob Reiner.
Adapted by William Goldman, who wrote the novel, it follows the adventures of a farmhand named Westley who rescues Princess Buttercup from the evil antagonist Humperdinck, the prince of Florin.
Howl’s Moving Castle, the sumptuous 2004 animated adventure directed celebrated auteur Hayao Miyazaki also made the list.
The film follows the protagonist Sophie as she seeks to break a spell which has turned her into an old lady, with the help of the wizard Howl and his friends Calcifer and Markl.
Next up on the actor’s list was “the greatest kids movie of all time, The Goonies”, he told the outlet.
The much-loved 1985 classic, which celebrated its 40th anniversary in January, follows a group of friends set off in search of pirate treasure to save their town.
A long-awaited sequel is officially in the works, with Steven Spielberg, Kristie Macosko Krieger and Holly Bario producing, alongside director Chris Columbus, who wrote the script of the original.
Culkin said his final choice was a “toughie”, adding: “If you ask me on another day I might say something else, but I’m going to say, Uncle Buck.”
The heartwarming 1989 film, which starred the late great John Candy, followed the loveable commitment-phobe Buck Russell who has to look after his brother’s children during a family emergency.
Kieran’s older brother Maccaulay, best known for his performances in the Home Alone films stars as his nephew Miles, as Buck is forced to finally grow up and take responsibility.
Culkin won his first Academy Award for his role in A Real Pain a Jesse Eisenberg-directed drama which follows two cousins from the US who embark on a tour of the notorious Nazi deathcamp Auschwitz.
He also notably starred in the hit HBO series Succession as Roman Roy the arrogant, naive son of a media mogul, as he competes with his siblings to inherit his empire.
“EVs don’t have the strength to tow our big caravan,” loudly explained the gentleman to his female companion at the next cafe table.
He’s correct that in Australia today there are no pure electric vehicles (EVs) or plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHEVs) suitable to tow a 3500kg caravan.
This will change soon. A brief look at the best PHEV and pure-electric towing options available now, and on the way, is followed by a brief explanation of the limitations of present battery technology.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
BYD Shark 6
Examining the issue of tow-friendly charging infrastructure is also important and will reveal how close alternative powertrain technologies really are to becoming viable towing options for Australian drivers.
We should then be able to guess which drivetrain tech represents the best bet for serious towing enthusiasts.
PHEV
The newly released BYD Shark 6 PHEV has attracted plenty of attention for its value, utility, performance and decent EV-only range. However, it’s only rated to tow 2500kg, not the local industry benchmark of 3500kg.
Even within its rated limits the Shark 6 has shown that with its particular PHEV implementation there are some notable differences in towing capabilities compared with a standard diesel or petrol vehicle.
The soon to be released GWM Cannon Alpha is rated to tow 3500kg. Upon release it will also be examined closely to see whether it has similar issues.
Meanwhile, the upcoming Ford Ranger PHEV, with its proven 3500kg-capable ICE powertrain, should be free of SOC (State of Charge) problems. However, its on-board battery and EV-only range is very small, and owners may save fewer dollars at the pump. Overall, it’s early days for these vehicles.
Towing aside, they’re off to a promising start, but the jury needs time to deliver a verdict on whether this bunch of PHEV utes will become genuine towing substitutes for traditional rivals.
EV
In our market, when it comes to towing ‘serious’ loads pure EVs do have a towing problem: there aren’t any!
LDV eTerron 9
Products from Rivian and Tesla may arrive here in the future, if they conform to Australian Design Rules, while the 4500kg-capable F-150 Lightning is yet to be confirmed for release by Ford Australia, but is available in locally converted right-hand drive form from AUSEV and starts from $170k.
Due later in 2025 is the LDV eTerron 9. This promises 3500kg towing capability and up to 325kW of power. However, the 102kWh battery means that the already optimistic WLTP range figure of 430km will never be threatened if towing close to its max rating or less again if the load also has poor aerodynamics.
The Geely-built Riddara RD6 will also likely come here later in the year, but with a smaller battery than the LDV and the same 2500kg tow limit as the Shark 6.
So, at time of publishing, there still aren’t any EVs capable of towing a 3000kg-plus caravan, and when the LDV becomes available here its limited range will still make it a poor choice for heavy towing far beyond urban areas.
If you really want a first-class EV for serious towing, you must look to the USA.
The present ‘best in class’ pure EV is the Chevrolet Silverado EV. One of these 2024 models, with a 200kWh battery, gets a formal EPA-rated range of 450 miles (720km). With prices starting from US$70k for the extended range versions that come with close to 800hp (588kW) and tow over 5500kg, these are capable but expensive vehicles.
Although GM Specialty Vehicles does bring in the Silverado for right-hand drive conversion, the electric models are not presently available in Australia.
How far can they go? A real-world comparison test with a 3000kg brick-shaped enclosed car trailer has indicated the EV’s towing range at approximately half the manufacturer’s EPA figure. You’ll be shocked how far a Chevy Silverado EV can tow versus a petrol-powered Ford F-150!
The EV and a 3.5-litre V6 petrol F-150 running on the same roads at the same time towed identical trailers for 232 miles (373km). Although the vehicles did reach 75mph (121km/h) while towing on the highway, some of the test was done at lower speeds on secondary roads.
Chevrolet Silverado EV
This means that these were not exclusively fast ‘highway‘ miles. The roads were also flat and the weather mild. These conditions therefore represent close to a best-case scenario as extreme weather and big hills increase energy consumption. The Silverado only indicated 15 miles of remaining range at the end of the test.
It averaged the equivalent of 38mpg versus its rated 63mpg combined urban/highway figure. Meanwhile, the petrol F-150 achieved almost exactly half (9.8mpg) of its normal EPA combined efficiency of 20mpg, but due to the size of the 36-gallon (136L) fuel tank, still had another 108 miles (173km) until empty.
‘Tank’ size
The previous sentence is crucial. Although EV batteries are large, heavy and pack a lethal voltage, their present-day energy density is only a fraction of that of the diesel fuel that powers most heavy utes and 4WDs.
Ford F-150 Lightning
An EV with a 100kWh battery that may weigh over 500kg only contains the same energy as 10 litres of diesel. A Landcruiser or F-150 with 140 litres of fuel on board therefore packs a massive 1400kWh of stored energy.
So even a huge EV, like the 4000kg Silverado above, with its massive 200kWh battery, is still only carrying the equivalent of 20 litres of fuel.
With that tiny 20 litre ‘tank’, the incredible efficiency of electric motors means it can manage 700km before needing to charge. However, if you tow something like a heavy caravan with ‘brick-like’ aerodynamics, especially at highway speeds, the huge amount of energy needed to push all that air out of the way can more than halve the range, as shown above.
Charging infrastructure
The results of the Chevy EV are not bad at all, but there’s another limiting factor beyond range to consider: refuelling. Although the above test revealed the F-150 chewed through almost four times as much energy as the EV to tow the same distance, refuelling the Ford is quick and easy.
Towing-friendly charge options. Source: Plugshare
It’s easy even with a big trailer attached, as almost every service station allows the driver to drive in, fill up without unhitching, and drive off. Such infrastructure is uncommon in the EV charging world. Australia is a typical case.
A quick look at the ‘trailer friendly’ charging option on PlugShare shows the limited number of locations where EVs don’t need to unhitch while charging.
PlugShare is an essential app for EV owners: showing where chargers are located. PlugShare reveals just 20 such locations in the state of Queensland and 40 in NSW – with large parts of the state lacking any tow-friendly charging stalls at all.
In fact, in the whole of Australia there are only 142 charging stations (includes 12 in Tasmania) where you can charge your EV without having to disconnect your trailer. This compares with over 1000 high-power public charging locations Australia-wide as of mid-2024.
This all means that towing in Australia, especially in regional areas, is far easier with a combustion engine. It’s a job best suited to vehicles such as the Toyota LandCruiser, select variants of the Ford Ranger and other popular vehicles in that class.
It’s not all bad news for electrified vehicles, as the charging infrastructure continues to grow at a healthy pace so future EV motorists will be better supported.
Longer term, battery technology also continues to advance, with decreases in costs and increases in energy density and charging speeds. In the heavy SUV and 4WD vehicle segments, however, these are unlikely to be price competitive with combustion vehicles for a while.
This is why Ford CEO Jim Farley is holding off on production of new full-size electric SUVs and trucks. Are there any medium-term solutions that may allow owners to enjoy some of the running cost, performance and emissions benefits of electric motoring but still be able to haul a big boat or heavy caravan across regional Australia?
A solution?
There may be a solution not too far away. It’s a full-size PHEV truck that has some similarities with the Shark 6 but upscaled.
The Ram 1500 Ramcharger has two electric motors, developing a total of 476kW and powered by a large 92kWh battery. It can tow over 6000kg.
Ram 1500 Ramcharger
The battery can be DC and AC charged externally but can also be charged by its 3.6-litre petrol V6 combustion engine acting as a generator. The Ramcharger is due later this year in the North American market.
The combustion engine never drives the wheels: it just generates power for the battery. In pure EV mode, Ram rates the 3400kg truck at just under 150 miles (241km) of range. Its EV capacity would actually be greater, but a large portion of the battery is hidden from use to maintain its rated specs and towing performance in tough conditions.
Key to its ability to tow heavy loads on long steep gradients is how Ram integrates the powerful combustion engine to work with the high-voltage components. The result is a vehicle that should offer all the EV advantages of instant torque available from 0rpm, and fast 4.7-second 0-100km/h times, but is still rated for 690 miles (1110km) of EPA range.
Even halving that range while towing heavy loads would bring you parity with other heavy vehicles like the petrol-powered F-150. When you want to tow your heavy boat or caravan, with this vehicle you should have confidence travelling to remote places knowing that you can fill up at regular service stations.
With that 6000kg tow rating, this is one electrified vehicle no-one is going to claim ‘lacks towing strength’. Let’s hope this Ram is reasonably priced, and jumps the pond, because many Australians would love a vehicle with these capabilities.
Summing up
Towing has clearly been a problem for electric vehicles so far. Specifically, battery energy density has limited the range of pure-electric vehicles and PHEVs.
Electric motors have the strength to tow, with power and torque characteristics that compare favourably to combustion engines, but towing heavy loads with poor aerodynamics drains power reserves fast.
Battery costs have been steadily decreasing, but the cost of the huge batteries needed by pure EVs for serious long-distance towing means that today the best value is still with diesel and petrol vehicles. This is especially the case if towing away from urban areas, as we have seen how limited towing-friendly EV charging infrastructure is at present.
The promising news is that there are multiple electrified vehicle options coming. These cleaner options will save motorists money on fuel, provide features and performance not usually seen from this class of vehicle, and deliver some decent competition for your dollars.
Indian dealers this week offered a discount of up to $39 an ounce over official domestic prices, including 6% import and 3% sales levies, up from a discount of $10 to $21 last week.
Gold price in India has hit a record high of 87,886 rupees per 10 grams.
Gold discounts in India widened this week to their highest point in nearly eight months, as a surge in prices to a record high dampened demand, while customers in other key hubs also remained on the sidelines.
“Jewellers all over are seeing fewer customers. Demand’s taken a big hit because of rising prices,” said a Chennai-based bullion dealer. Domestic gold prices hit a record high of 87,886 rupees per 10 grams on Thursday.
Indian dealers this week offered a discount of up to $39 an ounce over official domestic prices, including 6% import and 3% sales levies, up from a discount of $10 to $21 last week.
“Jewellers are not keen on building high-cost inventory at the end of the financial year, as they are busy closing accounts,” said a Mumbai-based dealer with a bullion-importing bank. India’s financial year runs from April until March 31.
India’s gold imports are set to tumble 85% in February from year-ago levels, reaching their lowest levels in 20 years, as demand is dampened by record-high bullion prices.
In China, the world’s largest consumer, gold traded at a discount of $1 to an $18 premium over spot prices. Meanwhile, dealers in Hong Kong charged premiums ranging from par to $2 per ounce.
“China’s market is wavering between a discount and a premium,” Standard Chartered analyst Suki Cooper said in a note.
“The physical market has provided a weaker footing for gold … China’s markets have slowed amid high prices, underscoring the macro drivers.”
In Japan, bullion was sold between a discount of $3 and a premium of $0.5, a trader said.
“The market has been choppy and volatile due to Trump’s policies, and it seems investors stay on the sidelines till the trend is clear,” said a Japanese trader.
In Singapore, gold traded between a $0.50 discount and a $3 premium, a trader said.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – Reuters)
The cryptocurrency market is starting to recover due to an overall increase in buying from traders. This boost follows a positive consumer price report and ease in global tensions. As a result, Bitcoin’s price is on its way to hitting $90K after getting past some key hurdles. However, with a bit of selling pressure now, investors are wondering if Bitcoin might start to drop again soon.
Bitcoin Recovers Following Positive News
Today, Bitcoin approached the $85K mark, fueled by bullish developments such as a positive Consumer Price Index (CPI) report and a reduction in geopolitical tensions. A key factor was Ukraine’s agreement to a temporary 30-day ceasefire with U.S. involvement, a move reported by Bloomberg that has cooled down the global market tensions. This decrease in geopolitical uncertainty has enhanced investor confidence and brought stability to the crypto market.
In addition, Ontario’s decision to eliminate a 25% tariff on electricity exports to Michigan, New York, and Minnesota has softened trade tensions and boosted overall market sentiment.
Data from Coinglass shows that Bitcoin saw significant market activity with around $75.4 million in positions liquidated over the last 24 hours. This included $15.4 million by buyers and $60 million by sellers, indicating an increase in short liquidations amid Bitcoin’s price rise.
The bullish momentum has also influenced Bitcoin’s market trends, with open interest in Bitcoin increasing by nearly 6%, reaching a high of $49.8 billion. IntoTheBlock data suggests a continued bullish trend as the exchange reserve declines.
Also read: Trump Crypto Executive Order Sparks New Bill for U.S. Bitcoin Reserve
The Netflow metric has consistently been in the negative, with a notable outflow of 3.1K BTC in the last 48 hours. This trend indicates that holders are moving their Bitcoin from exchanges to self-custody wallets, reducing the potential for selling pressure and pointing to continued upward movement in Bitcoin’s price.
What’s Next for BTC Price?
Bitcoin is currently riding a wave of strong bullish activity, targeting a stable position above the $85K mark. It briefly touched a peak of $85,309 before encountering resistance and slipping below $85K. Currently, bears are strongly defending a surge above 23.6% Fib channel. As of now, Bitcoin’s price trades at $84,593, marking a 5.3% increase over the last 24 hours.
Looking ahead, the BTC/USDT trading pair is challenging a resistance area within $84,205 to $86,704. Increased buying efforts are anticipated to ward off any significant pullbacks. Should Bitcoin successfully breach the $90K threshold, it could potentially aim for a climb towards $95,000.
Conversely, a failure to meet buyer interest near the $85K level might lead to a pullback, possibly dropping to a low of $79,974.
However, the long/short ratio of Bitcoin has taken a sharp downturn, currently standing at 0.67. This indicates an increasing dominance by sellers, who are likely pushing for an immediate correction in the BTC price chart. At present, about 60% of traders anticipate a decline in the price.
Around 300 out of 600 MBBS seats in the 10 new Employees’ State Insurance Corporation (ESIC) medical colleges are expected to be made available for children of 3.72 crore insured persons in the academic session beginning in August this year.
The 10 ESIC medical colleges are at Andheri (Maharashtra), Basaidarapur (Delhi), Guwahati-Beltola (Assam), Indore (Madhya Pradesh), Jaipur (Rajasthan), Ludhiana (Punjab), Naroda-Bapunagar (Gujarat), Noida and Varanasi (Uttar Pradesh), and Ranchi (Jharkhand).
The Ministry of Labour & Employment has decided to reserve almost 50 per cent of the total seats for ESIC insured persons, or employees covered under the Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948, and who work in factories with wages up to Rs 21,000 per month, Ministry sources said.
The intake of MBBS students into these ESIC medical colleges and hospitals will happen through the NEET exam scheduled for May 4, 2025.
Of the ten, only ESIC Model Hospital & PGIMSR Basaidarapur, Delhi and ESIC Model College Indore would have 100 MBBS seats each, while the remaining eight will have 50 seats each, sources said.
Approval for opening 10 new medical colleges was accorded at the 194th meeting of the ESIC held on October 8 last year, to support the announcement made by Prime Minister Narendra Modi during the 2024 Independence Day speech for creating 75,000 new medical seats in the next five years.
These medical colleges and hospitals, which will cater to ESIC insured persons and their families and Ayushman Bharat Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (PM-JAY) beneficiaries, have come up in less than one year of the announcement, adding to the existing tally of 160 ESIC medical colleges in the country.
Fifty-one hospitals are run by the ESIC directly, and another 109 hospitals are under the control of the states through the ESI scheme, as per information shared with Parliament in 2023.
Additionally, there are 1,502 ESI dispensaries in the country, which include 36 dispensaries run by the ESIC directly and 1,466 run by the states under the ESI scheme (ESIS), the Ministry of Labour and Employment informed Rajya Sabha two years ago.
Other than that, there are 89 Dispensary-cum-Branch Offices (DCBOs) directly run by the ESIC.
Sleep has never come easy for me — quality sleep, that is. I’m a light sleeper, and I usually find myself wide awake every few hours throughout the night, staring at the ceiling as I wonder why sleep has eluded me once again.
I’ve tried my fair share of sleep rituals and products, ranging from high-tech devices like the Somnee Smart Sleep Headband and the Eight Sleep Pod Cover to dozens of sleep masks, headphones, sound machines, supplements and more. My spouse (and fellow CNET sleep expert Dillon) and I have a monthly YouTube series dedicated to testing mattresses in an effort to find the perfect one. If there’s a new sleep hack trending on TikTok, chances are I’ve given it a shot.
This story is part of Sleep Awareness Month 2025, CNET’s deep dive into how sleep impacts your overall health and why it’s crucial to all aspects of life.
Because long, peaceful slumbers have escaped me since I was a child, there came a point when I essentially accepted that I’m simply not good at sleeping — until recently. As a member of CNET’s sleep team, I acknowledge how essential it is for my overall health to get consistent, quality rest. In honor of Sleep Awareness Month, I decided to finally investigate the root cause of my sleeplessness rather than relying on gadgets and pills out of desperation. This is what led me to taking a hormonal sleep test for the first time.
In-lab vs. at-home sleep tests
Known as polysomnography, overnight sleep tests and studies have long been conducted in controlled labs, where participants are hooked up to sensors that track brainwaves and other physiological activity. These in-lab studies are the gold standard for identifying and diagnosing conditions such as sleep apnea.
However, facets of these studies have already entered our bedrooms, with various companies offering tests you can take from the comfort of your home. One example is Sleep Doctor’s At-Home Sleep Apnea Study, which uses a WatchPAT One device and sensors that connect to your finger, wrist and chest. The device records your breathing patterns throughout the night and automatically shares the results with your provider to review and offer the appropriate sleep solution, such as prescribing a CPAP machine.
Learn more: At-Home Sleep Tests vs. Lab Studies: Is At-Home Just as Good?
If you think you have a sleep disorder, the best first step is to talk to your doctor.
Carlofranco/Getty Images
In addition to sleep apnea, you can now take other sleep tests and health panels remotely. Though it’s not as thorough (or possibly as accurate) as in-person tests, these at-home tests can be quicker and more cost-effective. To get to the root cause of my sleeping woes, I decided to take Thorne’s Sleep Test.
This test uses saliva to track hormone fluctuations in your sleep-wake cycle. It analyzes melatonin and cortisol, the primary drivers of our circadian rhythm.
I ordered and awaited the arrival of my sleep test. I suspected the results would indicate that my cortisol levels were high, which I believed may be one of the reasons I struggle to sleep — and boy, I was in a for a surprise.
Taking the Thorne Sleep Test
The test arrived in a small package via mail. I followed the instructions, activating my account online and completing the health portfolio by answering questions about my exercise, diet, daily supplements, conditions or ailments, sleep patterns and more.
I highly recommend thoroughly reading the instructions before taking any at-home test. If you have periods, you should take the test on day 19, 20 or 21 of your menstrual cycle. There are also specific guidelines for those who use or take hormones. You’re also advised to avoid lip products or drink alcohol on collection day, and advised using anti-aging or anti-wrinkle facial creams within three days of taking the test because these products can contain undisclosed hormones that may alter the results — alarming, I know.
I know I’m chronically dehydrated, but this test made me realize I needed to work on that. Filling the vials with saliva was more difficult than I expected.
Aly Lopez/CNET
I must admit, I’ve never been great at tracking my period. When I took this test, I thought I was around the recommended 20ish day of my cycle, but I started my period the next day. I’m mentioning this because it may have contributed to my surprising results.
Collection involves filling the four provided vials with saliva at designated times throughout the day, the first being 30 minutes after waking up. Since you must collect throughout the day, I suggest ensuring you have a regular or open schedule in order to follow the instructions on avoiding food and drink before each one.
After filling all four vials, I packed and shipped them off the next day in the provided packaging and shipping label. Easy peasy.
Reviewing my unexpected results
About a week later, I received a notification that the test results were in, and I logged into my account to check them out. I was pleasantly surprised to see that my cortisol levels were in the normal range, falling on the low end. As an easily stressed individual, I’d anticipated them to be high. “Good news! You have a healthy wake-cycle based on your normal cortisol pattern,” the report exclaimed.
Confused by the odd melatonin numbers in my results, I scheduled an online consultation with Nathan Price, PhD, chief scientific officer at Thorne, to discuss the results.
“We’re tracking two variables over time: your melatonin and cortisol patterns. Melatonin typically goes up as a sleep signal, and cortisol is the opposite, as a waking signal. When I first glanced at your results, what jumped out was the high melatonin,” Price said.
My melatonin levels were essentially flipped, with high amounts detected in the morning and throughout the day and dropping at night and before bed. The vial I filled just after waking up detected 39.5 pg/mL, well outside the clinically normal range between 3 and 19 pg/mL. It was still high for the second daytime test, at 12.2 pg/mL. My melatonin levels dropped into the normal range by early evening and fell just inside the normal range by nighttime, at 7.4 pg/mL — teetering toward the low range.
My melatonin levels were abnormally high in the morning and during the day.
Thorne/Aly Lopez/CNET
Price asked if I remembered what had happened the night before I took the sleep test to see if we could deduct why my melatonin was so high in the morning. I looked back at my Whoop Band data and saw that I had slept for 7 hours and 39 minutes, falling asleep at 11:06 p.m. and waking up at 7:34 a.m. Nothing out of the ordinary. I spent 48 minutes awake that night, which was 12% lower than my 30-day average of 55 minutes.
I frequently take a melatonin supplement if I think I’ll struggle to sleep that night; however, I hadn’t taken one for three or four nights when I took this test, so we didn’t think it was from that.
Price shared a graph like the one below showing the typical rise and fall of melatonin levels throughout the day and night. “The other explanation could be that you woke up prematurely that morning. If you wake up early and are in the middle of this down cycle in your melatonin levels, you’ll feel groggy because you still have a high amount of melatonin in your system,” he said.
This seems the most plausible explanation. I often wake up abruptly in the morning while still having vivid dreams in the REM phase of sleep, typically because our dog wants to go outside or our cat loudly announces that her food bowl is empty.
My high melatonin levels in the morning and throughout the day could have also been influenced by my period starting the following day. Menstrual cycles cause our hormone levels to fluctuate. Though general research on this topic is currently lacking, the Study of Women’s Health Across the Nation found that melatonin levels can be up to 4.5 times higher during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle (leading up to our periods) than in the follicular phase. Being that I was at the tail end of my luteal phase could offer another explanation — but I still don’t think that’s the whole picture.
“This is one of the challenges of launching health testing businesses. For some of the tests — particularly if they have a relationship to hormones — it is more challenging for women [due to menstrual cycles]. It adds an extra complication,” Price explained.
“The main thing that we’re looking at in this particular test is to figure out if your sleeping issues are primarily melatonin or cortisol driven, and they lead to different recommendations,” Price said. He clarified that if the results showed my melatonin had not been spiking appropriately before bed, that would indicate that perhaps I would want to take a melatonin supplement. “That’s why melatonin, at the right dose, can be helpful for jet lag or shifting your sleep and situations like that,” Price explained.
My cortisol levels were in the clinically normal range, which I was pleased (and shocked) to see.
Thorne/Aly Lopez/CNET
If my cortisol levels had been high, Thorne’s practitioners would likely suggest taking a product like PharmaGABA, a natural form of GABA, a neurotransmitter that helps you relax. “This is important — you didn’t show a problem there [with my cortisol levels], so we did not recommend a product. Trust is super important for Thorne as a company. If we don’t think a supplement will make a difference, we won’t make a recommendation.”
Read more: I Got a Blood Test to Learn About Cortisol and Its Effects
My initial feedback from Thorne outlined holistic steps for a healthier sleep hygiene plan rather than a supplement. These personalized recommendations were algorithmically generated from my test results and included in-depth information on the following:
Eating an anti-inflammatory diet (like Mediterranean or low-carb)
Limiting melatonin-rich foods (such as tomatoes, walnuts or tart cherries)
Limiting caffeine, as it can interfere with melatonin levels
Avoiding alcohol before bed, as it inhibits melatonin secretion
Maintaining a consistent bedtime routine and wake-up time
Exercising regularly and practicing yoga and meditation
The guidelines also included research-backed sources and clinical evidence for said recommendations.
How the test has helped
It’s been a few weeks since receiving the results of my Thorne Sleep Test, and I have been paying much closer attention to my sleep patterns and daily habits.
Consistent bedtime routine
One of the main changes I’ve implemented is a stricter bedtime routine. I have been going to bed earlier (around 10 p.m. rather than midnight, like I was). I almost always wake up early, whether from the rising sun or our pets demanding food and attention. Given that my melatonin levels were extremely high in the morning after waking up, the simplest way, in theory, to fix this would be to adjust my sleep schedule so that my melatonin levels peak between 2 a.m. and 4 a.m., as they should, rather than closer to sunrise.
Less caffeine and alcohol
I’ve been more mindful of the types of food I eat at dinner and before bed, doing my best to avoid sugary or spicy foods (which has proven to be the toughest adjustment).
Since I normally wake up feeling groggy after a restless night of tossing and turning, I have come to rely on caffeine to revive myself. I typically have a few cups of coffee in the morning and early afternoon to get me through the day, but lately, I’ve been forgoing all coffee after lunch. I also occasionally enjoyed a glass of red wine before bed, but I’ve since given that up, as well.
Read more: Best Mocktails to Make Before Bed
No more melatonin pills
Another significant change I implemented is avoiding melatonin pills to allow my body’s natural production of melatonin to balance out. Though I didn’t use a melatonin supplement every night, I did take them regularly. I also took them too late in the evening, usually around an hour before bed. Most experts recommend taking melatonin around two to three hours before bed, but some suggest even earlier. According to the University of Michigan’s Behavioral Sleep Medicine Program, it’s best to take melatonin 4 to 6 hours before bed — which I definitely was not doing.
Stopped tracking my sleep
Though it wasn’t included in Thorne’s recommendations, I stopped tracking my sleep with a wearable. I felt it becoming more of a burden as I began to worry about what my tracker would say, informing how I felt based on the poor sleep scores I received. I wanted to let my body and mind decide for itself how it felt.
Read more: Obsessing Over Your Sleep Data Is Keeping You Up. Here’s How to Stop
Reading instead of scrolling
Sleep researchers have been screaming it from the mountaintops: no screens before bed. Thorne also suggested avoiding blue light exposure because melatonin’s natural release is triggered by darkness. The report explains that the “influx of light from an electronic device can alter the normal production of melatonin. Even though your melatonin levels [before bed] tested within normal limits, use of these devices can negatively affect sleep and might temporarily negatively impact melatonin levels and your ability to fall asleep.”
I’ve prioritized reading before bed rather than scrolling mindlessly on my phone. Instead of e-books on my Kindle, I’ve been reading physical books with a reading light that emits a soft, warm glow.
My new bedtime routine makes me feel like a Victorian-Era woman — pre-electricity, sleep tech, screens and melatonin supplements. And I’m loving it.
Duncan1890/Getty Images
Returning to the basics
Since making these adjustments, I’ve already noticed a drastic improvement in my sleep. As expected, there have been some restless nights and groggy mornings here and there, but fewer than before. I’m falling asleep easier and waking up less often throughout the night as my body slowly adapts to going to bed earlier. I haven’t felt as strong of a need to drink coffee later in the day, and I believe (and hope) it’s because my circadian rhythm is slowly returning to normal.
The irony is not lost on me. Thanks to today’s telemedicine technology, I can take a sleep test from home — only for it to tell me that I need to focus on the basics of the human sleep-wake cycle. This indicates a larger conundrum that millions of people face as our technology advances, but our quality of sleep declines. It’s to the point where lack of sleep is now considered a public health epidemic.
According to the 2025 Global Sleep Report by ResMed, most people attain only four nights of good sleep per week, leaving the other three nights unsatisfactory. “It’s a paradox of modern life — sleep quality is falling short even as its value is being increasingly acknowledged,” the report shares.
Thorne advised, “We suggest you follow your diet, exercise and lifestyle recommendations for three to six months and then retest to track progress.” I will continue heeding these guidelines to the best of my ability, paying closer attention to my energy levels in the morning and throughout the day. There are additional ways I plan to address and improve my sleep habits, including Thorne’s suggestions for mindful exercise, meditation and journaling.
As Price explained, this test provides only a snapshot. Retaking it down the road could help build the bigger picture — and thanks to our advancing technology, I don’t even have to leave my house to do so.
Pros and cons of at-home testing
Thorne offers various at-home tests and health panels, including thyroid, menopause, biological age, fertility and gut health. The company also has free online quizzes to determine which supplements are best for you. “At Thorne, we’re focused on pairing testing with solutions. We offer testing as part of a more comprehensive program. We try to figure out the right product or solution that will be useful for you,” Price said.
The advantages of such at-home tests are clear. They offer convenience and privacy, allowing you to manage aspects of your health from home. This can appeal to those with busy schedules or who feel anxious about visiting the doctor. The results are typically returned quickly and can be more cost-effective than scheduling multiple appointments or tests.
Addressing and managing health concerns via telehealth platforms is beneficial for many.
ArtistGNDphotography/Getty Images
On the other hand, visiting your doctor in person can provide a level of professional guidance and support that at-home tests cannot. Most at-home health panel services also offer virtual appointments with providers, so it’s important to take advantage of that rather than trying to interpret results on your own.
Another complication is taking the test correctly and at the appropriate times, which I experienced by taking the sleep test too close to my period.
Learn more: Medicare Telehealth Coverage Ending Soon? Here’s What We Know
The choice ultimately depends on your preferences and the health conditions involved. Always consult your doctor about any concerns you have, whether sleep-related or otherwise, to help determine the best path forward.
Several types of skincare products used to treat acne have been recalled due to a cancer risk.
The products, which contain benzoyl peroxide, a common treatment for acne, were tested for elevated levels of benzene, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) said in a notice this week.
The recalled products include:
La Roche-Posay Effaclar Duo Dual Action Acne Treatment – lot number MYX46W
Walgreens Acne Control Cleanser – lot number 23 09328
Proactiv Emergency Blemish Relief Cream Benzoyl Peroxide 5% – lot number V3305A; V3304A
Proactiv Skin Smoothing Exfoliator – lot number V4204A
SLMD Benzoyl Peroxide Acne Lotion – lot number 2430600
Walgreens Tinted Acne Treatment Cream – lot number 4970743
FDA RECALLS COMMON CHINESE FOOD INGREDIENT AFTER UNDECLARED SULFITES FOUND IN FLORIDA INSPECTION
Several types of skincare products used to treat acne have been recalled over a cancer risk. (iStock)
The manufacturer of Zapzyt Acne Treatment Gel also agreed to voluntarily recall the product because of an elevated level of benzene found in its own testing, the FDA said.
The FDA explained that 90% of the 95 products with benzoyl peroxide that were tested had “undetectable or extremely low levels of benzene.”
Benzene is a “chemical used in the production of a wide range of industrial products, including chemicals, dyes, detergents, and some plastics,” according to the agency.
FEWER FOOD RECALLS YET MORE AMERICANS SICKENED IN 2024 THAN PREVIOUS YEAR, SAYS NEW REPORT
It is released into the air through “cigarette smoke, emissions from automobiles, and burning coal and oil.”
La Roche-Posay Effaclar Duo Dual Action Acne Treatment with lot number MYX46W is one of the recalled products.(La Roche-Posay)
While it is safe to use benzoyl peroxide in acne products, benzene contamination in small amounts over a long period of time “can decrease the formation of blood cells. Long-term exposure to benzene through inhalation, oral intake, and skin absorption may result in cancers such as leukemia and other blood disorders.”
The FDA said it started independent testing of benzoyl peroxide products after third-party test results “raised concerns about elevated levels of benzene in certain acne products.”
“FDA testing results indicate fewer products with benzene contamination than the third-party findings,” the agency added.
The FDA said the companies had voluntarily recalled the products, noting it was at the retail and not the consumer level.(AP Photo/Andrew Harnik, File)
The FDA said the companies had voluntarily recalled the products, noting it was at the retail and not the consumer level.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“This means retailers are instructed to remove products from store shelves and online marketplaces but does not specifically instruct consumers to take actions regarding products currently in their possession,” the FDA said. “Even with daily use of these products for decades, the risk of a person developing cancer because of exposure to benzene found in these products is very low.”
Name an Indian mithai loved by people of all ages. If your answer is kaju ki barfi, also known as kaju katli, we’re on the same page! This festive delight, made from cashew nuts and milk, is the star of every Indian celebration. The best part? Kaju ki barfi can be easily made at home, and trust us, the homemade version will be even more delicious than the store-bought ones.
Also read: 10 Best Indian Dessert Recipes
How To Make Kaju Ki Barfi I Kaju Barfi Recipe
Blend cashews and milk in a blender until smooth. Transfer the paste to a pan, add sugar, and cook over low heat, stirring until the sugar dissolves. Bring the mixture to a boil, then continue stirring over medium heat until it thickens and starts leaving the sides of the pan, forming a dough-like consistency. Remove from heat and let it cool slightly until manageable. Roll it out on a greased surface using a greased rolling pin while it’s still warm. Flatten to about 1/4 cm (1/8 inch) thickness. Cover with silver leaf and allow it to cool completely. Once set, cut into diamond-shaped pieces. Click here for the detailed recipe.
Other than the classic kaju katli flavour, you can experiment with different versions of this beloved dessert by making small tweaks to the recipe.
Kaju katli is commonly served during festivals. Photo Credit: Getty
Here are some exciting variations of kaju ki barfi you can try at home:
1. Kesar Kaju Katli
Give the traditional kaju katli a royal twist with a touch of saffron. This rich, buttery, golden-hued sweet is sure to satisfy all your cravings.
2. Rose Kaju Katli
A fusion twist on the classic, this version blends cashew nuts, milk powder, sugar syrup and fragrant rose essence. The result? A delicately floral take on an all-time favourite.
Also Read: Khoye Ki Barfi Recipe
3. Cranberry Kaju Katli
A perfect balance of sweet and tangy, this variation combines cashews with dried cranberries, nuts, cardamom and a hint of ghee for a unique, zesty treat.
4. Chocolate Kaju Katli
When chocolate meets cashew, you get the ultimate indulgent treat. For an extra decadent version, add a layer of dark chocolate ganache and a dusting of Dutch cocoa powder.
5. Strawberry Kaju Katli
Infused with the sweet and fruity essence of strawberries, this variation is a must-try. Want a lighter version? Skip the full-fat cream and use skimmed milk instead.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-14/Joint-Statement-of-the-Beijing-Meeting-between-China-Russia-and-Iran-1BJR0Zgm8Rq/img/9fe3fded876e4df2abc758f04ac01210/9fe3fded876e4df2abc758f04ac01210.png' alt='L-R: Russia's Deputy Foreign Minister Sergei Ryabkov, China's Executive Vice Minister of Foreign Affairs Ma Zhaoxu, and Iran's Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi hold a press conference after their meeting at Diaoyutai State Guesthouse in Beijing, March 14, 2025. /CFP'
China, Russia and Iran on Friday issued a joint statement following their trilateral meeting on the Iranian nuclear issue in Beijing.
The following is the full text of the statement.
Joint Statement of the Beijing Meeting between China, Russia and Iran
The Beijing Meeting between China, Russia and Iran was successfully held on March 14, 2025. The Beijing Meeting was chaired by Deputy Foreign Minister Ma Zhaoxu of the People’s Republic of China, with participation of Deputy Foreign Minister Ryabkov Sergey Alexeevich of the Russian Federation and Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi of the Islamic Republic of Iran.
China, Russia and Iran engaged in in-depth discussions on the latest state of play with regard to nuclear issue and sanctions lifting. The three countries emphasized on the necessity of terminating all unlawful unilateral sanctions.
The three countries reiterated that political and diplomatic engagement and dialogue based on the principle of mutual respect remains the only viable and practical option in this regard.
The three countries emphasized that relevant parties should be committed to addressing the root cause of the current situation and abandoning sanction, pressure, or threat of force.
The three countries stressed the importance of the UNSC Resolution 2231, including its timeframes, and called for relevant parties to refrain from any action that may escalate the situation, so as to create a favourable atmosphere and conditions for diplomatic efforts.
The three countries reiterated the importance of upholding the Treaty on the Non-proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT) as the cornerstone of international non-proliferation regime. China and Russia welcomed Iran’s reiteration that its nuclear programme is exclusively for peaceful purposes, and not for development of nuclear weapons, and also welcomed Iran’s commitment to full compliance with its obligations under the NPT and Comprehensive Safeguard Agreement, supported Iran’s policy to continue cooperation with the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), and stressed the need to fully respect Iran’s right to peaceful uses of nuclear energy as a State Party to the NPT. The three countries stressed the necessity for all States to refrain from any action that undermines the technical, objective and impartial work of the IAEA.
Iran and Russia commended China for its constructive role and hosting the Beijing meeting. The three countries agreed to continue their close consultation and cooperation in the future.
The three countries also exchanged views on regional and international issues of common interest, and agreed to maintain and strengthen their coordination in international organizations and multilateral arrangements such as BRICS and the Shanghai Cooperation Organization.
At a time when, in his words, “nobody was writing about gay life,” he produced groundbreaking novels and memoirs and published books by Harvey Fierstein and others.
Hanto Workspaces is expecting over 40 per cent increase in revenue this fiscal year to ₹30 crore on rising demand for flexible managed office space.
Bengaluru-based Hanto Workspaces had posted a revenue of ₹21 crore in the 2023-24 fiscal year.
“We are likely to post a revenue of around Rs 30 crore during this fiscal year. There is a huge demand for managed flexible workspaces in Bengaluru,” Hanto Workspaces Founder Aashit Verma told PTI.
He said the company has expanded its portfolio and also improved occupancy rates, helping it achieve higher revenues.
At present, Verma said the company has 15 co-working facilities in Bengaluru covering 3 lakh square feet area and 6,000 seating capacity.
The company charges between ₹7,000 and ₹18,000 per desk from corporate clients.
Verma said the company is looking to strengthen its portfolio in Bengaluru and also exploring to enter other major cities. He said the company also intends to raise funds to expand business and future growth.
Also read: TN Budget 2025: Govt announces 2,000-acre modern city, Semiconductor Mission 2030 & more
In 2023, Hanto Workspaces had raised ₹15 crore as seed funding to grow its business.
According to Cushman & Wakefield, India’s office market was very active in 2024 with gross leasing of workspace witnessing a 19 per cent increase to a record 885.2 lakh square feet across eight major cities.
Out of the total gross leasing, coworking operators took on rent 14 per cent of workspaces from property owners for further sub-renting to corporates, especially IT firms.
Property consultant Anarock MD-Commercial Leasing and Advisory Peush Jain noted that flexible workspaces have truly come of age in 2024, with a significant increase in demand for flexible lease terms and managed office spaces, as companies seek agility and cost-efficiency.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LAMELO Ball trenutačno bilježi prosjek od preko 25 poena po utakmici, što je njegov najbolji rezultat u dosadašnjih pet sezona u Charlotte Hornetsima. Paralelno s tim, njegova suradnja s PUMA Hoopsom nastavlja privlačiti pažnju, a model PUMA MB.04 dobiva sve više novih boja kako sezona odmiče.
Najnovija verzija nazvana je Golden Child, a inspirirana je idejom da sve što LaMelo dotakne postane zlato.
Već su dostupne u prodaji
Kampanja je predstavljena na društvenim mrežama brenda i košarkaša uz spot i fotografije tenisica, a mnogima su se tenisice svidjele: “Super su”, “Izgledaju nestvarno, ali stvarno”, “Kralj”, “Ovo će biti hit”, “Pitam se je li dizajn njegova ideja”.
Ove tenisice dolaze u potpuno zlatnom izdanju. Sjajni zlatni slojevi prekrivaju gornji dio, dok je osnova u nešto zagasitijoj zlatnoj nijansi. Crni detalji lijepo nadopunjavaju zlatne, a nalaze se na jeziku i peti, kao i na natpisima.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ove su tenisice već dostupne na službenom PUMA webshopu i u odabranim trgovinama. Model za djecu košta 90 eura, za mlade 105 eura, a uniseks model za odrasle 125 eura. Možete ih vidjeti ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Normani and D.K. Metcalf are engaged, the newly minted Pittsburgh Steeler announced Thursday.
“Hold that rock up, baby,” he said to the R&B singer, who was off camera during his introductory news conference.
Metcalf popped the question in Houston where both of their families were together.
“It was my sister’s spring break and just thought about getting the whole family together for a big kumbaya and joining our families with a ring,” he said before letting loose with the biggest smile.
Normani, 28, and Metcalf, 27, were introduced to each other in 2022 by singer Ciara, wife of NFL player Russell Wilson. Wilson was Metcalf’s quarterback on the Seattle Seahawks from 2019 to 2022. The two men will play on the same team again now that they’re both with the Steelers.
Ciara posted video late Thursday showing a peek at a Facetime exchange between the couples where Fifth Harmony alum Normani was showing off her ring.
“@RussellWilson and I knew when we introed yall 3yrs ago ..love was truly in the air!,” Ciara wrote. “Now yall gon be booed up forever!! This was the best news! @DK Metcalf @Normani we love yall so much!
A representative for Normani did not respond immediately Friday to The Times’ request for comment.
A great trip starts with the right luggage. Packing well can make your journey smooth, keeping everything organised and easy to carry. A sturdy trolley or spacious luggage bag helps you move around without stress. With up to 60% off, now is the perfect time to upgrade your travel gear. Find stylish and practical options that fit all your needs from short trips and long vacations, to business travel.
Pack light, travel far! Grab trolley and luggage bags at up to 60% off. Perfect for stylish, stress-free adventures on any budget.
Lightweight designs, strong wheels, and smart compartments make packing a breeze. Travel with ease, knowing your belongings are safe and secure. No more last-minute struggles or messy packing. Get the best deals now and start planning your next trip without worrying about your bags. Grab yours today and hit the road in style!
Check out the top deals at the Amazon Sale
Cabin trolley bags Perfect for quick getaways or business trips, cabin trolley bags keep your essentials close without weighing you down. With Amazon’s amazing sale, grab compact, stylish bags at unbeatable prices. Built for convenience, they fit in overhead compartments, glide smoothly, and keep your belongings safe. Budget-friendly and travel-ready, these bags make short trips stress-free and full of style.
Top picks at the Amazon Sale
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Medium trolley bags Planning a longer trip? Medium trolley bags are the perfect travel companion. Spacious enough for extended stays, yet easy to carry, they balance size and practicality. Amazon’s sale offers huge discounts, so you can travel smart on a budget. With sturdy wheels and organised compartments, these bags are ideal for vacations, family visits, or even work travel.
Top picks at the Amazon Sale
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Trolley bags set of 2 For couples, siblings, or friends who love traveling, a set of 2 trolley bags is a great choice. Amazon’s deals make it affordable to buy matching bags with plenty of space. Travel light with the smaller one or pack more with the bigger option. Versatile and stylish, these sets cover everything from weekend escapes to long adventures.
Top picks at the Amazon Sale
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Trolley bags set of 3 Families and group travelers, this one’s for you! A set of 3 trolley bags means no more luggage struggles. With Amazon’s discounts, buy a complete set for all your travel needs. Perfect for short, medium, and long trips, these bags offer endless flexibility. Smooth wheels, durable designs, and roomy compartments keep packing simple and organised.
Top picks at the Amazon Sale
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Duffle bags with trolley For flexible, grab-and-go travel, duffle bags with trolleys are a game-changer. Perfect for gym-goers, weekend travelers, or spontaneous trips, they combine style and practicality. Amazon’s sale makes them even better with budget-friendly deals. Easy to carry, roll, or sling over your shoulder, these bags offer enough space for essentials without slowing you down.
Top picks at the Amazon Sale
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Similar articles for you
Amazon Offers: Trolley bags starting at ₹1599 to make budget travel easy
Worried about the one-cabin-bag rule? Check out our top picks for cabin suitcases with accessible laptop compartments
Grab last minutue deals on pichkari & Holi essentials! Find some stellar deals
Amazon offers on trolley and luggage bags: FAQs
What types of luggage are on sale?
Amazon offers discounts on cabin bags, medium trolleys, duffle bags, and luggage sets — perfect for every kind of traveler!
How much can I save during the sale?
You can save up to 60% on luggage and trolley bags, with extra deals on combo sets and top-rated brands.
Are there discounts on luggage sets?
Yes! Amazon has amazing offers on sets of 2 or 3 trolley bags, ideal for family trips or longer vacations.
What features should I look for in a trolley bag?
Look for sturdy wheels, lightweight materials, spacious compartments, and TSA locks for stress-free, organised travel.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, concerning the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
Despite making its debut at the end of February, the physical edition of Monster Hunter Wilds has already been given a big discount.
While the game is selling for £64.99 on the PlayStation Store and at retailers like GAME, Argos customers can grab Monster Hunter Wilds for just £49.99 on PS5 and Xbox Series X.
Representing a saving of more than 20%, the incredible Monster Hunter Wilds discount deal is also available at Very.
You can grab a copy from GAME or Very by clicking the links below.
Argos customers are rushing to snap up the deal, which is listed as “in demand” and “selling fast”. This means you may need to act fast to take advantage of the discount.
If you do decide to make the purchase, Argos offers various payment schemes, including the ability to spread payments via Klarna and PayPal. Very also offers payment schemes.
It’s a great deal for a fantastic game, which is the second highest-rated of the year so far on Metacritic, behind only Split Fiction.
Monster Hunter Wilds takes place in the Forbidden Lands, where fearsome creatures hunt in packs.
Monster Hunter Wilds features a dynamic weather system, which changes the attributes of some monsters, and what hunters can expect to find.
Developer Capcom explains more: “Monster Hunter Wilds is the highly anticipated next evolution in the award-winning Monster Hunter franchise.
“The latest entry in the beloved series of co-op action RPGs takes the thrill of hunting larger-than-life foes in expansive natural environments to immersive new heights.
“As hunters, players protect the balance of the ecosystem, utilising resources from hunts to craft powerful gear and continue investigating the mysteries at the heart of these new lands.”
Elsewhere, Argos is currently selling Kingdom Come Deliverance 2 for £49.99, which is down from the £59.99 price tag on the PlayStation Store.
Volkswagen is replacing the Tiguan Allspace with an entirely new model called the Tayron (pronounced tie-ron), and it will fulfil the same role as the outgoing seven-seat mid-sized SUV, slotting in between the five-seat Tiguan and the range-topping Touareg.
Whereas the Allspace was little more than a stretched Tiguan in order to fit in a third row of seats, the Tayron gets a bespoke exterior design, though it still looks more like the Tiguan than its bigger brother, the Touareg.
Similar to the latest version of the Mk8.5 Golf, the Tayron gets illuminated VW logos front and rear, with LED light units at either end as well. In Europe there are three specification grades – Life, Elegance and R-Line – and these are likely to be offered in Australia as well.
In terms of size, the Tayron stretches to 4792mm in length and is 1853mm wide, with the roofline reaching 1668mm. Built on the same MQB Evo platform as the Tiguan, the Tayron’s wheelbase is a smidge longer at 2788mm, benefitting those sitting in the rear.
Both five- and seven-seat layouts are available in the Tayron, though the plug-in hybrid only comes with five seats on account of the battery placement beneath the rear seats.
That is a pity as, with relatively few seven-seat EVs on the market, a long-range PHEV such as the Tayron could have been a great compromise for families looking to reduce their carbon footprint.
We got behind the wheel of the Tayron at its international launch in Europe to see how it compares to the Tiguan and whether those extra seats are useful.
How much does the Volkswagen Tayron cost?
It’s unlikely that the Volkswagen Tayron will be appearing in Australian dealers until closer to the end of 2025, and as yet there are no pricing details.
But as the Tayron is a successor to the Tiguan Allspace, we expect it to be similarly priced, perhaps with a modest premium. Currently the Tiguan Allspace has a driveaway price of $47,990 for the entry-grade 110TSI Life.
What is the Volkswagen Tayron like on the inside?
The Tayron’s interior mirrors the overall aesthetic of the smaller Tiguan, with minor differences to the air vents and some of the material inserts on the dashboard. Its dashboard layout is a horizontal vista of structure with no physical buttons other than the legally required hazard warning at the centre.
We’re very pleased to see that Volkswagen has reverted to using a multifunction steering wheel that has physical buttons on its two upper spars, however, and if you opt for the R-Line specification, the bottom spoke gets the ‘R’ logo.
Ahead of the wheel is a 10-inch digital instrument cluster that provides the usual variety of screen options to suit individual preferences. For example, you can switch between having more traditional rev counter and speedometer readouts or having the navigation map fill the entirety of the screen. A large colour head-up display can also be added to the Tayron, bringing speed and traffic sign information – along with turn-by-turn navigation prompts – into the driver’s eye line.
Two infotainment touchscreen options are available, starting with a 12.9-inch unit, though our test car was equipped with the larger 15-inch display that really fills up the centre of the dashboard. Unlike the instrumentation that’s inset within the dashboard, the 15-inch touchscreen looks more stuck onto the fascia, sticking up above the leading edge of the dash.
Nonetheless, the infotainment system is comprehensive, and the display is quick to react to inputs, but the layout of the menus and lack of physical buttons mean you often have to hunt around the various sub-menus to find what you’re looking for.
Both Android Auto and Apple CarPlay are supported, however, and the capacitive slider at the base of the screen lets you adjust volume and temperature by swiping your finger across. Thankfully, that’s now backlit – unlike earlier iterations of the idea.
Additionally, a backlit panel in front of the passenger seat can be changed to different colours or ‘Atmospheres’ as Volkswagen calls them – linked to the drive modes – matching the upper inserts on top of the doors that are also illuminated from within.
Between the front seats, there’s plenty of storage, including a useful area below the central air vents. Lift that up and there’s a wireless phone charging pad underneath. A nifty rotary controller has hints of BMW iDrive about it, though its functionality is nowhere near as varied. It’s possible to adjust stereo volume and to cycle through the drive modes. The general look and quality of the materials throughout the interior are quite high, especially in the R-Line version.
Rear passenger space in the second row is quite generous, and it is noticeably different to the Tiguan thanks to the 108mm increase in wheelbase, no doubt. Some markets will offer the Tayron as a five-seater in addition to the three-row setup, but the latter is likely to be the more popular option.
Where fitted, the Tayron’s third row provides a useful extra set of seats within limits. The Tayron remains more a ‘five-plus-two’ rather than a proper seven-seat SUV, though it is possible to slide the second row forward by up to 18 centimetres to give those in the rearmost row more legroom (or to increase boot volume).
On the subject of boot space, the seven-seat Tayron has a generous 850 litres available, with up to 1905 litres when all the rear seats are folded. When all three seat rows are in place, the usable boot volume is still 345 litres, which is almost equivalent to a mid-sized hatchback such as Volkswagen’s own Golf.
The five-seat Tayron gets the largest boot, at 885 litres, and that can swell to 2090 litres when the rear seats are folded. In the plug-in hybrid five-seater, that boot space decreases slightly to 705 litres due to the hybrid battery underneath, and the total cargo capacity is 1915 litres.
What’s under the bonnet?
Volkswagen’s desire to provide something for everyone in the Tayron is reflected in the range of powertrains available.
Tayron eHybrid
You can have a basic turbocharged 2.0-litre TSI petrol engine, which comes equipped with VW’s 4Motion all-wheel drive. This four-cylinder motor is available in 150kW and 190kW states of tune, and, as is the case across the entire Tayron lineup, automatic gearboxes are standard.
The 2.0-litre TDI diesel comes with either front- or all-wheel drive. There’s 110kW at your disposal in the front-wheel drive Tayron, while the 4Motion version makes up to 142kW.
The plug-in hybrid – badged as the eHybrid – is an appealing prospect as it has a useful battery-only driving range of up to 126km, thanks to its 19.7kWh energy capacity. The electric motor generates 85kW on its own, and it is paired with either 110kW or 130kW petrol engines, resulting in quoted system maxes of 150kW or 200kW, respectively.
Recharging can be done at 11kW three-phase AC chargers and 50kW DC fast-chargers, as well as at home.
For those who don’t want to faff around with charging cables, there is a mild-hybrid variant of the Tayron. Badged as the eTSI, its 110kW 1.5-litre engine can provide brief moments of engine-off coasting and longer periods of stop-start in traffic to help save fuel.
Specifications
Volkswagen Tayron eHybrid
Engine
1.5L 4cyl petrol with 85kW electric motor
Power
150kW
Engine torque
350Nm
Transmission
6-speed auto
Driven wheels
Front-wheel drive
Weight
1939kg (kerb)
Braked towing capacity
1800kg
CO2 (claim)
10-12g/km (combined)
Fuel economy (claim)
0.4-0.5L/100km
Fuel economy (observed)
1.3L/100km (mixed driving, driver only)
Fuel tank size
45L
How does the Volkswagen Tayron drive?
It’s very clear that Volkswagen has gone to great lengths to make the Tayron feel polished and refined on the move.
Not only has it been liberal with the use of sound-deadening material in the floor, but our test car was also equipped with acoustically optimised glass that has additional layers of insulation film to help reduce undesirable wind and external noise from breaching the cabin. At 4.96mm thick, the glass does do a good job as it’s rather hushed inside.
That’s emphasised when driving the plug-in hybrid as once there’s some charge remaining in the 17.7kWh battery, it will default to driving in electric mode wherever possible. Even with just the 85kW motor doing its thing, the Tayron easily keeps up with urban traffic and can drive at highway speeds in near-silence.
Combine that quiet running with a well-judged suspension setup and light steering, and the Tayron proves to be comfortable and untaxing to drive. You can provoke the petrol engine into life when you want to get the most performance, and when it does activate it generally does so quite smoothly unless you’ve kept your right foot firmly pressed on the accelerator pedal.
Even over a long journey that sees the battery fully deplete, the switch from fully electric to hybrid mode means fuel consumption remains pleasingly low. On one particular route, which was longer than the battery’s maximum 126km range, the total fuel consumption was a mere 1.3L/100km.
Of course, if you’re on a much longer journey and you’re not stopping to plug in and recharge the battery, that consumption figure will quickly rise as the engine is then pulling around the extra weight of the hybrid hardware.
On the flipside, the 110kW 2.0 TDI diesel isn’t quite as polished nor as quiet as the plug-in hybrid, but it isn’t that far behind. For sure, it still sounds like a diesel inside, especially when started from cold, but you can hear how much the boffins have done to reduce and muffle that sound inside the cabin.
The diesel engine reacts much more quickly than previous iterations and it generally feels much livelier as well. Its seven-speed dual-clutch automatic transmission swaps cogs very smoothly, and a long highway run revealed it is geared in a way that keeps the diesel engine spooling at a lower rpm where it can be at its most efficient.
Ride comfort is also one of the Tayron’s positives, thanks in part to the DCC Pro system (Volkswagen’s adaptive suspension damping setup), which is standard on the plug-in hybrid.
In this latest iteration, there are new two-valve shock absorbers that can react faster to input changes as the system continually monitors the road conditions along with speed and steering input.
The result is a large SUV that handles keenly. It does a solid job of keeping body control in check, and when you do decide to push on a bit more, the chassis feels well able to keep up.
What do you get?
It is expected that there will be three equipment grades for the Volkswagen Tayron, starting with the Life.
This version is likely to include the digital instrument display, a 12.9-inch touchscreen and wireless connectivity for Android and Apple devices. Keyless entry, a reversing camera, 17-inch alloy wheels and LED headlights are included as standard equipment, and all Tayrons can carry at least three child seats thanks to two ISOFIX points in the middle row and one in the front passenger seat.
The mid-level Elegance features 19-inch alloy wheels, LED Plus headlights, silver roof rails, rear privacy glass and electrically adjustable front seats with a massaging function. Up to 30 interior ambient colours can be selected from while other niceties inside include ArtVelours Eco microfleece upholstery inserts, sports seats in the front and leatherette inserts in the door.
Topping the range is the R-Line, and this is more easily recognisable by the more aggressive-looking front bumper and R badging on the front doors. There are also 19-inch wheels and 3D LED tail-lights. On the inside, the seats carry specific R detailing, and there’s seat heating front and rear.
2025 Volkswagen Tayron equipment highlights:
Unique styling
Five- or seven-seat options
Sliding second row
Front- or all-wheel drive drivetrains
Up to 126km electric range
50kW DC charging for the PHEV
12.9- or 15-inch touchscreens
Wireless Android Auto and Apple CarPlay
Is the Volkswagen Tayron safe?
The Volkswagen Tayron has yet to be assessed by either Euro NCAP or ANCAP. However, as it does share a lot of its architecture and technology with the Volkswagen Tiguan, we expect it to perform well when it is tested. For reference, the Tiguan achieved a five-star rating from ANCAP in 2024.
Standard safety equipment includes:
Driver and front passenger airbags
Curtain and side airbags front and rear with centre airbag
Front Cross Traffic Assist
Lane keeping system
Automatic emergency braking
High-beam control Light Assist
Three ISOFIX points
How much does the Volkswagen Tayron cost to run?
All new Volkswagens in Australia come with a five-year unlimited kilometre warranty and 12 months of 24/7 roadside assistance. Volkswagen Australia also offers an Assured Service Plan so owners can clearly see what five years of servicing costs will look like.
Servicing and Warranty
Volkswagen Tayron
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
12 months
Capped-price servicing
Powertrain dependent
The WLTP combined fuel consumption for the plug-in hybrid Tayron is 18.9-17.8kWh/100km plus 0.5-0.4L/100km, with the more powerful version at 18.7-17.7kWh/100km plus 0.5-0.4L/100km. During our time a combined drive in the plug-in hybrid returned a total of just 1.3L/100km.
CarExpert’s Take on the Volkswagen Tayron
Volkswagen has done a comprehensive job of making the Tayron a comfortable and refined car to drive, though it’s not exactly what we’d call an exciting driving experience.
The longer electric driving range of the plug-in hybrid is a huge plus though, and it’s the best choice of powertrain for the Tayron. It’s just a pity that you can’t have it with seven seats.
Interested in buying a Volkswagen Tayron? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
US President Donald Trump and Prime Minister Narendra Modi announced plans to negotiate the first tranche of a Bilateral Trade Agreement by this year by cutting tariffs.
Union Commerce Minister Piyush Goyal with US Trade Representative Jamieson Greer. (Piyush Goyal/X)
Union Commerce Minister Piyush Goyal on Friday said that he had a “forward-looking” discussion with US Trade Representative Jamieson Greer on a mutually beneficial bilateral trade agreement.
Goyal had previously met Greer and US Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick during his visit to the United States earlier this month to negotiate a mutually beneficial, multi-sector Bilateral Trade Agreement (BTA) between the two countries.
“Had a forward looking discussion with @USTradeRep Jamieson Greer on a mutually beneficial Bilateral Trade Agreement. Our approach will be guided by ‘India First’, ‘Viksit Bharat’ and our Comprehensive Strategic Partnership,” Goyal said on X.
Had a forward looking discussion with @USTradeRep Jamieson Greer on a mutually beneficial Bilateral Trade Agreement.Our approach will be guided by ‘India First’, ‘Viksit Bharat’ and our Comprehensive Strategic Partnership. pic.twitter.com/0KKyWALEP7
US President Donald Trump and Prime Minister Narendra Modi announced plans to negotiate the first tranche of a mutually beneficial, multi-sector Bilateral Trade Agreement (BTA) by the fall of 2025, during the latter’s visit to the White House in February.
The two leaders resolved to expand trade and investment to make their citizens more prosperous, nations stronger, economies more innovative, and supply chains more resilient. “Through the BTA, our objective is to strengthen and deepen India-US two-way trade in the goods and services sector, increase market access, reduce tariff and non-tariff barriers, and deepen supply chain integration between the two countries,” said the Ministry of External Affairs.
They also resolved to deepen the US-India trade relationship to promote growth that ensures fairness, national security and job creation. To this end, the leaders set a bold new goal for bilateral trade – “Mission 500″ – aiming to more than double total bilateral trade to USD 500 billion by 2030.
Trump’s Tariff Threats
However, since assuming office in January, Trump has repeatedly criticised India’s tariff rates, describing the country as a “tariff king” and a “tariff abuser”. Before PM Modi’s visit to the White House, Trump had announced reciprocal tariffs on its partners, including New Delhi.
Trump recently claimed that India has agreed to cut its tariffs “way down” as he reiterated his claim that the country charges America massive tariffs that make it difficult to sell products there. “They’ve agreed. they want to cut their tariffs way down now because somebody is finally exposing them for what they’ve done,” he said.
However, India’s commerce secretary clarified that India is still negotiating with the United States and has not made any commitments so far, according to sources. Commerce Secretary Sunil Barthwal told a parliamentary committee that the US has not imposed any tariffs on India despite announcing reciprocal tariffs earlier.
India exported nearly $74 billion worth of goods to the US in 2024, which establishes the US as India’s biggest trading partner. Higher tariffs on Indian products are likely to decrease their competitive edge in the US market which will hit major labour-intensive sectors hard.
India has already said it is looking at deepening trade ties with the US, including by reducing tariff and non-tariff barriers through the bilateral trade deal. US Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick in an interaction with India Today TV said the US wants a more balanced trade relationship with India, emphasising the need for fairer trade policies.
(with agency inputs)
News india Piyush Goyal Holds ‘Forward Looking’ Talks With US Trade Representative On Bilateral Trade Deal
Market sentiment plays a crucial role in cryptocurrency investment decisions. When fear dominates, many investors panic and sell, while smart investors recognize opportunities in undervalued projects with long-term potential. During uncertain times, projects that focus on innovation, scalability, and real-world adoption tend to attract attention. While many assets experience volatility, certain cryptos continue to gain momentum due to their strong fundamentals and forward-thinking ecosystems.
Lightchain AI, priced at just $0.006 and having already raised $17 million, is emerging as a standout project for those looking beyond short-term market swings. Its future-driven ecosystem positions it as a key contender for sustained growth, making it a strategic choice for investors aiming to capitalize on the next big wave in crypto. Betting on technology-driven solutions rather than hype often leads to greater rewards.
Lightchain AI Advantage
Lightchain AI is gaining attention for its strong fundamentals and strategic positioning in the crypto market. Unlike many speculative projects, it focuses on delivering real-world applications that enhance blockchain efficiency and scalability. Its ability to integrate AI-driven solutions into decentralized ecosystems makes it a unique asset in the evolving Web3 landscape. As investors seek stability in a volatile market, Lightchain AI’s forward-thinking approach provides a compelling reason to consider it for long-term growth.
With continuous development and increasing investor confidence, it stands out as a project that prioritizes innovation, usability, and decentralization. While many cryptocurrencies rely on hype, Lightchain AI’s structured growth model and expanding ecosystem suggest it could emerge as a significant player in the coming years, making it an appealing choice for forward-looking investors.
Why Market Fear Can Create Opportunities
Market fear often triggers panic selling, leading to undervalued assets and lucrative buying opportunities for strategic investors. Historically, downturns have provided entry points for those who recognize long-term potential rather than short-term fluctuations. As sentiment shifts, assets with strong fundamentals tend to recover and outperform. The current crypto landscape reflects this trend, with uncertainty driving investors to seek projects that offer utility and resilience.
In times of market fear, capital flows into ecosystems that demonstrate innovation and real-world applications, as seen in previous cycles. Identifying projects with strong roadmaps and committed development teams is key to maximizing future gains. While some investors exit in uncertainty, seasoned market participants understand that these periods often set the stage for the next wave of high-value opportunities, making research and patience critical for success.
Can Lightchain AI Emerge as the Next Big Winner?
With market uncertainty pushing investors to seek stability and potential growth, Lightchain AI has positioned itself as a strong contender for long-term success. Unlike speculative meme coins, it focuses on real-world applications and an expanding ecosystem that attracts both retail and institutional interest. Its presale momentum has already caught the attention of early adopters, signaling strong demand.
As the market recovers, assets with innovative technology and practical use cases tend to outperform, and Lightchain AI’s future-oriented model could drive significant adoption. Many investors are now shifting toward projects that offer both growth potential and fundamental value, making Lightchain AI an attractive option. While the crypto space remains unpredictable, projects that continuously evolve and cater to the industry’s needs often emerge as major winners in the long run.
Manipal Academy of Higher Education (MAHE) has been ranked in eight narrow subjects and one broad subject in Quacquarelli Symonds (QS) World University Rankings by Subject in 2025.
In the latest rankings, MAHE has been recognised in key subject areas, including life sciences, chemistry, biological sciences, computer science and information systems, dentistry, chemical engineering, medicine, pharmacy and pharmacology, and economics and econometrics.
In the rankings among the broad subjects, life sciences have improved from last year’s rank of 317 to 293 this year.
As compared to the previous year’s ranking, two narrow subjects made entries and have been ranked under the 400 band this year (chemical engineering, and economics and econometrics).
MD Venkatesh, Vice Chancellor of MAHE, said: “This achievement highlights our continued growth, with significant strides in multiple disciplines compared to previous years. Our consistent presence in global rankings is a testament to the dedication of our faculty, students, and researchers, who work tirelessly to push the boundaries of knowledge.”
This year’s expansion into new subject areas and improvements in ranking demonstrate MAHE’s upward trajectory on the global stage. These accolades reinforce MAHE’s commitment to fostering a world-class learning environment, driving pioneering research, and contributing to society through transformative education, he added.
CNET experts researched and evaluated Cincinnati’s internet service providers to find the best choices for you, whether you value speed or affordability. If you live in Cincinnati, you mostly have two options when it comes to internet providers: Spectrum and Altafiber. (Though some households can access 5G home internet from T-Mobile, Verizon or AT&T Internet Air.) We tested the available options and recommend Altafiber as the best internet provider in Cincinnati, thanks to its combination of fast speeds and reasonable pricing.
Altafiber also offers the cheapest plan in the area, starting at $35 a month for 100 megabits per second. If speed is your priority, Altafiber also has a 2-gigabit plan for $85 a month. But keep in mind that, ultimately, your choice will depend on which providers and plans are available at your address.
Cincinnati internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
Altafiber
Fiber
$35-$85
100-2,000Mbps
None
None
None
N/A
AT&T Internet Air Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60
72-225Mbps
None
None
None
6.9
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$50-$70
500-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible phone plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 with eligible phone plans)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Cincinnati
Hughesnet: If you’re in Cincinnati or its immediate suburbs, you probably don’t need satellite internet. It’s only available at speeds of 50-100Mbps, with prices starting at $50 with a two-year contract and equipment fees.
Starlink: With prices starting at $120 a month and a hefty equipment fee of $349, Starlink outpaces some top fiber and cable internet providers. This satellite provider’s obvious appeal is its accessibility for rural residents, low latency and unlimited data. Plus, Starlink’s new internet option, Starlink Mini, lets you take your internet connection on the go.
T-Mobile Home Internet: Cincinnati residents can access 5G internet from Verizon and T-Mobile. T-Mobile’s home internet service costs $50 to $70 monthly and offers speeds up to 415Mbps.
Viasat: Another major satellite internet company, Viasat’s monthly prices start at $120, and speeds can reach up to 150Mbps, depending on the plan.
Cheap internet options in Cincinnati
Not including the pricey satellite internet options, Cincinnati residents can expect to pay between $35 to $50 for internet service. The most affordable plans in the city come from Altafiber ($35 per month), which offers 100Mbps.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Cincinnati?
Provider
Starting monthly price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Altafiber Fioptics 100Mbps
$35
100Mbps
None
Altafiber Fioptics 400Mbps
$35
400Mbps
None
Altafiber Fioptics 600Mbps
$45
600Mbps
None
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$50
500Mbps
$10 (optional)
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
318Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
85Mbps
None
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How to find internet deals and promotions in Cincinnati
The best internet deals and top promotions in Cincinnati depend on what discounts are available during that time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Cincinnati internet providers, such as Altafiber and Verizon, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Some, however, including T-Mobile Home Internet and AT&T Internet Air, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
Larry Knupp/Getty Images
How fast is Cincinnati broadband?
With limited options, it’s no surprise that Cincinnati’s median download speeds are low compared with other American cities and even those in Ohio. The Queen City places 90th on Ookla’s list of internet speeds in the nation’s 100 most populous cities, with median download speeds of about 183 megabits per second and upload speeds of about 30Mbps. Not bad, but not great. Thankfully, high-speed internet options are available in the city. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
Looking for fast download speeds? Consider Altafiber’s 2,000Mbps plan, available at select addresses, for $85 per month. If that plan isn’t available to you, Altafiber also provides a 1,000Mbps plan for $65 monthly.
Fastest internet plans in Cincinnati
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Connection type
Altafiber Fioptics 2 Gig
$85
2,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
Fiber
Altafiber Fioptics 1 Gig
$65
1,000Mbps
600Mbps
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
Cable
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines — and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email, streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Cincinnati
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. So what’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
But it doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answers to those questions are often layered and complex, the providers that come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, though we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Cincinnati?
For most Cincinnati residents, the choice of ISP will come down to either Altafiber or Spectrum. However, some city residents can access 5G internet from T-Mobile and Verizon. Prices start around $50, and higher speeds are available for those willing to pay up to $100 monthly.
Internet providers in Cincinnati FAQ
Which is the best internet service provider in Cincinnati?
Due to its variety of speeds and affordability, our pick for the best ISP in Cincinnati goes to Altafiber. Residents have reported they are happy with its service, and as a bonus, the company is headquartered in the Queen City. Its 2,000Mbps plan for $85 is a lot of speed for the price.
Yes. It comes from Altafiber, our pick for the best internet service provider in the city. Altafiber’s service comes in various plans, starting at 100Mbps and going up to a speedy 2,000Mbps, with prices ranging from $35 to $85. Altafiber’s plans are competitive on both speed and price compared to the other options in Cincinnati.
If you’re in a rare situation with access to Verizon and T-Mobile’s 5G internet, you have a decision to make. If you want higher speeds, we recommend Verizon. But for a price-for-life guarantee (and other additional perks), T-Mobile might sway you. Check out CNET’s article comparing Verizon 5G Home and T-Mobile Home Internet for more detailed information.
Measles has been spreading across America, as the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has reported more than 220 cases nationwide as of March 7.
The uptick in cases began with an outbreak in Texas, where there have been 223 cases identified since late January (as of March 11).
A new case was confirmed in a Howard County, Maryland, resident last week after the individual traveled internationally through Dulles International Airport in Washington, D.C.
U.S. MEASLES OUTBREAK: SEE THE STATES WHERE CASES HAVE BEEN REPORTED
Officials claimed that this case is not related to the Texas outbreak, warning travelers to be on the lookout for measles symptoms if they traveled through the airport around that same time.
Measles is highly contagious and is most threatening to unvaccinated individuals, Fox News’ senior medical analyst Dr. Marc Siegel previously told Fox News Digital.
WedMD CMO Dr. John Whyte (not pictured) recommended that travelers wear masks, wash their hands and stay aware of their surroundings amid measles outbreaks.(iStock)
“There is a 90% chance you will get it if you are unvaccinated and step into a room where someone with measles was two hours before,” he cautioned.
MARYLAND CONFIRMS FIRST MEASLES CASE IN TRAVELER AT MAJOR DC AIRPORT
When traveling in a confined space, such as an airplane, exposure becomes even more of a concern.
In an on-camera interview with Fox News Digital in New York City, Dr. John Whyte, WebMD chief medical officer and practicing physician, emphasized how measles is “one of the most contagious respiratory viruses.” (See the video at the top of this article.)
“The good news is, if you’re immunized, you’re unlikely to be affected.”
“Measles is much more contagious than COVID,” he said. “It’s a factor of several times more contagious.”
One infected person can impact about 10 to 15 other people, according to Whyte.
There are multiple ways to protect yourself from infection while traveling and flying, the doctor said, including being aware of your surroundings and wearing a mask in areas where cases have been detected.
When traveling in a confined space, such as an airplane, exposure becomes even more of a concern.(iStock)
The doctor also recommended “good handwashing” after touching surfaces, as well as keeping surfaces clean, since virus droplets can stick and spread when contact is made.
People who have been infected with measles often do not become symptomatic until four days after exposure, Whyte shared, so it may be difficult to track the origin of the infection.
FLORIDA ALERTS FIRST MEASLES CASE OF YEAR IN PUBLIC SCHOOL AS EXPERTS STRESS VACCINATION
Whyte mentioned that the measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine is “very effective,” although some people have chosen not to be vaccinated, which is “where we’re seeing those cases,” he said.
Since the MMR vaccine is most commonly administered to children, some adults might not remember if they received it and may be concerned about the strength of their immunity.
A booster for the MMR vaccine is available for people who lack immunity, Whyte noted.(iStock)
Whyte suggested receiving a measles titer, which is a blood test that measures antibody (immunity) levels against the disease.
This is especially important for people who are traveling to other countries, where exposure risk may be higher, the doctor added. For those lacking immunity, MMR vaccine boosters are available.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“I’d say if you’re starting to see measles in your area, and you’re concerned about whether or not you have immunity, go to your doctor and get your titers checked,” he advised.
“Otherwise, practice all those good hygiene methods that we talked about. Wash your hands. Wear a mask. Be aware of your surroundings. Clean surfaces.”
Measles cases are mostly occurring in unvaccinated, school-aged children, the data shows.(iStock)
For those who are feeling sick, Whyte encouraged staying home and abstaining from traveling to help keep others healthy.
Measles symptoms typically begin with coughing and sneezing, and then lead to a red rash on the face and body several days later.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“A lot of physicians [have] never seen measles,” Whyte noted. “So, you have to sometimes prompt your doctor if you think you might have been exposed.”
Measles can cause serious complications, the doctor warned, including brain swelling and pneumonia, particularly in older individuals.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“The good news is, if you’re immunized, you’re unlikely to be affected, even if you come into contact with someone who does have measles,” Whyte said.
“That’s the whole beauty of immunization.”
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
Holi 2025: Colour on hands, gulaal on cheeks and smiles on everyone’s faces — if you haven’t guessed already, we are talking about Holi. Youngsters sneakily splash water balloons at each other and load their water guns with bright pigments. Meanwhile, adults exchange warm hugs and stories over gujiyas and thandai. Holi is incomplete without delicious food. Dahi chaat is one of the lip-smacking treats that is savoured during this festival. There are many variations worth trying. Here are some tasty curd-based chaat recipes that you can prepare at home for a fun and flavourful celebration:
Also Read: 5 Smart Ways To Make Healthier Gujiya
Holi 2025: 10 Dahi Chaat Recipes For A Festive Feast
Holi 2025: Dahi can be used in various chaat recipes. Photo Credit: iStock
1. Dahi Papdi Chaat
A street-food speciality, papdi chaat strikes the right balance between crispness and coolness. The chilled curd combined with papdis and an array of masalas and chutneys, can be the perfect Holi treat. Click here for the full recipe.
2. Dahi Samosa Chaat
Samosa and chaat – can there be any other iconic snack combo? We think not. Imagine taking a scrumptious bite into the spice-infused mashed potato, drizzled with sweet curd. Find out the recipe here.
3. Dahi Puri
Crisp puris, which are filled with sweetened curds, chutneys, aloo and masalas, are topped with lots of sev to make this beloved street-style snack. Check out the full recipe for dahi puri here.
4. Dahi Bhalla
Who doesn’t love dahi bhallas? A must-have on festive occasions, this popular snack is generally prepared with urad dal vadas, curd and chutneys. Here’s the full recipe.
5. Bread Dahi Chaat
This quick and easy chaat is a blend of bread, green and imli chutney and of course curd. It is perfect for last-minute preparations. Full recipe here.
Also Read: How To Make Soft And Fluffy Dahi Bhalla Like A Pro
6. Dahi Aloo Chaat
Sweet, spicy and tangy – this one has it all. After all, potatoes can elevate any dish at any time. Simmered in curd, dahi aloo chaat is simply a feast for the senses. Here’s an easy-peasy recipe for you.
7. Dahi Chana Chaat
This chaat stands out for the mouthwatering use of chickpeas. Infused with protein, they help you to stay fuller for longer. So after an exhausting Holi celebration, a plate of dahi chana will make your tummy do a happy dance. Find out the recipe here.
8. Raj Kachori With Dahi
Rightfully called the king of chaats, Raj Kachori is a decadent indulgence for foodies with a love for bold flavours and crunchy textures. When the velvety dahi oozes out of the crispy puffed balls, you are in for the best snack experience. Chickpeas, boondi and pomegranate seeds add an extra dose of zing. Want the recipe? Click here.
9. Palak Patta Chaat With Dahi
Holi 2025: Palak patta chaat also uses dahi. Photo Credit: iStock
Spinach is what makes this chaat different from the rest. Until typical chaats served with papdis, palak patta chaat uses whole spinach leaves. When coated with light gram flour batter and fried, the spinach’s natural freshness beautifully blends with the creamy curd. For the full recipe, click here.
10. Dahi Kachori
Crispy kachoris and creamy dahi team up to make this yummy snack. Cracking open the deep-fried kachori offers a delectable medley of spiced lentils, tamarind and mint chutney and chaat masala for that fiery kick. Pomegranate pearls, fresh coriander and crunchy sev will leave you craving for multiple bites.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-13/Truth-about-Ren-ai-Jiao-An-integral-part-of-China-s-Nansha-Qundao-1BIcvKNmvBK/img/7e16b4f8ae6f41dfb268a6b761188142/7e16b4f8ae6f41dfb268a6b761188142.png' alt='The Philippines dispatched two coast guard vessels and one supply ship to intrude into the waters adjacent to China's Ren'ai Jiao, South China Sea, March 23, 2024. /VCG'
Since August 2023, the Philippines has repeatedly provoked and disrupted the peace in the South China Sea by exploiting a dilapidated military vessel illegally grounded at Ren’ai Jiao in the Nansha Qundao for over 20 years.
Who owns Ren’ai Jiao? Who is changing the status quo of it? Why has a rusted-out World War II Philippine warship been “grounded” there for over 20 years? And, what are the intentions of the Philippines?
CGTN here presents the facts and truth about Ren’ai Jiao.
Who owns Ren’ai Jiao?
Ren’ai Jiao is a submerged reef lying in the southeast of China’s Nansha Qundao. It’s about 16 kilometers long and 5 kilometers wide. China has indisputable sovereignty over Nansha Qundao, including Ren’ai Jiao, which is solidly grounded in history and law.
History records show that the Chinese people’s activities in the South China Sea date back more than 2,000 years. China is the first to have discovered, named and exploited the South China Sea Islands and relevant waters, and the first to have continuously, peacefully and effectively exercised sovereignty and jurisdiction over them.
After World War II, China recovered the South China Sea Islands illegally occupied by Japan. In 1948, China published an official map, reaffirming China’s sovereignty over the South China Sea Islands and their adjacent waters. In the 1950s and 1960s, the U.S. repeatedly filed applications to China for surveying there, which implied U.S. acknowledgement of China’s governing authority over the South China Sea Islands. Official maps published by Japan and other countries also marked the South China Sea Islands as belonging to China.
Ren’ai Jiao is neither “terra nullius,” nor Philippine territory, nor is it within the Philippine exclusive economic zone and continental shelf. The territorial boundaries of the Philippines were established by a series of international treaties, and the Nansha Qundao, including Ren’ai Jiao, fall outside of this scope. The so-called “contiguity or proximity” is not a valid reason for asserting sovereignty.
Ren’ai Jiao and a warship
The Philippines first stirred up issues regarding Ren’ai Jiao in 1999. That year, a Philippine military vessel, the BRP Sierra Madre, under the excuse that it got “stranded,” illegally ran aground on it.
Since then, a contingent of more than a dozen Philippine Marines and sailors has been stationed on the dilapidated warship, which has become a symbol of the Philippine outpost in the offshore islands.
The presence of the Sierra Madre prompted immediate and serious representations from China. At the time, then-Philippine President Joseph Estrada promised to tow away the warship, blaming the grounding on a “malfunction.” President Gloria Macapagal-Arroyo also pledged in 2003 not to “construct [new] facilities.”
Nevertheless, moves by the Philippines in recent years have shown that the country has reneged on its pledge to remove the grounded warship from Ren’ai Jiao.
Since 2011, there had been increasing signs that Manila hoped to consolidate the deteriorating shipwreck into a more permanent installation. It had been delivering not only food, water, fuel and other supplies to the ship, but transporting constructing materials to repair and reinforce it.
And after receiving the support gesture from the U.S., the Philippines, in March 2014, for the first time publicly acknowledged that it deliberately “placed” the warship on the shoal in 1999 to “serve as a permanent Philippine government installation.”
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-13/Truth-about-Ren-ai-Jiao-An-integral-part-of-China-s-Nansha-Qundao-1BIcvKNmvBK/img/e6968b27603244a29f35461bb759154c/e6968b27603244a29f35461bb759154c.png' alt='A rusted-out World War II Philippine warship has "grounded" on Ren'ai Jiao for over 20 years. /Xinhua'
Who is changing the status quo?
With U.S. support, the Philippines, in 2014, brought up an arbitration against China over South China Sea Islands’ sovereign issues. Two years later, the South China Sea Arbitration Tribunal issued an award and denied China’s territorial sovereignty and its maritime rights and interests there.
The Chinese government immediately rejected the arbitration, saying the award was “illegal, null and void” as it ignored historical facts, violated principles of international law and was manipulated by the U.S.
It’s known that the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) has no jurisdiction over sovereignty and territorial disputes, so the Philippines’ unilateral initiation of arbitration on the basis of UNCLOS violated the international law and the arbitral tribunal exercising jurisdiction based on the UNCLOS went beyond its powers.
Besides, territorial sovereignty is a prerequisite for claiming maritime rights, and to deny territorial sovereignty based on maritime rights is to reverse cause and effect. The Philippines’ denial of China’s territorial sovereignty over Ren’ai Jiao, based on the invalid and illegal ruling of the South China Sea arbitration, violates the ancient yet enduring principle of “the land dominates the sea” in international law and is fundamentally untenable.
Furthermore, the 2002 Declaration on the Conduct of Parties in the South China Sea (DOC) signed by China and ASEAN countries, including the Philippines, stipulated bilateral negotiations as the means of resolving border and other disputes. Clearly, the Philippines violated the rules.
“China doesn’t accept or recognize the award, nor does it accept any claim or action based on the award,” China’s foreign ministry has said, and it also urged the Philippines to immediately remove the warship from Ren’ai Jiao and restore it to its unoccupied state.
U.S. role behind the scenes
The U.S. is deeply involved in the Philippines’ infringement and provocation activities at Ren’ai Jiao, instigating and supporting the Philippines in repairing and reinforcing the illegal “grounded” warship, and sending military aircraft and warships to the scene to coordinate with the Philippines.
The U.S. government even openly voiced support for the Philippines’ provocative actions. For example, the U.S.-Philippines Mutual Defense Treaty has boosted the confidence of the Philippines in its maritime provocations.
American media and think tanks are also hyping up the issue of Ren’ai Jiao by attacking and accusing China. One typical example is Project Myoushu. The project is mainly operated by members with backgrounds in the U.S. military, and its leader Ray Powell, served in the U.S. Air Force for 35 years. The project uses social media platforms to disseminate false information, constantly attacking and smearing the normal activities of Chinese ships in the South China Sea, mainly through speculation, baseless fabrication, manipulation of public opinion, exaggeration of the “Chinese threat” theory, and incitement of regional division.
Brigade Group has announced the launch of a premium residential project, Ebony at Brigade Orchards, which is expected to generate ₹380 crore in revenue. The project spans a total development area of 0.5 million square feet in Devanahalli.
Ebony at Brigade Orchards is a joint venture residential project within the 135-acre Brigade Orchards township.
This comes after its recent launch in Chennai with the launch of Brigade Altius, which has a revenue potential of ₹1,700 crore.
Founded in 1986, Brigade Enterprises Ltd. operates across Bengaluru, Chennai, Hyderabad, Mysuru, Kochi, Gift City-Gujarat, Thiruvananthapuram, Mangaluru, and Chikkamagaluru with developments across residential, office, retail, and hotels.
The company reported a profit after tax (PAT) of ₹236 crore for its third quarter of FY2, growing by 322 per cent increase from the corresponding quarter last year. The growth, it noted was attributed to the completion of two residential towers each in Hyderabad and North Bengaluru.
The shares of the company closed at ₹948.45, down by 2.73 per cent on the BSE.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
AMANDA Seyfried je nedavno viđena u New Yorku u žutoj jakni s odgovarajućom mini suknjom. Glumica je svojim izborom boje savršeno utjelovila proljetni duh dok je u ponedjeljak izlazila iz studija ABC Television. Njezin monokromatski outfit je privukao poglede, dodatno potvrđujući njezin status moderne modne ikone.
Pronašli smo sličan kompletić
Seyfried je unijela osvježenje u ulice New Yorka nakon gostovanja u emisiji Live with Kelly and Mark, gdje je promovirala svoj novi filmski projekt Long Bright River.
Glumičin outfit sastojao se od kratkog sakoa i mini suknje. Sako s dugmadi od kornjačevine i prednjim preklopnim džepovima dao je suptilni retro štih, a kratka suknja osigurala je ravnotežu između sofisticiranosti i odvažnosti.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Uz ovaj upečatljiv outfit, Seyfried je nosila velike crne sunčane naočale i crne Gianvito Rossi Hansen čizme do koljena. Time je razigranu žutu kombinaciju upotpunila kontrastnim tonovima. Od modnih detalja odabrala je jednostavan zlatni nakit.
Ako vam se sviđa njezino izdanje, pronašli smo kompletić koji nas podsjeća na ovaj kakav nosi Seyfried.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
INDIANAPOLIS — Desmond Claude sprinted as fast as he could down the hardwood, knowing the season was in his hands and precious time was ticking off the clock. He already tried once before to tie it, flying into the fray for a floater that bounced off the back iron.
But a missed free throw gave Claude hope as he came flying across halfcourt, only for his handoff pass to be snatched amid a crashing collection of bodies. Suddenly, after such a gutsy fight, any hope of USC’s season surviving had slipped away in a 76-71 loss to Purdue.
The season-ending steal was not without controversy. Wesley Yates threw his hands up in disbelief. Coach Eric Musselman whispered expletives under his breath, shaking his head.
All game, USC (16-17) had held in a deadlock with Purdue (22-10), refusing to let up. Even as the roars of Purdue fans echoed with each back-and-forth run, USC kept coming back. They fought through early foul trouble from Claude, who finished with 18 points, and early struggles with Yates, who had 13 points.
They’d already been through a battle the night before, a double-overtime thriller that saw all five of the Trojans’ starters play more than 40 minutes. But all season, Musselman had pushed his small rotation to the brink, and Thursday, USC showed no signs of slowing.
It survived without its top scorer for long stretches. Claude picked up two quick fouls in the first half, and Musselman chose to sit him for the final 13 minutes. He returned in the second half, only to draw two more quick fouls.
With both teams deadlocked, Musselman brought Claude back in with just over 10 minutes remaining, knowing he had no other choice. From there, the Trojans floor general made up for lost time, in spite of his four fouls. He shook off a defender and hit a pull-up. Then he did it again. And again.
Claude scored 10 straight for the Trojans, hitting a pull-up with under a minute remaining to tie it.
With 28 seconds left and the game tied 71-71, Rashaun Agee was called for a foul, sending Purdue’s leading scorer, Trey Kaufman-Renn to the line. He hit both.
Claude wasted no time in trying to tie it up again, flying through the lane for a floater. But it bounced off the iron.
USC got one more chance, after Kaufman-Renn missed another free throw. This time, though, their last hopes was stripped at halfcourt.
The latest Epic Games Store giveaway features a surprisingly decent Soulslike with an interesting gameplay mechanic.
From now until March 20, Epic Games Store customers can redeem Mortal Shell for free.
All you’ve got to do is visit the Epic Games Store, login to your account and redeem Mortal Shell from the store page.
Once you’ve added Mortal Shell to your account, it’s yours to download and keep, no strings attached.
In addition to Mortal Shell, Epic Games Store customers can redeem a bonus pack for World of Warships.
The Anniversary pack contains bonuses like free cruisers and credits, not to mention camo and XP.
As for Mortal Shell, the game features similar punishing gameplay to action adventures like Dark Souls.
The twist, however, is that you can inhabit different bodies (shells) for a more varied gameplay experience.
Epic explains more: “Mortal Shell is a deep action-RPG that tests your sanity and resilience in a shattered world. Your adversaries spare no mercy, with survival demanding superior awareness and precision.
“Possess lost warriors, discover hidden sanctums, and face formidable foes.”
Epic Games Store customers have until 4pm on March 20 to redeem Mortal Shell, which will be replaced by a new game.
Next week’s free game giveaway is Jurassic World Evolution 2, which lets players set up their own dino park.
Police in Victoria have impounded a Tesla Model Y for 30 days after the electric SUV was caught travelling at 70km/h above the speed limit in the state’s border region.
On March 6, Wodonga Highway Patrol officers were driving south on Federation Way near Rutherglen when the Model Y was allegedly detected at 171km/h, with the signposted speed limit on the road being 100km/h.
The Tesla was subsequently intercepted by police and its 28-year-old driver was charged with exceeding the speed limit by more than 45km/h, which usually incurs a fine of $988 and a 12-month licence suspension.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
In addition to this, the man’s car was impounded for 30 days at a cost of $1255.
He’ll face court at a later date, while police issued a warning to other electric vehicle (EV) drivers about using their car’s rapid pace on public roads.
“We know these electric cars are capable of accelerating quickly and are very fast, but there are no excuses for these speeds and risky behaviour on our roads,” Wodonga Police warned.
BSE and NSE will be closed on March 14, 2025, for Holi. Trading activities will be paused. Banks, financial institutions, and government offices are also likely to be closed.
Stock Market Holiday: Will The Indian Stock Market Be Open Or Closed Today?
Stock Market Holiday On Holi 2025: Both the Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE) and National Stock Exchange (NSE) will be closed on Friday, March 14, 2025, for the Hindu festival of Holi. All trading activities, including equity, derivative, and settlement functions, will be paused for the day.
Along with the stock market, banks, financial institutions, and government offices will also likely be closed on March 14th in observance of Holi.
Stock Market Holiday Calendar 2025
Sr. No
Date
Day
Description
1
26-Feb-25
Wednesday
Mahashivratri
2
14-Mar-25
Friday
Holi
3
31-Mar-25
Monday
Id-Ul-Fitr (Ramadan Eid)
4
10-Apr-25
Thursday
Shri Mahavir Jayanti
5
14-Apr-25
Monday
Dr. Baba Saheb Ambedkar Jayanti
6
18-Apr-25
Friday
Good Friday
7
1-May-25
Thursday
Maharashtra Day
8
15-Aug-25
Friday
Independence Day / Parsi New Year
9
27-Aug-25
Wednesday
Shri Ganesh Chaturthi
10
2-Oct-25
Thursday
Mahatma Gandhi Jayanti/Dussehra
11
21-Oct-25
Tuesday
Diwali Laxmi Pujan
12
22-Oct-25
Wednesday
Balipratipada
13
5-Nov-25
Wednesday
Prakash Gurpurb Sri Guru Nanak Dev
14
25-Dec-25
Thursday
Christmas
Holidays falling on Saturday or Sunday are as follows:
Sr. No
Date
Day
Description
1
26-Jan-25
Sunday
Republic Day
2
6-Apr-25
Sunday
Shri Ram Navami
3
7-Jun-25
Saturday
Bakri Id
4
6-Jul-25
Sunday
Muharram
Bank Holiday For Holi Today
Banks in multiple cities including Ahmedabad, Belapur, Bhubaneswar, Chandigarh, Gangtok, Guwahati, Hyderabad (AP & Telangana), Itanagar, Jaipur, Jammu, Kolkata, Mumbai, Nagpur, New Delhi, Panaji, Patna, Raipur, Shillong, Shimla, and Srinagar will be closed on Friday, March 14 for the Holi festival.
Many banks across different states will also remain closed for the following two consecutive days (March 14 and 15) in observance of Holi celebrations.
However, it’s important to remember that bank closures might differ based on your region, as per the RBI’s holiday schedule. Checking this schedule beforehand is recommended to avoid any inconvenience while trying to use offline bank services.
Under President Trump’s encouragement for the crypto sector, the U.S. Senate Banking Committee has successfully pushed forward a bill regulating stablecoins. This marks a significant move towards having the legislation reach President Trump’s desk for his signature. The bill cleared the committee with an 18-6 vote, benefitting from the support of five Senate Democrats who joined Republicans in advancing the proposal.
Stablecoin Regulation Bill Heads Toward Trump
The U.S. Senate Banking Committee has moved forward with the cryptocurrency industry’s stablecoin regulation bill, marking a critical move towards presidential approval. After obtaining its inaugural committee endorsement, the bill aimed at regulating U.S. stablecoin issuers federally is poised for a Senate vote, with a similar bill pending in the House of Representatives.
Despite several obstacles ahead, such as reconciling differences between the Senate and House versions, the committee has successfully passed the bill with an 18-6 vote.
Among the Democrats supporting the passage of the GENIUS Act were bill co-sponsor Angela Alsobrooks and Senate Banking Committee members Mark Warner, Andy Kim, Lisa Blunt Rochester, and Ruben Gallego. Bill Hagerty, the bill’s sponsor, expressed his aim to bring the bill to a full Senate vote by the end of April.
Also read: Just In: Senator Hagerty Introduces GENIUS Act to Regulate Stablecoins
At the Senate Banking Committee meeting on Thursday, Senator Elizabeth Warren, a known skeptic of cryptocurrency, proposed several amendments to the GENIUS Act. This legislation aims to establish a legal framework allowing nonbank stablecoin issuers to operate within the U.S. economy.
Senator Elizabeth Warren suggested modifications to the GENIUS Act that would blacklist stablecoin issuers if their tokens were used for illegal activities, such as transactions with state enemies, drug trafficking, or purchasing child pornography.
She also proposed extending the Act’s regulations to include crypto exchanges and other entities dealing with stablecoins. However, her proposed amendments were rejected along party lines.
Near the end of the hearing, Elizabeth expressed strong reservations about advancing the bill, highlighting its numerous deficiencies and the timing of its progression amid reports that Donald Trump was attempting to launch his own stablecoin with a company known for legal violations. She referred to news that Trump-associated World Liberty Financial had been negotiating with the crypto exchange Binance.
Warren criticized the decision to push the bill through while Trump was allegedly making deals with what she termed a criminal stablecoin platform, cautioning that it was a mistake likely to be regretted.
Hagerty said, “It presents common sense rules that protect consumers, promote competition, and foster innovation. It’s time we provide the clarity and stability that our country and its innovators so desperately need.”
This year, the crypto industry is rallying bipartisan support in Congress for its policies. A notable bipartisan success involved overturning an IRS rule opposed by the sector. After the 2024 elections gave Republicans control of both chambers, stablecoin legislation has become a key priority under Scott’s leadership.
IPO-bound edtech major Physicswallah has appointed three independent directors to its board according to filings.
The edtech unicorn has onboarded Deepak Amitabh, Rachna Dikshit, and Nitin Savara as independent directors.
Savara, ex-deputy CFO at Zomato, holds similar roles across multiple firms., Amitabh, led PTC India and now oversees Adani Group’s flagship operations and. Dikshit, a former RBI regional director, serves as an independent director in several companies.
The edtech firm has changed the designation of Prateek Boob from executive director to wholetime director of the company for the period of five years, effective February.
Along with these three individuals, PW’s board includes Sandeep Singhal, Co-founder and Managing Partner at WestBridge Capital India Advisors, as well as the company’s co-founders, Alakh Pandey and Prateek Maheshwari. The board has reclassified the co-founders as whole-time directors from executive directors.
Recently, the company appointed Ajinkya Jain as group general counsel, company secretary, and compliance officer. In November, it appointed former Blinkit CFO Amit Sachdeva as chief financial officer following the announcement of its FY24 financial results.
Valuation doubles
Physicswallah had rasied $210 million funding round led by Hornbill Capital, which doubled its valuation to $2.8 billion. The edtech unicorn has raised $310 million till date from investors including Lightspeed Ventures, WestBridge and GSV Ventures.
The Noida-based firm, preparing to go public this year, is expected to file its draft IPO papers soon. The firm reported a consolidated loss of Rs 1,131.3 crore in FY24, a 13.5X surge from Rs 84.1 crore in the previous fiscal year.
Avengers directors Anthony and Joseph Russo are back for another expensively assembled sci-fi flick, with the release to streaming of The Electric State.
Set in an alternate 1990s where robots have been exiled following a failed uprising, the plot of The Electric State follows orphaned teenager Michelle, played by Millie Bobby Brown, who embarks on a journey across the American Southwest to find her missing brother, Christopher.
Accompanied by a robot named Cosmo and a smuggler named Keats (Chris Pratt), Michelle uncovers sinister forces behind her brother’s disappearance.
Netflix
Despite its all-star cast and reported $320 million budget, early reviews have been poor. You can make up your own mind by finding out how to watch The Electric State below, and how a VPN could be useful.
Read more: 21 TV Shows on Netflix That Are Perfect for Your Next Binge-Watch
When to watch The Electric State
The Electric State lands on Netflix in the US on Friday, March. 14.
James Martin/CNET
Netflix now starts at $8 a month for its ad-based plan, and goes up to $25 per month for the premium tier. There are two price points for its extra member fees as well, depending on whether your additional member is streaming with ads ($7) or without ($9).
How to watch The Electric State from anywhere with a VPN
Maybe you’re traveling abroad and want to stream Netflix while away from home. With a VPN, you’re able to virtually change your location on your phone, tablet or laptop to get access to TV shows and movies from anywhere in the world. There are other good reasons to use a VPN for streaming, too.
A VPN is the best way to stop your ISP from throttling your speeds by encrypting your traffic. Using a VPN is also a great idea if you’re traveling and find yourself connected to a Wi-Fi network, and you want to add an extra layer of privacy for your devices and logins. Streaming TV can be a bit smoother with a reliable, quality VPN that’s passed our tests and security standards.
You can use a VPN to stream content legally as long as VPNs are legal in your country and you have a valid subscription to the streaming service you’re using. The US and Canada are among the countries where VPNs are legal, but we advise against streaming or downloading content on illegal torrent sites. We recommend ExpressVPN, but you may opt for another provider from our best list such as Surfshark or NordVPN.
James Martin/CNET
If you’re looking for a secure and dependable VPN, our Editors’ Choice is ExpressVPN. It’s fast, works on multiple devices and provides stable streams. It’s normally $13 per month, but you can save money if you get an annual subscription.
ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
Follow the VPN provider’s instructions for installation, and choose a country where the movie will be streaming. We’ve successfully tested using Netflix and an ExpressVPN server in New York City, so that’s one location you could choose to watch the new film.
Before you open the streaming app, make sure you are connected to your VPN using your selected region. If you want to stream Netflix on more than one device, you may need to configure each one to ensure you are signed in. Go to settings and check your network connections to verify you’re logged in and connected to your VPN account.
If you run into issues with streaming, first make sure your VPN is up and running on its encrypted IP address. Double-check that you’ve followed installation instructions correctly and you’ve picked the right geographical area for viewing. If you still encounter connection problems, you may need to reboot your device. Close all apps and windows, restart your device and connect to your VPN first. Note that some streaming services have restrictions on VPN access.
Lara Trump on setting a healthy example for her children
Amid the widespread support for Robert F. Kennedy Jr.’s MAHA movement, Lara Trump — mom, wellness advocate and daughter-in-law of President Donald Trump — shared her beliefs in a healthy America with Fox News Digital.
A popular summertime treat could contain hidden dangers to kids’ health, a new study cautions.
Researchers at University College Dublin conducted a review of 21 children who became ill between 2009 and 2024 after consuming a “slush ice drink.”
A vast majority of the children, none of whom had preexisting medical conditions, became ill within an hour of having the drink.
SCHOOL MEALS RAISE EYEBROWS AS MAHA ADVOCATES URGE ‘DIFFERENT CHOICES IN THE LUNCH LINE’
The patients, who ranged in age from 2 to 6 years old, all received medical treatment in the U.K. and Ireland.
A popular summertime treat could contain hidden dangers to kids’ health, a new study cautions.(iStock)
The most prevalent symptoms included acute decrease in consciousness, hypoglycaemia (low blood sugar), metabolic acidosis (lactic acid build up in the bloodstream), pseudohypertriglyceridaemia (falsely elevated triglycerides) and hypokalaemia (low potassium levels), according to the findings, which were published in the journal Archives of Disease in Childhood.
“The children had very low blood sugar levels, were unconscious (one had a seizure) and had high levels of lactate in their blood,” lead study author Ellen Crushell, a pediatrician at Children’s Health Ireland and a clinical professor at University College Dublin, told Fox News Digital.
EXCESSIVE PHONE AND SCREEN USE TIED TO MANIC SYMPTOMS FOR ONE GROUP, STUDY FINDS
“They had high levels of glycerol in their blood and urine when sick, which disappeared when they recovered. They recovered well, but needed hospitalization and intravenous fluids.”
The researchers concluded that consumption of slush ice drinks containing glycerol may cause a syndrome called glycerol intoxication.
The majority of the children (95%) did not have continued symptoms after avoiding the drinks.
What is glycerol?
“Glycerol is used as a sweetener and to maintain the semi-frozen texture of some (not all) slush ice drinks,” Crushell said.
“It is being used more often in recent years as a sugar substitute,” she noted. “Large doses can be harmful to small children.”
The researchers concluded that consumption of slush ice drinks containing glycerol may cause a syndrome called glycerol intoxication.(iStock)
The effect of sudden illness after consuming a slush drink had never been reported in medical literature, Crushell noted.
This study did have some limitations, the researchers acknowledged.
“The numbers are small and include only the sickest children who were brought to emergency departments and who were referred on to specialists in inherited metabolic disorders,” Crushell said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“They were referred because their symptoms were similar to those of some rare metabolic diseases. We do not know the extent of children who may develop milder symptoms.”
The other limitation is that the amount of glycerol ingested in the various slush drinks is unknown, she added.
Recommendations for parents
Crushell noted that slush ice drinks “do not convey health benefits at any age” and are not recommended as part of a healthy, balanced diet.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
The UK Food Standards Agency and the Food Safety Authority of Ireland (FSAI) have both issued guidance recommending that children 4 and under avoid consuming slush ice drinks containing glycerol, and for children 5 and up to only drink them in moderation.
The researcher noted that slush ice drinks “do not convey health benefits at any age” and are not recommended as part of a healthy, balanced diet. (iStock)
“The use of slush ice machines by children in the home should be monitored,” Crushell advised. “Parents and guardians should check the ingredients of syrups used to make slush ices in the home for the presence of glycerol and follow the manufacturer’s instructions for use.”
The researchers hope this new study could lead to the development of new policies and guidance in related to glycerol ingestion.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Fox News Digital reached out to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and to a leading manufacturer of slush drinks requesting comment.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Bollywood actress Alia Bhatt is all set to ring in her 32nd birthday on March 15, but she decided to start the celebrations a little early. On March 13, the actress hosted a pre-birthday bash for the media, making sure to include the ever-present paparazzi in her special celebration. And of course, by her side was her husband, Ranbir Kapoor, ready to shower her with love – and a little mischief. The celebration was intimate yet full of joy, with Alia cutting a gorgeous two-tier cake, as seen in videos circulating on Instagram.
The actress’ birthday cake was a beautiful creation with a buttercream finish. It was decorated with fresh flowers and what looked like berries, giving it a simple yet elegant look. The tiers were neatly stacked, and the cake sat beautifully on the table as the centre of the celebration – perfect for the intimate gathering.
Also Read: Alia Bhatt And Ranbir Kapoor’s Private Chef Shares What They Ate In The ‘Past Few Days’
As she stood before the cake, cameras rolling, the paps went all out, singing the classic birthday tune – “Baar baar ye din aaye, baar baar ye dil gaaye”. Their enthusiasm was unmatched as they cheered as she cut the cake, “Happy birthday Aloo!” (Yes, her adorable nickname lives on.)
Alia, then playfully, took a spoonful and happily fed herself first, doing a little happy dance before finally sharing a bite with Ranbir. “It’s very yummy,” she declared to the paps.
But Ranbir Kapoor wasn’t going to let the moment pass without some fun. In a classic Bollywood rom-com move, he took a spoonful of buttercream and pretended to feed Alia. Just as she eagerly opened her mouth for the bite, he smeared the cream on her nose instead. The actress scrunched up her nose, wiped it off, and – like the foodie we all relate to – licked it.
Also Read: Alia Bhatt’s Throwback Post From France Featured This Yummy Parisian Treat
And just when we thought the moment couldn’t get any cuter, Ranbir leaned in and planted a kiss on her forehead. With cake, love, and laughter, Alia’s pre-birthday bash was as wholesome as it gets. And if this is how the pre-celebration went, we can only imagine how grand March 15 is going to be.
Official data has shown that China remains a top destination for transnational investment, and China welcomes foreign firms to invest in the country, Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Mao Ning said at a regular news briefing on Thursday.
According to Mao, the number of foreign-funded companies in China had grown to nearly 1.24 million by 2024, with actual utilized foreign investment amounting to 20.6 trillion yuan ($2.87 trillion).
Some 60,000 foreign-invested companies were established in China in 2024 alone, a 9.9-percent year-on-year increase. The return rate of FDI in China has remained at approximately 9 percent over the past five years, ranking among the highest around the world, she said.
This year’s government work report notes that China will encourage foreign investors to increase their reinvestment in the country, and it will ensure equal treatment for foreign-funded enterprises in fields such as production factor access, license applications, standards setting and government procurement.
“No matter how the external environment changes, China has always fulfilled its commitment to high-level opening up. China welcomes foreign companies to invest and deepen their presence in China to share its dividends and achieve common development,” Mao said.
There has been a steady increase in the registration of documents and the revenue generated from it. This has been due to an increase in building permits issued over the years. After a major reform, the introduction of self-certification scheme in July 2024, there has been a sharp increase in issuing building permission, with permissions issued already reaching 59,910 in the current year, surpassing total permits issued in the previous fiscal, according to the State’s Economic Survey for 2024-25 released on Thursday.
The number of documents registered in Tamil Nadu has shown consistent growth over the years – from 25.88 lakh in 2019-20 to 33.23 lakh in 2023-24, and 33.24 lakh estimated for 2024-25. During the same period, the revenue generated from this service has increased from ₹11,028 crore to ₹18,825 crore, and is projected to be ₹22,814 crore for the current financial year, the survey said.
Real estate is one of the major components in the services sector in the State. The sector witnessed a real annual growth rate of 7.97 per cent from 2020-21 to 2023-24. During the same period, its sub-sector – real estate – grew at 9.41 per cent; trade, repair, hotels and restaurants at 7.98 per cent; transport and storage at 7.67 per cent; public administration at 5.74 per cent and financial services at 4.69 per cent, the survey said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
BRENDOVI Massena Lab i Unimatic nastavljaju suradnju novim modelom sata nadahnutim svemirom. Riječ je o satu U1-SPG NASA Artemis, koji će biti dostupan u ograničenom izdanju, a ističe se zagasitom narančastom bojom. Što se tiče poveznice s NASA-om, ovaj model odaje počast programu Artemis, čiji je prvi let bio u studenom 2022.
Kućište je premazano narančastim Cerakote premazom, koji podsjeća na boju SLS rakete korištene u misijama Artemis. Cerakote je keramički premaz koji se obično koristi u svemirskoj i automobilskoj industriji zbog estetskih i antikorozivnih svojstava.
Samo jedan sat po kupcu
Kućište je promjera 41.5 mm i debljine 13.2 mm. Jednosmjerni rotirajući okvir i krunica premazani su dubokom sivom nijansom Cerakote premaza, što im daje mat teksturu. Brojčanik također slijedi svemirsku temu. Crne je mat boje, a iznad šest sati se ističe vintage NASA logo.
Svi detalji, od kazaljki do oznaka na luneti, imaju bež Super-LumiNova premaz za bolju vidljivost u mraku, što satu daje retro izgled.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Na stražnjoj strani kućišta nalazi se ugraviran NASA Artemis logo, serijski broj (od ukupno 99 primjeraka) i oznaka vodootpornosti od 300 metara dubine. U1-SPG koristi automatski Seiko NH34A mehanizam.
Sat će biti dostupan po cijeni od 1295 američkih dolara, a svaki će kupac biti ograničen na samo jedan primjerak. Više možete doznati ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Shohei Ohtani is coming home as a World Series champion, and demand for tickets to the Dodgers’ season-opening series in Tokyo is fierce.
Want one? The lowest-priced ticket available on StubHub as of Wednesday afternoon: $1,855 for the series opener next week; $1,352 for the second and final game, in both cases including fees. By the time you read this, those tickets might no longer be available.
If you live in Japan, the Dodgers offered a shortcut: Pay $500 to join their new fan club, securing the right to buy two tickets to one of the games.
On the day they signed Ohtani, the Dodgers declared their intention to paint Japan in Dodger blue. On the day they signed Roki Sasaki, they shared their plan for a Dodgers fan club in Japan.
“That is something Premier League and European soccer clubs already do, amassing international fans,” Dodgers president Stan Kasten said then. “We’re doing a pilot program to start that and see how it does.”
For now, the fan club offers four levels of membership. The top level — at about $500 per person, and sold out this year at 1,200 members — offered the chance to buy two tickets to a Tokyo Series game “on a first-come-first-served basis.”
Top level members also got what was billed as an “ultra rare collector’s item” — a ticket with Dodger Stadium dirt from the game in which the Dodgers clinched the National League West championship against the San Diego Padres. Ohtani had three hits in that game, including a double against countryman Yuki Matsui.
The other membership levels cost about $120, $100 and $45 annually. Of the four membership levels, the top three include Ohtani bobblehead dolls and other promotional items, plus discounts on Dodgers fan events in Japan. (Ohtani bobblehead dolls can sell for $100 or more on EBay. On the Dodgers’ website Wednesday, the cheapest ticket to the first Ohtani bobblehead night this season was $132.)
All fan club membership levels include discounts on tickets and merchandise at Dodger Stadium.
The Dodgers drive more international sales on StubHub than any other major league team, the company said. Dodgers tickets this year have been bought by fans in 29 countries outside the United States and Canada, the company said, but most often by fans in Japan.
Over the last five years, Ohtani merchandise has accounted for 57% of total Fanatics sales of Major League Baseball merchandise in Japan, Fanatics said. In the one year since the Dodgers signed Ohtani, the company said, its sales of Dodgers merchandise in Japan jumped “more than 2,000%.”
Joel Wolfe, the agent for Sasaki, said he had visited multiple ballparks in Japan with a team store for home team merchandise and a kiosk for Dodgers merchandise.
For the Tokyo Series, although MLB has set up a fan festival in Japan, the Dodgers have put up their own. The World Series championship trophy is on display, as are more than 200 bobbleheads. An area of the exhibition is devoted to Ohtani.
“We’ve done this, really for the first time, only in Japan,” Dodgers vice president Michael Spetner told the Japan Times, “and are bringing the Dodgers here to meet our fans.”
The Dodgers’ Japan fan club is not open to fans outside Japan. The Dodgers do not currently have a fan club for American fans.
When it comes to travel bags, Tommy Hilfiger is a name that stands out for its quality, style, and durability. With a wide range of options to choose from, Tommy Hilfiger travel bags are designed to cater to different travel needs. Whether you’re looking for a spacious backpack, a stylish overnighter trolley, or a versatile duffel bag, Tommy Hilfiger has the perfect travel companion for you. In this article, we’ll explore the top 7 Tommy Hilfiger travel bags that offer both style and convenience, helping you make an informed decision for your next travel adventure.
Stylish Tommy Hilfiger travel bags: sleek, durable, iconic, and adventure-ready.
The Hilfiger Joshua Backpack is a sleek and functional travel bag designed for everyday use. With multiple compartments and padded shoulder straps, this backpack offers both style and comfort. Whether you’re traveling for work or leisure, the Hilfiger Joshua Backpack is a versatile choice for modern travelers.
The Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-KENDALL0815 is a versatile and durable travel bag that combines style and functionality. With a spacious main compartment and multiple pockets, this duffel bag offers ample storage space for your travel essentials. The adjustable shoulder strap and padded handles make it easy to carry, making it an ideal choice for frequent travelers.
The Tommy Hilfiger Carolina Overnighter Trolley is a stylish and functional travel bag designed for short trips. With a durable ABS construction and spacious interior, this trolley bag offers both style and convenience. The 360-degree spinner wheels and telescopic handle make it easy to maneuver, while the TSA lock ensures the security of your belongings.
The Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-JORDEN081504 is a versatile and stylish backpack designed for modern travelers. With a padded laptop compartment and multiple pockets, this backpack offers ample storage space for your essentials. The breathable mesh back panel and padded shoulder straps ensure comfort, making it an ideal choice for daily commutes and travel.
The Tommy Hilfiger Memphis Overnighter Trolley is a stylish and functional travel bag designed for short trips. With a durable ABS construction and spacious interior, this trolley bag offers both style and convenience. The 360-degree spinner wheels and telescopic handle make it easy to maneuver, while the TSA lock ensures the security of your belongings.
The Tommy Hilfiger Matias Polyester Backpack is a stylish and functional travel bag designed for everyday use. With a spacious main compartment and padded shoulder straps, this backpack offers both style and comfort. Whether you’re traveling for work or leisure, the Tommy Hilfiger Matias Backpack is a versatile choice for modern travelers.
The Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-MARLON08 is a versatile and durable travel bag that combines style and functionality. With a spacious main compartment and multiple pockets, this duffel bag offers ample storage space for your travel essentials. The adjustable shoulder strap and padded handles make it easy to carry, making it an ideal choice for frequent travelers.
Best 3 features of the top Tommy Hilfiger travel bags
Best Tommy Hilfiger travel bags
Material
Dimensions
Capacity
Weight
Hilfiger Joshua Backpack
Polyester
18 x 11 x 5 inches
20 liters
500 grams
Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-KENDALL0815
Polyester
22 x 12 x 11 inches
40 liters
1.5 kg
Tommy Hilfiger Carolina Overnighter Trolley
ABS
20 x 14 x 8 inches
35 liters
3 kg
Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-JORDEN081504
Polyester
18 x 12 x 6 inches
25 liters
700 grams
Tommy Hilfiger Memphis Overnighter Trolley
ABS
20 x 14 x 8 inches
35 liters
3 kg
Tommy Hilfiger Matias Polyester Backpack
Polyester
17 x 12 x 6 inches
22 liters
600 grams
Tommy Hilfiger Polyester TH-MARLON08
Polyester
22 x 12 x 11 inches
40 liters
1.5 kg
Similar articles for you
Lightweight luggage bags for travellers who dont want to be weighed down: 10 options that we recommend
Travel in style with the best trolley bags starting at ₹1599 which makes budget travel a possibility
Best cabin bag suitcases to buy: Top 10 picks that are lightweight, stylish and ideal for easy travel
Best travel bags with wheels for easy and convenient journey: Top 8 sturdy, ergonomic and easy-glide options
Worried about the one-cabin-bag rule? Check out our top picks for cabin suitcases with accessible laptop compartments
FAQs on tommy hilfiger travel bags
What are the price ranges for Tommy Hilfiger travel bags?
The price of Tommy Hilfiger travel bags varies depending on the size, material, and design. You can find options ranging from budget-friendly to premium quality, catering to different price ranges.
Are Tommy Hilfiger travel bags suitable for international travel?
Yes, Tommy Hilfiger travel bags are designed to meet international travel standards, offering durable construction, ample storage space, and security features such as TSA locks for hassle-free travel.
What are the key features to look for in a Tommy Hilfiger travel bag?
When choosing a Tommy Hilfiger travel bag, consider features such as material, size, storage capacity, security features, and convenience, ensuring that the bag meets your specific travel needs and preferences.
Are there any new releases of Tommy Hilfiger travel bags in the current year?
Tommy Hilfiger regularly introduces new travel bag designs and collections, offering updated styles, materials, and features to cater to the latest travel trends and technology.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
Mark Hoppus recently confirmed he is soon bringing his turbulent life to fans around the world in a more intimate way than ever before. The multi-talented star behind such acts as blink-182 and +44 has detailed portions of his life in a brand new memoir titled Fahrenheit-182. The book will venture into the formation and degradation of his pop-punk bands, as well as his battle with cancer.
And, as if that wasn’t exciting enough for British fans, he’ll be sitting down to talk about this new adventure in May this year to a live audience. An Evening with Mark Hoppus will be hitting London’s Savoy Theatre on Monday, May 5, 2025. There, on this one-night-only event, the 52-year-old star will be discussing the ins-and-outs of his book, life, touring, and more. Tickets are about to be released; here’s what you need to know:
Electric vehicle (EV) prices are on the slide, and the Cupra Born is ‘Exhibit A’ of this developing trend.
The sporty Spanish electric hatchback arrived Down Under back in 2023 with a price tag of $59,990 before on-road costs, which held firm through turbulent times for EVs… until now.
Amidst cuts to prices across the EV market, Cupra has attacked 2025 with aggressive nationwide drive-away pricing for Born, discounting it by up to $19,400. That equates to savings of 29 per cent – mind-boggling, even in the current climate.
So, where does that leave this new-age compact performance car? Well, it’s now cheaper than just about all of its rivals.
You can throw a blanket over the Abarth 500e, Smart #3, Volkswagen Golf GTI and Mini Cooper SE, all of which sit in the $55,000-60,000 bracket before on-road costs – a decent chunk more than the Born.
WATCH: Paul’s video review of the 2023 Cupra Born
Given the niche nature of an electric Cupra hatch, there’s not much else you’d cross-shop it with.
Does that make the Born a slam-dunk selection for new car buyers chasing a European urban runabout with some flair? Or is there more to the story? Let’s find out.
How does the Cupra Born compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Cupra Born against similarly sized vehicles.
Cupra
Born
How much does the Cupra Born cost?
The Cupra Born currently comes in just one single variant, with either four or five seats. Cupra is offering discounts to the tune of over $15,000 on MY23 and MY24 Born models until the end of March, or while stocks last.
Model
Drive-away price
Cupra Born
$47,090*
Cupra Born with Interior Package
$49,990
At the time of publication, however, it appears Cupra Australia has exhausted its supply of un-optioned Born vehicles and is now advertising a stockpile of Borns with Interior Pack from $49,990 drive-away – the spec you see here.
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
What is the Cupra Born like on the inside?
The Cupra Born has stacks of interior wow factor for a sub-$50k electric vehicle.
Upon sliding into the driver’s seat, you’re greeted by an expansive glasshouse enhanced by a raked windscreen and split A-pillar.
Wherever you look there are unique, high-end finishes, and that’s accentuated by the $2900 Interior Pack fitted to our tester. The optional upgrade package brings front sports trimmed in blue suede, which oozes European luxury.
Not only are the pews stylish, they’re also supremely comfortable with plenty of cushioning and side bolstering, plus adjustable lumbar and thigh support.
It doesn’t end there, either. Both front seats feature 12-way power adjustment, three-stage heating and a massage function to top it off – there’s really no excuse for being uncomfortable in the driver’s seat.
That doesn’t change when you reach out and grasp the perforated leather steering wheel, which sit perfectly in the hands. It features ergonomic contours and heating for cold winter mornings, as well as an eye-catching woven centre panel.
In addition to the two major touch points, there are several other nice touches scattered through the cabin. The central tunnel and door cards wear suede inserts, and metallic finishes can be found throughout.
There are less desirable hard plastics too, but only where you’d expect them to be. While the cabin undoubtedly presents beautifully, there are some flaws hidden beneath the surface, namely in the technology.
The Born features a 5.3-inch digital instrument binnacle and 12-inch infotainment touchscreen, both of which boast clean graphic designs and uncluttered layouts. It’d be nice if the instrument screen was paired with a head-up display (HUD), as the font for your speed and efficiency readouts is on the smaller side.
Angled towards the driver, the infotainment screen is well within reach, and defaults to a smartphone style app grid menu system.
Physical buttons are nowhere to be seen, so it’s all about touch inputs, from the screen itself to capacitative sliders that control audio volume and cabin temperature. Cupra has gone down a similar route by fitting the steering wheel with haptic buttons, and it’s all to the Born’s detriment.
Minimalist screen-centric interiors can work, but there has been pushback against recent VW Group technology for good reason. The haptic steering wheel buttons simply aren’t user-friendly – it’s easy to press the wrong button and smooth plastic surface isn’t tactile to use.
For an interior that’s generally low on distractions, faffing around with steering wheel controls quickly becomes very distracting. The same can be said for the volume and climate sliders.
The infotainment system has sharp processing in its favour but is down on functionality compared to some rivals, lacking satellite navigation or the option of wireless smartphone mirroring. Instead, phones need to be hooked up via USB-C outlets in the centre console.
Cupra’s driver profile feature is great for moulding the system to your preferences, with the option to set up app shortcuts at the bottom of the centre screen for easy access. A nine-speaker Beats sound system is reserved for Borns fitted with the Interior Pack, and I wouldn’t say it’s a huge drawcard.
One advantage that the Born does have over its rivals in the small car segment is plenty of cabin storage. Deep storage bins are carved into the door cards, and a similarly cavernous tray sits below the centre stack. A wireless charging pad is incorporated into the centre console.
The second row is equally spacious, with ample room for both people and their belongings.
A three-seat rear bench is standard, but the Interior Pack turns the Born into a four-seater, which is probably how I would option the car.
With one less potential passenger, each rear occupant has more space to spread out, and most adults will be able to find a comfortable seating position.
Headroom isn’t an issue for six-footers, and the front seat backs are gentle on cramped knees. Air vents are a notable omission, but the windows are nice and big.
Road trip essentials including books, snacks and electronics fit snugly in the large door bins and shallow map pockets, while a pair of USB outlets is on hand to keep devices charged up.
The absence of a middle seat allows the centre armrest and integrated cupholders to remain in permanent use.
Behind the second row, the Born is blessed with 385 litres of boot capacity, more than any of its closest rivals. In addition to raw space, you get baggage hooks and a 12V power socket, while the rear bench folds flat in 60/40 fashion.
There’s even a ‘ski slot’ opening between the boot and second row – perfect for trips to the snow… if you’re confident taking a rear-wheel drive EV up the slopes.
Parents in the market for a Born can tick the child safety box, as ISOFIX and top tether points are attached to both rear outboard seats.
Dimensions
Cupra Born
Length
4322mm
Width
1809mm
Height
1540mm
Wheelbase
2766mm
Boot capacity
385 litres
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
Just one drivetrain is currently offered in the Australian-market Born… until the faster VZ arrives later this year.
Model
Cupra Born
Drivetrain
Single-motor electric
Battery
77kWh
Power
170kW
Torque
310Nm
Drive type
Rear-wheel drive
Weight
1960kg (tare)
0-100km/h (claimed)
7.0 seconds
Claimed range (WLTP cycle)
511km (standard) 475km (Performance Pack)
Claimed energy consumption
17.0kWh/100km
Observed energy consumption
20.4kWh/100km (equiv. 377km range)
Max DC charge rate
170kW
A new performance flagship – the Born VZ – will arrive during the second quarter of this year, bringing with it a more powerful 240kW/545Nm rear electric motor and a larger 79kWh battery pack.
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
How does the Cupra Born drive?
The unique dimensions of the Born have a significant bearing on how it drives, and what buyers should ultimately expect from Cupra’s smallest electric offering in Australia.
I went into this review thinking the Born was going to be a light, nimble city hatch that’ll turn on a dime and willingly dart in and out of traffic. That’s not quite the reality, and it was apparent as soon as the car arrived in my driveway.
The first thing you notice about the Born is that it’s quite big. At 4.3 metres long, this ‘little’ EV is longer than most rivals including the Golf GTI, and it also stands quite tall.
Then there’s the topic of weight. The Born tips the scales at 1927kg – nearly half a tonne heavier than the GTI, and 147kg more than a base Smart #3.
That creates some issues for the not-so-little Born. Rewarding handling dynamics are a key USP for Cupra as a brand, but I can only imagine that it’s very difficult to make a 2.0-tonne electric car that handles like a traditional hot hatch.
To Cupra’s credit, they’ve imbued the Born with some entertaining driving characteristics, but the model still has a clearly defined dynamic ceiling.
You feel the extra kilograms on the road, especially when punching the throttle – acceleration is brisk and smooth, but never exhilarating. After an initial burst of electric torque, the thrills taper off when approaching 100km/h, which isn’t unusual for EVs with more modest outputs.
The hotter Born VZ is bound to address this when it arrives in a few months. Set to arrive in April or May, the sharper flagship will arrive with an extra 70kW and 245Nm – enough to improve the Born’s 0-100km/h sprint by 1.4s.
While you can have some fun with the rear-wheel drive layout in certain situations, the Born is prone to understeer when taking corners at speed. Regardless, rear-wheel drive hatches are few and far between, and the layout remains a key selling point of the Born.
When driven a little less vigorously, the direct and well-weighted steering system in the Born is a pleasure to interact with.
Cupra has opted against piping synthetic engine noise into the cabin, which can be viewed as either a pro or con depending on your taste. I didn’t mind the silence personally, but many value sound as a key source of engagement behind the wheel.
All-in-all, the Born feels more like a warm small crossover of sorts rather than a hot hatch. It offers a smoother ride than you might expect, gliding over imperfections in the road with ease.
The compliant ride is down to a MacPherson strut front and multi-link rear independent suspension setup with passive damping and Cupra’s preferred spring rates, which are firmer but expertly judged for Australian roads.
Regenerative braking can be adjusted between the drive modes, with the sportiest ‘Cupra’ providing aggressive levels of regen. It takes stress off the undersized rear drum brakes, and is a fun way to slow the car down, even if it won’t come to a complete stop without stepping on the left pedal.
As a city car, the Born’s credentials are bolstered by the inclusion of desirable convenience features. A surround-view camera and parking sensors at both ends of the vehicle make parking a breeze, despite its chunky dimensions.
Outside city limits the Born maintains its mature demeanour. Wind and road noise remains muted on the highway, while adaptive cruise control is on hand to take a load off the driver over long journeys.
With that said, the suite of advanced driver assist systems leaves a bit to be desired. The Born isn’t capable of semi-autonomous driving, missing out on the lane-centring feature built into VW Group’s Travel Assist system. It also misses out on traffic sign recognition and speed limiting – at least in Australia.
A slew of drive modes are at your disposal when the road turns twisty or rough, from eco and comfort to individual, performance, and Cupra.
The latter offers the most enthusiast regen and throttle response, lending itself to spirited driving.
It comes at the cost of efficiency – over one week over mixed driving we saw 20.4kWh/100km – but the Born can easily post respectable range figures when driven sensibly.
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
What do you get?
Two option packages are available with the Cupra Born, which comes as standard in a single trim level.
Cupra Born highlights:
19-inch black and copper Typhoon alloy wheels
Tyre pressure monitoring
Heated, power-folding exterior mirrors
LED headlights, tail lights, fog lights
Automatic headlights with auto high-beam
Rain-sensing wipers
Tinted rear windows
Rear roof spoiler
5.3-inch digital instrument binnacle
12-inch infotainment touchscreen
Apple CarPlay, Android Auto (wired)
Wireless phone charging
DAB+ digital radio
4 x USB ports
Surround-view camera
Leather, heated steering wheel
Front bucket seats
Floor mats
Keyless entry and start
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Dual-zone climate control
Aluminium pedals
Sports suspension
Driving profile selection
Progressive (variable-ratio) steering
Options
A pair of option packages are offered with the Born.
Interior Package: $2900
Aurora Blue, suede-trimmed, front bucket seats
Heated front seats
12-way power adjustable front seats with massaging
2-seat rear bench
Heated washing jets
Beats premium sound system – 9-speaker, 395W
Performance Package: $2600
20-inch firestorm alloy wheels in black and silver
235mm Michelin Pilot Sport 4 tyres
2-seat rear bench
Adaptive damping
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool.
Is the Cupra Born safe?
The Cupra Born wears a five-star ANCAP safety rating, based on 2022 Euro NCAP tests.
Category
Cupra Born
Adult occupant protection
93 per cent
Child occupant protection
89 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
73 per cent
Safety assist
80 per cent
Standard safety features include:
7 airbags incl. front-centre
AEB incl. Pedestrian, Cyclist detection
Adaptive cruise control
Driver fatigue monitoring
Lane Assist
Lane departure warning
Lane keep assist
Park Assist
Parking sensors front, rear
Proactive passenger protection
Side Assist
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic alert
Exit Warning
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
How much does the Cupra Born cost to run?
Like the wider Cupra line-up, the Born is backed by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
Ownership Program
Cupra Born
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
EV battery warranty
8 years, 160,000km
Service intervals
12 months or 15,000 kilometres
Total service costs (3yr/5yr)
$990 – 3 years $1590 – 5 years
To see how the Cupra Born compares with its rivals, use our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Cupra Born
Despite receiving no updates since its 2023 launch, the Cupra Born makes more sense now than ever before.
It remains a bit of an oddball, with unique proportions and a performance bite that doesn’t quite match its visual bark.
That’s not to say the sexy styling isn’t welcome, because the Born is a stunning vehicle inside and out. That optional blue interior just pops, and all the high traffic areas are finished in high quality materials.
Frustrating capacitative controls and ADAS omissions compromise everyday usability, but those drawbacks aren’t dealbreakers.
The Born is a practical thing, too. Four adults can travel in comfort, and there’s plenty of room in the boot for weekends away.
We already knew all that, though. More importantly, the purchase of a Born actually makes some semblance of financial sense now.
Many will argue that EVs continue to be a risky buy, and those who’ve bought one of these over the last few months would probably agree.
But it’s also undeniable that the Born is currently a relative bargain compared to its rivals. As we speak, you’d have to stump up at least another $10,000 to get into the closest electric competitors – the Smart #3, Abarth 500e, and Mini Cooper SE.
Pivoting to a petrol-powered equivalent doesn’t change the value equation much, either. Want to get behind the wheel of everyone’s favourite practical performance hero, the Volkswagen Golf GTI? That’ll be $60k on the road, minimum. Even a base Hyundai i30 N will set you back $55,000 drive-away.
The price wars are likely to continue, especially as the electric vehicle market grows, but that’s a universal trend that also poses issues for more traditional ICE models.
Perhaps the more pressing threat to the Born is the imminent arrival of its meaner twin – the Born VZ. But without any pricing information, it’d be irresponsible to make assumptions about what effect the new flagship will have on base Born values.
So, if your heart is set on something sporty and (relatively) compact, the Born is now a good bet, at least until the end of March.
Interested in buying a Cupra Born? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
The SEC had sought the ministry’s assistance to serve the summons under the Hague Convention for Service of Judicial and Extrajudicial Documents in Civil and Commercial Matters
The summons was forwarded after a request from the Central Authority of the USA, the report said, citing the government note. (Representational Image)
The union ministry of law and justice in February forwarded a summons from the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) to a sessions court in Ahmedabad for it to be served on industrialist Gautam Adani at his address in the city, according to The Hindu.
“Under consideration is a request for service of summons received from the central authority US, under the Hague Convention for Service of Judicial and Extrajudicial Documents in Civil and Commercial Matters, 1965,” the government said in an internal note provided to the newspaper.
The summons was forwarded after a request from the Central Authority of the USA, the report said, citing the government note.
“We may, if approved, forward the documents to the District & Sessions Court, Ahmedabad, Gujarat, for effecting service upon the respondent,” the note said.
The SEC charged Gautam Adani and his nephew Sagar with orchestrating a bribery scheme involving hundreds of millions of dollars to Indian government officials to secure their commitment to purchase energy at above-market rates, according to the US regulator’s website. The SEC also charged Cyril Cabanes, an executive of Azure Power “for conduct arising out of a massive bribery scheme”.
The SEC alleged that Adani Green raised more than $175 million from US investors, and Azure Power’s stock was traded on the New York Stock Exchange.
News business Union Law Ministry Forwarded US SEC Summons For Gautam Adani To Gujarat Court In February: Report
The live price of the Bitget Token crypto is $ 4.20356957.
The BGB price could reach a high of $14.56 in 2025.
Bitget Token coin price with a potential surge, may reach a high of $41.60 by 2030.
In the infinitely expanding world of the crypto-verse, the Bitget cryptocurrency exchange’s native token “BGB” made its debut in 2021. Notably, it is the exclusive platform token for the centralized exchange giant, the Bitget exchange, and also the decentralized Bitget Wallet ecosystem.
As a utility token of the cryptocurrency exchange, it is widely used for trading, paying transaction fees, and participating in platform activities. Further, its investors have special access to the platform’s unique perks.
Are you one of many who are planning on investing in exchange tokens before the altcoin market kickstarts? Hop aboard as in this article, we have covered the market trends, sentiments, and possible Bitget Token Price Prediction 2025, 2026 – 2030, and the years between them.
Overview
Cryptocurrency
Bitget Token
Token
BGB
Price
$ 4.20356957 -0.43%
Market cap
$ 5,044,283,487.2947
Circulating Supply
1,200,000,000.00
Trading Volume
$ 129,057,149.6824
All-time high
$8.49 on 27th December 2024
All-time low
$0.05836 on 11th August 2023
Bitget Token Price Prediction 2025
Suppose this exchange token comes up with more fundamental updates and witnesses a meteoric rise in adoption. Moreover, adapting to regulatory standards of top countries like the USA could push the price of its native token to achieve a new all-time high in 2025.
Under such an optimistic outlook, the Bitget price could smash its target price of $10 and achieve a new high of $14.56 this year. On the contrary, a bearish setback or unfavorable cryptocurrency regulations could pull the price of the BNB token toward its annual low of $5.32.
Considering the present market sentiments, the Bitget Token (BGB) price could conclude the year 2025 with an average trading price of $9.94.
Year
Potential Low
Potential Average
Potential High
2025
$5.32
$9.94
$14.56
Curious to explore the long-term price prospects of the largest altcoin by market capitalization? Read Ethereum Price Prediction to uncover the possible mysteries!
BGB Coin Price Chart 2026 – 2030
Year
Potential Low ($)
Potential Average ($)
Potential High ($)
2026
8.67
14.24
19.82
2027
11.29
17.72
24.16
2028
15.47
22.57
29.68
2029
19.68
27.73
35.79
2030
23.50
32.55
41.60
Bitget Token Cryptocurrency Forecast 2026
During 2026, the BGB price may range between $8.67 and $19.82. With this, the average price could land at around $14.24.
BGB Crypto Price Prediction 2027
By 2027, the value of a single Bitget Token price could reach a maximum value of $24.16 with a potential low of $11.29. With this, the average price could land at around the $17.72 level.
Bitget Token Crypto Price Target 2028
The BGB price could range between $15.47 and $29.68 for the year 2028. Moreover, the altcoin could have an average trading price of $22.57.
BGB Price Analysis 2029
Looking forward to 2029, the single Bitget token price could reach a maximum value of $35.79 with a potential low of $19.68. Considering the buying and selling pressure, the average trading price could settle at $27.73.
Bitget Token Crypto Price Forecast 2030
The BGB coin price could range between $23.50 and $41.60 for the year 2030. Moreover, the altcoin could have an average trading price of $32.55.
Wondering if the BNB coin price will achieve the $1000 mark this AltSeason? Read Binance Price Prediction to uncover the possible price projection until 2030!
Market Analysis
Firm Name
2025
2026
2030
Changelly
$1.62
$2.36
$10.83
CoinCodex
$7.01
$7.02
$11.92
DigitalCoinPrice
$14.11
$16.47
$36.15
*The aforementioned targets are the average targets set by the respective firms.
CoinPedia’s Bitget Token Price Projection
With more fundamental updates and partnerships, the Bitget cryptocurrency exchange could attract more users to its platform. This could result in its native token “BGB” gaining significant attention from the crypto space. Further, with a unique strategy, the Bitget exchange could become a key player.
If the bullish sentiment sustains, the BGB coin price could reach a high of $14.56 this year. On the flip side, if the cryptocurrency market experiences a strong bearish setback, this could result in this altcoin settling at a low of $5.32.
Year
Potential Low
Potential Average
Potential High
2025
$5.32
$9.94
$14.56
Planning on investing in CRO crypto buy and concerned about its price prospects? Read CoinPedia’s Cronos Price Prediction 2025, 2026 – 2030!
FAQs
Does Bitget have a token?
Bitget cryptocurrency exchange has its own native token “BGB” which was launched in July 2021.
What will Bitget price be in 2025?
If the bullish sentiment sustains, the BGB coin price could conclude the year 2025 with a potential high of ~$15.
Is Bitget available in the USA?
No, the Bitget crypto exchange is not available for users in the United States of America (USA) due to its regulatory restrictions.
How much is 1 BGB in dollars?
At the time of writing, the value of one Bitget token was $4.20.
What is the future of Bitget token?
With a potential surge, this altcoin may achieve a high of $41.60 by the year 2030.
How much is 1000 BGB?
With a trading value of $6.69, 1000 BGB are currently valued at $6,690.
What country is Bitget based in?
Bitget is a Seychelles-based crypto exchange. Reportedly, it empowers 20+ million users across 100+ countries with copy trading and various smart tools.
What is the value of BGB?
With a market capitalization of $8.76 billion, this altcoin is exchanging hands at $4.20.
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
IIM Bangalore (IIMB) has recorded 100 per cent placements for its lateral and final placements for the PGP and PGPBA Class of 2023-25. All 595 students who participated in the placement process secured offers from 176 firms. The placement season saw strong participation from both legacy and new recruiters, with approximately 30 per cent being first-time recruiters, the institute stated. The total batch size was 602, with some students opting out of the placement process.
Also read: IIM Bangalore introduces online BBA programme
Professor Nishant Verma, Chairperson of Career Development Services, IIM Bangalore, said, “Despite being a challenging year for the job market around the world, IIM Bangalore conducted the process efficiently, setting a benchmark both in terms of the number of offers made and the diversity of roles across sectors.”
Management consulting accounted for 41 per cent of the offers, with 32 firms making 245 offers. This was followed by IT, software, analytics and product management, where 34 firms extended 80 offers.
The finance, banking and investment sectors saw 41 firms making 79 offers, while e-commerce, payments, telecom and logistics collectively accounted for 70 offers from 19 firms. The manufacturing, construction, energy and infrastructure sectors saw 16 firms making 37 offers.
Meanwhile, FMCG, retail and conglomerates contributed 23 offers, with participation from 8 firms. Additionally, the healthcare and education sectors together accounted for 23 offers.
What is the best internet provider in Bowling Green?
CNET recommends Spectrum as the best internet service provider in Bowling Green, Kentucky. Spectrum covers most of the city and offers the cheapest plan, starting at $30 for 100Mbps. For areas not covered by Spectrum, AT&T Fiber and Stupp Fiber are solid alternatives.
If you’re looking for speed, Stupp Fiber has the fastest option, with its 10,000Mbps plan. However, its coverage is limited and you need to consult the company for pricing details.
Bowling Green internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Read full review
DSL
$60
3-100Mbps
None
1.5TB for most plans
None
7.4
NCTC
Fiber
$65-$95
100-1,000Mbps
$5 router (optional)
None
None
N/A
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router rental (optional)
None
None
7.2
Stupp Fiber
Fiber
$70-Varies
350-10,000Mbps
None
None
None
N/A
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for eligible Verizon Wireless customers)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Bowling Green
AT&T Internet: AT&T’s legacy DSL network reaches some homes not covered by AT&T Fiber. Speeds depend on your address but may be extremely slow. There are no contracts and equipment is included. There’s a 1.5TB data cap for most plans. Prioritize other types of internet, including cable, 5G home internet or fiber, before settling for pokey DSL speeds.
NCTC: Local fiber provider NCTC (North Central Telephone Cooperative) mostly services areas outside the town’s central region. Plans start at $65 a month for 100Mbps and go up to $95 for 1,000Mbps, with all speeds symmetrical. There’s an option for a $5 monthly router rental. There are no contracts or data caps.
Satellite internet: If you live in a rural area outside of Bowling Green and can’t get Spectrum, fiber or decent fixed wireless, then check into satellite internet from Starlink, Viasat or Hughesnet. It’s on the pricey side for broadband, and speeds may be slow, but it can keep you connected when you live in a remote location.
T-Mobile Home Internet: T-Mobile Home Internet is a viable rival to Verizon 5G Home Internet. Consider it if you’re looking for an alternative to cable. Plans range from $50 to $70 a month for typical download speeds of 87 to 415Mbps. Bundle with a premium phone plan to knock that down to as low as $35 a month. Equipment is included, and there are no contracts or data caps.
Fountain Square in downtown Bowling Green, Kentucky.
DenisTangneyJr/Getty Images
Cheap internet options in Bowling Green
Expect to pay at least $50 a month for home internet unless you bundle a home internet and phone plan through Verizon or T-Mobile. Spectrum’s entry-level 100Mbps plan starts at $30 a month and then goes up by $20 after the first year. If AT&T Fiber or Stupp Fiber reaches your home, then consider paying a little more for symmetrical speeds. AT&T Fiber’s 300Mbps plan is $55 a month while Stupp offers 350Mbps for $70 a month. Check into the federal Lifeline program and Spectrum’s Internet Assist plans if you’re a low-income household.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Bowling Green?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Spectrum Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router rental (optional)
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
415Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
85Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
AT&T Internet Read full review
$60
3-100Mbps
None
NCTC
$65
100Mbps
$5 router (optional)
Stupp Fiber
$70
350Mbps
None
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How to find internet deals and promotions in Bowling Green
The best internet deals and top promotions in Bowling Green depend on what discounts are available during a given time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Bowling Green internet providers, like Spectrum, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, however, including AT&T Fiber and Stupp Fiber, tend to run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Bowling Green broadband?
Bowling Green had a strong showing in a recent Ookla speed test report with a median fixed internet download speed of nearly 266Mbps. That’s faster than the Kentucky state average of about 249Mbps. Bowling Green’s speed reflects the wide availability of cable and fiber options. Regarding speed-demon home internet plans, look to Stupp Fiber’s 10,000Mbps and 6,000Mbps options and AT&T Fiber’s top-end 5,000Mbps plan. Spectrum has a wider reach than either of those fiber providers, so most residents will top out at 1,000Mbps downloads over the cable network.
Fastest internet plans in Bowling Green
Plan
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
Stupp Fiber 10 Gig
Varies
10,000Mbps
10,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Stupp Fiber 6 Gig
$200
6,000Mbps
6,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Stupp Fiber 3 Gig
$120
3,000Mbps
3,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Stupp Fiber 1.2 Gig
$90
1,200Mbps
1,200Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
NCTC
$95
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (4 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines — and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics — browsing the internet, sending and receiving email, streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one person sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two people to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more people to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Bowling Green
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. So what’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
But it doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, though we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Bowling Green?
Spectrum is the dominant home internet provider in Bowling Green. It has the widest reach across town, but AT&T Fiber, Stupp Fiber and NCTC are available in some neighborhoods and offer symmetrical fiber speeds with competitive pricing. If you can get fiber, prioritize that. Otherwise, look to Spectrum. Skip AT&T DSL, but consider Verizon or T-Mobile for 5G home internet if you’re not happy with Spectrum and can’t get fiber.
Internet providers in Bowling Green FAQs
What is the cheapest internet provider in Bowling Green?
Spectrum’s introductory deal of $30 a month for the 100Mbps plan is the cheapest widely available wired home internet option in Bowling Green. Consider bundling a phone plan with Verizon 5G Home Internet to bring your broadband price down as low as $35 a month.
Which internet provider in Bowling Green offers the fastest plan?
Stupp Fiber offers a 10,000Mbps plan, but you’ll have to contact Stupp directly to get pricing for your address if the ISP services your home. Stupp also offers a 6,000Mbps plan for $200 a month. Compare that with AT&T Fiber’s top-end 5,000Mbps plan for $245 monthly.
Is fiber internet available in Bowling Green?
AT&T Fiber, NCTC and Stupp Fiber all service parts of Bowling Green. Pricing is competitive with all three, especially compared to how Spectrum’s cable internet rates rise after the introductory discount period.
What internet provider has the best coverage in Bowling Green?
Spectrum has the widest coverage of any wired ISP in Bowling Green. It reaches nearly 84% of homes, according to FCC data.
Exercise is essential for overall health — but as we age, our usual fitness routine might not be as effective.
For people over 40, the body goes through hormonal and physical shifts that can impact how it reacts to certain workouts.
Melissa Neill, CEO of Body by Bikini, specializes in helping women over 40 lose weight. She noted in an interview with Fox News Digital that this becomes “much harder” after this age.
IVANKA TRUMP STAYS FIT WITH THIS SELF-DEFENSE PRACTICE: ‘MOVING MEDITATION’
“There’s a lot of things going on with your body,” said the U.K.-based fitness expert. “And one of the big things is you’re losing muscle mass.”
Women lose muscle mass at a rate of 1% per year, which Neill described as “massive.”
Hormonal changes associated with aging can impact how people put on and lose weight.(iStock)
This loss isn’t as extensive for men, but it can still have a major impact on metabolism.
“In other words, your body is not going to burn fat as effectively as it did when you were younger,” she said.
Neill also mentioned a depletion in hormones, namely testosterone, which is a hormone that supports muscle.
PUSH-UPS BY AGE: HERE’S HOW MANY YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO DO
For aging women, as estrogen declines, the body will work to produce more of the hormone, which can lead to fat gain during menopause.
“It produces fat as it’s producing the estrogen,” she said. “And it typically sits around your midsection, which is really annoying.”
Fitness fixes
Women at this age typically gain about 20 pounds, Neill said, although it could be more.
“I work with women who have gained 40 pounds and they’ve done nothing different,” she said. “All they’re doing is the exact same [workouts] they did in their younger days. And, of course, it’s just not working anymore.”
“If you can incorporate strength training as the main source of your workout, you’re going to see much better results overall in your everyday life.”
To counteract these changes, Neill suggested that women “throw out” the fitness rulebook they followed in their 20s and 30s.
For people in their 40s, the focus should be more on strength training and less on cardio, according to the expert.
For people in their 40s, the focus should be more on strength training and less on cardio, experts advise.(iStock)
“You want to focus on building muscle, because muscle is going to improve your metabolic health,” she said. “Your body’s going to get better at burning calories even when you’re just sitting around doing nothing.”
“Even when you’re sleeping, when you’re watching TV — if you’ve been lifting weights — your body is going to get much better at burning fat.”
DEMENTIA RISK COULD BE LOWERED BY DOING THIS FOR 5 MINUTES A DAY: STUDY
By building more muscle through strength training instead of doing cardio like running on the treadmill, the body will not only become more effective at burning fat, but will also have improved longevity.
“People with muscle on them … They’re going to be stronger,” Neill said. “They’re going to have more mobility [and] better agility.”
By building more muscle through strength training instead of doing cardio like running on the treadmill, the body will not only become more effective at burning fat, but will also have improved longevity.(iStock)
Eating a high-protein diet can also help build muscle, Neill added.
For menopausal women, proper diet and nutrition will help to provide enough energy throughout the day.
IMPROVE YOUR SLEEP WITH THIS SPECIFIC EXERCISE, NEW STUDY SAYS
“You want a protocol that works with your body, so that’s eating healthy, whole foods, cutting out the processed foods and cutting out refined sugar,” Neill said.
The expert also cautioned against intensely working out too often, recommending two to three days of active rest with gentle movement, such as a walk or light yoga.
‘Consistency is key’
Alissa Mosca, regional operations manager for Planet Fitness in New York, said that starting a new fitness routine is the most difficult part, and staying consistent will make all the difference.
“Consistency is key, no matter what it is — but it’s your kind of consistency,” she said. “My consistency may be five days a week, but somebody else’s consistency may be three days a week for half an hour.”
“Cardio is great to just work on your overall heart rate, but it shouldn’t be the focus,” one expert said.(iStock)
“It’s taking those small, incremental steps to either kickstart a journey or run full force into it.”
Strength training can include any equipment involving weight, like free weights, machines, dumbbells, cable towers and other ways to “engage those muscles working through a full range of motion,” the trainer said.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
These exercises can help make everyday tasks easier, from getting in and out of the car to lifting children.
“If you can incorporate strength training as the main source of your workout, you’re going to see much better results in your everyday life,” Mosca said.
A good workout doesn’t require long, intense hours at the gym, experts agree.(iStock)
“You’re making [the body] react to things that you have to do outside the gym, which is super beneficial,” she went on. “It will help your muscles from stiffening [and] stop those aches and pains. You’ll start to find that getting out of bed is a lot easier.”
Mosca recommended switching between working out different parts of the body throughout the week, and choosing some days to do a full-body circuit.
For more Health articles, visit foxnews.com/health
“Every muscle group, especially the major muscle groups, adds functionality to every other movement,” she said. “So, your core is always included when you do squats [and] deadlifts.”
“When you start working on different parts of the body, you’re still incorporating those areas, but you’re making it a better, [more] well-rounded workout.”
Mosca recommended switching between working out different parts of the body throughout the week, and choosing some days to do a full-body circuit.(iStock)
For more toned results, Mosca recommended doing higher reps with lower weights. To boost strength, she said to try lower reps and heavier weight.
“You want to focus on building muscle, because muscle is going to improve your metabolic health.”
For people over 40 on a fitness journey, the trainer shared some key advice: “Don’t go off of the scale. Don’t go off of the mirror.”
“It’s mental, it’s physical, it’s emotional,” she said. “It’s how you feel every day. It’s how you wake up. It’s the quality of sleep. It’s your appetite.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“If you see improvements in all of these things, and you find yourself craving fruit over sweet treats, if you find yourself wanting to move more and get 10,000 steps in a day, as opposed to sitting on the couch and watching a show, those are the improvements that you’re working toward, and that speaks so much stronger than weight loss does.”
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
As the seasons transition from winter to summer, our desire for exploration and trying new things kicks in. For food enthusiasts, this is the perfect time to discover fresh flavours and cuisines. With the arrival of summer, top restaurants in Delhi-NCR have unveiled exciting new menus, packed with seasonal delights. From savoury snacks and refreshing drinks to decadent desserts, these menus offer a world of flavours to indulge in. They’re a treat for the senses, and you won’t want to miss out. Check out the latest offerings below.
Here Are New Menus You Must Check Out In Delhi-NCR:
1. Mister, Shangri-La Eros New Delhi
Mister Chai at Shangri-La Eros New Delhi has unveiled a new menu celebrating India’s tea culture. This contemporary tea lounge offers an elevated take on Indian street food, blending traditional flavours with modern twists. Signature dishes include Butter Chicken Samosa, Paneer Khurchan Tacos, and Masala Amritsari Fish N Chips. The menu also features creative desserts like Vanilla Mille Feuille and Dark Chocolate Sea Salt. Health-conscious and vegan options are available, along with a variety of teas and specialty coffee.
Where: Mister, Shangri-La Eros, Connaught Place, New Delhi
Photo Credit: Mister
2. The Lodhi
Elan at The Lodhi presents its new Dim Sum Lunch, a culinary journey celebrating global flavours. Available Monday to Thursday, this exclusive experience combines fine dining with socialising. The non-vegetarian dim sum selection features dishes like Nam-jim Chicken Rice Balls, Thai Style Money Bag Chicken, and Pork Pot Sticker. Vegetarian options include Pokchoy Wrapped Vegetable Dumplings and Sichuan Vegetable Bao. Each dish is crafted with fresh ingredients and inspired by international flavours. The Dim Sum Lunch at Elan is a must-try for food connoisseurs. With its elegant atmosphere and innovative cuisine, Elan promises an unforgettable dining experience.
Where: Elan, The Lodhi, CGO Complex, Pragati Vihar, New Delhi
When: 12 PM – 3:30 PM
Photo Credit: The Lodhi
3. Sorbo
Sorbo, a Moroccan-inspired restaurant in Gurgaon, has launched a revamped cocktail menu that elevates the drinking experience. Inspired by Moroccan flavours and modern mixology, the menu boasts bold flavours and exquisite craftsmanship. Each cocktail is a masterful blend of spice, citrus, and aromatics, featuring handcrafted infusions and house-made syrups. From saffron and cinnamon to mint and citrus, every sip captures Morocco’s vibrant spirit. Priced between INR 500 to INR 1,500, the menu offers something for everyone. Sorbo’s bar invites guests to explore the world of Moroccan mixology. With its innovative cocktails, Sorbo promises a unique drinking experience.
Step into the world of bold flavours at CHO – Asian Terrace & Cocktail Bar in New Delhi, where the exclusive Dragon Festival menu is available from February 21 to March 23, 2025. Inspired by Chinatown’s vibrant cuisine, this limited-time menu offers a diverse selection of handcrafted dim sum, broths, wok-tossed specialties, and indulgent desserts. From delicately balanced small plates to comforting soups and hearty mains, each dish reflects the rich culinary traditions of China. Experience a perfect blend of premium ingredients and expert craftsmanship, culminating in sweet treats that offer the ideal end to a memorable meal.
Where: CHO, 5/1,1st Floor, Ambawatta One Complex, LHS Kalkadas Marg, Mehrauli, New Delhi
Photo Credit: CHO
6. L’Opéra
L’Opéra, Delhi’s favourite French bakery and tea salon, has launched a new menu that blends traditional French cuisine with European and Mediterranean flavours. The menu offers a range of options, from delicate pastries and desserts to freshly baked breads, sandwiches, and light meals. Expertly crafted by Executive Chef Kevin Duthel, the menu showcases refined French culinary traditions. With dishes like Mushroom Cappuccino and Garlic Pesto Risotto, L’Opéra’s new menu promises a gourmet experience. The menu also features Mediterranean-inspired options like Grilled Chicken Pesto Wrap. With its carefully curated selection, the menu has something for everyone.
China will hold a trilateral meeting featuring itself, Russia and Iran on the Iranian nuclear issue on March 14, a Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson announced on Wednesday.
Chinese Vice Foreign Minister Ma Zhaoxu will chair the meeting, and Russian Deputy Foreign Minister Ryabkov Sergey Alexeevich and Iranian Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi will attend the meeting in Beijing, the spokesperson said, adding that the three parties will exchange views on the Iranian nuclear issue and other issues of mutual interest.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
SPECIJALIZIRANA trgovina za košarkašku opremu i obuću Grosbasket objavila je na društvenim mrežama da nakon više od deset godina poslovanja zatvara sve svoje poslovnice, uključujući webshop.
“Naš put bio je nezaboravan”
“S velikom tugom vas obavještavamo da se naša tvrtka, Grosbasket d.o.o., nakon više od deset godina poslovanja u prodaji košarkaške opreme, našla pred teškom odlukom o zatvaranju svih svojih poslovnica i web shopa.
Naš put bio je nezaboravan, pun izvanrednih profesionalnih i osobnih trenutaka. Iskreno smo zahvalni na vašoj podršci, povjerenju i suradnji koju smo primili od svih koji su pridonijeli rastu naše tvrtke i zajednice.
Prošle godine donijele su mnoge izazove i uvijek smo se trudili ponuditi najbolju opremu i usluge za sve ljubitelje košarke.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Iskreno zahvaljujemo svim našim kupcima i partnerima na vjernosti i suradnji kroz sve ove godine. Bilo nam je čast biti dio košarkaške zajednice i dijeliti našu strast prema sportu s vama kroz sve aktivnosti koje smo organizirali”, napisali su u objavi na Facebooku.
Trgovine u Ljubljani i Zagrebu zatvaraju se 31. ožujka
Istaknuli su da će posljednji dan za online narudžbe biti 20. ožujka, a posljednji radni dan trgovina u Ljubljani i Zagrebu 31. ožujka. Kupce su pozvali da iskoriste preostale kuponske kodove prije zatvaranja. Na webshopu Grosbasketa trenutačno je u tijeku totalna rasprodaja s popustima do 70%.
“Šteta”
“Šteta, bili smo vaši kupci nekoliko godina, bit će teško naći zamjenu za vas”, “Izgleda da sve što je vezano uz košarku u našoj zemlji odlazi u nepovrat”, “Kako je došlo do ovoga? Zna li tko što više? Neobjašnjivo mi je da se jedna tako uspješna, kvalitetna i dugogodišnja trgovina s brojnim vjernim kupcima zatvori samo odjednom?”, “Tuga”, komentirali su ljudi objavu.
Grosbasket je osnovan 2014. godine
Grosbasket je osnovan 2014. godine kao specijalizirani ponuđač košarkaške opreme svjetskih marki kao što su Nike, Jordan, adidas i Under Armour. Kako navode na službenoj web stranici, njihova misija bila je na jednom mjestu ponuditi najbolju opremu koju košarkaši trebaju za razvoj i postizanje svojih ciljeva.
Nakon početaka u malom prostoru od 40 kvadrata u Grosuplju, 2016. godine preselili su se u Ljubljanu, gdje su otvorili jednu od najmodernijih trgovina u Europi na površini od 440 kvadrata. Godine 2017. proširili su svoje poslovanje otvaranjem trgovine u Zagrebu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
INDIANAPOLIS — They’d withstood one wave after another, their season hanging in the balance with seemingly every possession. Nothing had come simply for USC through this frustrating first campaign under Eric Musselman, and here was one last stand, stretching fittingly into one overtime, then another.
So many chances had been squandered by that point in the Trojans’ Big Ten tournament opener. A 15-point, first-half lead was lost. A dynamic defensive effort had disappeared. What hope had been fortified in the first half Wednesday had faded by the second. By overtime, USC was left holding on for dear life.
But as precious seconds ticked away in the second overtime, Wesley Yates let a three-pointer fly. As it swished, he pounded his chest, knowing he’d guaranteed the Trojans at least one more day at the end of an otherwise frustrating season with a 97-89 win over Rutgers.
With the victory, USC will move on to face Purdue on Thursday night, with a chance to once again keep its season afloat.
It had to hang on through a wild ride to get there. After USC dominated most of the first half, Rutgers came rolling back in the second, taking its first lead with only four minutes remaining.
The season was hanging by a thread a few minutes later as Yates knifed through a crowd of Rutgers defenders. But as the redshirt freshman sprinted across half court, he lost control. The ball came loose.
Still, Yates, who would score 24 on Wednesday, refused to give up. He charged at the hoop on the next possession, this time sinking a lay-in. On the next, he drew a foul and made both free throws.
Rutgers would miss both of its free throws on the other end, giving USC an opening with just 18 seconds remaining. It was all Desmond Claude needed, as the Trojans clutch point guard made a floater to send the game to overtime. Claude would score 28 to lead USC.
A few minutes later, Claude knocked down two free throws of his own to give USC a lead with just 1:32 remaining in the first overtime. When Dylan Harper matched with a dunk, the Trojans stole away a loose ball. But a floater from Yates fell short.
Claude seized control early in the second overtime, going up and under the basket for a lay-in, plus the foul. A three-pointer from Rashaun Agee, who added 28 of his own, would secure the win.
To think, only a couple of hours earlier, it seemed USC might run away with an easy win.
So often this season, slow starts had sunk the Trojans, forcing them to spend most of the game’s remainder climbing back. But on Wednesday night, it was Rutgers that dug a deep hole early.
USC’s defense would help set that tone, clogging the paint to force Rutgers to the perimeter, where they struggled to find a rhythm. It took more than nine minutes for the Scarlet Knights to finally score at the hoop, long enough for the Trojans’ shooters to heat up themselves.
Yates made one three, then another, before Chibuzo Agbo joined in with his own. Agee tallied 12 first-half points, largely from the foul line, then made his own three for good measure just before halftime.
USC would push its lead to as many as 15 in the first half, setting itself up to roll in the second.
But in a matter of just four minutes after halftime, Rutgers would erase whatever cushion USC had built. The rest of the way would be a battle, one that USC was fortunate to emerge from unscathed.
The digital-first generation, Gen Z, is changing the way they travel. With an inherent spontaneous, ‘live in the moment’ attitude, they are redefining what it means to explore the world and embrace their wanderlust sides on their own unapologetic terms. Agoda, a digital travel platform, conducted a survey among travellers aged 18 to 27 and shared key findings on Gen Z travel habits.
Gen Z’s travel approach is all about being spontaneous.(Shutterstock)
These are the trends Agoda shared, based on their findings:
Social media as travel guide
Gen Z youth is one scroll away from landing on their dream vacay.(Shutterstock)
Gen Z is a force to be reckoned with when it comes to maneuvering social media to their best advantage. Social media shapes much of their travel itinerary from mood boards to travel checklists. TikTok and Instagram frequently feature viral ‘must-visit’ reels of eateries, bakeries, and underrated spots, captivating Gen Z and inspiring them to live out these reel-to-real moments. Since social media is constantly buzzing with the cool hotspots, it also helps them stay updated on the latest travel destinations and food experiences.
While Millennials still value recommendations from friends and family, Gen Z relies heavily on social media as their travel guidebook. However, despite social media’s stronghold as a travel compass, word-of-mouth remains a strong influence, coming in second in Gen Z’s decision-making process. Then again, word-of-mouth itself is just another form of social influence.
ALSO READ: Fake flexing: How Gen Z is buying glam digital personas
Spontaneous trips
Gen Z books tickets at the last minute.(Shutterstock)
Gen Z is going for last minute trips, ditching the elaborate planning phase. As per Agoda’s survey, 20% of Gen Z book flights less than a week in advance, surpassing Millennials, Gen X, and Boomers. While for accommodations, one in four Gen Z travelers book hotel tickets at the eleventh hour. Unlike the previous generations who doubled down on itinerary and elaborate planning phase, Gen Z is choosing the thrill of unplanned trips and adventures.
Shared trips
Everyone has a soft spot for Bollywood’s all friends trip movies. (Pinterest)
Every Gen Z is looking for their ZNMD or YJHD moments, savouring and recreating on their trip. Gen Z prefers to travel to new places with friends and family. 38% wish to travel with a partner as well. Although Millennials lean towards family trips, indicating a shift in travel preferences.
Budget conscious
Gen Z knows how to get the best deals.(Shutterstock)
Gen Z may be spontaneous and impulsive, but not careless. They keep an eye out for the best deals while also ensuring a wholesome travel experience. Even if they are careful with spending, they won’t sacrifice a quality travel experience. This also aligns with Millennials’ planning.
Unconditional love for travel
Irrespective of travel planning differences across generations, everyone loves to travel. As per the survey, nearly half of Gen Z and Millennials intend to take one to three trips this year, while a third have their sights set on four to six getaways.
ALSO READ: Gen Z is the most ‘unserious generation’: Expert explains why they use humour to deal with uncomfortable situations
Most artists can probably think of a song or two that their fans seem to love but they themselves are tired of performing over and over again. The same rule applies for Sir Elton John, despite having many hits to choose from. In fact, he has admitted that there are songs that make him think “Ugh, I gotta f***in’ sing that one again.”
When questioned which song he wasn’t too keen on performing he responded: “Probably Crocodile Rock. But the audience love it and y’know, it’s a guilty pleasure, as they say.” The song recorded and released in 1972 was the singer’s first US number-one single reaching the top spot in February 1973 and staying there for three weeks straight. It was ceritifed Gold in the same year and then Platinum in September 1995.
Between its release and Elton John’s Farewell Yellow Brick Road tour, the star had performed the song a vast number of times, including at the Greek Theatre with Ray Cooper and when he presented The Muppet Show in 1978. Yet it was decades later that he revealed that he no longer enjoys performing the song.
He also vowed never to play the song again after his tour, which took place between September 9, 2018, and July 8, 2023. Ahead of his sold-out show, Elton John also spoke about other aspects of touring that he won’t miss, including travelling, Smooth Radio reports.
Speaking at a press conference, he said: “I love to play live. I hate the travelling.
“There’s nothing better than going and pleasing an audience. And I’m so lucky as a musician, I get feedback every night from an audience.”
He added: “It must be hard for a movie actor to do movies all the time, and then sneak into the premiere and then sneak out again and never really get feedback. Musicians are so blessed because they get that.”
Of course, every star has had to face some tough crowds in their lifetime but Elton says he doesn’t mind.
He said: “Sometimes you start and some countries are a little colder than others and you have to get them going, but that’s all part and parcel of your craft. And that’s part and parcel of why you’re a professional musician.
“You never give in, you never say, ‘I can’t be bothered. I always wanted the audience to have the best time. And I wanna have the best time.”
Used car sales increased in Australia last month, following multiple months of decline, however experts have warned there could be change on the horizon.
Data compiled by AutoGrab and published by the Australian Automotive Dealer Association (AADA) shows 174,762 used vehicles were sold during February, a 2.2 per cent increase on the month prior.
This is just the third month since July last year where month-on-month sales have increased, however it’s a drop of almost 5000 vehicles on the 179,448 sales recorded in February 2024.
It’s also the 10th month in which used vehicle sales have been below 200,000 since the AADA’s Automotive Insights Report (AIR) debuted at the end of 2023.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
“While the increase in sales is a positive shift from January, the broader market remains in a state of adjustment,” said AADA CEO James Voortman.
“With supply contracting and demand still below historical levels, it remains a competitive market for sellers.
“Average days to sell a used vehicle remained stable at 48.5 days, suggesting that vehicles are still moving at a steady pace, albeit with some regional fluctuations.
The average time to sell a used car rose to 49 days in October and has since stayed comfortably below the record high of 50.9 days in December 2023.
The AADA and AutoGrab offer the following definitions for the monthly Automotive Insights Report:
For Sale: Level of available used and demo cars listed online by dealers and private sellers nationally at the time of reporting. AutoGrab processes and de-duplicates listings to identify and eliminate repetitions, ensuring that vehicles listed across multiple platforms are counted only once.
Sales: Total vehicles delisted from online marketplaces, serving as a close proxy to actual sales and recorded monthly. The delisting count also reflects unique vehicles, as AutoGrab processes and deduplicates listings to identify and eliminate repetitions, ensuring that vehicles listed across multiple platforms are counted only once.
Best-selling used cars (up to 10 years old)
As has been the case for the past year, the Ford Ranger was the best-selling used car, reflecting its popularity in the new car market.
The Toyota HiLux was the best of the brand’s five cars in the top 10, which consisted of one Ford, one Hyundai, one Mitsubishi and two Mazdas.
Used car sales by state and territory
Sales of used vehicles were up in every jurisdiction bar Western Australia, South Australia and the Australian Capital Territory, with significant growth in New South Wales and Victoria helping to slow the downward trend.
State/territory
Vehicles sold (February 2025)
New South Wales
56,561 (+3.8%)
Victoria
43,552 (+7.0%)
Queensland
39,738 (+0.1%)
Western Australia
22,699 (-3.0%)
South Australia
12,069 (-0.4%)
Tasmania
3665 (-8.2%)
Australian Capital Territory
1886 (+1.5%)
Northern Territory
601 (+14.3%)
Total
174,762 (+2.2%)
Sales by vehicle type
After surpassing traditional passenger cars in October, SUVs have continued to be the best-selling vehicle type, leading the overall growth in the market.
Vehicle type
Total sales (February 2025)
SUVs
73,059 (+2.8%)
Passenger cars
65,308 (+1.6%)
Utes
30,996 (+1.9%)
Vans and buses
5399 (+2.4%)
Sales by fuel type
Sales of electric vehicles (EVs) and plug-in hybrids (PHEVs) continue to increase, however they make up little more than 2500 sales per month.
Vehicle type
Total sales (February 2025)
Petrol
109,384 (+1.9%)
Diesel
54,069 (+1.9%)
Hybrid
8523 (+4.5%)
Electric vehicles (EV)
2137 (+11.4%)
Plug-in hybrid (PHEV)
388 (+35.7%)
LPG
261 (+14.5%)
MORE: Australia’s best-selling used cars of 2024 revealed
EPFO plans to launch an innovative upgrade, allowing users to withdraw their Provident Fund (PF) from ATMs. Check out the new features, benefits, and step-by-step guide on how to withdraw PF hassle-free.
EPFO 3.0 Update: How Employees Can Withdraw PF Money from ATMs
PF ATM Withdrawal: The Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO) is on the verge of revolutionizing how subscribers access their savings. Union Labour Minister Mansukh Mandaviya recently announced the upcoming “EPFO 3.0 version,” promising seamless PF fund withdrawals directly from ATMs.
Seamless Withdrawals, Just Like Your Bank Account
With this innovative system, gone are the days of visiting EPFO offices or relying on employers for withdrawals. Mandaviya assured subscribers, “It is your money. You will be able to withdraw it from ATMs whenever you want.”
The Ministry is committed to making this vision a reality by significantly upgrading its IT infrastructure. The aim is to simplify PF withdrawals, making them as straightforward as withdrawing cash from your bank account. Lengthy claim processes and waiting periods will become a thing of the past.
How ATM Withdrawals Will Work
EPFO plans to connect PF accounts with an ATM-compatible system, enabling subscribers to access their funds through their registered Universal Account Number (UAN) or linked bank accounts. To ensure security, withdrawals will likely involve multi-factor authentication, such as OTP verification sent to the registered mobile number.
Beyond ATMs: Fund Withdraw Via UPI Soon
Beyond ATM access, EPFO is actively working towards enabling PF claims through the Unified Payments Interface (UPI). This integration with popular platforms like PhonePe, Google Pay, Paytm, and BHIM will facilitate instant fund transfers, eliminating the current 2-3 day processing time associated with NEFT or RTGS.
EPFO 3.0: Your Guide To ATM Withdrawals
The new system will provide you with a dedicated PF withdrawal card, functioning like a regular ATM card. This card will empower you to withdraw your EPF funds directly from designated ATMs at your convenience.
While the specific details and the list of approved ATMs are yet to be announced, the withdrawal process is expected to be simple and user-friendly.
News business EPFO 3.0 Update: PF Withdrawals Via ATMs Soon? Check Process, Rules & Launch Details
In case, you are looking for a cool and interesting way to earn a quick buck, Here’s a platform that pays you for filling out simple surveys. Toluna Group lets you take surveys for forming a database for market research.
Toluna is a worldwide survey technology provider and claims to be the “ World’s Largest social voting community” which has more than nine million survey takers.
In this review, you will get a detailed insight into Toluna, Let’s look into this review article now:
Overview
Name
Toluna
Owner
Frederic-Charles Petit
Founded Year
2000
Headquarters
Paris, France
Type
Online Surveys
Apps
iPhone & Android Devices
Support
Email, Phone
Website
www.toluna.com
What is Toluna?
Toluna is a community survey platform that offers online surveys in return for rewards. This is a Paris( France) based company, managed by the Toluna Group and a well known market research company preferred by brands around the world. With more than 9 million survey takers, for the people who want to make money by taking surveys, Toluna is a preferred option.
The users that register on Toluna and take up these surveys are known as “Toluna Influencers”. These surveys completed are used by the major brands to help them figure out their business plan. It is one of the world’s most popular survey sites which has a very strong subscriber base and an effective portfolio of clients.
With 16+ offices globally, Toluna team aims to provide better products and quality to the consumers. They do it by surveying for the brands and thus it helps in dealing with customer satisfaction and to improve their business plan.
How to Register on Toluna?
Toluna provides its membership to 49 countries. The number of surveys that are available depends on your location.
Step 1: You can fill up the registration form online and sign up for Toluna.
Step 2: After the Toluna login, you will be asked to verify your account by providing your personal details. Further, you are good to take the online surveys.
Toluna Influencers are paid in the form of points which can be redeemed further in the form of gift cards, vouchers, etc. There are two types of Toluna surveys available listed below:
Profile Surveys: These surveys take a short period of time to complete where you are rewarded with 100 points.
Longer Surveys: These surveys take a longer duration to complete typically about 10 to 30 minutes with much higher rewards
You can update your personal information by logging into your account. Select “Account” in the top right corner and then click the Edit option. You can also view your account activity such as credits purchased, surveys launched, and the current status of your subscription.
In cases where you forget your password, you can do it by Clicking the Sign in button at the top right side. Then click the “forgot your password” option and follow the instructions further which you will be able to retrieve your password.
How to make money in Toluna?
There are 8 ways to earn in Toluna which are as follows:
Toluna Surveys: They are the most effective way of earningToluna points. There are multiple surveys available online to complete at any point of time. Usually the majority of the surveys pay 1000-2000 points which lasts for about 20 minutes. 5500 Toluna points are roughly equivalent to 1 pound.
Completing Profile Surveys: You will find the “Profile Surveys” under the surveys option at the top of the screen. Each profile consists of 14 Surveys each and you will get 100points for each survey.
Participate in Polls: In this you will usually earn a points reward of 15 points per poll, usually takes seconds to complete
Post in the Toluna community: You can also earn points by posting your content in the Toluna Community. You may win up to 1000 points per post if your post gets qualified.
Participate in the Contest: Toluna offers launch contests to encourage the users to post more in the community. Inreturn they are rewarded with some points and other prizes.
Start your own contest: you will also be rewarded with points and prizes if you start your own contest.
Refer a friend to Toluna: you can share your referral link with your friends and you will get 500 bonus points for each friend upto 10 months
Play Toluna Games:You can also win points by playing games. You can win about 80-1000 points by spinning the wheel.
How to redeem points in Toluna?
There are 3 ways to redeem the points in Toluna which are listed below:
Rewards:It offers a variety of gift cards with an option to cashout by Paypal. The cheapest gift card costs around 30,000 points
Gifties: These are the tickets you can buy to win a range of rewards
Sweepstakes: You can also exchange your points to get a chance to join the monthly sweepstakes where you can buy branded items
You need to reach of minimum of 30,000 points which are listed below:
$10 gift card for Starbucks- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Cheesecake factory- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Redbox- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for JiffyLube- 30,000 points
$25 gift card for Restaurants.com-45,000 points
$25 gift card for Walmart- 45,000 points
$25 gift card for Fandango- 45,000 points
Toluna is it Legit or Scam?
As per the Toluna reviews, it has been found that Toluna is a legitimate business. Despite its long wait times, it has a noted record of paying its clients and further issuing them good rewards.
It is a company that offers to pay on each survey you take. It has been very popular and has become one of the people’s number one choices regarding online surveys. They also have a base of around 13 million users and is on a rapid expansion
Toluna also has an A+ rating in the Better Business Bureau(BBB) with only around 31 customer complaints. Further, it has a 3.8 rating on the Trustpilot with more than 2,100 Toluna reviews.
There are a lot more positive reviews compared to the criticism. It has great customer service for which it accounts as one of the legit organizations that pay people in response to the online surveys.
Conclusion
It is to be acknowledged that Toluna is a legitimate business which pays its users based on the surveys they take.It is one of the top rated companies with a trusted community of 1+ million members which make it highly recommended.
It is an honest way to make full time income on the internet by taking surveys. It has no hidden costs and in turn you will learn how to build a flourishing business online in Toluna. It also allows you to choose surveys in categories which you are interested in.
Thus finally it is advisable that Toluna is worth giving a try. You can take it as a fun experience and further you will enjoy it a lot. If you are looking to earn income by taking up online surveys, then Toluna is definitely on the top lists which are trusted.
FAQ
How much does it cost to join Toluna?
No, Signing up for Toluna is completely free. Sign up today and access its features free of cost
Does Toluna pay in cash?
Toluna Influencers are compensated in points, which can be exchanged for a variety of items such as gift cards, competition entries, or plain old cash.
How long do the surveys take to complete?
It is dependent on the targeting and the screening questions. The more of these questions you have, the longer your survey may take to complete.
How do I cash out my Toluna points?
You need to have at least 60000 points. Go to rewards, convert your points into cash through, 60000points=$20.
Is Toluna Survey Legit?
Toluna is a safe and reliable platform. It is not a scam, and millions of people from all over the world have taken their surveys for over ten years. However, your experience with the site may vary from that of other survey takers.
Toluna Ratings
User Review
1.12 (354 votes)
Pros
It is a very reputed company which is operating.
It is completely free to join and features are free to use
Modern and user-friendly interface
You can earn money by answering the surveys on the go while on the phone
Interesting Surveys
Get a consolation prize even if any disqualified
Cons
The disqualifications can be frustrating
There is a minimum cashout of $30 which is hard to reach
Some of its surveys take time to complete
Some users complain about the long wait times for payments or rewards
Indian Institute of Management Kozhikode (IIMK) has secured a career-best #141 position in the QS World University Rankings by Subject 2025 for ‘Business & Management Studies’ category.
This marks a notable improvement from last year’s 151-200 range and a significant leap from its initial ranking in the 401-500 range in 2021, a press release said. IIM Kozhikode achieved an overall score of 68.5 in this edition of these rankings.
The QS World University Rankings by Subject 2025 analysed 5203 institutions worldwide, with 2303 institutions assessed in the Business & Management Studies category and 650 institutions were ultimately ranked in this edition.
Four key parameters
The rankings evaluate institutions on four key parameters: Academic Reputation; Employer Reputation; Citations per Paper; H-Index.
Debashis Chatterjee, Director, IIM Kozhikode, said “this consistent improvement in global standing reflects our focus on holistic learning, cutting-edge research, and industry relevance in Business and Management Studies”.
IIM Kozhikode’s consistent rise in global rankings is complemented by its strong domestic and international presence. The institute was ranked among the Top 3 management schools in India as per the NIRF Rankings 2024 and have now risen to global rank #68 in the Financial Times Rankings for Masters in Management category, Rank #70 for Financial Times Ranking for Executive Education- Open Enrolment category and world Rank #86 for Financial Times Global MBA 2025, for its one-year MBA.
Best tax filing service for freelancers, gig workers and sole proprietors
TaxSlayer
It’s only been a few months since the last bout of government funding drama in Washington, but with the next funding deadline only a few days away, the threat of shutdown is still in the air, even as temporary measure passed in the House.
The US narrowly averted a government shutdown in December after Elon Musk’s involvement resulted in a continuing resolution proposal being reworked heavily at the last minute. The current funding deadline also came to revolve around Musk, with Democrats seeking provisions to curb his ability to slash the federal workforce via the “Department of Government Efficiency” office. Republicans, conversely, said that they wouldn’t entertain anything that curbed President Donald Trump’s authority.
TAX SOFTWARE DEALS OF THE WEEK
Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.
Despite this stalemate, a vote on a continuing resolution with Trump’s support passed in the House on Tuesday, March 11. It now has to pass in the Senate, where Minority Leader Chuck Schumer said on March 12 that Democrats wouldn’t support the bill and said it lacked the votes needed to pass. If it’s passed and signed into law by Trump, the government would remain funded through Sept. 30.
The government has shut down or suffered funding gaps at least 20 times in history, all in the past 50 years. The most recent shutdown lasted 34 days, spanning the end of 2018 into the start of 2019 during Trump’s first term. No shutdowns have happened since then but the threat of one has become increasingly common in the current political climate.
With just a few days left until the deadline, read on to find out what might happen to your tax return during a shutdown. For more tax coverage and tips, find out what Trump’s External Revenue Service means for you and if your state has its own version of the child tax credit.
When is the deadline to fund the government?
Congress has until March 14 to pass legislation to keep the federal government funded and avoid a shutdown. This can be done with either a full federal budget or, as was passed on March 11, a temporary continuing resolution, the latter of which has become more common in a highly polarized Washington.
When is the deadline for filing my tax return?
As it is every year, you have until the end of the day on April 15 to submit your tax return to the IRS. This year, that falls on a Tuesday.
Certain parts of the country affected by recent natural disasters — including floods, hurricanes and wildfires — have had their tax deadlines extended, so make sure to check on the details for your specific area.
Will a government shutdown affect my tax return?
The impact that a government shutdown would have on tax returns is an open question. While there have been shutdowns in the past, not one has ever occurred during tax season.
Typically, a shutdown sees all nonessential government functions stop and the employees involved in those functions furloughed. A 2024 contingency plan released by the Treasury Department claimed that during a shutdown, essential IRS functions would continue but there’s no telling how things would actually play out until a shutdown actually happens.
Speaking with CNET, Tracey Spivey, a partner with accounting firm KPMG, said that in all likelihood, returns submitted electronically during a shutdown should be processed like normal. Returns that contain an error or taxpayers who choose to file via a hard copy could see a delay.
However, Jassen Bowman, an IRS enrolled agent and tax expert, told CNET in an email that delays are likely inevitable in the event of a shutdown, no matter how you handle your return. While he agreed that e-filing would be faster and that major delays would mostly be reserved for returns with errors, he warned that returns that need “human review” might not be sorted until the shutdown was over.
“During past government shutdowns, only ‘essential’ personnel were allowed to work,” Bowman said. “Most of these essential workers are IT staff. So if you e-file a return and choose direct deposit for your refund or pay online if you owe, there should be minimal delays, unless the e-file system flags the return for human review. In that case, the return would not be processed until after the government shutdown. The same holds true for anybody that files a paper return.”
Will a government shutdown affect my tax refund?
Any tax refund you’re set to receive will likely fall under the same possibilities outlined above. A potential delay would depend on how many IRS workers are furloughed during a shutdown but a delay is very likely if you don’t file electronically. Bowman also warned that people claiming certain tax credits, such as the earned income tax credit, could see substantial delays because the IRS typically requires more verification for these credits.
“Returns that claim certain types of credits, such as the Earned Income Tax Credit, tend to be flagged more than other returns due to identity verification requirements and IRS fraud prevention programs,” Bowman wrote. “Legitimate EITC claims are made by the most financially vulnerable Americans and so delays in receiving those refunds can have catastrophic impacts on families.”
What other IRS services would be affected?
Beyond the potential delays in processing returns, Bowman noted, some other IRS services would be impacted by a government shutdown. “The most noticeable impact by consumers will be the shutdown of IRS call centers,” he said. “No customer service personnel will be working, not even at the special numbers for tax professionals. Therefore, it will be impossible to get anything fixed with the IRS.”
Bowman added: “If you’re waiting on a response to a letter, that will be delayed as well. Any scheduled appeals hearings, audit conferences and the like will all be canceled, further dragging out the resolution of any tax problems somebody might be experiencing.”
He said his best advice is to “file your tax return right now if you possibly can and if you have any outstanding IRS issues, call them immediately, before any shutdown occurs. This may not eliminate any future frustrations but it will help minimize the frustration by getting the ball rolling now.”
For more, see what the future might hold if pennies cease production.
The measles outbreak continues to spread throughout the U.S., sparking discussions about how best to protect children and other high-risk groups from the disease.
While West Texas has been the focus of the largest outbreak — with reported cases exceeding 220 as of March 11 — the virus has also emerged in several other states.
Below is a state-by-state rundown of where in the U.S. measles has been detected and the number of cases. Fox News Digital will continue to update this list as new data is released.
The state recorded a case of measles in an unvaccinated adult who traveled overseas in January 2025, according to the Alaska Department of Health.
The measles outbreak continues to spread throughout the U.S., sparking discussions about how best to protect children and other high-risk groups from the disease.(iStock)
California
Five cases of measles have been confirmed in California as of March 11.
Georgia
A total of three measles cases have been confirmed in 2025 in Atlanta.
The first case was reported in January; in February, two additional family members contracted the virus.
Kentucky
On Feb. 26, the Kentucky Department for Public Health announced a confirmed case of measles, the first since February 2023.
The adult had recently traveled internationally to an area with ongoing measles transmission, health officials said.
IS MMR VACCINE SAFE FOR KIDS? DR. NICOLE SAPHIER ADDRESSES CONCERNS AS MEASLES CASES RISE
Maryland
On March 9, the Maryland Department of Health and Howard County Health Department announced one confirmed case of measles.
The person had recently traveled internationally.
New Jersey
A total of three measles cases have been reported in New Jersey this year, as of March 7.
“There is no ongoing community transmission of measles in New Jersey at this time,” the health department stated.
Signs point the way to measles testing in the parking lot of the Seminole Hospital District across from Wigwam Stadium on Feb. 27, 2025, in Seminole, Texas.(Jan Sonnenmair/Getty Images)
New Mexico
As of March 11, there have been 33 cases of measles in the state — 32 of those in Lea County and one in Eddy county.
One death has been reported, an adult who was not vaccinated and reportedly didn’t seek medical help.
New York
A total of three cases have been reported in New York — two of them in New York City and one in New York State outside the city.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Oklahoma
Two cases of measles were reported in Oklahoma on March 11. The individuals with symptoms reported having exposures associated with the Texas and New Mexico outbreak, according to the Oklahoma State Department of Health.
Pennsylania
As of March 7, one case of measles has been confirmed in the state.
The patient was an unvaccinated child from Montgomery County, according to the Philadelphia Department of Public Health.
The best way to prevent measles is to receive the two-dose measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and various experts.(iStock)
Rhode Island
The state confirmed one case of measles in January 2025, the first since 2013.
The patient was a young, unvaccinated child with a recent history of international travel, according to the Rhode Island Department of Health.
Texas
As of March 11, a total of 223 cases have been identified since late January, according to the Texas Department of State Health Services. The majority have been reported in Gaines County.
Twenty-nine of the patients have been hospitalized and one death has been reported.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Vermont
The state confirmed its first case of measles in 2025 on March 11. The patient was a school-aged child who recently traveled internationally, according to the Vermont Department of Health.
Washington
The state’s first measles case of the year was reported on Feb. 27, affecting an infant in King County.
A sign is posted in German at the entrance of the children’s emergency room at Covenant Children’s Hospital on Tuesday, Feb. 25, 2025, in Lubbock, Texas. (AP Photo/Julio Cortez)(AP Newsroom)
Fox News senior medical analyst Dr. Marc Siegel previously shared with Fox News Digital that measles is highly contagious.
“There is a 90% chance you will get it if you are unvaccinated and step into a room where someone with measles was two hours before,” he cautioned.
Siegel previously suggested that high exemption rates for childhood vaccines, which are now under 85% compliance, are to blame.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
The majority of cases in the current outbreak have occurred in unvaccinated individuals, mostly school-aged children.
The best way to prevent measles is to receive the two-dose measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and various experts.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Many people share their weight loss transformation on social media platforms to motivate others going through similar journeys along with sharing their impressive health updates. One such fitness story going viral on Instagram is of 21-year-old Kajal from Rampur, who used to weigh 106 kg and managed to lose 50 kg in a year. In her Instagram videos, she shares that her weight gain was because she was not conscious of taking care of her lifestyle and eating habits. However, she was not comfortable with the excessive weight, used to feel low and lacked confidence.
With consistency and hard work, she managed to lose all that extra weight and become a healthier version of herself. In her viral videos, Kajal shares that she lost weight by eating healthy and tasty homecooked meals as guided by her nutritionist, along with following regular workouts.
Watch her viral weight loss transformation here:
Further, in her Instagram videos, Kajal reveals 5 basic diet tips that helped her achieve calorie deficit and lose weight.
Also Read:“It’s A Mind Game,” Man Says After Losing 34 Kg In 6 Months With New Diet And Lifestyle
5 Calorie Deficit Tips To Lose Weight:
1. Eat more fibre as it keeps you fuller for long. 2. Reach 10,000 steps daily. 3. Eat enough protein. 4. Cut out sugar and refined sugar products such as soft drinks, cookies etc. 5. Make sure to drink 3-4 litres of water daily.
Found this weight loss story inspiring? Check out more weight loss tips and guidelines here.
About Jigyasa KakwaniJigyasa finds her solace through writing, a medium she is exploring to make the world more informed and curious with every story published. She is always up for exploring new cuisines, but her heart comes back to the comforting ghar-ka-khana.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-12/Japan-says-U-S-tariffs-risk-impacting-their-bilateral-economic-ties-1BGlkV0B7YA/img/468141be4ca644d8a5ed4f6421c6296f/468141be4ca644d8a5ed4f6421c6296f.png' alt='Japanese Chief Cabinet Secretary Yoshimasa Hayashi holds a press conference at the prime minister's office on March 5, 2025. /VCG'
Japan said on Wednesday it was “regrettable” that the country had not been granted an exemption from U.S. President Donald Trump’s steel and aluminum tariffs of 25 percent.
Asked if Japan was considering retaliatory measures, top government spokesperson Yoshimasa Hayashi said the two nations would continue to discuss details of the duties, which came into force at midnight U.S. time (0400 GMT Wednesday).
“Widespread measures to limit trade risk having a significant impact on the Japan-U.S. economic relationship as well as the world economy and multilateral trade system,” Hayashi told reporters.
“That Japan was not excluded from the imposition of additional tariffs is regrettable,” he said.
Japan exported 31.4 million tonnes of steel in 2024, of which 1.1 million tonnes went to the United States.
That corresponds to around four percent of U.S. steel imports, according to Washington.
“Imports of Japanese steel and aluminum products won’t harm U.S. national security, but rather, our high-quality products are difficult to replace and essential to strengthening the competitiveness of the U.S. manufacturing industry,” Hayashi added.
Japan’s products “are also contributing greatly to U.S. industry and employment,” he said.
Economy, Trade and Industry Minister Yoji Muto said in Washington this week he had asked U.S. officials to exempt Japan from metal and upcoming vehicle tariffs.
“During Minister Muto’s U.S. trip, Washington expressed its position that it considers its relationships with Japan a priority and that Japan’s investment in the United States as well as the role it plays in the U.S. economy, such as through employment, are valued,” Hayashi said.
Japan is home to the world’s top-selling carmaker, Toyota, and the health of the auto industry impacts many of its industrial sectors, from parts manufacturing to steel and microchips.
Of its 21.3 trillion yen ($145 billion) of U.S.-bound exports in 2024, cars and other vehicles accounted for roughly a third.
Prescription drugs like lorazepam — used to treat anxiety, panic attacks and sleep disorders — play a role in popular TV shows like ‘The White Lotus’ and ‘The Pitt.’
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NAKON tjedan dana prednarudžbi Appleov iPad Air s M3 procesorom sada je dostupan za kupnju, a prvi sretni korisnici već ga drže u rukama. Apple je 4. ožujka 2025. predstavio novi 11-inčni i 13-inčni iPad Air. Prednarudžbe su krenule odmah, a nije došlo do klasičnog scenarija u kojem najpopularnije konfiguracije brzo nestaju iz zaliha.
Tijekom cijelog perioda prednarudžbi većina boja i konfiguracija oba modela ostala je dostupna s isporukom na dan lansiranja, a sad su dostupni i u ostalim odabranim trgovinama.
Što je dostupno u trgovinama?
Novi iPad dolazi u četiri boje – Space Grey, plavoj, ljubičastoj i Starlight. Dolazi u dvije veličine i četiri boje, kao i s izborom od 128 GB, 256 GB, 512 GB ili čak 1 TB prostora za pohranu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Novi iPad Air pokreće Apple M3 čip, dolazi s Liquid Retina zaslonom sa širokim spektrom boja, 12 MP prednjom i stražnjom kamerom s Center Stage funkcijom za poboljšane videopozive te podrškom za Wi-Fi. Kompatibilan je s Apple Pencil Pro.
Cijena kreće od 1039.99 eura za model od 128 GB, model od 256 GB košta 1179.99 eura, od 512 GB košta 1439.99 eura, a model od 1 TB košta 1699.99 eura.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Beckman 14, Irvine 4 Bell Gardens 10, San Gabriel 0 ‘ Bishop Amat 1, Gardena Serra 0 Brentwood 1, Viewpoint 0 Buena 9, Oxnard 2 Burbank Burroughs 14, Hoover 0 Cathedral 7, St. Monica 1 Chaparral 8, Campo Verde 1 Coastal Christian 13, SLOCA 3 Crescenta Valley 9, Glendale 0 Culver City 12, Morningside 0 Garden Grove 10, Bolsa Grande 3 Granite Hills 5, University Prep 2 Hesperia Christian 15, CIMSA 1 La Palma Kennedy 2, Buena Park 1 La Quinta 13, Palm Springs 0 La Sierra 5, Long Beach Cabrillo 0 Lawndale 5, Hawthorne 0 Long Beach Wilson 7, Valley Christian 2 Norwalk 8, Paramount 1 Oak Hills 13, Serrano 0 Orcutt Academy 4, Valley Christian Academy 3 Oxnard Pacifica 7, Dos Pueblos 1 Pasadena Marshall 3, Western Christian 2 Redlands Adventist 14, Desert Chapel 3 Riverside Prep 14, Claremont 0 San Dimas 5, Bonita 1 Santa Ana Foothill 12, Don Lugo 1 Santa Monica 18, Compton Centennial 0 South El Monte 7, Artesia 3 St. Bonaventure 5, Righetti 2 St. Francis 7, Chaminade 5 St. Paul 5, Paraclete 2 Sultana 4, Victor Valley 2 Trinity Classical Academy 9, Santa Clarita Christian 0 Vasquez 11, Valley Torah 1 Ventura 8, San Marcos 1 West Covina 5, Village Christian 2 Xavier Prep 7, Shadow Hills 4
SOFTBALL
Southern Section
AAE 19, NSLA 9 Alhambra 12, El Monte 11 Bolsa Grande 16, Long Beach Cabrillo 7 Brea Olinda 23, San Dimas 6 California 5, Sunny Hills 2 Calvary Baptist 22, Webb 0 Corona Del Mar 9, Western 3 Covina 3, Mountain View 0 Culver City 12, Lawndale 0 Dos Pueblos 13, Oxnard Pacifica 2 Downey 14, South El Monte 6 Eastside 4, Antelope Valley 1 Flintridge Sacred Heart 16, Westridge 2 Glendora 13, Claremont 3 Knight 23, Palmdale 2 Highland 12, Littlerock 2 Paraclete 3, Bishop Amat 1 Pioneer 10, Bell Gardens 3 Quartz Hill 2, Lancaster 0 Ramona Convent 12, Cantwell-Sacred Heart 9 Santa Clarita Christian 24, Frazier Mountain 9 Santa Maria 17, Valley Christian Academy 5 Santa Monica 18, Compton Centennial 1 Shadow Hills 32, Xavier Prep 0 South Pasadena 12, San Marino 3 Serrano 19, Granite Hills 8 Sierra Vista 17, Pasadena 1 St. Monica 11, Bishop Conaty-Loretto 8 Valley Christian 9, Long Beach Poly 7 Ventura 3, San Marcos 2
The people of Delhi will soon be able to enjoy boat rides as the Delhi government and the Centre signed an MoU on Tuesday to develop water tourism on the 4 kilometer Sonia Vihar-Jagatpur stretch of the Yamuna.
Cabinet Minister of Irrigation and flood control Parvesh Sahib Singh takes a boat ride from Boat Club to Chhath Ghat during his visit to the Yamuna River, near ITO in New Delhi, India.(Photo by Arvind Yadav/ Hindustan Times)
Speaking at the event in Asita Park, Lieutenant Governor V K Saxena said that in the coming days, the facility will be expanded, a move that will decongest the city’s roads and also provide better travel options for residents of the city.
This is a major step towards integrating river, road, and metro transportation. The public-private partnership (PPP) model will also be explored for expanding the facility in the Yamuna, Saxena said.
Chief Minister Rekha Gupta said the initiative would give Delhi a fresh and modern identity, focusing on cleanliness, beautification, and development.
The previous government created several obstacles, but the people of Delhi rejected them, paving the way for progress, she said, adding that eco-friendly electric-solar hybrid boats will be introduced to promote sustainable travel.
Gupta said she has envisioned Yamuna ghats evolving into a cultural and artistic hub, akin to Varanasi, and highlighted that the government was committed to sustained Yamuna cleaning efforts and daily development work.
She also thanked all departments, saying that this transformation would not have been possible without their commitment.
“Under Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s leadership, we are making the impossible possible,” she said expressing gratitude to all officials involved.
The LG said charging stations and other facilities would also be developed to enhance the experience for commuters in Delhi.
“This is just the beginning. In the upcoming days, the service will be expanded, significant improvements will be made in the condition of the Yamuna, and Delhi’s waterways will be further developed,” he said.
Saxena called it is a “historic day” for the city, emphasising the government’s commitment to environmental conservation and the development of waterways.
“PM Modi’s vision is focused on strengthening the country’s water transport network, and we are taking concrete steps to restore Delhi’s ecological balance,” he said.
He acknowledged past delays in Yamuna cleaning, saying that earlier it was being treated like a drain.
Saxena assured that progress has accelerated since the new government took charge and said significant strides in solar energy adoption and sustainable transport solutions have been made.
The government also announced plans to improve public transport, reduce traffic congestion, and boost local businesses.
“This is just the beginning. More developments are on the way, and we will work with private players to expand and enhance the system,” the LG said.
Despite previous challenges, the administration remains committed to clearing pending projects and accelerating progress, he added.
Union Minister Sarbananda Sonowal, PWD Minister Pravesh Verma, and Delhi Capital Minister were also present at the event.
This summer, Keanu Reeves returns as John Wick in Ballerina, an Ana de Armas-led spin-off set between the events of John Wick Chapters 3 and 4.
Given the assassination didn’t kick the bucket until John Wick Chapter 4, this explains how he can cameo in the upcoming film.
Meanwhile, John Wick 5 is in the works, even though Reeves himself said last week that his character was dead. Yet he did admit that Hollywood can always change things around.
And now a Lionsgate executive has addressed just that while confirming that John Wick 5 is happening.
Speaking with Comic Book, Lionsgate executive Jenefer Brown said of the franchise’s future: “This world continues to grow and expand in incredible ways. Up next, of course, we have Ballerina, which is our first spin-off movie and [we] can’t wait for that to release to the world. Of course, we’ve announced we’re working on a fifth John Wick film. I think there are more spinoffs to come, a TV series, video game.”
The outlet then pressed her specifically on John Wick 5, a film that would presumably need Reeves’ character alive.
She replied: “We’ve shared that we’re developing a fifth John Wick film … [John Wick] may be [dead]. We are all on baited breath waiting to find out.”
Given Chapter 4’s box office success and the fact we never saw Wick’s body, it seems incredibly likely the hitman isn’t really dead.
The Australian Government’s Fringe Benefits Tax (FBT) exemption for certain electric vehicles (EVs) and plug-in hybrids (PHEVs) has cost taxpayers 10 times more than initially projected, according to a tax expert.
Speaking to the Australian Financial Review, Institute of Public Accountants senior tax adviser Tony Greco estimated the government is losing approximately $564 million annually on tax revenue due to the exemption.
In 2022, Treasury forecast the FBT exemption to cost $55 million this financial year, with Mr Greco’s estimation more than 10 times higher than the government figures.
It’s worth noting Mr Greco’s estimation is based on an average EV cost of $60,000, spread across 100,000 novated leases.
Launched in July 2022, the FBT exemption applies to EVs and PHEVs priced under the Luxury Car Tax (LCT) threshold for fuel efficient vehicles (currently $91,387), and purchased through novated leases.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Mitsubishi Outlander PHEV
BYD Sealion 6
With the scheme, the government effectively takes on the cost of your employer’s fringe benefits tax, which would typically be passed on to you, bringing annual savings of up to five figures.
There’s no time limit on the scheme for EVs, however since its introduction there has been a deadline of April 1, 2025 for PHEVs, requiring eligible vehicles to be delivered by the end of this month.
According to data supplied to the publication by the National Automotive Leasing and Salary Packaging Association (NALSPA), more than 100,000 eligible novated leases have been taken out for EVs and PHEVs.
An earlier estimation by the Institute of Public Accountants pegged Treasury’s $55 million cost forecast on only 4700 EV owners taking up the exemption, AFR reports.
In the time since its introduction, EVs have gone from 1.8 per cent of new car sales to 7.4 per cent at the end of last year. Likewise, PHEV sales have risen from less than 1.0 per cent of the new-car market to almost 2.0 per cent.
BYD Shark 6
While this has been a positive result for the government’s carbon emissions cutting plans, it’s come at a cost to taxpayers.
Though the exemption for PHEVs will wrap up within a month – with buyers who don’t take delivery before the April 1 deadline having to pay the FBT if they take a novated lease – EV buyers will be able to make use of it for the foreseeable future.
The Electric Vehicle Council, Australia’s advocacy body for EVs, has continued its calls for the PHEV exemption to be extended, despite Mr Bowen previously including it to get the policy across the line.
“This electric car discount has been a hit with Australians, and we’re calling on all sides of politics to extend this policy during the upcoming federal election,” Electric Vehicle Council chief executive Julie Delvecchio said in a media statement.
“The discount is easing the cost of living by helping families save on transport costs and accelerating the shift to cleaner, more affordable cars.
“EVs don’t just benefit the individual driver, they also reduce the nation’s carbon emissions, cut air pollution which makes people sick, and unshackle Australia from our historic dependence on foreign oil.
Tesla Model 3 and Model Y
“The electric car discount simply allows people to put their hard earned money toward the lease of an electric vehicle. The immense benefits of this policy are chalk and cheese compared to the billions paid by the government for fuel subsidies each year.
“The facts show that over 52 per cent of electric cars are being bought in our outer suburbs and regions. Indeed we know the biggest uptake has been from everyday families in the suburbs struggling with the cost of living.
“We can already see that the FBT exemption is helping supply more EVs to the second-hand car market, so that more Australians can enjoy the benefits of driving an electric car. Low-income households will benefit enormously by switching to a second-hand EV, because they can avoid volatile petrol prices which we know are hurting families.”
It’s worth noting the Electric Vehicle Council aligns itself with overseas definitions of EVs, and counts PHEVs in its figures.
The NALSPA last month echoed its prior calls for the PHEV exemption’s extension.
“The FBT exemption is making BEVs and PHEVs more affordable for everyday working Australians,” said NALSPA chief executive Rohan Martin.
“Through a novated lease, the exemption typically saves employees around $5000 annually on an EV. The exemption means a $50,000 EV could cost the same or even less to lease over say four years than a $30,000 petrol car.
“The cost-of-living is hitting households hard, so finding ways to save on big purchases like a new vehicle is really important. While we’re encouraging motorists to take full advantage of the FBT exemption for PHEVs while it lasts, there are still other ways to save when buying a new car.
“After April 1, workers who want a PHEV can still benefit from a novated lease where they can acquire a new car using their pre-tax salary.
“A novated lease reduces your income tax and removes GST on the car’s purchase price and on running costs, like fuel and servicing. This can lead to significant savings, potentially amounting to thousands of dollars annually compared to purchasing a car outright or financing it with a loan.
“Additionally, the FBT exemption for fully electric vehicles will remain in place until at least 2027, providing even greater savings for those looking to fully transition to electric driving.”
Among cities, housing sales in Gurugram rise to Rs 1,06,739 crore in 2024 from Rs 64,314 crore in the preceding year.
In Delhi-NCR overall, the sales of residential properties rose 63 per cent to Rs 1,53,000 crore in 2024 from Rs 94,143 crore in the preceding year.
Housing sales across 9 major cities in India increased by 12 per cent year-on-year to Rs 6.73 lakh crore during the year 2024 on the back of higher demand especially for luxury homes, according to data from real estate data analytic firm PropEquity. It said the total housing sales across top-9 cities had stood at Rs 6,00,143 crore in 2023.
PropEquity on Tuesday released data on housing sales of top 9 cities in terms of value for the calendar year 2024.
Among cities, housing sales in Gurugram rose to Rs 1,06,739 crore in 2024 from Rs 64,314 crore in the preceding year.
PropEquity did not mention the name of real estate companies that achieved strong sales in Gurugram last year.
However, property brokers in the Gurugram area said DLF, Signature Global, Godrej Properties, M3M India along with its group firm Smartworld Developers, Elan Group, ATS Group and Krisumi Corporation were among the top sellers.
In Delhi-NCR overall, PropEquity said the sales of residential properties rose 63 per cent to Rs 1,53,000 crore in 2024 from Rs 94,143 crore in the preceding year.
Samir Jasuja, founder & CEO of PropEquity, said, “In Delhi-NCR, the weighted average sales price has gone up to Rs 12,469 per sq ft. Rising prices and demand buoyance in Delhi-NCR is due to the robust infrastructure development, growing corporate presence and ample employment opportunities as is evident from Delhi-NCR’s rising dominance in office leasing.”
With the new government in place in Delhi, and MPD 2041 likely to see the light of the day, Jasuja said the real estate market will further see a surge with entry of new supply.
Gurugram-based property consultant InfraMantra co-founder Garvit Tiwari said, “The Gurugram market performed extremely well in 2024. The city within a short span, has emerged as the most preferred real estate destination for residential and commercial development.” Gurugram boasts of good returns leading to greater interest from investors, he added.
Vijay Harsh Jha, Founder and CEO of property brokerage firm VS Realtors, said the NCR market has become a hot destination with demand for luxury homes at an all-time high.
“The infrastructure development around the National Capital and the adherence to compliance due to RERA have helped the real estate sector become a trusted investment tool for income generation and wealth creation,” he said.
As per the PropEquity data, housing sales in Mumbai rose 13 per cent to Rs 1.38 lakh crore last year from Rs 1.22 lakh crore in the 2023 calendar year.
Thane saw a 6 per cent increase in sales to Rs 56,000 crore from Rs 53,000 crore. In Pune, housing sales fell 1 per cent to Rs 76,000 crore from Rs 77,000 crore.
Navi Mumbai witnessed a rise of 32 per cent in sales to Rs 25,000 crore from 19,000 crore. Sales in Hyderabad dipped 18 per cent to Rs 1.05 lakh crore from Rs 1.28 lakh crore.
Bengaluru saw a 13 per cent increase in sales to Rs 85,000 crore from Rs 75,000 crore while Chennai witnessed a 5 per cent growth to Rs 20,000 crore from Rs 19,000 crore.
Housing sales in Kolkata increased 15 per cent to Rs 15,000 crore in 2024 from Rs 13,000 crore in the preceding year.
After being trapped in a falling trend since early December 2024, Dogecoin (DOGE) price has approached a possible bottom. In preparation for a much anticipated parabolic rally to price discovery, leading dog-themed memecoin, which is backed by tech billionaire Elon Musk, has rebounded from a crucial support level of around $0.143 in the past two days.
In the past 24 hours, DOGE price rallied about 8 percent to trade around $0.1722 on Wednesday, March 12, during the early New York session. As a result, the large-cap altcoin, with a fully diluted valuation of about $25 billion and a 24-hour average trading volume of around $2.1 billion, could be following Bitcoin (BTC) price in an anticipated bullish recovery ahead.
Dogecoin Price Insights
From a technical analysis standpoint, Dogecoin price recently rebounded from a crucial support level of around $0.14, which coincided with the weekly 0.786 Fibonacci Retracement.
The top-tier memecoin has been forming higher highs and higher lows in the past year, thus signaling a potential bottom for the ongoing market-wide correction.
As a result, a consistent close above the support/resistance level of around 20 cents will yield a major rally towards the all-time high. However, a consistent close below $0.14 in the coming weeks will spell further downside risks.
Key Factors Driving DOGE Market Outlook
The Dogecoin network, which is secured through the legendary proof-of-work (PoW) consensus method, has attracted more than 6.1 million on-chain holders as of this writing. The unwavering support from Musk and his family of unicorns has helped increase the mainstream adoption of Dogecoin as a means of payment by global merchants.
The rising demand for memecoins has attracted institutional investors into Dogecoin as shown by the filing of spot DOGE ETFs in the U.S. by Grayscale and Bitwise. Meanwhile, on-chain data from IntoTheBlock shows that the number of large transaction volumes on the Dogecoin network has experienced a sharp uptick in the last few months.
According to on-chain data from Santiment, Dogecoin whales purchased more than 1.4 billion coins in the last two days to currently hold about 24.6 billion coins.
Marketing goals often use soft, fuzzy language like “brand awareness,” “credibility,” and “education.”
They’re nice things for the business, but they aren’t easy to measure, and worse, they don’t speak to what’s important to the business.
For marketing to get the recognition (and budget) it deserves, set goals that incorporate the language of your executives and sales colleagues. Use verbs like generate, grow, reduce, and retain. Not only will you set marketing on a different level in your organization, but you’ll also set your brand’s marketing apart from the rest.
Brand awareness has been (and likely will remain) the most common goal of content marketers. In the most recent CMI research, brand awareness ranks at the top, with 87% of marketers naming it as a goal of their program.
On the opposite end, less than half of marketers (49%) say generating sales/revenue is a goal.
Yet, scrutinizing what the most successful marketers say, their goals are more likely to contain those verbs loved by executives and sales teams:
Generate demand/leads (89% most successful vs. 49% least successful)
Nurture subscribers/audiences/leads (77% vs. 36%)
Generate sales/revenue (65% vs. 26%)
To change the conversation and gain the respect and budget marketing deserves, focus on these four goals:
1. Grow subscribers
Unlike a customer database, a subscriber database contains customers, prospects, referrals, and potential referrals. These people see your content as valuable enough to provide their contact information. In doing so, they also give you permission to subtly market to them.
When it makes sense
If you regularly publish content, such as a newsletter, podcast, video channel, etc., subscribers are essential. It lets you contact them without an intermediary gatekeeper like social media or pay-per-click advertising.
More specifically, adopt subscriber goals when your business wants to penetrate a new market, compete with a high-profile market leader, or begin the content marketing journey.
Profitable actions to track
Measure progress by the number of subscribers to an owned channel (email newsletter, blog alerts, magazine, podcast, etc.)
Compare the subscriber sales conversion rate with the general audience conversion rate. You can also compare those two groups in terms of total sales value and lifetime sales value.
Go deeper into the subscribed audience as a goal:
2. Generate leads
Great content can encourage consumers to convert into prospects by signing up for a demo, registering for an event, or requesting access to a resource center. Unlike subscribers, these leads provide more than an email address. They trade more information about themselves because they see value in the content offered.
For example, they may share their role in the company to get content tailored for their position or complete a quiz to get answers specific to their interests.
When it makes sense
To help the sales team identify or qualify new prospects, this type of content is a must. It can also help nurture leads through the sales funnel.
Profitable actions to track
Measure content’s impact with form completion, downloads, and landing page conversion rates.
Assess conversion rates through the sales funnel. Measure the percentage of marketing- and sales-qualified leads.
To go deeper on tracking lead generation, check out:
CAVEAT: Some leads aren’t really leads. People provide more detailed information to get the piece of content but aren’t interested in your product or service now. Consider converting these not-really leads into opt-in subscribers who may become more valuable over time.
3. Generate sales through support and enablement
Supporting sales with content typically involves creating pieces that offer proof points to help customers decideuroblems.
When it makes sense
Goals around growing sales or adding new revenue streams benefit from this content. (So, it always makes sense to create it.)
Profitable actions to track
Measure your sales support through lead-to-customer conversion rates, effect on time to close new customers, and revenue generated.
Go deeper on aligning content with sales:
4. Retain clients (and reduce customer support costs)
Though many treat content marketing as a top-of-the-funnel play, content can also work to reinforce the customer’s decision post-sale. How-to and activation content ensures the customer gets value from the purchase — and is likely to buy again (or make a referral).
When it makes sense
To reduce costs (i.e., high volume of support calls), customer support and loyalty content works well.
If the business model involves repeat business or prioritizes upselling or add-ons, this content can help achieve those goals.
Profitable actions to track
Measure the impact by the percentage of existing customers who consume content, the reduction in the number of support calls, the number of repeat customers, revenue from upselling, customer retention rate, and changes in churn rate.
Speak up about marketing’s goals
Once you’ve crafted goals that speak the language of sales and executives, don’t forget to verbalize them to the marketing team, the sales team, and other adjacent teams, as well as the C-suite.
No matter which goal-setting framework you use, incorporate the elements of the FAST framework outlined by Donald and Charles Sull in this MIT Sloan article — frequently discussed, ambitious, specific, and transparent.
And with that, you’ve established an innovative content marketing program tied to business outcomes that will net outcomes any colleague will appreciate.
Updated from a May 2022 article.
Like what you read here? Get yourself a subscription to daily or weekly updates. It’s free – and you can change your preferences or unsubscribe anytime.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The number of Indians travelling abroad for studies declined by 15 per cent in 2024 as countries worldwide tightened their visa regulations.
As per a reply by Sukanta Majumdar, Minister of State in the Education ministry, in the Lok Sabha on Monday, 7,59,064 students went abroad for studies, according to information provided by the Bureau of Immigration (BoI). While this is a dip from 8,92,989 students in 2023, the number of students travelling overseas for education is marginally higher compared to 2022, when it was 7,50,365.
The data pertains to the number of Indians who disclosed their purpose of visit as “Study/Education” while going abroad. The data from BoI for prior years, as per information shared in Lok Sabha earlier, shows that the 2024 tally is higher than in the pre-pandemic days of 2019, when 5,86,337 students went abroad for studies.
Interestingly, the top destinations that registered biggest decline (in percentage terms) are Canada, US, and UK, all of whom have tightened Visa regulations for immigrants. In the backdrop of worsening diplomatic relations with Canada in 2024, the country had become stricter on student visa regulations. This had led to increased visa rejections and more scrutiny on applications.
Indian students travelling to Canada dipped 41 per cent; the UK saw a 27 per cent decrease, and 13 per cent fewer students travelled to the US for their studies in 2024. Australia also saw a 12 per cent decline. At 2,04,058, the US welcomed the maximum number of Indian students in 2024. Canada had the second-highest at 1,37,608. China is another country that saw a decline as 7,279 students travelled there in 2023 while only 4,978 went in 2024.
Interestingly, Germany, Bangladesh, Russia, and Ireland were among the top countries that saw biggest jump in Indian students travelling for studies at 49 per cent, 44 per cent, 34 per cent and 30 per cent increase respectively. At 34,702 there was a 49 per cent jump in Indians going to Germany for their studies. 31,444 students went to Russia for studies in 2024 compared to 23,503 in 2023. France, Philippines, and Uzbekistan are other countries that saw an increase in 2024.
“The dip in numbers for the US, and the UK are expected; largely driven by a shift in government and the impact of elections. Canada’s larger geopolitical tension with India with it putting caps on immigration always signaled a fall off this year,” Akshay Chaturvedi, Founder & CEO of study abroad platform firm Leverage Edu, said. “Germany has undoubtedly been a dominant force in attracting international students over the past 12-18 months, driven by its strong economy, tuition-free education, and thriving STEM ecosystem,” he added.
While countries like Germany have sustained their numbers for a long period, we are yet to see for how long these destinations can support exponential growth and how well their infrastructures are set up to support international students, Chaturvedi said.
Best tax filing service for freelancers, gig workers and sole proprietors
TaxSlayer
Tax season has been underway for about 5 weeks now — and that means we’re just about a month out from the April 15 tax deadline. If you haven’t already filed, you might be spending the next few weeks gathering your important tax documents or trying to decipher your W-2. Even if you’re using tax software or having someone else file taxes for you, you are likely to still run into questions.
While you can call the IRS with questions, you may experience long wait times. Plus, you’re likely to find the answer to your tax questions online at IRS.gov. Below, we break down helpful IRS tools and resources and provide IRS contact information for when you’ve exhausted all the online options and still haven’t solved your problem.
TAX SOFTWARE DEALS OF THE WEEK
Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.
This story is part of Taxes 2025, CNET’s coverage of the best tax software, tax tips and everything else you need to file your return and track your refund.
For more tax info, check out CNET’s taxes cheat sheet and this roundup of important deadlines for this upcoming tax season.
What IRS tools and resources are available online?
CNET
There are many — and free — tools online to help you through your taxes.
Interactive Tax Assistant: A virtual assistant that responds to various inquiries to help you determine whether your income is taxable, whom you can claim as a dependent and what your filing status is.
Get Refund Status: A tool to help you track the status of your tax refund.
Personal IRS account: Create your own account to find information about your prior year’s tax return.
Can I ask the IRS tax questions in person?
The IRS staffs a toll-free hotline, but yes, there are in-person options.
The IRS has roughly 600 local offices nationwide, and if there’s one close to you, you can schedule an in-person appointment. Here’s how:
Select the closest location and choose “Make Appointment.”
Call the office’s appointment phone number to schedule your visit.
When you go to your local office, remember to bring a government-issued photo ID along with your Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN) or Social Security number.
Can I call the IRS when I have tax questions?
Yes, you can call the IRS with tax inquiries, but before calling be aware that call volumes are often high, so you may experience long wait times to speak with a representative.
You can dial 800-829-1040 for assistance with your tax-related issue. Have the following information ready to verify your identity:
Your Social Security number or ITIN
Your birthdate
Your filing status (e.g., single, head of household, married filing jointly or married filing separately)
IRS phone numbers
There are several IRS phone numbers that address a specific tax question or topic such as checking the status of an amended tax return, and reporting tax scams or phishing. Here’s the breakdown:
IRS Phone Numbers
Purpose
Number
Scheduling an appointment with the IRS
844-545-5640
Locating free tax clinic near you
800-906-9887
Taxpayer Advocate Service
877-777-4778
Interpretation services for Spanish speakers
800-829-1040
Interpretation services for other languages
833-553-9895
Deaf or hard of hearing assistance
800-829-4059
IRS Disaster Hotline
866-562-5227
Requesting IRS to mail paper tax forms
800-829-3676
Ordering a tax transcript
800-908-9946
Checking status of a tax refund
800-829-1954
Self-employed taxpayer assistance
800-829-4933
Reporting phishing or tax scams
800-366-4484
Estate and gift tax law questions
800-829-1040
Victims of identity theft assistance
800-908-4490
Checking status of amended tax return
866-464-2050
Topics the IRS won’t discuss over the phone
There are a few complex tax topics the IRS does not discuss on the phone. These topics include:
Business sale and business depreciation
Capital gains and losses
Commuting
Corporations, exempt organizations and partnerships
Education
Healthcare
International-related tax questions (such as branch profits tax, foreign tax credits and expatriation tax)
Rentals and residential property tax
Trusts
Specific forms
The IRS has a list of resources online to help with each of the above topics. You can also make an in-person appointment with a representative instead of searching online.
For more tax tips, here’s how to get your tax refund up to five days sooner and all the states with tax filing deadlines later than April 15.
‘Massive detox plan’ cured woman’s cancer, she says
Liana Werner-Gray believes that if she had not made substantial changes to her diet and lifestyle, she would not have beaten her cancer. Fox News Digital spoke to the author and wellness advocate about her health journey.
Taking a common over-the-counter pain reliever could help keep certain cancers from spreading.
That’s according to a new study from the University of Cambridge, which found that aspirin could reduce cancer metastatis (spread) by stimulating participants’ immune systems.
The findings were published in the journal Nature on March 5.
ASPIRIN MAY BE LINKED TO LOWER RISK OF COLORECTAL CANCER, NEW STUDY SUGGESTS
In mouse models, scientists discovered that a certain protein called ARHGEF1 suppresses T-cells, which are immune cells that can pinpoint and attack individual cancer cells that break away from original tumors, according to a press release.
ARHGEF1 was “switched on” when T cells were exposed to thromboxane A2 (TXA2), a chemical produced by platelets that helps with blood clotting.
Taking a common over-the-counter pain reliever could help keep certain cancers from spreading, a new study suggests.(iStock)
Too much of TXA2 can increase the risk of heart attacks and strokes.
That’s where aspirin comes in — it is already known to stop the production of TXA2 and prevent clotting, which is why it may be recommended to prevent cardiac events in some people.
“Aspirin, or other drugs that could target this pathway, have the potential to be less expensive than antibody-based therapies.”
“This new research found that aspirin prevents cancers from spreading by decreasing TXA2 and releasing T cells from suppression,” the press release stated.
In mice with melanoma, the ones that were given aspirin had less frequent metastases of the cancer compared to those who were not given the medication.
DAILY ASPIRIN AFTER A HEART ATTACK CAN REDUCE THE RISK OF FUTURE EVENTS, STUDY FINDS
“It was a ‘eureka’ moment when we found TXA2 was the molecular signal that activates this suppressive effect on T cells,” said first author Dr. Jie Yang from the Department of Pathology at the University of Cambridge in the release.
“Before this, we had not been aware of the implication of our findings in understanding the anti-metastatic activity of aspirin,” he went on.
“Aspirin, or other drugs that could target this pathway, have the potential to be less expensive than antibody-based therapies, and therefore more accessible globally.”
Aspirin could reduce cancer metastatis (spread) by stimulating participants’ immune systems, the research found.(iStock)
Previous studies have suggested that daily aspirin treatment is associated with reduced cancer spread in humans with the disease and with reduced cancer mortality in patients without metastasis, noted senior researcher Dr. Rahul Roychoudhuri, professor of cancer immunology at the University of Cambridge.
In one randomized controlled trial, taking 600 milligrams of aspirin daily for an average of 25 months substantially reduced cancer incidence in carriers of hereditary colorectal cancer.
COMMON CANCER TREATMENT CAN HAVE THIS PAINFUL SIDE EFFECT
Pashtoon Kasi, M.D., medical director of gastrointestinal medical oncology at City of Hope Orange County in California, reiterated that previous research has linked aspirin use with a reduced risk of cancer, particularly gastrointestinal tract cancers.
“It has been identified in numerous studies with mixed results on reducing the risk of recurrence and/or improving outcomes in patients with metastatic cancer,” Kasi, who was not involved in the research, told Fox News Digital.
“This new study further demonstrates how aspirin and other inhibitors of this pathway could be used in new treatments to prevent the cancer from metastasizing or spreading.”
Potential risks
Roychoudhuri, the senior researcher, encouraged caution in applying the findings.
While aspirin is low-cost and widely available, its long-term use is not without “significant risks,” he said, including stomach bleeding and hemorrhagic stroke, particularly in older individuals.
While aspirin is low-cost and widely available, its long-term use is not without “significant risks,” the researcher cautioned.(iStock)
“This is why we emphasize that patients should not start taking aspirin for cancer prevention without specific medical advice from their doctor,” he said in a statement to Fox News Digital.
“The risk-benefit calculation varies substantially between individuals based on age, comorbidities and concurrent medications,” the doctor noted.
“Patients interested in aspirin therapy should discuss it with their oncologist or family practitioner, who can evaluate the potential benefits against the risks.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Kasi pointed out the study’s potential limitations, primarily that the research was conducted on mice models rather than humans.
“The study also did not take into account complications that some people who use aspirin regularly experience, such as bleeding or interactions with other medications,” he noted.
Experts agree that patients should talk to their doctor to discuss the benefits and health risks associated with regular aspirin use. (iStock)
“However, it builds upon the growing body of evidence … and provides mechanistic insights into how this effect might occur from an immune perspective.”
Kasi agreed that patients should talk to their doctor to discuss the benefits and health risks associated with regular aspirin use.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“In some cases, low-dose aspirin or other anti-inflammatory drugs are already being considered in clinical use, as well as in additional trials – for example, for individuals born with Lynch syndrome who have a higher predisposition to developing colorectal, endometrial and other cancers,” he noted.
Next steps
The scientists are planning to conduct more research — through the Add-Aspirin clinical trial, which will recruit more than 10,000 patients with early-stage breast, colorectal, gastroesophageal and prostate cancers across the U.K. and India — to determine whether aspirin can stop or delay the recurrence of these cancers.
“Patients interested in aspirin therapy should discuss it with their oncologist or family practitioner, who can evaluate the potential benefits against the risks.”
“Our research suggests aspirin could potentially be most beneficial for patients with early-stage cancers who have been treated with curative intent but might harbor undetected micrometastases,” Roychoudhuri said.
“However, further clinical validation is needed before specific recommendations can be made.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The research received funding from the Medical Research Council, the Wellcome Trust and the European Research Council.
The Add-Aspirin clinical trial is funded by Cancer Research UK, the National Institute for Health and Care Research, the Medical Research Council and the Tata Memorial Foundation of India.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Fractional share trading has become increasingly popular among retail investors who want to invest in expensive stocks without needing to buy whole shares. Many traders wonder whether they can trade fractional shares on quote trade and whether the platform supports this investment approach. Fractional shares allow investors to buy a portion of a stock rather than purchasing a full share, making investing more accessible to those with limited capital. This feature enables traders to diversify their portfolios and participate in the market without requiring large amounts of money.
Quote trade provides access to a wide range of financial instruments, and some platforms that operate under the quote trade model do support fractional share trading. This means that investors can buy and sell fractions of high-priced stocks, allowing them to invest in popular companies without committing a large amount of capital. For example, if a stock is priced at $1,000 per share, an investor with $100 can still participate by purchasing 0.1 of a share. This flexibility is particularly beneficial for new investors who want to start small and gradually increase their investments over time.
One of the primary advantages of trading fractional shares on quote trade is portfolio diversification. Instead of allocating all funds to a single stock, investors can distribute their capital across multiple assets, reducing risk exposure. Diversification is a key strategy in long-term investing, as it helps protect against losses from a single stock’s poor performance. By allowing fractional share trading, quote trade enables users to build well-balanced portfolios even with small investment amounts.
Can I Trade Fractional Shares on Quote Trade?
Another benefit of fractional share trading on quote trade is the ability to implement dollar-cost averaging (DCA). This investment strategy involves regularly purchasing a fixed dollar amount of an asset regardless of its price fluctuations. Since fractional shares allow investors to buy smaller portions, they can consistently invest in their chosen stocks over time, reducing the impact of market volatility. DCA is a widely used strategy for long-term wealth accumulation, as it removes the need for precise market timing.
Liquidity is also an essential factor when trading fractional shares on quote trade. Unlike traditional full-share transactions, fractional shares rely on platform-specific order execution. Some platforms facilitate liquidity by pooling fractional share orders together, ensuring smooth transactions. However, investors should be aware that fractional shares may not have the same level of liquidity as whole shares, and selling them could take slightly longer in certain market conditions.
Quote trade platforms that offer fractional share trading also provide automated investing options, making it easier for investors to allocate funds according to their financial goals. Some platforms allow users to set recurring investments, which automatically purchase fractional shares based on predefined criteria. This feature simplifies the investing process and encourages disciplined investing habits.
In conclusion, trading fractional shares on quote trade provides investors with flexibility, affordability, and diversification opportunities. It allows traders to invest in high-priced stocks without needing a large capital outlay, implement dollar-cost averaging strategies, and build diversified portfolios. As fractional share trading continues to gain popularity, quote trade remains a valuable option for investors looking to participate in the stock market with limited funds.
South Indian food is loved worldwide for its bold and unique flavours. From soft idlis with sambar to crispy vadas, South Indian cuisine offers a wide variety of dishes that never fail to impress. Many South Indian snacks are light, healthy, and easy to digest, which is why they are so popular. Traditional recipes and cooking techniques are still followed, giving these dishes their signature authentic taste. While there are countless South Indian options for breakfast, lunch, and dinner, today we are focusing on snacks that are perfect for teatime. After a long day, nothing feels better than relaxing with a hot cup of tea and some tasty snacks. If you are looking for quick and delicious South Indian snacks to pair with your evening tea, here are some must-try recipes.
Also Read: Elevate Your Brunch Game With This Easy South Indian Appe Recipe
Here Are 9 South Indian Snack Recipes for Teatime:
1. Goli Idli
This creative take on idli involves steaming rice balls and serving them with your favourite tomato chutney. It is easy to make and requires just a few ingredients. Click here for the recipe.
2. Poha Medu Vada
Poha medu vada is a twist on the classic medu vada. Instead of using the traditional urad dal batter, this recipe swaps it with soaked poha for a light yet crispy snack. Click here for the recipe.
3. Murukku
Murukku is a popular South Indian snack that is crispy, flavourful, and easy to prepare. Made with gram flour and lentils, it is not only tasty but also quite filling. Click here for the recipe.
4. Vermicelli Upma
Vermicelli upma is quick and simple to make. Vermicelli is cooked with urad dal, tomato purée, and vegetables like carrots and peas, seasoned with spices and herbs for extra flavour. Click here for the recipe.
5. Aloo Bonda
Aloo bonda is a beloved tea-time snack. Mashed potatoes are mixed with salt, chillies, coriander leaves, and lemon juice, then deep-fried until golden. Served with tangy green chutney, it is hard to resist. Click here for the recipe.
6. Banana Chips
Banana chips are a classic South Indian snack that is always hard to put down. Raw bananas are thinly sliced and deep-fried for that authentic crunch and flavour. Click here for the recipe.
7. Appe
Appe are small, shallow-fried dumplings that are crispy on the outside and soft on the inside. There are many variations of this popular snack, and it is perfect for both breakfast and evening tea. Click here for the recipe.
8. Ambode (Dal Vada)
Ambode, also known as dal vada, is made with chana dal, curry leaves, coriander, green chillies, and hing. It is crispy, spicy, and packed with flavour. Click here for the recipe.
9. Churmuri
Churmuri is a spicy and tangy puffed rice snack tossed with chillies, chaat masala, and lemon juice. It is light yet full of flavour-perfect for a quick bite. Click here for the recipe
Try these delicious South Indian snacks with a hot cup of tea, you will not be disappointed.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-11/U-S-Ukraine-begin-talks-on-Ukraine-crisis-in-Saudi-Arabia-1BEOjkPKf3a/img/29ffa65468e24843a7654345b943adba/29ffa65468e24843a7654345b943adba.png' alt='Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy (L) meets with Saudi's Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman at the Royal Palace, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, March 10, 2025. /VCG'
A high-level delegation from the United States and Ukraine began talks on resolving the Ukraine crisis in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, on Tuesday.
The two sides are expected to discuss the framework for a peace agreement, a preliminary ceasefire, and issues related to a U.S.-Ukraine critical minerals deal.
The U.S. delegation includes Secretary of State Marco Rubio, National Security Advisor Michael Waltz, and U.S. Middle East Envoy Steve Witkoff. The Ukrainian delegation comprises Head of the Presidential Office Andriy Yermak, Foreign Minister Dmytro Kuleba, and Defense Minister Rustem Umerov.
Ahead of the talks, U.S. Middle East Envoy Steve Witkoff expressed optimism about the negotiations. On Monday, he stated that the U.S. anticipates substantial progress in the discussions and hopes that a deal on critical minerals is signed.
“I think that we’re going over there with an expectation that we’re going to make substantial progress,” Witkoff said in an interview with Fox News.
When asked if Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy might visit the U.S. to sign a minerals deal this week, Witkoff said, “I am really hopeful. All the signs are very, very positive.”
Witkoff added that key agenda items would include security protocols for Ukraine and territorial issues.
In preparation for the talks, Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman met with both Zelenskyy and Rubio on Monday. The Crown Prince reaffirmed the Kingdom’s commitment to supporting all international efforts to resolve the crisis and achieve peace.
Zelenskyy expressed gratitude for Saudi Arabia’s efforts, emphasizing the Kingdom’s pivotal role in the Middle East and beyond. He arrived in Saudi Arabia earlier on Monday, ahead of the U.S.-Ukraine negotiations.
Meanwhile, UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer spoke with U.S. President Donald Trump by phone ahead of the talks. Starmer expressed hope that the discussions in Saudi Arabia would yield positive outcomes, enabling Washington to lift its pause on aid and intelligence support to Ukraine.
Starmer also noted that British officials had been in contact with Ukrainian counterparts over the weekend and confirmed that “they remained committed to a lasting peace.”
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PROZIRNI komadi već su neko vrijeme veliki trend u modi – od haljina i suknji do hlača, a mrežasti modeli jedan su od upečatljivijih načina nošenja ovog stila. Bivša hrvatska košarkašica Antonija Mišura Sandrić odlučila se upravo za takav statement komad, a njezin nas je stajling podsjetio na kombinaciju Kylie Jenner, koja je ranije nosila vrlo slične hlače.
Glavni fokus ovog izgleda su mrežaste hlače s metalik efektom koje reflektiraju svjetlost i stvaraju atraktivan vizualni dojam. Antonija ih je kombinirala s oversized bež sakoom i crnim grudnjakom, naglašavajući kontrast između ležernog kroja i odvažnog mrežastog detalja.
Kylie Jenner u sličnim hlačama, ali s kristalićima
Kylie Jenner nosila je sličan model hlača, ali s dodatkom kristalića, koje je uparila s pripijenim crnim sakoom s efektnim gumbima te prozirnim cipelama na petu.
I dok su ovakve hlače same po sebi hrabar izbor, kombiniranje s klasičnijim komadima poput sakoa i minimalističkog nakita stvara skladan izgled. Antonija je svoj stajling zaokružila crvenim ružem, dok je Kylie ostala vjerna svom prepoznatljivom minimalističkom beauty looku s elegantno stiliziranom punđom.
Prozirni trend ne jenjava i prilagođava se različitim stilovima – od ležerne elegancije do glamura za večernje prilike. Mrežaste hlače samo su jedan od načina kako ga nositi, a Antonija i Kylie pokazale su dva efektna pristupa istom modnom momentu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
PHOENIX — The Dodgers will board their charter flight for Japan early Wednesday but as of Tuesday night, they hadn’t released a list of the 31 players who will be on that plane.
Manager Dave Roberts wouldn’t even say if he was taking 16 pitchers and 15 field players or whether it was the other way around.
“It’s one of those two combinations,” he said.
But the team did release a list of players who won’t be going after sending seven players to the team’s minor league camp.
The two biggest names on the list were right-hander Bobby Miller, who had been expected to fight for the fifth spot in the starting rotation, and infielder/outfielder Hyeseong Kim, who entered the spring among the favorites for the starting job at second base. Both were optioned.
Miller didn’t appear in a game after being hit by a line drive 11 pitches into his first appearance. Kim played in 15 games but hit .207 in 29 at-bats, striking out 11 times. Only four players had more at-bats than Kim, who appeared at second base, shortstop and center field.
“He’s going to stay here. He’s going to continue to log at-bats,” Roberts said of Kim, who will begin the season at triple A. “The last four games have been really good for him. He looks much more comfortable at bat. The defense has been really good, and it was good to see him in center field.
“We feel that it’s most important for him to stay here, take at-bats, playing games to help him get ready for the season.”
The five non-roster invitees the Dodgers reassigned to minor league camp were right-hander Giovanny Gallegos, catcher Dalton Rushing, infielders David Bote and Michael Chavis and outfielder Eddie Rosario.
Xiaomi 15 Series India Launch: Xiaomi India on Tuesday launched the Xiaomi 15 Series in the Indian market at a starting price Rs 64,999. This series includes two smartphones: Xiaomi 15 and Xiaomi 15 Ultra. With Leica Summilux optical lenses and the powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite Mobile Platform, the Xiaomi 15 Series offers next-generation AI capabilities, enhanced system optimisation, and superior connectivity, the company said in a press release.
Both the devices are powered by Xiaomi HyperOS 2.
Xiaomi 15: Display, Camera
The Xiaomi 15 boasts a 6.36-inch CrystalRes Dynamic 1-120Hz AMOLED display with a 94 per cent screen-to-body ratio, and a versatile triple-camera system spanning 14mm to 120mm focal lengths. It also has a 60mm Leica floating telephoto camera for close-up photography, and Fastshot Mode to capture moments in just 0.6 seconds, the company added.
Xiaomi 15: Battery
The Xiaomi 15 is powered by the Xiaomi Surge Battery Management system and a 5240mAh battery, with 90W HyperCharge (charger included) and 50W wireless charging.
Xiaomi 15 Ultra: Display, Camera
The Xiaomi 15 Ultra boasts a 6.73-inch WQHD+ AMOLED display with a peak brightness of 3200 nits. With a Silver Chrome finish, aerospace-grade glass fiber, and PU leather, the device features a 1-inch 50MP Leica Summilux main camera, a Sony LYT-900 sensor, and 14EV high dynamic range. According to the company, the Ultra pushes the boundaries of mobile videography with 4K 120fps slow-motion recording, Dolby Vision 4K 60fps video, and Ultra Image Stabilisation.
Xiaomi 15 Ultra: Battery
With the Xiaomi Surge Battery Management System, the device houses a 5410mAh battery with a 90W HyperCharge charger in the box and 80W wireless HyperCharge.
Xiaomi 15 Ultra Photography Kit – Legend Edition
For photography enthusiasts, the company has introduced the Xiaomi 15 Ultra Photography Kit which offers professional-grade control in a compact form. The company claimed that the shutter button and ergonomic grip provide a DSLR-like experience, ensuring accuracy and stability. It has a built-in 2000mAh battery, customisable dials, and zoom lever for exposure and zoom adjustments.
“With a 67mm filter adapter ring for creative flexibility and IP54 dust and splash resistance, this kit empowers users to capture stunning shots in any environment,” it added.
Price and Availability
The starting price of Xiaomi 15 is Rs 64,999 while the Xiaomi 15 Ultra is priced at Rs 1,09,999. The Xiaomi 15 Series will be available for purchase starting April 3, on mi.com, Amazon.in, and authorised retail stores.
Pre-booking Details
Pre-booking for the Xiaomi 15 Series will start on March 19, and runs till April 2 on mi.com, Amazon.in, and authorised retail partners.
According to the company release, consumers who pre-book the Xiaomi 15 Ultra will receive the Photography Kit – Legend Edition (worth Rs 11,999) at no additional cost. Those opting for the Xiaomi 15 will receive the Xiaomi Care Plan (worth Rs 5,999) at no extra cost, offering coverage against accidental and liquid damage for a worry-free experience.
Madhya Pradesh Chief Minister Mohan Yadav inaugurated the newly established “Madhav Tiger Reserve” in Shivpuri district on Monday.
A tigress released in its natural habitat after the inauguration of the ‘Madhav Tiger Reserve’ by Madhya Pradesh Chief Minister Mohan Yadav, in Shivpuri, Madhya Pradesh.(CMMadhyaPradesh on X via PTI Photo)
It is the state’s ninth and the country’s 58th national tiger reserve. CM Yadav released a tigress brought as part of the reintroduction process into the open habitat of the reserve on the occasion.
“It is a historic day for the Chambal region, as the Madhav Tiger Reserve is witnessing the reestablishment of tigers. Thanks to the conservation efforts led by Prime Minister Narendra Modi, the state has been granted its 9th national tiger reserve,” CM Yadav said.
The chief minister also unveiled the official logo of the tiger reserve and inaugurated its boundary wall. He further emphasized that the state government was making every possible effort to boost wildlife tourism in the Chambal region.
“Madhya Pradesh is rich in forest resources and home to a large number of wildlife species. With cheetahs in Kuno, gharials in the Chambal River, and now tigers in Madhav National Park, the area is set to become a major tourist attraction. Chambal is a rare place where wildlife and humans coexist harmoniously. With the state government’s initiatives, tourism in this region will flourish, creating employment opportunities and paving the way for new developmental projects in the Gwalior-Chambal area,” the Chief Minister said.
CM Yadav also highlighted that Madhya Pradesh has the highest number of tigers in India and the world, earning it the title of “Tiger State.”
The Chambal region was the only remaining area in the state without tiger movement, and this gap has now been filled. On the birth anniversary of Late Madhavrao Scindia, the inauguration of this tiger reserve marks another step towards the holistic development of the state.
Additionally, the Chief Minister stressed the immense potential for wildlife tourism in Madhya Pradesh, stating that the Madhav Tiger Reserve will create history. This region, already home to bears, leopards, deer, chinkaras, wolves, jackals, porcupines, pythons, and vultures, will now be recognized for tiger rehabilitation as well.
Reaffirming the government’s commitment to wildlife conservation, CM Yadav stated, “While developing the new tiger reserve, special care will be taken to maintain the coexistence of other species. This is not a zoo but an open habitat, accessible to both wildlife and the general public.”
Union Minister Jyotiraditya Scindia expressed gratitude to CM Yadav for gifting the historic Madhav Tiger Reserve to the Gwalior-Chambal region. He noted that after Panna Tiger Reserve, this is the third national park in Madhya Pradesh to be revived. This development has significantly boosted the prospects for wildlife tourism in the Chambal region.
“Under the leadership of PM Modi, the extinct cheetah has been successfully reintroduced into Kuno National Park. Previously, on March 10, 2023, three tigers were released into Madhav National Park, and today, another tigress has been introduced. With the combined area of Kuno and Madhav Tiger Reserves exceeding 3,000 square kilometers, this region will play a key role in wildlife conservation,” Scindia said.
The Union Minister also assured full support in the development of Madhav Tiger Reserve alongside CM Yadav.
Middle-earth Shadow of Mordor and its sequel Shadow of War are two of the best action games in recent memory, thanks in no small part to the superb Nemesis system.
This unique gameplay mechanic makes things more interesting by having enemies remember previous encounters with the player.
For example, if you flee from an Orc early in the game, the same Orc will taunt you for being a coward if you encounter them again later. Likewise, another Orc may be sporting an injury from a previous fight and will be determined to get revenge.
The Middle-earth games are well worth checking out, especially if you’re a fan of Lord of the Rings, not to mention this unbelievable discount on Steam.
Running until 5pm GMT on March 13, the latest Steam deal means fans can pick up a bundle containing both Middle-earth games for just £5.99.
That’s less than £6 for two action games that have Steam user scores of 89% and 92%.
The Middle-earth bundle also contains the Shadow of War expansion pass and Shadow of Mordor game of the year upgrade.
The game of the year upgrade entitles Shadow of Mordor users to the Bright Lord expansion, which adds Celebrimbor as a playable character.
That’s on top of new character skins for lead character Talion, as well as additional in-game battles.
The Shadow of War Expansion Pass features new story content such as The Desolation of Mordor DLC.
The Desolation of Mordor lets users play as a new character named Baranor, who is a Captain of the Tower from Minas Ithil.
“Rendezvous with Torvin, the epic Dwarven Hunter who traveled deep into the Desolation of Mordor pursuing the legendary Were-wyrms,” reads the official description.
“Baranor is an exceptional Commander with new Skills and Abilities to lead his men into battle against the Orc forces.”
A separate story expansion lets you play as a warror of Galadriel, complete with new powers and combat style.
The Toyota bZ4X is the Japanese car giant’s latest electric vehicle (EV) to receive a mid-life update, bringing greater driving range, more power, an enhanced interior and a fresher face.
Unveiled in Europe, Toyota Australia has confirmed the facelifted bZ4X is due to come to local showrooms in the fourth quarter of 2025 (October to December), with pricing to be confirmed closer to launch.
Visual changes include the adoption of Toyota’s latest ‘hammerhead’ family face, with thinner LED headlights, high-mounted fog lights, a more squared-off lower bumper, and vertical side air aprons.
It appears the rear-end is largely unchanged, while gloss black wheel-arch mouldings replace the matte black look of current examples.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Inside, the central infotainment touchscreen now runs on new software and has grown from 12.3 to 14.0 inches, resulting in the start button moving next to the steering column and two knobs being fitted to either side of the display.
The climate control has lost its rocker switches for temperature and fan speed adjustment, though there now appear to be knobs for temperature adjustment. Other functions are controlled via buttons on the screen.
The gear selector knob has also been moved further back, now sitting behind a pair of wireless phone chargers which are now exposed, rather than under a cover on the centre console.
While the 7.0-inch digital instrument cluster remains, it no longer appears to be surrounded by part of the dashboard. It’s unclear if it sits any higher, as visibility of the screen in the current car can be obscured when the steering wheel is in its highest position.
Though these are far from insignificant changes, Toyota has made further enhancements under the skin to not only improve the bZ4X’s power outputs but also increase its driving range.
Single-motor, front-wheel drive models now produce 165kW of power, up 15kW. This has resulted in a saving of one-tenth from its 0-100km/h sprint time, now standing at 7.4 seconds.
It’s not clear if there has also been a torque output increase, though based on the minimal acceleration timing shaving this seems unlikely. The pre-update model produces 266Nm.
The flagship all-wheel drive bZ4X has also received a power bump, rising from 160kW to 252kW, slashing its 0-100km/h time to 5.1 seconds – 1.8 seconds quicker than the current model.
Toyota claims it’s made efficiency improvements to the electric motors of both powertrains, which have also benefited from the fitment of a larger battery pack.
The 71.4kWh lithium-ion battery pack of the current bZ4Xs sold in Australia has grown to 73.1kWh, resulting in a driving range claim of 573km for front-wheel drive examples and 520km for all-wheel drive variants.
Both of these figures are claimed by Toyota against the WLTP cycle, and represent significant improvements on the 436km and 411km claims made for pre-updated Australian-delivered examples.
Toyota has also fitted the bZ4X with battery pre-conditioning for the first time, allowing it to take higher charging rates by keeping the pack at an optimal temperature.
The carmaker claims it has a “development target of rapid charging in approximately 30 minutes under cold conditions (under -10 degrees Celcius)”.
Australian pricing could rise from the current $66,600 before on-road costs tag for front-wheel drive bZ4Xs and $74,900 before on-roads for the all-wheel drive.
While Toyota has previously ruled out following other brands by cutting the prices of its EVs, the mid-sized electric SUV segment has become increasingly competitive.
Growth in Australia’s EV market is also slowing down, with just 9516 battery-powered vehicles sold in January and February 2025 – a drop of more than one-third from the 15,004 sales recorded across the same period last year.
Local deliveries of the bZ4X kicked off in February last year, and fewer than 1000 examples were delivered through 2024, placing it 19th in the annual EV sales race.
MORE: Everything Toyota bZ4X MORE: Toyota Australia won’t slash EV prices for a ‘short-term hit’
Airtel partners with SpaceX to bring Starlink’s high-speed internet to India. This collaboration aims to enhance Airtel’s services, expand network coverage, and connect remote areas.
Airtel and SpaceX will explore offering Starlink equipment in Airtel’s retail stores, Starlink services
via Airtel to business customers, opportunities to connect communities, schools, and so on.
Airtel has teamed up with SpaceX to bring Starlink’s high-speed internet services to India. This partnership will allow Airtel to offer Starlink’s services once SpaceX receives the necessary approvals to operate in the country. In the filing, Airtel said that this partnership will explore how Starlink can enhance Airtel’s existing internet services and expand its reach.
The partnership will also explore how Starlink can strengthen and expand Airtel’s network coverage. Additionally, SpaceX will have the opportunity to leverage Airtel’s ground infrastructure and resources in India.
Airtel And SpaceX Plan To Offer A Range Of Services, Including:
Selling Starlink equipment in Airtel stores.
Providing Starlink services to Airtel’s business customers.
Connecting remote communities, schools, and health centers, especially in areas with limited internet access.
“Working with SpaceX to offer Starlink to Airtel customers in India is a significant milestone and further demonstrates our commitment to next-generation satellite connectivity,” said Gopal Vittal, Managing Director and Vice Chairman, Bharti Airtel Ltd. “This collaboration enhances our ability to bring world-class high-speed broadband to even the most remote parts of India, ensuring that every individual, business, and community has reliable internet. Starlink will complement and
enhance Airtel’s suite of products to ensure reliable and affordable broadband for our Indian customers – wherever they live and work.”
By adding Starlink to its portfolio, alongside its existing partnership with Eutelsat OneWeb, Airtel aims to offer nationwide coverage and bridge the digital divide. This will empower businesses, communities, and individuals with seamless connectivity through comprehensive packages offered by Starlink enterprise suite.
Must Adhere To Country’s Regulatory Framework
Lieutenant General Dr SP Kochhar, Director General of the Cellular Operators Association of India (COAI) said to CNBC-TV18 that India welcomes new businesses but emphasises the need for alignment with national policies and goals. Companies must demonstrate a clear strategy that supports government objectives and benefits the Indian population.
News business Bharti Airtel Joins Hands With Musk’s SpaceX To Bring Starlink Internet To India
The crypto market is experiencing a significant decline, triggered by global trade tensions. Moreover, President Trump’s Executive Order to set up a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve has surprisingly left crypto traders feeling let down. As a result, the price of Solana has fallen sharply, along with a decrease in important on-chain metrics. Despite a recent recovery from its lows, the price of Solana appears likely to fall below $100 soon.
Solana’s Realized Price Drops to 3-Year Low
Over the last 24 hours, SOL price witnessed nearly equal domination among buyers and sellers. Data from Coinglass shows that Solana faced a total liquidation of around $27.3 million. Of this, buyers liquidated $15.7 million and sellers closed $11.6 million worth of positions.
Solana’s SOL faced turbulent times as it plunged by 15% to $114 amid a severe downturn in the crypto market today. This marked the first time the token fell below its realized price of $134 since May 2022, based on data from Glassnode.
Also read: Will Solana (SOL) Reclaim $180? Key Chart Signals Massive Move
The realized price, which represents the average cost basis of all coins last moved, suggests that the average holder is now facing losses. This situation is typically seen as a bearish indicator and may lead to panic selling or capitulation.
Additionally, Solana’s revenue dropped by 93% to around $4 million, the lowest it has been since September 2024. Additionally, the income from its decentralized applications (DApps) fell by 86%, from $238 million in mid-January to just $32 million by March 2025.
In the wake of these downturns, the total value locked (TVL) in Solana’s DeFi ecosystem also halved, dropping from a January peak of more than $12 billion to roughly $6.38 billion, as reported by DeFiLlama.
It’s not surprising that Solana experienced a significant drop as interest in memecoins within the crypto community dropped. After reaching its all-time high in January, SOL’s value has fallen by nearly 57%.
What’s Next for SOL Price?
Solana’s price continues to be under intense bearish pressure as it recently dropped below the $114 level. As buyers are struggling to defend a decline, SOL price is now aiming for a drop below immediate Fib channels. As of writing, Solana’s price stands at $127, having surged by 6.56% in the last 24 hours.
The SOL/USDT trading pair is facing multiple rejections as sellers defend an immediate surge above EMA trend lines. With the Relative Strength Index (RSI) hovering below the midline at level 44, there is a possibility that SOL’s price could drop and retest $110.
If it sustains above this level, it could benefit buyers and potentially push the price for $139. A surge above that level might send the price toward $153. On the other hand, if the SOL price drops below $110, we might see a strong correction below $100.
India Inc’s annual corporate social responsibility (CSR) spending saw a 13 per cent rise in 2022-23, reaching ₹29,988 crore, compared to ₹26,616 crore in the previous year. More than half of this expenditure was directed towards education and healthcare, Harsh Malhotra, Minister of State for Corporate Affairs, informed the Lok Sabha in a written reply.
Education emerged as the biggest area of focus , receiving an estimated ₹10,086 crore—nearly one-third of the total CSR outlay. Meanwhile, healthcare accounted for ₹6,830 crore, reflecting a growing commitment from corporates to social welfare initiatives.
Steady Growth in CSR Spending
Data shared by the Minister revealed a consistent upward trend in CSR contributions over the years. From ₹20,218 crore in 2018-19, India Inc’s CSR outlay has steadily increased, reaching ₹24,966 crore in 2019-20 and ₹26,211 crore in 2020-21. The sharp jump in 2022-23 underscores the private sector’s growing role in nation-building through social investments.
Under Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013, companies meeting specified financial thresholds are required to allocate at least 2 per cent of their average net profits from the last three years towards CSR activities. The Companies (CSR Policy) Rules, 2014, empower corporate boards to undertake these initiatives independently or through registered trusts, societies, or government-backed entities.
Regulatory Oversight and Expanding CSR Reach
A key regulatory change implemented in 2021 mandates that all CSR implementing agencies be registered with the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA). As of now, 87,578 such agencies have been registered under the MCA21 system. However, the government does not maintain data on CSR expenditure at the level of individual parliamentary constituencies or implementing agencies.
Schedule VII of the Companies Act lists eligible CSR activities, including poverty alleviation, healthcare, sanitation, education, rural sports, and initiatives to reduce social and economic inequalities. While companies are encouraged to prioritise local areas for their CSR efforts, they have flexibility to balance regional and national development priorities.
With corporate contributions to education and healthcare surpassing ₹16,800 crore in 2022-23, India Inc’s role in driving social impact continues to expand. As regulatory frameworks evolve and CSR commitments deepen, these investments are expected to play a crucial role in addressing socio-economic challenges across the country.
The iPhone 16 has been out for about six months, but it’s never too early to speculate what Apple’s next flagship device could look like.
There’s already been plenty of buzz about what we could see with the next iPhone, likely called the iPhone 17, from a slimmer version of the upcoming device to a new screen with a higher refresh rate on baseline models. The camera module could also get a makeover, and reports suggest Apple will overhaul the look and feel of its software with the launch of iOS 19.
Here’s what analysts and leakers predict about the iPhone 17 lineup, which is expected to be announced around September.
A slimmer iPhone
One of the biggest rumors surrounds a possible iPhone “Air,” a thinner version of Apple’s flagship device that would replace the iPhone Plus option. It could feature a 6.6-inch screen, making it slightly smaller than the iPhone 16 Plus and iPhone 16 Pro Max but still bigger than the baseline model, according to analysts Jeff Pu and Ming-Chi Kuo. Similarly, it’s likely the Air will be more expensive than the baseline 17, but cheaper than the Pro models — maintaining the Plus’ place in the iPhone hierarchy.
To slim down a device, there will need to be hardware trade-offs, and that may include the phone’s camera. It’s possible this version of the iPhone 17 would have only one main camera, Kuo speculates, doing without the ultrawide and 5x telephoto lenses that have been staples of Apple’s premium iPhones for years. This would place the slim iPhone in the same camp as the $600 iPhone 16E when it comes to cameras, as that phone has only one rear lens as well. The good news, though, is that the selfie camera on the iPhone Air could get a boost; more on that later.
Watch this: iPhone 17 Rumors: What Analysts Say Apple Is Doing Next
The iPhone 17 Air will likely feature an A18 or A19-branded chip, Pu suggests. This would reportedly match the chip in the baseline iPhone 17. It could also include 8GB of RAM and the Apple-developed 5G modem, called the C1 chip, which debuted earlier this month on the iPhone 16E.
What remains to be seen is what battery capacity could look like. A slimmer build typically means less space for the battery and, by extension, potentially a compromise on battery life. Hopefully, that’s not the case here, but we’ll have to see.
A higher refresh rate across the board
Rumor has it all models of the iPhone 17 will feature a 120Hz display, bumping the non-Pro models up from their current 60Hz refresh rate. That could be a welcome change, as the discrepancy between the Pro and non-Pro refresh rate is surprising; when Apple debuted the iPhone 16 and 16 Plus with a 60Hz display, there was a bit of an outcry from folks who expected more in 2024. This rumored update could remedy that — and possibly bring the always-on display to the baseline model.
Apple could also upgrade its Ceramic Shield display by using an antireflective material that’s more scratch-resistant, MacRumors reported.
Camera upgrades
James Martin/CNET
It’s not an iPhone release without a camera upgrade, and there have been plenty of rumors on what the camera module could look like on Apple’s upcoming phones. In January, a leaked image from Majin Bu on X suggested the phone could feature a pill-shaped camera bar, essentially resembling what you’d find on Google’s Pixel 9 phone. In February, Majin Bu followed up with CAD renders of what’s said to be the iPhone 17 lineup, featuring horizontal camera bars, as well as larger rectangular bars on the iPhone 17 Pro models.
Front Page Tech also shared iPhone 17 Pro renders in a video last month, depicting a larger camera bar that maintains the lens’ stacked layout. A separate video on the iPhone 17 Air shows a smaller camera bar, with one lens on the left. Time will tell if these rumors end up being reality.
Another rumor is that the selfie camera on all iPhone 17 models, including the Air, will be upgraded to 24 megapixels, Pu reports. That’s a decent bump from the current 12-megapixel front-facing camera on the iPhone 16 lineup, though it’s important to remember that more megapixels don’t automatically mean better photos. Still, given how much people increasingly rely on their front cameras to snap selfies and record videos for TikTok and Instagram, this will surely be a welcome advancement.
iOS 19 could bring a fresh look
Regarding what’s on the inside, Apple is reportedly looking to revamp its mobile operating system with the release of iOS 19. According to Bloomberg, this “includes updating the style of icons, menus, apps, windows and system buttons.” Sources reportedly told the publication that Apple is “working to simplify the way users navigate and control their devices,” and that the design borrows from the Vision Pro’s operating system. For instance, VisionOS features more circular app icons and translucent navigation panels. It’s possible what you’ll see on your future iPhone could more closely mirror this aesthetic.
The software revamp would reportedly extend to iPad and Mac, therefore bringing consistency across Apple’s devices. Bloomberg notes this would be the biggest software shakeup since macOS Big Sur’s release in 2020 and iOS 7’s release in 2013.
Other possible features
The rumors on what frames the iPhone 17 lineup will feature have gone back and forth, but Pu recently suggested the iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro and iPhone 17 Pro Max will all have aluminum frames. He noted that the iPhone 17 Air could be the outlier with a titanium frame.
Additionally, the iPhone 17 Pro Max could have a narrower Dynamic Island, thanks to a smaller Face ID sensor. Dynamic Island on other iPhone 17 models would reportedly stay the same size, Pu has said.
In February, Kuo noted Apple will swap out Broadcom’s Wi-Fi chips for in-house chips across the iPhone 17 lineup, stating this would “enhance connectivity across Apple devices.” It’s not yet clear what exactly this would mean, but it would be interesting if Apple’s C1 chip were accompanied by its own Wi-Fi chip too.
We’ll continue to update this piece as more rumors surface, so be sure to follow along.
Check Out the iPhone 16 Pro Max’s Cameras, Display and Colors
Clean beauty brand owner calls for higher safety standards
In an on-camera interview with Fox News Digital, TV personality and clean beauty brand owner Emily Austin expressed her excitement about the push for change with the MAHA movement, calling for U.S.-made products to meet EU standards.
A teenager has landed a spot in Guinness World Records for having the world’s hairiest face.
Lalit Patidar, an 18-year-old from India, was found to have 201.72 hairs per square centimeter, covering 95% of his face, according to Guinness.
The excessive hair growth is the result of a rare medical condition called hypertrichosis, informally known as “werewolf syndrome.”
CAN RED LIGHT THERAPY IMPROVE YOUR SKIN? DERMATOLOGISTS SHARE BENEFITS AND TIPS
The condition can be genetic and can occur at birth, according to Healthline. There are also acquired cases that can occur as a result of other skin conditions, malnutrition, eating disorders, cancer or medication side effects.
Lalit Patidar, an 18-year-old from India, was found to have 201.72 hairs per square centimeter, covering 95% of his face.(Guinness World Records)
There have only been around 50 documented cases of the condition worldwide, according to JAMA Dermatology.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
To confirm the record, Patidar saw a trichologist (a specialist who treats hair and scalp disorders) to get an official measurement of his facial hairs.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The teen was excited to learn that he had broken the record.
“I am speechless, I don’t know what to say, because I’m very happy to get this recognition,” he said to Guinness.
The teen was excited to learn that he had broken the record. “I am speechless, I don’t know what to say, because I’m very happy to get this recognition,” he said.(Guinness World Records)
Patidar also told Guinness that children were afraid of him when he first started school.
“They were scared of me, but when they started knowing me and talking to me, they understood I was not so different from them, and it was just on the outside that I looked different, but I’m not different inside,” he said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The teen is now embracing his uniqueness, and has started a YouTube channel that chronicles his daily life.
When people tell Patidar he should remove his facial hair, he says, “I like how I am and I don’t want to change my look.”(Guinness World Records)
When people tell Patidar he should remove his facial hair, he shares the following response.
“I tell them that I like how I am and I don’t want to change my look.”
To confirm the record, Patidar saw a trichologist to get an official measurement of his facial hairs.(Guinness World Records)
There is no cure for hypertrichosis, Healthline noted.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Hair can be removed through short-term methods (shaving, waxing, chemical peels, etc.) or through longer-term methods (electrolysis and laser surgery).
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Indian cuisine boasts a wide variety of flavourful curries, and chole is among the most beloved. Made with chickpeas and a whole bunch of spices, this curry is a staple in North Indian households. It typically offers a spicy flavour and is best savoured with flatbreads and rice. If you’re a chole lover, we are sure you must’ve eaten it multiple times. However, have you ever tried a tangy version of this classic dish? Introducing: Dahi Waale Chole! This unique dish adds a hint of tanginess, making it even more flavourful and delicious. The recipe was shared by the Instagram page @myflavourfuljourney. Before we get into the recipe, let’s see what this dish is all about. Also Read: How To Make Punjabi Chole Masala Powder (And Tips For Storing It)
What Makes Dahi Waale Chole A Must-Try?
Dahi waale chole is unlike any other chole you’ve had before. The addition of curd in this recipe gives it a distinct tangy flavour, making it one-of-a-kind. You can expect it to be creamier and more indulgent, and also spicier. It’s great for times when you feel like preparing something different for lunch or dinner.
What To Serve With Dahi Waale Chole?
Dahi waale chole are best enjoyed with steaming hot jeera rice. Additionally, it also tastes incredible with crispy lachha paratha or roti. When enjoying it, don’t forget to relish some papad, onions, and achaar on the side. You’ll absolutely love the taste.
How To Make Dahi Waale Chole | Chole Recipes
Start by boiling kabuli chana with some salt. Now, add curd, cashew nuts, ginger-garlic paste, green chillies, haldi, red chilli powder, coriander powder, and jeera powder into a food processor. Blend well to form a smooth paste. Next, heat oil in a kadhai and add jeera, kasuri methi, and the prepared curd paste. Cover the kadhai with a lid and cook over a low flame. Add the boiled kabuli chana, sliced onion, fresh coriander, and garam masala. Mix well and cook for another 2 to 3 minutes. Serve hot and enjoy! Also Read: How To Make Chole Bhature: The Complete Guide
Watch the complete video below:
Will you try this dahi waale chole recipe? Tell us in the comments below!
About Vaishali KapilaVaishali finds comfort in eating parathas and rajma chawal but is equally enthusiastic about exploring different cuisines. When she’s not eating or baking, you can often find her curled up on the couch watching her favourite TV show – FRIENDS.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-11/China-denounces-disinformation-campaigns-by-anti-China-institute-1BEZHvhWPvi/img/765f63f82ff04567a1b6aa68d4e021e3/765f63f82ff04567a1b6aa68d4e021e3.jpeg' alt='Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Mao Ning speaks at a regular press conference in Beijing, China, March 11, 2025. /Chinese Foreign Ministry'
China calls on all sectors of Australia and the international community to join voices denouncing and resisting the fabrication and spread of disinformation by a so-called research institute in Australia, a Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson said on Tuesday.
Spokesperson Mao Ning made the remarks at a regular press briefing in response to reports that the head of the Australian Strategic Policy Institute (ASPI) posted on social media about the institute’s lack of anti-China materials due to U.S. funding cuts, urging the U.S. or other organizations to immediately fund relevant anti-China agenda.
Mao said that the so-called research institute in Australia has long been funded by the U.S. defense and diplomatic agencies, as well as arms dealers. She emphasized that it serves the interests of its donors and has propagated a long list of lies against China, with its so-called “research findings” lacking basic factual grounds and having repeatedly been proved as disinformation, which clearly violates the professional ethics of academic research. “There is no credibility to speak of for this so-called research institute.”
What the head of the institute revealed on social media further exposes its hypocritical nature of creating falsehoods and spreading disinformation to vilify China under U.S. funding, Mao said, expressing hope that people in Australia and the international community would recognize ASPI’s true nature and join in denouncing and resisting its disinformation campaigns.
Hyderabad’s real estate growth is rapidly expanding beyond its core hubs, with peripheral areas emerging as the city’s new growth frontiers, according to a report by real estate services company Colliers.
In its report ‘Hyderabad: Emerging Real Estate Growth Hotspots’, Colliers said the growth is largely driven by the upcoming Metro Phase II extension, proposed Regional Ring Road (RRR) and various industrial corridors that are coming up on the outskirts of the city.
“Hyderabad’s office market continues to mature, driving one-fifth of the demand and over one-fourth of the new supply across the top 6 cities in India during 2024. The city’s peripheral areas are set to enter a transformative growth phase, fueled by upcoming infrastructure projects and supportive government policies,” Arpit Mehrotra, Managing Director, Office Services, Colliers India, said.
“Both demand and supply of Grade A office spaces are likely to grow multifold in the next few years,” he said.
The West Periphery micro-market in particular, including Kokapet, Neopolis, Narsingi etc. is likely to witness heightened commercial activity, driven by price arbitrage compared to established IT hubs of Gachibowli & Hi-Tec City and enhancements in metro connectivity.
“Although average rentals in the West Periphery micro market could potentially increase by 10-15% from the current levels, the price arbitrage will persist and continue to be an attractive proposition for domestic and global occupiers, including GCCs,” he said.
While established hotspots in the West & Central Hyderabad will continue to drive real estate activity, peripheral areas including North, South, East and West peripheries are expected to account for 12-15 per cent of Hyderabad’s Grade A office stock and 5-10 per cent of annual office space demand in the next 3-5 years, the report said.
The residential market is also set to witness significant traction, with property prices in the peripheral areas projected to rise 10-20 per cent over the next 3-5 years.
Emerging areas in the city’s periphery are likely to account for 20-25 per cent of Hyderabad’s Grade A new supply, significantly up from a current share of less than 5 per cent. Moreover, areas including Kokapet, Shamshabad, Uppal and Pocharam are expected to see a notable rise in Grade A space uptake.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LILA Moss privukla je pažnju prošlog vikenda u Parizu, gdje je na večeri brenda Frame u Château Voltaireu nosila kaput s leopard uzorkom iz ormara svoje majke, Kate Moss. Kako navodi Vogue, Kate je ovaj kaput prvi put nosila oko 2006. godine.
Lila Moss naslijedila je majčin prepoznatljiv stil, ali mu daje moderni zaokret, spajajući ležernu estetiku s upečatljivim komadima. Njezina interpretacija Kateine rock’n’roll elegancije prilagođena je novoj generaciji, no ljubav prema bezvremenskim statement komadima ostaje.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Često posuđuje mamine vintage modne komade
Ovo nije prvi put da je Lila zavirila u mamin kultni ormar – Kate je za Vogue otkrila da joj Lila često “krade” vintage dizajnerske komade, uključujući one Johna Galliana i Vivienne Westwood.
S odrastanjem u svijetu mode, gdje se već kao dijete družila iza kulisa revija Louis Vuittona, Lila danas suvereno gradi vlastiti stil. Dok clean girl estetika i dalje dominira, Lila Moss donosi njezinu evoluciju – razbarušena kosa umjesto zalizane punđe i dašak leopard uzorka kao odmak od minimalističkog sportskog šik izgleda.
Ako vam se sviđaju jakne s leopard uzorkom poput one u kojoj je prošetala Lila Moss, pronašli smo sličnu – pogledajte je u nastavku.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Animo de la Hoya 11, Smidt Tech 5 Chavez 1, Grant 0 Diego Rivera 12, Elizabeth 3 East Valley 11, Lakeview Charter 6 Franklin 17, West Adams 2 Gardena 3, Fremont 1 Northridge Academy 6, Triumph Charter 5 Rancho Dominguez 6, Port of LA 4 RFK Community 11, Mendez 5 Roosevelt 8, Verdugo Hills 7 Salesian 8, Legacy 2 Vaughn 6, Marquez 3
Southern Section
Alhambra 11, Mark Keppel 8 Alta Loma 12, Diamond Bar 1 Anaheim Canyon 8, Yorba Linda 7 Apple Valley 3, Granite Hills 1 Aquinas 12, Woodcrest Christian 1 Arcadia 9, Pasadena 0 Arlington 8, Liberty 2 Banning 9, Big Bear 6 Bellflower 5, Valley Christian 0 Cajon 6, Adelanto 0 California Lutheran 3, Cornerstone Christian 1 Castaic 4, Santa Paula 0 Chadwick 9, Long Beach Jordan 2 Chino Hills 5, Beckman 2 Cypress 6, Santa Ana Foothill 5 Desert Mirage 4, Desert Hot Springs 1 Downey 2, Long Beach Poly 1 Ridgecrest Burroughs 9, Foothill 0 Sierra Canyon 10, Loyola 2 Edison 2, Katella 0 Elsinore 6, Mission Vista 1 El Rancho 2, Eastvale Roosevelt 1 Esperanza 5, Milken 3 Faith Baptist 11, PACS 2 Fountain Valley 6, Lakewood 2 Godinez 7, Placentia Valencia 4 Harvard-Westlake 8, Bishop Alemany 2 Indio 5, San Jacinto Valley Academy 1 Jurupa Hills 5, Eisenhower 2 Kaiser 8, Upland 0 La Canada 11, South Pasadena 8 La Mirada 4, Warren 2 La Salle 4, Charter Oak 3 Littlerock 8, Hesperia Christian 1 Loma Linda Academy 5, Mesa Grande Academy 1 Los Altos 9, Santa Fe 7 Magnolia 7, Western 5 Monrovia 5, Temple City 0 Newport Harbor 2, Aliso Niguel 1 Nordhoff 25, Bishop Diego 4 Northwood 12, Mission Viejo 3 Oxnard 5, Malibu 4 Pioneer 10, Rosemead 3 Ramona 2, Riverside King 1 Rancho Alamitos 6, Saddleback 3 Rancho Cucamonga 2, Glendora 1 Riverside Notre Dame 8, Rancho Verde 7 Santa Ana Calvary Chapel 3, Ocean View 0 Santa Maria 14, Valley Christian Academy 4 San Marino 8, Cerritos 1 Savanna 9, Los Amigos 3 Segerstrom 3, Costa Mesa 1 Sonora 5, Sunny Hills 2 South Hills 5, Ayala 4 South Torrance 15, Peninsula 9 Tahquitz 10, West Valley 1 Temecula Valley 1, Compton Early College 1 Twentynine Palms 14, Cathedral City 5 Vasquez 11, Golden Valley 4 Vista Murrieta 3, Etiwanda 2 Windward 4, Grace 0 Woodbridge 3, La Palma Kennedy 2 YULA 10, Buckley 1
Intersectional
Animo Venice 20, Animo City of Champions 3 Calabasas 12, Kennedy 2 Palos Verdes 8, Narbonne 2 Pasadena Poly 11, Eagle Rock 8 Salesian 8, Legacy 2
SOFTBALL
City Section
Bell 15, Maywood Academy 4 Cleveland 9, North Hollywood 5 Community Charter 21, VAAS 0 Contreras 14, Hollywood 5 Legacy 16, Hamilton 1 Marquez 10, Lincoln 0 Mendez 31, Bernstein 21 Narbonne 13, Fairfax 12 Orthopaedic 9, Roybal 6 Triumph Charter 20, University Prep Value 9
Southern Section
Adelanto 20, ACE 7 Anaheim 12, Costa Mesa 2 Apple Valley 18, Victor Valley 2 Arlington 1, Ramona 1 Arroyo 13, Garey 1 Banning 17, Big Bear 15 Beckman 10, Dana Hills 0 Bishop Amat 8, Lakewood St. Joseph 1 Bishop Diego 16, Valley Christian Academy 0 Buena Park 10, Whitney 0 Burbank 7, Mayfield 6 Cajon 20, Rialto 1 Coachella Valley 9, Cathedral City 3 Coastal Christian 12, Del Oro 1 Colton 6, Hesperia Christian 1 Foothill Tech 18, Carpinteria 0 Glendale 6, Lynwood 5 Grace 8, Santa Paula 5 Hacienda Heights Wilson 8, Nogales 5 Hawthorne 17, Saddleback 2 Hemet 14, Anza Hamilton 0 Immanuel Christian 27, Lucerne Valley 1 Irvine University 14, Savanna 1 Jurupa Hills 15, Colony 9 Lakeside 17, Temecula Prep 2 Los Osos 0, Kaiser 2 Maranatha 28, Pasadena 26 Mesa Grande Academy 3, Loma Linda Academy 2 Muir 12, La Canada 2 Newbury Park 8, Royal 5 North Torrance 4, Wiseburn Da Vinci 1 Palm Springs 6, Excelsior Charter 5 Portola 18, Orange 3 Rancho Cucamonga 16, Chino 12 Rancho Verde 13, Riverside Notre Dame 2 Riverside King 13, Temescal Canyon 2 Riverside Prep 6, Redlands East Valley 3 San Clemente 3, Woodbridge 3 San Jacinto Valley Academy 4, West Valley 0 Santa Ana Calvary Chapel 13, Westminster 4 Santa Monica 2, Peninsula 1 Santa Rosa Academy 10, Jurupa Valley 7 Serrano 13, Riverside North 8 Summit 20, University Prep 10 Twentynine Palms 11, Moreno Valley 5 Upland 16, West Covina 0 Valencia 5, Thousand Oaks 0 Viewpoint 10, Faith Baptist 0 Westminster La Quinta 13, Godinez 12
Intersectional
Camarillo 8, El Camino Real 1 El Rancho 11, LA Roosevelt 0 Ridgecrest Burroughs 21, Bakersfield Foothill 2
Nothing Phone (3a) Series Sale Starts: After the global launch of the Nothing Phone (3a) Series last week, London-based technology company Nothing on Tuesday, March 11, started the sales of Phone (3a) and Phone (3a) Pro in India. Interested customers can purchase these devices from Flipkart, Vijay Sales, Croma, and all leading retail stores of the country.
Introductory Price
As a special introductory offer on day 1, the company announced that the Phone (3a) would be available for as low as Rs 19,999, and the Phone (3a) Pro for as low as Rs 24,999 (including all offers).
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: Camera
Launched globally on March 4, the Nothing Phone (3a) Series has major camera upgrades. The Phone (3a) features a 50MP main sensor, a Sony ultra-wide sensor, and a 50MP telephoto lens with 2x optical zoom, while the Phone (3a) Pro with a periscope camera, boasts 60x ultra zoom. For selfies, the Phone (3a) has a 32MP front camera, while the Pro model features a 50MP sensor with 4K video recording.
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: Processor and Battery
Both phones feature the Snapdragon 7s Gen 3 Mobile Platform and 5000 mAh batteries. The company claims that it is capable of delivering up to two days of use on a full charge.
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: Charging
With upgraded fast charging of 50W, the Phone (3a) Series delivers a full day’s power (50%) in under 20 minutes, the company added.
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: Display
Both phones boast a display of 6.77 inches with Full HD+ resolution. Visuals look crisp with 387 pixels in every inch of screen, and a fluid 120Hz adaptive refresh rate. The display offers 1000 hz sampling rate in gaming mode making gaming smooth and responsive.
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: OS and Upgrades
The Nothing Phone (3a) Series runs Nothing OS 3.1 on Android 15. It includes updates to the Nothing Gallery, Camera, and Weather apps and guarantees six years of updates—three years of Android updates and six years of security updates.
Essential Space
The series also introduces Essential Space, an AI-powered hub for notes and ideas, and the Essential Key (on the right side of the phone) for quick access—press to save content, long-press for voice notes, and double-tap to view saved items.
Phone (3a) will be available in Black, White, and Blue colour. ○ 8+128 GB – ₹22,999 (Including bank offers) ○ 8+256 GB – ₹24,999 (Including bank offers)
Phone (3a) Pro will be available in Grey and Black colour ○ 8+128 GB – ₹27,999 (Including bank offers) ○ 8+256 GB – ₹29,999 (Including bank offers) ○ 12+256 GB – ₹31,999 (Including bank offers)
Nothing Phone (3a) Series: Availability
○ The Phone (3a) is available on sale via Flipkart, Flipkart Minutes, Vijay Sales, Croma, and all leading retail stores starting from 11 March. ○ The Phone (3a) Pro is available on sale via Flipkart and Flipkart Minutes starting from 11 March. The Flipkart deliveries and sales on Vijay Sales, Croma and all leading retail stores will start from 15 March. ○ Additionally for the first time the Nothing Phone (3a) series will be available on Flipkart minutes which means the phone can be delivered to your home within 10 minutes of open sales.
Guatemalan authorities evacuated around 1,000 people Monday after Central America’s most active volcano erupted, spewing lava, ash and rocks.
The “Volcan de Fuego,” or Volcano of Fire, blows a cloud of ash seen from Palin, Guatemala.(Image by AP)
By night, however, the eruption was declared over, and evacuees were allowed to begin returning to their homes.
Residents with traumatic memories of a deadly eruption in 2018 sought refuge early Monday after the Fuego volcano exploded spectacularly 35 kilometers (22 miles) from the capital Guatemala City.
“We heard the rumblings and then a strong eruption,” Manuel Cobox, 46, told AFP after leaving his home with his wife and three daughters.
Some 125 families, around 900 people, were moved to safety from the community of El Porvenir, said Juan Laureano, a spokesman for Guatemala’s disaster coordination agency, Conred.
Residents of another community in Las Lajitas were also evacuated, the official added.
Buses brought evacuees carrying belongings to a town hall turned into a temporary shelter, while others stayed with friends or relatives.
Around 30,000 people were potentially “at risk” and should evacuate themselves if necessary, Conred head Claudinne Ogaldes told a news conference.
By late Monday, though, the eruptive episode was declared “ended” and the volcano’s parameters returned to “normal” levels following the dramatic increase of activity from Sunday, the state-run Volcanology Institute said in a bulletin.
Guatemala lies on the Pacific “Ring of Fire” and experiences frequent seismic and volcanic activity.
In June 2018, 215 people were killed and a similar number left missing when Fuego volcano erupted, sending rivers of lava pouring down its sides and devastating the village of San Miguel Los Lotes.
On that occasion, residents “did not believe the magnitude and a tragedy struck,” said Cobox, who works on a pig farm.
Amanda Santos, a 58-year-old housekeeper, said that memories of that previous eruption came flooding back when she heard the firefighters’ sirens.
“That’s why we’re afraid. Many people died,” she added.
Another eruption in 2023 from the 3,763-meter (12,346-foot) Fuego caused the evacuation of around 1,200 people.
An alert was issued by the authorities on Sunday in order to coordinate the response and preventive measures, Conred said.
The government suspended local school activities, although classes were now set to resume Tuesday.
Officials also temporarily closed a road through the village that links the south of the country to the colonial city of Antigua, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and Guatemala’s most popular tourist destination.
Authorities had been monitoring pyroclastic flows — fast-moving currents of hot ash, gas and rock fragments that descend the slopes of a volcano, Conred spokesman Laureano said.
The Volcanology Institute recommended that air traffic take precautions due to a spreading ash cloud.
Architects have continued to grow with every album, and now they’ve reached melting point. The metalcore band have this week announced their next UK tour, will be kicking off in October, 2025. And, however exciting this already is, it’s even more of a big deal considering the band will be playing arenas for the first time. That includes a final show of the tour at London’s O2 Arena, the 20,000+ capacity venue that has now become the band’s biggest UK date of their career.
All of this follows the release of their 11th studio album, The Sky, The Earth and All Between, which was released on February 28, 2025, and reached number two in the album charts (beaten only by Sabrina Carpenter). Tickets for this tour will be released at the end of the week, with some presales kicking off before then. Here’s all the information you need on how to get involved now.
Architects are holding three presale events.
The first is an album/artist presale and kicks off on Wednesday, March 12, 2025, at 10am. These tickets are exclusively available to fans who purchased the band’s new album, The Sky, The Earth and All Between, before 3pm on Tuesday, March 11, 2025, from the official website.
The second presale comes from O2 Priority, and will be available to fans who are signed up to the O2 mobile phone network on Wednesday, March 12, 2025, at 10am.
Makoto Uchida will be replaced as CEO of Nissan by the Ivan Espinosa, the company’s chief planning officer and head of motorsports, on April 1.
Nissan’s board of directors met on March 11, and asked Uchida-san to step aside in favour of Mr Espinosa. Uchida-san will stay on as a director until the automaker’s shareholder meeting in June.
Since Honda and Nissan officially abandoned their plans to merge in the middle of February, reports emerged indicating Nissan’s board were unhappy with Uchida-san’s leadership and were keen for a change in leadership. There are also rumors Honda is willing to revive merger talks provided Uchida-san step aside.
Other changes to the board include Guillaume Cartier adding marketing and customer experience to his role as chief performance officer, Eiichi Akashi, currently head of vehicle component engineering, becoming chief technology officer, and Teiji Hirata stepping up to be head of manufacturing and supply chain management.
Asako Hoshino, chief brand and customer officer, and Hideaki Watanabe, chief strategy and corporate affairs officer, will both step down.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Ivan Espinosa, new Nissan CEO
At a short press conference, Mr Espinosa was asked about the possibility of reviving merger talks with Honda, how he plans address Nissan’s lacklustre performance in China and the US, and whether there are any further plant closures on the horizon.
He didn’t provide detailed answers to these questions, stating he only just found out of his appointment as the next CEO, and saying he needed “need some time to reflect” on those issues.
Mr Espinosa has a degree in mechanical engineering, and worked as an automotive engineering analyst at Jato dynamics before joining Nissan Mexico in 2003, rising to become the head of product planning there by 2006.
After this he spent some time as head of commercial vehicle marketing and then program director at Nissan ASEAN before taking on the lead product planning role in Latin America.
Since 2014 Mr Espinosa has held senior global roles primarily in product development, adding NISMO and motorsports to his portfolio in 2019 and 2023, respectively. Just a year later he was elevated to become the automaker’s chief planning officer.
Overnight he said his experience across different parts of the company, as well as in different regions, gave him insight into what makes Nissan “unique and valuable”.
Makota Uchida, outgoing Nissan CEO
Speaking at the press conference Uchida-san said, “Since we unveiled the turnaround actions last fall, people not only outside the company but also our employees began to question my responsibility”.
“Given I am unable to gain the confidence of some of our employees and that the board made a request, I concluded that transitioning to the new top management and making a fresh start will be in the best interests of Nissan,” he continued.
According to Uchida-san “the top priority of Nissan today is to break away from the current situation as quickly as possible and bring the company back on the growth track”.
The company is “looking into new partnership opportunities from diverse perspectives and have started to examine various options”, although the outgoing CEO didn’t elaborate on whether these were with Honda, the iPhone contract manufacturer Foxconn, or some other entity.
According to Uchida-san, the new management team are already involved in discussions about partnerships and how to turn the company around.
Looking over his five years and four months in charge of the automaker, Uchida-san said the company had a lot on its plate, including industry-wide disruptions, such as electric vehicles and autonomous driving, as well as Nissan-specific problems, like the aftermath of former CEO Carlos Ghosn’s arrest.
He took credit for “rebalancing” Nissan’s relationship with Renault, which agreed to slowly sell down its stake in the Japanese automaker, take a more hands-off approach, and loosen the product planning and parts sharing bonds between the two firms.
Uchida-san noted Nissan’s “business performance that has rapidly deteriorated” over the past year, and said, “I deeply regret that I have to pass the baton to my successor in these circumstances.”
In February, on the back of another disapointing quarter, Nissan announced it would close three factories, and implement major cost-saving measures in a bid to save 400 billion Yen ($4.14 billion) by the 2026 Japanese fiscal year.
The outgoing CEO spoke warmly of successor, stating “Espinosa-san is still in his 40s and full of energy” and that “he’s also a real car guy” who has more technical knowledge about Nissan’s current products than himself.
MORE: Nissan CEO to step down imminently, Honda merger could be back on – report MORE: ‘A clash of egos’: What allegedly led to the Honda-Nissan merger failing MORE: Honda’s ultimatum to Nissan: Ditch your CEO if you want a merger – report MORE: Nissan to close factories, cut thousands of jobs as financial woes worsen MORE: Honda and Nissan officially call off merger
While mobile bill payments don’t directly affect your credit score, but timely payments can boost creditworthiness. Unpaid bills sent to collections can lower your score.
Timely mobile bill payments don’t directly affect credit scores.
When applying for a loan or credit card, your credit score – often referred to as a CIBIL score – plays a crucial role in determining your creditworthiness. Banks and financial institutions closely evaluate this score to decide whether to approve your loan or credit card application. While factors like credit card usage and loan repayments are known to impact credit scores, many people wonder if paying mobile phone bills has a similar effect. Let’s break down the connection between mobile bill payments and credit scores.
Do Mobile Bill Payments Affect Credit Scores?
In India, paying your mobile bill on time does not directly influence your credit score. Leading credit information companies like CIBIL, Experian, Equifax, and CRIF High Mark focus primarily on credit-related transactions – such as loan repayments, credit card bills, and credit utilisation ratios – when calculating credit scores. Utility bills, including mobile phone payments, are generally not factored into these calculations.
However, consistently paying your mobile bills on time can still contribute to your overall financial health by reinforcing responsible payment behaviour. This reflects positively on your credit profile, even if it doesn’t directly improve your credit score.
New Credit Scoring Models Could Change This
Newer credit scoring models are being developed to give lenders a more comprehensive view of an individual’s financial behaviour. These models aim to incorporate utility bill payments, including mobile bills, into credit score calculations, especially for individuals without a traditional credit history.
Such models are already in use in some countries, helping people with limited credit history to build a credit profile based on regular bill payments. However, in India, these models are still in the early stages of development and have not yet been widely adopted by financial institutions.
The Risk of Unpaid Mobile Bills
While paying your mobile bill on time won’t boost your credit score, missing payments can hurt it. If a mobile service provider reports unpaid bills to a collection agency, the outstanding amount may appear on your credit report. This can negatively impact your score, making it harder to secure loans or credit cards in the future.
Once a bill goes to collections, it remains on your credit report for several years, signaling to lenders that you may be a risky borrower. Therefore, it’s essential to treat mobile bill payments with the same level of importance as credit card or loan repayments.
News business Not Paying Mobile Bills On Time? Here’s How It Can Affect Your Credit Score
In case, you are looking for a cool and interesting way to earn a quick buck, Here’s a platform that pays you for filling out simple surveys. Toluna Group lets you take surveys for forming a database for market research.
Toluna is a worldwide survey technology provider and claims to be the “ World’s Largest social voting community” which has more than nine million survey takers.
In this review, you will get a detailed insight into Toluna, Let’s look into this review article now:
Overview
Name
Toluna
Owner
Frederic-Charles Petit
Founded Year
2000
Headquarters
Paris, France
Type
Online Surveys
Apps
iPhone & Android Devices
Support
Email, Phone
Website
www.toluna.com
What is Toluna?
Toluna is a community survey platform that offers online surveys in return for rewards. This is a Paris( France) based company, managed by the Toluna Group and a well known market research company preferred by brands around the world. With more than 9 million survey takers, for the people who want to make money by taking surveys, Toluna is a preferred option.
The users that register on Toluna and take up these surveys are known as “Toluna Influencers”. These surveys completed are used by the major brands to help them figure out their business plan. It is one of the world’s most popular survey sites which has a very strong subscriber base and an effective portfolio of clients.
With 16+ offices globally, Toluna team aims to provide better products and quality to the consumers. They do it by surveying for the brands and thus it helps in dealing with customer satisfaction and to improve their business plan.
How to Register on Toluna?
Toluna provides its membership to 49 countries. The number of surveys that are available depends on your location.
Step 1: You can fill up the registration form online and sign up for Toluna.
Step 2: After the Toluna login, you will be asked to verify your account by providing your personal details. Further, you are good to take the online surveys.
Toluna Influencers are paid in the form of points which can be redeemed further in the form of gift cards, vouchers, etc. There are two types of Toluna surveys available listed below:
Profile Surveys: These surveys take a short period of time to complete where you are rewarded with 100 points.
Longer Surveys: These surveys take a longer duration to complete typically about 10 to 30 minutes with much higher rewards
You can update your personal information by logging into your account. Select “Account” in the top right corner and then click the Edit option. You can also view your account activity such as credits purchased, surveys launched, and the current status of your subscription.
In cases where you forget your password, you can do it by Clicking the Sign in button at the top right side. Then click the “forgot your password” option and follow the instructions further which you will be able to retrieve your password.
How to make money in Toluna?
There are 8 ways to earn in Toluna which are as follows:
Toluna Surveys: They are the most effective way of earningToluna points. There are multiple surveys available online to complete at any point of time. Usually the majority of the surveys pay 1000-2000 points which lasts for about 20 minutes. 5500 Toluna points are roughly equivalent to 1 pound.
Completing Profile Surveys: You will find the “Profile Surveys” under the surveys option at the top of the screen. Each profile consists of 14 Surveys each and you will get 100points for each survey.
Participate in Polls: In this you will usually earn a points reward of 15 points per poll, usually takes seconds to complete
Post in the Toluna community: You can also earn points by posting your content in the Toluna Community. You may win up to 1000 points per post if your post gets qualified.
Participate in the Contest: Toluna offers launch contests to encourage the users to post more in the community. Inreturn they are rewarded with some points and other prizes.
Start your own contest: you will also be rewarded with points and prizes if you start your own contest.
Refer a friend to Toluna: you can share your referral link with your friends and you will get 500 bonus points for each friend upto 10 months
Play Toluna Games:You can also win points by playing games. You can win about 80-1000 points by spinning the wheel.
How to redeem points in Toluna?
There are 3 ways to redeem the points in Toluna which are listed below:
Rewards:It offers a variety of gift cards with an option to cashout by Paypal. The cheapest gift card costs around 30,000 points
Gifties: These are the tickets you can buy to win a range of rewards
Sweepstakes: You can also exchange your points to get a chance to join the monthly sweepstakes where you can buy branded items
You need to reach of minimum of 30,000 points which are listed below:
$10 gift card for Starbucks- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Cheesecake factory- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Redbox- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for JiffyLube- 30,000 points
$25 gift card for Restaurants.com-45,000 points
$25 gift card for Walmart- 45,000 points
$25 gift card for Fandango- 45,000 points
Toluna is it Legit or Scam?
As per the Toluna reviews, it has been found that Toluna is a legitimate business. Despite its long wait times, it has a noted record of paying its clients and further issuing them good rewards.
It is a company that offers to pay on each survey you take. It has been very popular and has become one of the people’s number one choices regarding online surveys. They also have a base of around 13 million users and is on a rapid expansion
Toluna also has an A+ rating in the Better Business Bureau(BBB) with only around 31 customer complaints. Further, it has a 3.8 rating on the Trustpilot with more than 2,100 Toluna reviews.
There are a lot more positive reviews compared to the criticism. It has great customer service for which it accounts as one of the legit organizations that pay people in response to the online surveys.
Conclusion
It is to be acknowledged that Toluna is a legitimate business which pays its users based on the surveys they take.It is one of the top rated companies with a trusted community of 1+ million members which make it highly recommended.
It is an honest way to make full time income on the internet by taking surveys. It has no hidden costs and in turn you will learn how to build a flourishing business online in Toluna. It also allows you to choose surveys in categories which you are interested in.
Thus finally it is advisable that Toluna is worth giving a try. You can take it as a fun experience and further you will enjoy it a lot. If you are looking to earn income by taking up online surveys, then Toluna is definitely on the top lists which are trusted.
FAQ
How much does it cost to join Toluna?
No, Signing up for Toluna is completely free. Sign up today and access its features free of cost
Does Toluna pay in cash?
Toluna Influencers are compensated in points, which can be exchanged for a variety of items such as gift cards, competition entries, or plain old cash.
How long do the surveys take to complete?
It is dependent on the targeting and the screening questions. The more of these questions you have, the longer your survey may take to complete.
How do I cash out my Toluna points?
You need to have at least 60000 points. Go to rewards, convert your points into cash through, 60000points=$20.
Is Toluna Survey Legit?
Toluna is a safe and reliable platform. It is not a scam, and millions of people from all over the world have taken their surveys for over ten years. However, your experience with the site may vary from that of other survey takers.
Toluna Ratings
User Review
1.12 (354 votes)
Pros
It is a very reputed company which is operating.
It is completely free to join and features are free to use
Modern and user-friendly interface
You can earn money by answering the surveys on the go while on the phone
Interesting Surveys
Get a consolation prize even if any disqualified
Cons
The disqualifications can be frustrating
There is a minimum cashout of $30 which is hard to reach
Some of its surveys take time to complete
Some users complain about the long wait times for payments or rewards
You stop writing after the intro to ponder what details to include.
You need facts to support the solutions recommended in the content, but you don’t have them.
You’ve written and written and written, but you’re not sure it makes sense, let alone if it’s good.
Your fingers are posed to write another piece of content on the same topic you’ve written about 25 times in the past two years, and you must make it different enough.
You wrote a good first draft, but you’ve been immersed in the text so long you’ve lost the ability to polish it for a reader who’s never seen it.
What can you do to overcome these challenges?
Grab your AI buddy (or buddies) to help you out. Follow these five prompts (and prompt revisions) to get your creativity flowing and your content consumable and credible. I used Gemini, ChatGPT, and Perplexity AI as my helpers, but these prompts should work well with similar AI tools, too.
1. Generate ideas you haven’t thought of
You know the topic well. After all, you write about it frequently. But you’re not sure how to make it fresh or different from everything your brand has already published. Try this.
AI prompt: “I am writing an article for (target audience) to help them tackle (challenge). Share 10 unexpected things they could do.”
Example prompt: “I am writing an article for marketers about how to get out of a creative rut when creating content. Share 10 unexpected things they could do.”
Gemini’s response includes such things as:
Visit a museum or art gallery (virtual or in-person).
People-watch or eavesdrop (ethically).
Cook or bake something new.
Explore a different genre of music.
Go walk in nature (without your phone).
The other six suggestions include:
Try freewriting or stream-of-consciousness writing.
Change your physical environment.
Read something completely unrelated to your industry.
Brainstorm with someone outside your field.
Revisit your old work (with fresh eyes).
Gemini also explains how to execute each suggestion and why it is beneficial. For example, the people-watch and eavesdrop tip explains:
“Go to a coffee shop, park, or other public space and observe people. Listen to snippets of conversations (without being creepy, of course!). Real-life interactions can provide insights into current trends, concerns, and language that resonates with your target audience. This helps you tap into authentic human experiences.”
OK, that’s a good answer, but many of the unexpected ideas go beyond what the audience likely could do within their work parameters. If that’s the case, add a follow-up prompt to get more helpful answers.
Follow-up AI prompt: “What could they do to address that challenge with (describe environment or available means)?”
Example follow-up prompt: Since marketers in a creative rut probably can’t leave their desk to hit a museum, walk in nature, or eavesdrop, the follow-up prompt is, “What could they do while sitting at their desk?”
Gemini responds with even more practical and specific answers — only one of which overlaps with the previous answer:
Change your font.
Use a random word generator.
Explore visual content.
Listen to ambient sounds.
Try a mind-mapping tool.
Take a micro-break.
Use a writing prompt generator.
Read quotes from inspiring figures.
Use a thesaurus.
Freewrite for five minutes.
2. Ask for research assistance
Third-party research can bring fresh perspectives and credibility to your content, so turn your AI tool into a research assistant. I find this usually requires a little more prompt finesse when you get into the specifics, but here’s a good starting point.
AI prompt: “Share quality research about effective solutions for (topic).”
Example prompt: “Can you share quality research about effective solutions for creative ruts?”
Perplexity AI gave me some possibly helpful answers, citing an Elsevier study about establishing a routine and quoting psychologist Graham Wallas about a theory that involves taking strategic breaks in the creative process.
But, the sources identified in the right column aren’t clearly research articles. They seem to talk about answers that are generically backed by research. The last source in the image, “Cultivating Creative Problem-Solving Through Limitations and …” may be the most helpful, stating “This action research explores how setting limitations on a creative process is used across disciplines …”
However, after looking through the sources, I’d like more authoritative options, so I revised the prompt to add the word “academic.”
Follow-up AI prompt: “Share quality academic research about (topic).”
Example prompt: “Can you share quality academic research on solutions to creative ruts?”
The answer cites research from the universities of Michigan, Limerick, and Iowa State, as well as the Elsevier study.
The sources include a couple of fresh options, including one with an interview with a neurology professor and another that explores neurological, psychological, and environmental factors.
3. Unravel your messy text
You’ve pulled together a lot of notes and compiled them into a really long article. You’ve read it so many times, you’ve lost sight of whether it flows well for your targeted reader.
Your AI assistant stands ready to help and detail the path to see if you’re sending readers in the right direction.
Prompt: “Write subheads for this text: (Add the text without any headlines or section labels.)”
Example prompt: “Please write subheads for this article: (I included the text from a CMI article about asking for a raise and removed all the headers.)”
Among the first subheads created by ChatGPT:
Why Job-Hopping May Be the Fastest Route to a 20% Raise
How to Research Your Worth in the Marketing Industry
Using Salary Benchmark Reports to Strengthen Your Case
As I read through the subhead suggestions, it’s clear the article flows logically. (Whew, given this piece was already published, that’s a good thing.)
But what if I changed the polished text to a messier version? Here’s what Gemini suggests for subheads:
Research the marketplace before you negotiate.
Leverage pay transparency laws to your advantage.
Three key strategies to boost your compensation.
Use job postings to gauge market compensation.
Consult salary benchmark reports for additional insights.
Frame your raise request around business value.
Make it easy for decision-makers to approve your raise.
When I read through the seven subheads, I can easily see the original draft would benefit from a reorder. After all, it makes sense to group the external research ideas [pay transparency laws (no. 2), job postings (no. 4), and salary benchmark reports (no. 5)] into the same section.
TIP: I find the AI tools usually default to listing subheads for every point in the article. While that’s helpful for understanding if the content flows logically, it can be problematic in crafting the actual subheads. So, use this follow-up prompt, “Use fewer subheads for the article,” and you’ll likely get a usable response.
4. Mix up the format
You’re sick and tired of doing (and seeing) your content the same way every time — headline, intro, subhead, text, subhead, text, subhead, text, etc. Reinvigorate your content by asking your AI buddy (I used Gemini) for fresh format ideas.
AI prompt: What other content formats would work well for this text?
Example prompt: Using the CMI salary article, I posed the question about other formats and received this answer:
“This content about asking for a raise could be effectively repurposed into several other formats, each catering to different learning styles and consumption habits. Here are a few ideas:
Infographic: A visually appealing infographic could break down the key steps into digestible chunks, using icons and charts to illustrate key points like salary research, achievement tracking, and negotiation tactics. This format is ideal for quick comprehension and sharing on social media.
Video: A short, engaging video could feature a career coach or expert walking through the steps, perhaps using real-life scenarios or role-playing to demonstrate effective communication techniques. Video is highly engaging and allows for a more personal connection with the audience.
Podcast Episode: A podcast episode could delve deeper into each step, featuring interviews with successful marketers who have negotiated raises. The audio format is perfect for listening on the go and allows for more in-depth discussion and storytelling.
Checklist/Worksheet: A downloadable checklist or worksheet could provide a practical, actionable tool for readers to follow along and track their progress. This format encourages active participation and helps readers personalize the advice to their own situations.
SlideShare Presentation: A visually driven presentation on SlideShare could condense the key takeaways into a concise and shareable format, suitable for presentations or quick reviews.
Social Media Thread: A series of tweets or LinkedIn posts could break down the content into bite-sized pieces, each focusing on a specific tip or strategy. This format is ideal for engaging with a wider audience and sparking conversation.
Email Newsletter Series: A multi-part email series could deliver the content gradually, allowing readers to digest the information over time and prompting them to take action at each stage. This format fosters engagement and builds a relationship with the audience.
Interactive Quiz: An online quiz could test readers’ knowledge and understanding of the key concepts, providing personalized feedback and reinforcing the most important takeaways. This gamified approach can make learning more fun and engaging.
Blog Post with Embedded Resources: The current blog post format is already good, but it could be enhanced with embedded resources like salary calculators, template emails for requesting a raise, or links to relevant articles and job boards. This adds value and provides practical tools for the reader.
By diversifying the content format, you can reach a wider audience and cater to different preferences, maximizing the impact of your message.”
OK, some of those format ideas might be an immediate no given the parameters around the content. For example, since I’m writing an article for the blog, a podcast wouldn’t be an option. But the checklist or article with embedded resources might be.
If you use the prompt and get a list that isn’t helpful, revise the prompt and describe your limitations or parameters to get more doable suggestions.
5. Take a listen
If you’re bad at editing the content you create, your AI assistant stands ready to help. Ask it to read the content aloud. You can use the immersive reader or read-aloud feature in a Microsoft document, use the built-in features in Google Docs, or add a tool like Speechify.
Close your eyes and listen as the AI assistant reads your content. Hit pause when you hear phrasing that makes you cringe, such as a verb that could be stronger or a run-on sentence that causes the AI tool to take a virtual breath. Then, rework that section and hit play again.
TIP: You can use the text-to-voice tools for proofreading, too. Just don’t do both at the same time. Otherwise, you’ll likely default to hearing the grammatical mistakes and not the overall editing opportunities.
Get better with an AI assist
Make friends with generative AI tools to make your content creation life better. By using these prompts, you can alleviate the ennui and frustration that comes from writing the same thing over and over. Even better, you can more easily deliver content that your bosses and audiences will want to consume.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The number of Indians travelling abroad for studies declined by 15 per cent in 2024 as countries worldwide tightened their visa regulations.
As per a reply by Sukanta Majumdar, Minister of State in the Education ministry, in the Lok Sabha on Monday, 7,59,064 students went abroad for studies, according to information provided by the Bureau of Immigration (BoI). While this is a dip from 8,92,989 students in 2023, the number of students travelling overseas for education is marginally higher compared to 2022, when it was 7,50,365.
The data pertains to the number of Indians who disclosed their purpose of visit as “Study/Education” while going abroad. The data from BoI for prior years, as per information shared in Lok Sabha earlier, shows that the 2024 tally is higher than in the pre-pandemic days of 2019, when 5,86,337 students went abroad for studies.
Interestingly, the top destination countries that registered the biggest decline (in percentage terms) are Canada, US, and UK, all of whom have tightened Visa regulations for immigrants. In the backdrop of worsening diplomatic relations with Canada in 2024, the country had become stricter on student visa regulations. This had led to increased visa rejections and more scrutiny on applications.
Indian students travelling to Canada dipped 41 per cent; the UK saw a 27 per cent decrease, and 13 per cent fewer students travelled to the US for their studies in 2024. Australia also saw a 12 per cent decline. At 2,04,058, the US welcomed the maximum number of Indian students in 2024. Canada had the second-highest at 1,37,608. China is another country that saw a decline as 7279 students went to China in 2023 while only 4,978 went for studies in 2024.
Interestingly, Germany, Bangladesh, Russia, and Ireland were among the top countries that saw biggest jump in Indian students travelling for studies at 49 per cent, 44 per cent, 34 per cent and 30 per cent increase respectively At 34,702 there was a 49 per cent jump in Indians going to Germany for their studies. 31,444 students went to Russia for studies in 2024 compared to 23,503 in 2023. France, the Philippines, and Uzbekistan are among other countries that saw an increase in Indian students who traveled for studies in 2024.
Not just any puppet — this amazing 18-inch-tall Stitch toy offers 100 different action and sound combinations. You can use the buttons inside to move his ears and mouth and make his eyes blink, and the sound effects will automatically change based on how you’re using him. He’ll react with different moods depending on whether you make his ears go up and down, and if you pet his head, he’ll react happily. “He might be the best toy to land on Earth this year,” declared CNET’s Bridget Carey.
While lightsabers are (still) a thing of fantasy, a new toy comes close to replicating the real thing without costing a fortune. The $50 Power Saber not only lights up, but it extends on its own, giving the effect of firing up a real lightsaber to battle against a Sith Lord. The sound effects make the experience all the more immersive. You can choose from red or green, depending on what side of the Force your giftee is drawn to. It’s become a go-to gift for CNET’s Russel Holly.
Furby interactive plush toy
Furby is back and better than ever. It comes with five voice modes, a bunch of dance moves and more than 600 unique responses, including phrases, jokes, songs and more. Plus, it can glow in the dark. It can communicate with other Furbies too and is quite huggable. Past concerns about the Furby can be kicked to the curb — there’s no Wi-Fi connectivity, no app and no LCD screen eyes. Basically, it’s more doll than robot, which is a huge plus.
Hex Bots Wall Crawler Gecko
CNET’s Bridget Carey says this won her over “both as a mom and as someone who delights in making my co-workers squirm.” By using a remote — that can be as far as 25 feet away — you can make it scale walls or perform spin tricks, she explains. To charge it, there’s a USB-C port and you’ll need two AAA batteries for the remote.
Read our review here.
If your little one has been begging for a dog and you’re apprehensive about all the responsibility, Dog-E may be the pet for you. Although WowWee’s Dog-E isn’t the first robot dog to hit the toy market, this pup has a bunch of unique features that make it stand out from the pack (no pun intended). Each Dog-E is unique in their colored light designs and personality traits — you won’t know which version you’ve got until it’s out of the box. There are over 200 sounds and reactions to expect with your new robot pup, including real dog sounds, tail wagging and a cute little run. An accompanying mobile app adds further interactive play, allowing you to teach it tricks and track its basic needs.
Read our WowWee Dog-E Robot Dog review.
WowWee Fingerlings Interactive Baby Monkey
Fingerlings are back, and these finger monkeys are more than meets the eye. Equipped with more sensors, these fuzzy cuties know when they’re on your finger and have more animated features than ever before. Each monkey in the set comes in a different color and personality, which means they’re programmed with a variety of different reactions. Might as well collect them all.
Thames & Kosmos Gecko Run: Marble Run Starter Set
This isn’t just any old marble set. This version is more like a gecko, with suction cups that let the chutes and funnels climb up and down your walls. “Kids drop in the included marbles and watch gravity take its course as they roll down and drop from piece-to-piece,” explains CNET’s Bree Fowler. “Of course, it doesn’t work perfectly each time and marbles go flying, but that’s half the fun and how kids learn; they can adjust the pieces and try again.” Expansion sets are available too and include fun add-ons, like loops and trampolines.
Bitzee Magicals Interactive
Bitzee is a screen-free interactive pet that kids can play with, care for and take with them anywhere. It loves treats and is reactive to touch, swipes and other movement. Each one begins as a baby and grows through three evolutionary stages, culminating in a final stage that unlocks a special game. Twenty interactive animals — like a cat, unicorn and dragon — can be unlocked the more your kiddo plays with Bitzee.
This cool 3D printing pen lets kids create anything they could possibly imagine out of plastic filaments. It’s slim and light, making it easy for small hands to hold, and it’s great introduction to the world of 3D printing. The pen melts sticks of plastic so kids can draw them into any shape, and the nozzle and melted plastic aren’t hot, so it won’t burn little hands. CNET’s Bridget Carey confirms, “I’ve tested it; you can put the tip to your skin and draw on your finger. I had no worries giving it to my kids.”
Loog Mini Electric Guitar
If your child has expressed an interest in playing an instrument, this is a great starter instrument and teaches kids how to play songs via flashcards and video lessons. It’s a three-string guitar, has a built-in amp and speaker and comes in six fun colors, from light blue to red to pink. To make the gift complete, you can also get a strap ($19) and carrying case ($39).
Lexibook Harry Potter Electronic Chess Set
Chess took off among kids a couple of years ago, and it’s still going strong. This chess set makes a great gift for Potterheads who are also chess fans — or aspiring chess fans. The keyboard has light and sound effects and players can choose from 64 levels of difficulty. There’s also a training mode, which lets a player know if the move they just made is a good one and lets them try again.
Moonlite Storytime Mini Projector with Eric Carle Stories
Bedtime stories get a huge boost with this Moonlite Storytime mini projector. It attaches to the flashlight on your cell phone so that you can project each “page” of a story onto the while while it plays sound effects as you read along to your child. The projector is easy to use and gets kids excited about reading and bedtime — win, win. This set includes four Eric Carle classics: The Very Hungry Caterpillar, The Very Busy Spider, Brown Bear Brown Bear and Mister Seahorse.
Watch this: Best Tech Toys (You’ll Want for Yourself) This Year
Best STEM toys
Snap Circuits Jr. Electronics Exploration Kit
Snap Circuits are the perfect gift for curious kids. There are over 100 electronic projects possible with this STEM set, which is best for ages eight and up. Build a flashlight, photo sensor, siren and more. The best part is, kids will learn about the fundamentals of electricity as they play.
National Geographic Mega Slime Kit & Putty Lab
All kids love slime. And this STEM kit from National Geographic comes with eight varieties of the substance. Magnetic putty, glow-in-the-dark putty, fluffy slime and color-changing slime are just some of what you can expect to find in this box. There’s education to be found here too, as an enclosed learning guide explores the science behind all this goo.
ThinkFun Gravity Maze Marble Run Brain Game
This is an award-winning STEM toy and for good reason. Aside from being a lot of fun, it also requires a lot of critical thinking. Players can choose from 60 different challenges at various difficulty levels, from beginner to expert.
Thames & Kosmos Pinball Machine Maker
Kids who enjoy building will love this DIY kit. They can put together a real pinball machine that uses gumballs as the pinballs. Bonus: This kit isn’t all fun and games — it’s a STEM project in disguise. Lessons in motion, gears, gravity, force and more are embedded in this cool gift.
Best action toys and collectibles
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Mutant Mayhem Pizza Fire Delivery Van
Cowabunga! This Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles Pizza Fire Delivery Van brings the Mutant Mayhem fun to life. The van has room for all four turtles and Master Splinter and it comes equipped with a fully functional pizza cannon. Eight pizzas can fit in this handy weapon, which will surely stop Super Fly and his minions in their tracks. And hey, after their battle is over, the gang can snag a pie for a well-earned snack.
Little Live Pets My Baby Monkey
This baby monkey, Mango, is super soft and also interactive. His hands can even grip and hold onto things, like his bottle. But that’s not all — he has over 50 sounds and reactions as your child plays with him.
Mattel Jurassic World Dominion Super Colossal Giganotosaurus
This is the mother of all dinosaur toys. At over three feet long, Super Colossal Giganotosaurus is an impressive play thing. He can gobble up action figures (and luckily, you can rescue them via his belly) and generally wreak havoc. Pro tip: He’s best for ages four and up.
Beast Lab: Shark Beast Creator
This unique experiment-based set is here to save the world. No, seriously: The Beast Lab poses the idea that the only way to protect humanity is with Beasts. Shark Beasts, to be specific. Thankfully, your child will get two in this set — the Havoc Hammerhead and Mayhem Megashark. Adorned with over 80 lights and sounds, and a collection of important ingredients — like Roar Rocks and Fossil Fragments — your kid will mix these oddities together to create the ultimate Beast. Once that’s done, it’s world-saving time. Hey, no pressure.
Best games for kids
Harry Potter Monopoly: A Magical Adventure at Hogwarts
This gift combines two of our favorite things: Monopoly and Harry Potter. It’s ideal for family game night and fun for all ages. It features a Hogwarts-themed gameboard and golden tokens to travel around with, like The Knight Bus and Hogwarts Express.
For more fun tabletop games for kids, be sure to check out our gift guide of our favorite board games to give.
Klask: An Epic Magnetic Battle
If your child is a foosball or air hockey fan, they’ll love this game, which is a combo of both. (And you’ll probably love it too.) Since it comes assembled, put it on any tabletop surface and you can start to play immediately. (When you’ll stop playing is the question.)
Taco Cat Goat Cheese Pizza Card Game
If your kids like high-energy card games like Uno, they’ll love this. Taco Cat Goat Cheese Pizza is highly addictive and great for game nights. Up to eight people can play at once and everyone takes turns flipping over a card, saying a word — Taco, Goat and so on — while flipping. If the spoken word matches whatever card is being flipped, everyone tries to slap their hand down. The last person to do so has to take the stack. Trust us, it’s fun. CNET contributor Oliver Haslam says, “It might be the most fun I’ve had with a card game since forever, and it made our recent vacation very memorable.”
It’s like Magic: The Gathering, but with everything Disney. This trading card game is easy to learn for kids ages eight and up. And kids who are a little younger can join in with help from an adult. CNET’s James Bricknell ranked it as one of the top family games of the year, saying, “It’s clearly been worked on for a long time, as it feels like a game that’s existed forever. It’s so well-polished.”
Best tech toys
This is a pricey one, but it’s worth putting on your child’s toy list. You can give them hours of entertainment playing Animal Crossing: New Horizons, Mario Kart, Zelda, Just Dance or whatever games they’re into. The new OLED model has a sharper, larger screen than the original model. And the Switch is definitely a better console for younger kids than the more expensive Xbox Series X and PlayStation 5. We also love that the Switch can be played on a TV or hand-held.
Amazon Echo Dot Kids, 5th Gen
Echo Dot Kids offers all the smarts of Amazon’s Alexa smart assistant, but with parental controls and a cute design. Choose from a dragon or an owl — kids can even customize Alexa’s voice to make it a dragon or owl character. Kids can use it for playing music, setting an alarm, playing interactive games and more. Bonus: The white noise is great for kids who need some extra help sleeping.
GoCube – Smart Cube 3D Puzzle
If you’ve always wanted to know how to complete a Rubik’s cube, but could never get the hang of it, now’s your chance, CNET’s James Bricknell says. The GoCube connects to your phone or tablet and takes you through the steps of solving a cube using “algorithms,” so to speak. “It’s the first time I’ve felt I had a handle on manipulating a puzzle cube without it being completely random,” he says. “Learning a new skill as a dad, especially one that can impress your kids, is always worthwhile — and the app even lets you play battle games with your kids to make it more family-oriented.”
Hot Wheels id Smart Track (Update: Out of Stock)
Playing with Hot Wheels has never been so cool. The Hot Wheels id Smart Track brings speed, stunts and a variety of mini games to the iconic race car brand. The track’s booster can launch cars upwards of 900 mph (at scale), and thanks to the interactive gaming component, you can scan different cars, track speeds and race to your heart’s content. Two exclusive Hot Wheels id cars come with it.
Best building toys
Lego Super Mario Adventures Starter Course Set
Inspired by Nintendo’s iconic video game characters, this toy brings Mario to life. He’s got color sensors, LCD screens in his eyes and his mouth and belly are programmed with over 100 different reactions and movements. Mario must collect virtual coins as he travels through the buildable course. A Goomba figure, Bowser Jr., and seven actionable bricks also come with the set. A mobile app offers further connectivity, giving more ways to play.
This toy is a classic, and it offers endless possibilities of play, which is why our CNET editors love it. Kids can use these magnetic construction tiles for building everything from princess castles to parking garages. And they’ll play with them for years, starting from age 2 up until 5 or 6.
Tiny Land Glow Fort-Building Kit
It’s a fact that kids love forts. And when they’re glow-in-the-dark, it’s’s next-level. With this kit, children can spend countless hours building a variety of structures with the 130 pieces included with it. Caves, tunnels, rockets and houses — the sky’s the limit for what can be constructed. Every parent knows their little one will eventually seek out their own safe space, and a fort is the perfect place for them to get some me-time. Plus, this thing is pretty darn cool.
Lego Disney Stitch Toy-Building Kit
Lilo & Stitch fans will love piecing together this Lego Stitch. Once he’s put together, he can move — his ears go up and down and his head can turn too. Some fun accessories also come with this kit, a buildable flower and ice cream cone for Stitch.
Best toys for toddlers
Sesame Street Elmo Slide!
Sesame Street’s Elmo never goes out of style. This 14-inch tall interactive doll encourages movement and singing and will get your little one up and dancing. Like the Just Play Elmo Plush, your kiddo can press Elmo’s right hand to play a game of “Elmo Says” — a fun, preschool-friendly riff on “Simon Says.” He can also speak in Spanish, as well as in English, which is another bonus.
KiwiCo Bake-a-Cake Stand Mixer
A great gift for pretend play that will keep little hands busy for hours. “My two-year-old loves ‘helping’ me in the kitchen, and she likes it even better when I help her bake goodies with her own KiwiCo stand mixer and accessories,” says CNET contributor Deena Shinn. “We pretend to crack eggs and pour in the sugar to whip up birthday cakes, much to her delight.”
Magna-Tiles Construction Set
This is a great beginner building set for kids who are obsessed with construction vehicles. It’s also a great add-on for kids who already have a Magna-Tiles set. It comes with two extendable cranes, a truck chassis, bricks, and pieces for building a road.
Playfoam Naturals Shape & Learn Letters & Numbers
If you’re not wanting to bring slime into your home, Playfoam Naturals offers a sensory-satisfying product that’s fun to play with. This kit is great for preschool learning and allows your little one to exercise their fine motor skills while learning to squish this plant-based substance into letters and numbers.
What are the top retailers to shop for toy gifts?
The top retailers to shop for toy gifts include Target, Walmart, and Amazon. These stores have large varieties of toys for every age group, and stock toys from top brands such as Hasbro and Lego. GameStop is a good option for toys, figurines and games for older kids. It’s also worth checking out individual toy brand websites, including Lego, Disney, Nintendo and even Mattel, since they often have exclusive items.
Do toy prices go down after Christmas?
Generally, the cheapest prices we see all year for the hottest toys and games are during Black Friday or Cyber Monday. You might, however, see markdowns after Christmas on toys that didn’t sell as well. Stores such as Target and Walmart are likely to mark down toys after Christmas, but it’s usually the leftovers. Some retailers might offer New Year’s discounts, and there are Presidents Day sales in February.
What are great toys for both girls and boys?
First, let’s be clear that any type of toy is good for any kid, regardless of gender. Age and interests are much better starting points when hunting for a gift, because that dictates how complicated the toy can be and helps narrow down the category. That said, there are toys that have had universal appeal among all genders for many decades. Here are just a few:
As measles cases continue to spread in several U.S. states, the spotlight is on prevention of the highly contagious disease.
While vaccines are widely regarded as the first line of defense, some experts have suggested that nutrition plays a role in reducing the severity of the disease.
HHS Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. discussed the topic during a recent exclusive interview with Dr. Marc Siegel, clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Health and Fox News’ senior medical analyst.
“We need to understand the relationship between good health and chronic disease,” RFK Jr. told Siegel.
“If you are healthy, it’s almost impossible for you to be killed by an infectious disease, in modern times — because we have nutrition … and access to medicines. What we need is good science on all of these things so that people can make rational choices.”
As measles cases continue to spread in several U.S. states, the spotlight is on prevention of the highly contagious disease.(iStock)
During the interview, RFK noted that in Texas — where more than 200 cases of measles have been reported in the current outbreak — malnourishment may be a factor.
VITAMIN A AS MEASLES TREATMENT? RFK JR.’S COMMENTS SPARK DISCUSSION OF BENEFITS AND RISKS
“The doctors that I’m talking to on the ground, the leaders of the community, are reporting that the people who are getting sick are people who are [malnourished],” he said.
“There’s a lot of poverty in that area, [which] is kind of a food desert,” RFK added.
In 1963, prior to the vaccine’s introduction, between 400 and 500 people died from measles each year in the U.S., according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).
“The doctors that I’m talking to on the ground, the leaders of the community, are reporting that the people who are getting sick are people who are [malnourished],” RFK Jr. said. (iStock)
“Almost all of them were malnourished children,” RFK said. “Measles still is a very, very lethal disease in foreign countries and developed countries where there is low malnutrition.”
He added, “The best thing Americans can do is to keep themselves healthy. It is very, very difficult for measles to kill a healthy, well-nourished person.”
“We see a correlation between people who get hurt by measles and people who don’t have good nutrition.”
Nutrition is “critical” for overall disease prevention, the HHS secretary told Siegel.
“We need to eat good foods. We need whole foods. We need to get plenty of exercise,” he said.
“We see a correlation between people who get hurt by measles and people who don’t have good nutrition or don’t have a good exercise regimen.”
Infectious disease experts weigh in
Dr. Jacob Glanville, CEO of Centivax, a San Francisco biotechnology company, agreed that measles is more likely to severely affect children in developing countries who are extremely malnourished.
“Historically, less than 1% of American children die from measles, while the Pan American Health Organization reports that as [many] as 10% of children die from measles in some developing countries, and it has been reported as high as 25% to 50% in a study of malnourished African infants,” he told Fox News Digital.
“Historically, less than 1% of American children die from measles, while the Pan American Health Organization reports that as high as 10% of children die from measles in some developing countries.”(Getty Images)
The lack of quality medical care in many areas of the developing world also contributes to disease severity, Glanville noted.
“While better nutrition is important for American children, it’s unlikely to make a difference when it comes to measles infection or severity — 90% of well-fed but unvaccinated American children exposed to measles will become infected, around 20% of those children will be hospitalized, and 0.1-1% of those children will die.”
MARYLAND CONFIRMS FIRST MEASLES CASE IN TRAVELER AT MAJOR DC AIRPORT
Dr. Trish Perl, an infectious disease expert at UT Southwestern Medical Center in Dallas, Texas, noted that malnutrition can impair some of the immune system responses to many infections — but in the case of measles, the answer is “complicated.”
“For example, malnutrition may decrease the robustness of the response to the MMR vaccine,” she told Fox News Digital.
RFK JR.’S TOP HEALTH AND WELLNESS PRIORITIES AS DOCTORS SHARE INPUT
“The vaccine is still effective, but in some cases, an additional dose may be required.”
Studies have shown that children who are malnourished with vitamin A deficiency and living in low- and middle-income countries have more severe illness with measles infection, face an increased risk of death and blindness, and take longer to get better, Perl said.
The CDC recommends that adults and teens are up-to-date on MMR (measles, mumps and rubella) vaccinations with either one or two doses, depending on individual risk factors.(iStock)
“There is no treatment for measles beyond supportive care,” she said. “However, in low- and middle-income countries — whose mortality is greater than 1% — the World Health Organization recommends vitamin A (two doses) to reduce the severity of measles and prevent complications.”
The issue isn’t as prevalent in the U.S., where vitamin A deficiency is “extremely rare,” the doctor added.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
There haven’t been formal studies into whether giving vitamin A to children with measles in the U.S. or other high-income countries prevents complications, according to Perl.
The American Academy of Pediatrics, however, recommends that hospitalized children with severe measles receive two doses of vitamin A as supervised by a healthcare provider.
Dr. Jonathan Jennings, a board-certified internist with the Medical Offices of Manhattan, also noted that multiple studies have found nutrition can “heavily impact” the clinical course of children who contract the measles virus.
“The risk of fatal outcomes is increased in children who are already malnourished prior to being infected,” he told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“The infection has been known to worsen the nutritional status, which impacts the child’s immune system and ability to recover.”
Jennings recommends a balanced diet with a variety of colorful fruits, vegetables, protein and healthy fats as a means of preventing complications once infected with the virus.
An expert recommended a balanced diet with a variety of colorful fruits, vegetables, protein and healthy fats as a means of preventing complications once infected with the virus.(iStock)
“Vitamin A-containing foods are particularly helpful, such as carrots, spinach and dairy products,” he said.
“Many studies have identified vitamin A supplementation as a means to prevent eye damage, which is a complication of the measles infection.”
Nutrition not substitute for vaccine, experts say
While proper nutrition is important for preventing many chronic health conditions, Perl emphasized that vaccination is the “only documented method” of preventing measles infection and “is the most important action anyone can take.”
“Vaccination should be given whether an individual is malnourished or not.”
“The vaccine has been in use since 1963 and is considered extremely safe,” she said.
“Vaccination should be given whether an individual is malnourished or not, as it is the only way to prevent measles.”
SCHOOL MEALS RAISE EYEBROWS AS MAHA ADVOCATES URGE ‘DIFFERENT CHOICES IN THE LUNCH LINE’
RFK also recognized the importance of vaccines, noting that the HHS is “making sure that anybody who wants the vaccine can get that vaccine.”
“The measles vaccine protects the community,” he told Dr. Siegel. “We are recommending that people in this country get vaccines … [and] we are also respectful of their personal choices.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Jennings also reiterated the importance of vaccines.
“The most effective way to protect and prevent you and your family from getting measles is to get everyone vaccinated against the virus,” he said.
The CDC recommends that adults and teens are up-to-date on MMR (measles, mumps and rubella) vaccinations with either one or two doses, depending on individual risk factors.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
I have always admired Shriya Saran, not only for her incredible performances on screen but also for her dedication to a healthy lifestyle. She radiates fitness and wellness, and I was thrilled to have the opportunity to interview her about how she maintains her diet while staying active and energetic. Here’s what she had to say about her balanced approach to nutrition.
Q: Shriya, you always look so fit and healthy. What’s your philosophy when it comes to diet?
Shriya Saran: Thank you! For me, keeping a healthy weight is not about strict diets or skipping meals-it’s about eating smart and making small, lasting changes that actually work. Balance and consistency matter more than extreme food trends. Instead of depriving myself, I focus on fresh, wholesome meals that give my body the nutrients it needs.
One thing that really helps is eating foods that keep me full for longer, so I don’t end up snacking on unhealthy things. A nutrient-rich start to the day makes a big difference-something as simple as almonds in the morning supports my energy levels and helps me avoid mid-morning cravings.
Glass of warm water with lemon and honey helps with digestion. Photo: Pexels
Q: What does your morning routine look like? How do you start your day?
Shriya Saran: My mornings always begin with a glass of warm water with lemon and honey. This simple habit helps with digestion, flushes out toxins, and hydrates my body after a long night’s rest. Hydration is something I prioritise because it plays a key role in maintaining energy levels throughout the day.
For breakfast, I prefer something light yet nourishing. Oatmeal with nuts and fruits, an egg white omelette, or a smoothie packed with berries, bananas, and a handful of almonds are my go-to choices. Almonds are packed with Vitamin E and healthy fats, which help keep my body energised. I avoid fried or overly processed foods in the morning since they slow me down rather than giving me an energy boost.
Also Read:Bhagyashree Shares Her Morning Routine, Highlights Benefits Of Methi Seeds Water
Q: Lunch is often a tricky meal-how do you keep it balanced and healthy?
Shriya Saran: I keep my lunch simple, nutritious, and filling. My meals are mostly home-cooked and include a balance of proteins, healthy carbs, and fibre. A typical lunch for me includes dal, roti, and sabzi, or sometimes grilled fish or chicken with quinoa and steamed vegetables. I also love having curd or a small bowl of homemade yoghurt, as it keeps my gut healthy and digestion in check.
One important thing I’ve learned is that portion control is key. Rather than overloading my plate, I eat just enough to satisfy my hunger. Overeating, even if it’s healthy food, can make you feel sluggish. So, I listen to my body and eat until I feel comfortably full.
Almonds are packed with healthy fats and essential nutrients Photo: Pexels
Q: Do you believe in snacking? What are your favourite healthy snack options?
Shriya Saran: I don’t believe in cutting out snacks completely-I just try to make smarter choices. A lot of people think snacking is bad for weight management, but the truth is, having the right snacks actually helps keep my metabolism active and stops me from overeating later.
Instead of reaching for chips or biscuits, I choose foods that keep me full and energised. Almonds are my favourite-they’re packed with healthy fats and essential nutrients that help keep hunger in check and support weight management. I also enjoy hummus with cucumber and carrot sticks for a balanced snack. And when I’m craving something sweet, I go for green tea with a piece of dark chocolate. These simple choices help maintain steady energy levels throughout the day and curb evening sugar cravings.
Also Read:13 Best Healthy Snacks Recipes
Q: Dinner is another meal that people struggle with. What’s your approach?
Shriya Saran: I prefer keeping dinner light and easy to digest. A bowl of soup with grilled vegetables, a salad with almonds and seeds, or khichdi works well for me. I try to eat by 7:30 PM to aid digestion and sleep quality. Eating heavy, oily foods late at night can make digestion sluggish and impact energy levels the next day.
Yoga for balance, energy, and a healthy mind Photo: Pexels
Q: Apart from diet, what are your other wellness habits?
Shriya Saran:Hydration is key. I always keep a bottle of water with me, which helps with digestion, skin health, and weight management. Staying active is just as important-I enjoy yoga, Pilates, and dance workouts, ensuring movement is part of my daily routine.
Q: Any final advice for those trying to maintain a healthy diet?
Shriya Saran: For me, staying fit is not about eliminating foods. Including wholesome, nutrient-rich foods like almonds in my daily routine has helped me maintain my weight effortlessly. They keep me full, provide essential vitamins and minerals, and are easy to include in meals without any extra effort.
I also believe in balance. If I want to indulge, I do so guilt-free but in moderation. The key is a sustainable, healthy lifestyle-eating well, staying active, and listening to my body.
Also Read:Malaika Arora Reveals Her Post-Yoga Meal, Skin And Haircare Secrets
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-10/DPRK-condemns-large-scale-U-S-S-Korea-joint-military-exercises-1BDeT7INsmA/img/e18f2084e7504b5d8cc9a0ca80a9bdc7/e18f2084e7504b5d8cc9a0ca80a9bdc7.png' alt='U.S. Army soldiers prepare to cross the Hantan river at a training field in Yeoncheon, South Korea, March 10, 2025. /VCG'
The Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK) on Sunday denounced the large-scale joint military exercises conducted by the United States and South Korea, the official Korean Central News Agency (KCNA) reported on Monday.
Despite the DPRK’s repeated warnings, the United States and South Korea are persistently staging the large-scale joint military exercises, which are “a dangerous provocative act of leading the acute situation on the Korean peninsula,” KCNA said, citing a press statement released by the Department of Press and Information of the DPRK Foreign Ministry.
The DPRK-U.S. political and military confrontation “has been closer to the threshold of explosion due to the frantic U.S. war saber-rattling directly aiming at the DPRK,” with the pattern of confrontation growing increasingly dangerous, said the statement.
According to Yonhap news agency, South Korea and the United States kicked off the annual joint military exercise “Freedom Shield” on Monday. The 11-day drills feature computer-simulated drills and on-field training to strengthen interoperability between the allies.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
AMERIČKA reperica i tekstopiskinja Doechii zapalila je društvene mreže svojim pojavljivanjem na pariškom Tjednu mode 2025. Posebno je veliku pažnju privukla na reviji Schiaparelli u četvrtak 6. ožujka, gdje je zablistala u upečatljivoj kreaciji ovog luksuznog brenda.
Korisnici TikToka uspoređivali su je s božicom. “Prava božica među smrtnicima”, “Nitko u povijesti ljudskog postojanja nije izgledao ovako dobro – ona je božica!”, “Žene su umjetnost”.
“Izgleda poput supermodela iz 80-ih i 90-ih”
Drugi su bili oduševljeni stilom i modnim izborom. “Izgleda poput supermodela iz 80-ih i 90-ih”, “Ovo je najbolji izgled ikad, oprostite”, “Tko god joj je radio frizuru i šminku treba biti stalni član njezina tima. Ovo je izgled kojem treba stremiti!” Bilo je i onih koji su njezinu ljepotu proglasili nestvarnom. “Kako ovo nije AI? Savršena je”, “Rođena je za ovo, zvijezda!”
Naravno, nisu izostali ni duhoviti komentari o samopouzdanju, poput: “Zamisli samo hodati okolo znajući da izgledaš ovako dobro? Bila bih nepodnošljiva.”
Ukrala je show
Iz komentara je jasno – Doechii je na pariškom Tjednu mode doslovno ukrala show. Nosila je dramatičnu Schiaparelli haljinu, koja savršeno spaja eleganciju i odvažnost. Kreacija ima dubok V izrez i visok prorez, dok lepršavi bijeli materijal daje haljini lagan i profinjen izgled. Poseban detalj je tamni traper korzet koji naglašava struk i dodaje modernu, edgy notu.
Svoj look Doechii je upotpunila raskošnim valovima u stilu starog Hollywooda, statement zlatnim nakitom i upečatljivim metalik noktima. Ovaj stajling još jednom je potvrdio njezin status modne ikone u usponu – spoj sofisticiranosti, moći i nepogrešivog osjećaja za stil.
Haljinu koju je nosila možete pogledati u nastavku, zajedno s pristupačnijom, ali sličnom opcijom.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
NEW YORK — The frustration was evident early. And it was hard to tell what was bothering the Lakers more — the missed shots or the perceived missed calls? Was it execution or exhaustion?
If it wasn’t one thing, it was the other, the Lakers losing 111-108 to the lottery-bound Brooklyn Nets, with tougher days over the next four weeks headed their way.
Playing without four of their regular rotation players due to injury Monday night, the Lakers weren’t anywhere close to their best, physically short-handed and rapidly disengaged mentally.
“I think it was just an overall mentality just to take shortcuts tonight. We just wanted to take shortcuts,” JJ Redick said about his team postgame. “Too many… they scored 20 points on us gambling. They had 16 offensive rebounds. We ball-watched all night. We said no dare shots. I can’t, I’ll go through it, they probably made six, seven uncontested threes. Just shortcuts.
“Want to be a good team? You want to win in the NBA? You gotta do the hard stuff. We couldn’t even pass to each other. We couldn’t enter our offense, running ball screens literally at half court. Yeah, that’s going to end up in a turnover. I don’t know what we’re doing.”
Austin Reaves, counted on to take on more of an offensive role with LeBron James missing his first game with his strained groin, never got it going. Alex Len and Trey Jemison III, the bigs the Lakers have access to with Jaxson Hayes dealing with swelling in his knee from a bone bruise, combined for only two points and five rebounds.
And Luka Doncic, the engine the Lakers will need to push them through this brutal stretch of schedule, missed shots and looked toward the refs for whistles that never came. When he finally got his first one — midway through the third quarter, he threw his hands into the air in celebration. When a later foul was ruled on the floor, wiping out a made basket, he dismissively waved his hands at the refs in disbelief.
“I mean, at the end of the day, it was a lot,” Doncic said, admitting frustration with the officiating. “It wasn’t fair. But we still got to still play the game. I got to keep playing the game.
“But it was a lot.”
And needing a stop deep in the fourth, the Lakers forced a D’Angelo Russell miss, but the possession ended with Jarred Vanderbilt pushed to the floor and Ziaire Williams grabbing the rebound and scoring.
Doncic needed 26 shots for his 22 points to go with 12 rebounds and 12 assists. Reaves missed 11 of 14 shots to go with his eight rebounds and 10 assists.
“I’ve gotta be better,” Reaves said. “Yeah, I mean, we’ll start there with me.”
Gabe Vincent and Dalton Knecht, filling in with the starters, scored 24 and 19 points respectively, and Jordan Goodwin had 17 off the bench, but the Lakers were never good enough executing on either end.
Brooklyn shot five more threes and 11 more free throws, the Lakers (40-23) attempting only two in the first half.
Monday’s game in Brooklyn was one of the few games the Lakers have this month against a team out of the playoff picture. They finish their current trip against Milwaukee and Denver on back-to-back nights before coming back to Los Angeles for five games in seven nights.
Pregame, Redick said James’ injured groin was still being evaluated, and that the team doesn’t have a clear sense of the severity. Hayes’ knee injury is still considered day to day, though he could very likely miss more game time. Rui Hachimura, who is working toward a return from his knee injury, isn’t set for a reevaluation until the Lakers return to L.A. And Dorian Finney-Smith wasn’t available because of continuing issues with his left ankle.
It meant the Lakers started Len at center alongside Knecht, Vincent, Reaves and Doncic — hardly a group with real on-court chemistry.
The Lakers turned the ball over 15 times, leading to 19 Brooklyn points. They stayed in the game because of Vincent and Goodwin, who made 11 of the Lakers’ 19 threes.
The turnovers came in all varieties, but often stemmed from Brooklyn flying two defenders at Doncic and Reaves. Redick said it’s a simple fix: The Lakers simply passing to the open man and playing advantage basketball, but said a lack of communication was the issue keeping that from happening.
“That was important,” Doncic said. “That’s my fault and we should have done better at that.”
Strike action grounded thousands of flights in Germany on Monday, including all connections to and from Berlin, as the service sector union called on workers to walk out for better pay.
A terminal of the Berlin-Brandenburg airport is empty during the airports warning strike, Germany, Monday, March 10, 2025.(AP Photo/Ebrahim Noroozi)
Some 3,400 flights were affected by the industrial action, impacting around 500,000 passengers, the German airport association ADV said.
At Frankfurt, the country’s busiest airport, operator Fraport said no passengers would be able to board and that disruptions would “almost certainly” affect transit travel, according to German daily Bild.
Airports in Bremen, Cologne, Dortmund, Duesseldorf, Hamburg, Hanover, Leipzig, Munich and Stuttgart were also affected.
The Verdi union said Friday it was calling on public sector workers and some 23,000 employees of ground handling service providers to walk out to send a message to management.
“We regret the inconvenience that this strike will cause for passengers,” said the union’s deputy chair Christine Behle.
“But without the pressure of industrial action, there will be no movement in the negotiations.”
The union’s demands include a pay rise of eight percent or at least 350 euros ($380) more per month, and higher bonuses for particularly stressful activities.
The union said that “we are forced to go on this warning strike because the employers have not yet made an offer in the ongoing collective bargaining negotiations for public sector employees and have shown no willingness to meet our legitimate demands.”
Fortnite developer Epic Games is about to add lots of new content to the game, although the good news ends there.
According to Epic Games, Fortnite update 34.10 is coming to PS5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, PC, Nintendo Switch and Android on March 11. It adds new content such as crossover skins, items and Mythics.
Unfortunately, however, the good news ends there, because the new content won’t be available until server maintenance comes to an end.
Fortnite will be taken offline at 8am GMT UK time, while matchmaking is disabled shortly beforehand.
The news was announced by Epic Games on X (formerly Twitter), alongside a confirmation of the server downtime.
“Fight back against the Big Bad Wolf!” reads an Epic tweet. “Downtime for v34.10 begins at 4 AM ET with matchmaking ending shortly beforehand.”
For UK fans, this means that Fortnite will be taken offline in full at 8am GMT, while matchmaking will be disabled at 7.30am UK time.
Epic hasn’t revealed exactly when downtime will come to an end, but maintenance typically lasts for 2-3 hours.
This means Fortnite and all companion game modes should be back online from 10am GMT UK time at the earliest.
Daily Express will update this article with all the latest developments, so keep checking back for confirmation about the Fortnite server maintenance.
In terms of what fans can expect, update 34.10 will put the spotlight on Fletcher Kane.
As you can see from the trailer above, the new update will also introduce a new Invincible crossover. This includes new skins and items for Allen the Alien and Dupli-Kate.
It’s believed the Outlaw Midas skins and questlines will be released as part of the new update, potentially alongside the new Scorpion skin and Mythic item from Mortal Kombat.
Speaking of new items, Epic Games has previously confirmed that the Outlaw Shotgun, Rocket Drill and Pump & Dump will join the game as part of update 34.10.
Andreas Mindt is Volkswagen’s latest executive to claim the end is nigh for touch-sensing haptic controls in the brand’s vehicle interiors, with the design chief calling its move away from physical buttons a mistake.
Volkswagen first rolled out haptic controls in certain models from 2019, with the steering wheel’s cruise control and media selection buttons – as well as the controls below the touchscreen – requiring little more than a light brush to be adjusted.
While this may not sound like an issue when the car is at a standstill, throw in a bumpy road at speed and it could be distracting to try and focus on making minor adjustments.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Current Golf R steering wheel
Speaking to Autocar, Mr Mindt said all new Volkswagens launched after the production version of the ID. 2all, a sub-Golf-sized electric hatchback, will regain physical buttons for certain key features.
“From the ID. 2all onwards, we will have physical buttons for the five most important functions – the volume, the heating on each side of the car, the fans and the hazard light – below the screen,” Mr Mindt said.
“They will be in every car that we make from now on. We understood this.
“We will never, ever make this mistake any more. On the steering wheel, we will have physical buttons. No guessing any more.
“There’s feedback, it’s real, and people love this. Honestly, it’s a car. It’s not a phone: it’s a car.”
ID. 2all concept interior
It’s worth noting Volkswagen has already started to walk back its move to haptic controls, after company boss Thomas Schäfer announced in late 2022 it would return to traditional buttons.
Mr Schäfer even went as far to say the haptic steering wheel switchgear, as well as touch-capacitive climate control sliders, “definitely did a lot of damage” to the brand’s image among its loyal fans.
“We had frustrated customers who shouldn’t be frustrated,” Mr Schäfer told Autocar in 2023.
“So we’ve spent a lot of time now – working through really systematically – on what all the functions are that a customer usually touches when using a vehicle.”
Though models such as the new-generation Tiguan and facelifted Mk8.5 Golf – except the R – have gone back to the more traditional steering wheel controls, no such change has been announced for the existing ID. family of electric vehicles.
ID. Every1 concept interior
Last year, Ars Technica reported at least 13 crash reports involving the Volkswagen ID.4 had been filed with the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), many of which involved certain Volkswagen vehicles hitting objects while parking.
According to the report, owners claimed the car’s cruise control system became reengaged in the moments leading up to the incidents.
While almost all of the 13 crashes reportedly occurred at relatively low speeds when drivers were parking, three of them resulted in occupants suffering injuries, while one didn’t trigger a black box recording or airbag deployment, despite significant damage to the EV’s battery.
MORE: Volkswagen owners claim steering wheel buttons are causing crashes – report MORE: Volkswagen brings back buttons as touch controls get the flick MORE: VW CEO: Our cabins “frustrated” owners, “did a lot of damage” MORE: Volkswagen brings back the push-button steering wheel
Bharat Electronics Limited (BEL) announced an interim dividend of Rs 1.50 per share for FY 2024-25, with a record date of March 11, 2025. BEL’s net profit rose 47.3% to ₹1,316 crore.
Bharat Electronics announces 150% interim dividend for FY2024-25.
BEL Interim Dividend 2025: Bharat Electronics Limited (BEL) shares will remain in the focus due to the ex-date for the interim dividend. BEL declared an interim dividend of Rs 1.50 per share (150%) for the financial year 2024-25. The interim dividend will be paid within 30 days from the date of declaration.
Defense PSU announced the cash reward in the board meeting held on March 05, 2025.
BEL Dividend History
In the previous financial year 2023-24, BEL declared two interim dividends of Rs 0.70 each. The company also declared a final dividend of Rs 0.80 per share last year for FY24.
BEL Dividend 2025 Record Date
BEL has fixed Tuesday, March 11, 2025 as the record date to determine the eligibility of the shareholders for the 150% payout.
BEL Q3FY25Financials
BEL reported a net profit of ₹1,316 crore for the period, marking a 47.3% increase from the previous year. Revenue reached ₹5,756 crore for the quarter, representing a 39% year-on-year growth.
EBITDA saw a significant jump of 57.5% year-on-year, reaching ₹1,653 crore, comfortably. EBITDA margin expanded by 330 basis points to 28.7%, up from 25.4% last year and higher than the 24.1% predicted by the CNBC-TV18 poll.
About BEL
Bharat Electronics Limited (BEL) is a Navratna PSU under the Ministry of Defence, Government of India. It manufactures state-of-the-art electronic products and systems for the Army, Navy and the Air Force.
After Bitcoin (BTC) and Ethereum (ETH) registered a price decline of over 4%, Dogecoin (DOGE) has lost its crucial support and is now poised for a massive drop. On March 10, 2025, the overall cryptocurrency market experienced a notable decline following the opening bell of the U.S. market.
DOGE Current Price Momentum
Amid this price decline, DOGE has dropped over 6.5%, falling below the key level of $0.17 and currently trading under $0.16. This marks the first time in the past three months that DOGE has fallen below this crucial level.
Dogecoin (DOGE) Price Action and Upcoming Levels
According to expert technical analysis, DOGE appears bearish as it has failed to hold the $0.17 level. Based on recent price action and historical patterns, this breakdown suggests a strong possibility that the asset could drop another 20%, reaching the $0.125 level in the coming days.
Source: Trading View
At present, DOGE’s Relative Strength Index (RSI) is below 26, indicating that it is in an oversold zone and lacks the strength for a price recovery. Meanwhile, its 200 Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is trading far above, signaling a continued downtrend.
$31 Million Worth of DOGE Outflow
Despite the bearish market sentiment and price action, the meme coin has seen a notable outflow from exchanges, according to on-chain analytics firm Coinglass. Data from spot inflows and outflows reveal that, in the past 24 hours, exchanges have recorded an outflow of $31 million worth of DOGE, indicating potential accumulation.
Source: Coinglass
Such an outflow in a bearish market suggests potential accumulation, which could create a buying opportunity and trigger a further upside rally.
Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras) has launched admissions to undergraduate programs for students who excel in national and international olympiads, which are competitive examinations that assess and challenge students in various academic subjects and skills.
Called ‘Science Olympiad Excellence’ (ScOpE), this admission will be outside the JEE (Advanced) Framework with the students to be admitted from the academic year 2025-2026.
Similar to admissions through Sports Excellence Admissions and Fine Arts and Culture Excellence modes, ScOpE will also have two supernumerary seats per program of which one seat will be exclusively for women students.
The eligibility criteria such as passing of Class 12 and age, among other criteria, remain exactly the same as that of JEE (Advanced) for the respective year. The candidate also should not have been admitted to an IIT in the previous years.
The applications will be open for the first batch from June 3, says a release.
What is the best internet provider in Chattanooga?
EPB is the best internet provider overall for most households in Chattanooga because of wide availability, simple plan terms and blazing-fast speeds. That being said, Xfinity or AT&T Fiber are also solid picks, depending on what’s available in your area.
We’ve also found the top options if you’re hunting for the lowest prices or the fastest speeds. The cheapest internet in Chattanooga is Xfinity’s offering of 300 megabits per second for $35 a month. The fastest available internet speed in Chattanooga comes from hometown hero EPB, with speeds up to 25 gigabits per second. That’s 25,000Mbps. No, that’s not a typo.
Best internet in Chattanooga, Tennessee
Chattanooga internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$225
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Read full review
DSL
$55
768Kbps-100Mbps
None
1.5TB (no data cap for 100Mbps plan)
None
7.4
EPB
Fiber
$58-$1,500
300-25,000Mbps
Varies
None
None
N/A
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50 ($30 with eligible mobile plans)
72-245Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for eligible Verizon Wireless customers)
50-300Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Xfinity Read full review
Cable
$20-$85
75-1,200Mbps
Varies
1.2TB
Varies
7
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Chattanooga
AT&T Internet: AT&T’s legacy DSL network is available across much of Chattanooga, but don’t be tempted unless you can’t get a faster connection. There’s one plan for $55 per month for whatever speed is available at your address, up to 100Mbps. It could be much slower, depending on your location. There are no equipment fees or contracts, but some speed tiers come with a 1.5TB data cap.
Satellite internet: If you live in Chattanooga, you’ll likely pick a wired broadband option over a satellite provider like Starlink, Viasat or HughesNet. However, rural residents with few options may need to check into satellite as one of the only ways to get online. Speeds can be variable and prices high, so check into wired options first.
Cheap internet options in Chattanooga
EPB may dominate the local broadband scene, but it’s not the cheapest provider around. That honor goes to Xfinity’s $20-per-month 75Mbps plan. There are some compromises with that plan. The pricing is only good for a year, and equipment is not included, so you’ll need to bring your own gear or rent a gateway for $15 monthly.
Another way to save on Chattanooga internet is to sign up with Verizon or T-Mobile’s 5G home internet service and bundle an eligible phone plan. That can lower your Verizon home internet price to as low as $35 per month or your T-Mobile home plan to as low as $30 monthly. Even if you’re shopping for bargains, keep value in mind. Heavy internet users may be better off with a $55-$60 per month 300Mbps fiber plan from EPB or AT&T for equally fast uploads and downloads.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Chattanooga?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Xfinity Connect More Read full review
$35
300Mbps
$15 (optional)
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($30 with eligible mobile plans)
245Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
100Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300mbps
None
AT&T Internet Read full review
$55
100Mbps
None
EPB
$58
300Mbps
$18 (optional)
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Joe Daniel Price/Getty Images
How to find internet deals and promotions in Chattanooga
The best internet deals and top promotions in Chattanooga depend on what discounts are available during a given time. Most deals are short-lived, but we frequently look for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Chattanooga internet providers, such as Xfinity, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, however, including EPB, T-Mobile Home Internet and AT&T Fiber, tend to run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promotions, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Chattanooga broadband?
Chattanooga has adopted the unofficial nickname “Gig City” for its city-wide fiber network. Recent Ookla speed test data shows Chattanooga logging a median fixed internet download speed of 241Mbps, with EPB as the fastest provider. That tops Tennessee’s overall median download speed of nearly 225Mbps. EPB offers some of the fastest residential broadband in the nation, but not everyone needs 25,000Mbps service. Most residents will do just fine at the 300Mbps or gig levels, which have the bonus of being much more affordable. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
Fastest internet plans in Chattanooga
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
EPB Gig25
$1,500
25,000Mbps
25,000Mbps
None
Fiber
EPG Gig10
$300
10,000Mbps
10,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
EPB Gig2.5
$98
2,500Mbps
2,500Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit Extra Read full review
$95
1,200Mbps
35Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
EPB The Gig
$68
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit Read full review
$65
1,000Mbps
20Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
Show more (5 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines — and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics — browsing the internet, sending and receiving email, streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Chattanooga
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. So what’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary pricing, availability and speed database that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
But it doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, though we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Chattanooga
The final word on Chattanooga internet providers is best expressed by three letters: EPB. EPB’s city-wide fiber network has face-melting speeds and affordable options for people who don’t need 25-gig or 10-gig plans. If budget is a big factor, then you might consider bargain-priced plans from Xfinity starting at $20 per month, but you won’t get the symmetrical speeds of EPB fiber. AT&T Fiber is a decent competitor but isn’t as widely available as EPB. As long as you live in Gig City, you might as well get your gigs from fiber.
Internet providers in Chattanooga FAQs
Who is the cheapest internet provider in Chattanooga?
Xfinity has its work cut out by going up against local fiber provider EPB. Still, based on a bargain-basement promotional price for its 300Mbps cable internet plan, it makes a case for consideration. The plan costs $35 per month, though equipment isn’t included. That pricing is good for a year. After the honeymoon is over, the price goes up.
Which internet provider in Chattanooga offers the fastest plan?
EPB leaves everyone else in the dust with its 25,000Mbps plan for $1,500 per month. You can’t just order it online, though. You’ll need to schedule a residential consultation with EPB first. If that’s more speed than you need, then consider the 10,000Mbps plan for $300 per month.
Is fiber internet available in Chattanooga?
Fiber internet is available to all across Chattanooga through local provider EPB. AT&T Fiber also services some parts of town. EPB’s speeds top out at 25,000Mbps, while AT&T offers speeds up to 1,000Mbps or 5,000Mbps, depending on your location.
What internet provider has the best coverage in Chattanooga?
FCC data points to local fiber internet provider EPB as having the widest coverage in town. Cable ISP Xfinity also covers almost every nook and cranny of Chattanooga.
The state of Maryland has confirmed its first measles case in a Howard County resident who recently traveled internationally.
The Maryland Department of Health (MDH) announced the positive case in a news release on Sunday. It was also confirmed by the Virginia Department of Health and Howard County health officials.
This case is not associated with the outbreaks in Texas or New Mexico, the health department confirmed.
VIRGINIA HEALTH OFFICIALS CONFIRM MEASLES CASE AT MAJOR INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Officials hope to identify people who might have been exposed while traveling at the following specific times and locations.
Travelers at Washington Dulles International Airport may have been exposed to measles on March 5, health officials say.(Craig Hudson for The Washington Post via Getty Images)
March 5, 4 p.m. to 9 p.m.: Washington Dulles International Airport: Terminal A, on transportation to the main terminal and in the baggage claim area
March 7, 3:30 p.m. to 7:30 p.m.: Johns Hopkins Howard County Medical Center Pediatric Emergency Department
FLORIDA ALERTS FIRST MEASLES CASE OF YEAR IN PUBLIC SCHOOL AS EXPERTS STRESS VACCINATION
The MDH urged residents to check these exposure times, monitor any rising symptoms and get up to date with vaccinations.
Early measles symptoms include a fever over 101, runny nose, cough and red, watery eyes, according to health officials.
A red rash will appear on the face and spread to the rest of the body, typically one to four days after early symptoms, according to the Maryland Department of Health.(iStock)
A red rash will appear on the face and spread to the rest of the body, typically one to four days after early symptoms.
Measles symptoms can develop from seven to 21 days after exposure, but usually appear within 10 to 14 days, the MDH added.
NEW MEXICO ADULT DIES OF MEASLES A WEEK AFTER TEXAS CHILD DIED DURING OUTBREAK
A person is contagious starting four days before the rash appears and up to four days after.
Fox News senior medical analyst Dr. Marc Siegel previously shared with Fox News Digital that measles is highly contagious.
Signs point the way to measles testing in the parking lot of the Seminole Hospital District across from Wigwam Stadium on Feb. 27, 2025, in Seminole, Texas. (Jan Sonnenmair/Getty Images)
“There is a 90% chance you will get it if you are unvaccinated and step into a room where someone with measles was two hours before,” he cautioned.
The best way to prevent measles is to receive the two-dose measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and various experts.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The Maryland Department of Health states that pregnant women, infants younger than 1 year old and people who are immunocompromised are at the highest risk of complications from measles.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“People, especially those not vaccinated or otherwise immune to measles, who were at any of these locations during the possible exposure times should monitor themselves for any early symptoms of measles for 21 days after the potential exposure,” the department noted.
River Jacobs, 1, is held by his mother, Caitlin Fuller, while he receives an MMR vaccine from Raynard Covarrubio, at a vaccine clinic put on by Lubbock Public Health Department on March 1, 2025, in Lubbock, Texas.(Jan Sonnenmair/Getty Images)
“People who develop a fever or other symptoms of measles should not go to childcare, school, work or out in public, and should contact their health care provider. They should call their health care provider first rather than showing up in the waiting room or emergency room so that the office can take measures to prevent spread to other patients.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Measles cases have occurred sporadically in Maryland, the department confirmed, including one case in 2024, one in 2023 and none from 2020 to 2022.
Nearly 200 measles cases were confirmed in Texas as of Friday, primarily affecting unvaccinated, school-aged children.
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
Several acclaimed restaurants in Mumbai have recently released new menus. From modern takes on regional Indian delicacies to inventive global delights, these fresh offerings promise to elevate the city’s culinary landscape. Expect carefully sourced ingredients, bold flavour pairings, and reinterpretations of classics, all crafted to surprise and delight discerning food lovers. Whether it’s a fine-dining establishment introducing a stellar tasting menu, a beloved cafe experimenting with artisanal ingredients or a popular restaurant showcasing innovative fusion dishes, there’s something new to explore at every turn. As Mumbai’s chefs push boundaries and reinvent their menus, now is the perfect time to rediscover some of the city’s favourite dining spots.
Here Are Some New Menus In Mumbai Restaurants You Must Try In March-April 2025:
1. Ekaa, Fort
Ekaa has unveiled its Tasting Menu 6.0, titled “Awakening.” Chef Niyati Rao’s 20-course experience is an ode to culinary metamorphosis, designed to ignite the senses through precise techniques and bold flavour combinations. This menu celebrates the inherent beauty of ingredients, showcasing unique elements like Indian Sea Asparagus, aged Narba with seaweed, house-made tofu, grape caramel and much more. Guests can choose from curated wine pairings, presented in hand-crafted ceramic carafes with 375 ml pours. The first pairing is a six-course selection of Indian wines, including handpicked offerings from esteemed wineries in Nashik, Akluj, and Bengaluru. The other pairing is a sophisticated selection of imported wines.
When we visited, we opted for the vegetarian tasting menu and were left amazed by the vibrancy of flavours, textures and colours we got to engage with on our plates. The menu card itself only contains symbols for each course, which lends the experience a delicious air of mystery. While 20 courses may seem a lot, thoughtful portion sizes and a smart sequencing of dishes ensure that the meal doesn’t become overwhelming. Unlike Ekaa’s previous tasting menu, this one doesn’t have a central theme or storyline, which concerned us at first. But after speaking with Chef Niyati, we saw how the absence of it is unexpectedly liberating and allows the team to focus on the ingredients and their possibilities themselves. This is a dining experience you should not miss.
What: New Tasting Menu at Ekaa
Where: Kitab Mahal, 1st Floor, D Sukhadwala Rd, Azad Maidan, Fort, Mumbai.
2. Koishii, The St Regis Mumbai, Lower Parel
Koishii, at The St. Regis Mumbai, is one of the city’s trailblazing Nikkei restaurants. It recently unveiled a new menu under the direction of Chefs Lan Thorne and Jesus Caballero. With over 30 years of combined experience, they have expanded Koishii’s offerings, blending traditional Nikkei with broader Latin American influences and refined Japanese techniques. While retaining beloved classics, the revamped menu pays homage to the chefs’ Peruvian Nikkei roots. We had the chance to visit Koishii and ended up spending a memorable evening tasting many of its new additions. We loved the complex textures of the Tuna & Salmon Crispy Rice and the balanced meatiness of the Ahiru Gyoza. We were initially wary of the sound of the Truffle Edamame Maki – after all, this flavour combo has become too ubiquitous. But Koishii’s take on it won us over from the first crisp and flavourful morsel. We were also wowed by the Signature Nigiri Platter, featuring a theatrical selection of exquisite delicacies.
The Ceviche and Tiradito options are not to be missed here, of course. We especially recommend the Ceviche Nikkei, which was a beautifully refreshing combination of Akami and avocado with yuzu. Among the mains, you have to try the Shromi Amazonico – it was one of the best preparations of Chilean Seabass we’ve had in recent times. Other new savoury dishes from the menu include Robata-grilled specialities, tempura, and main courses like Arroz Con Pollo, Peruvian Chaufa and Garden Katsu Curry. End the meal on a sweet and spicy note with the Rocotto Chocolate Fondant – this decadent dessert has fun hints of heat derived from fiery Peruvian peppers.
What: New Menu at Koishii
Where: The Penthouse Level 37 at The St. Regis, 462, Senapati Bapat Marg, next to Phoenix Palladium, Lower Parel.
3. Across, Kala Ghoda
ACROSS, a modernist Himalayan restaurant in Kala Ghoda, has launched a new menu that deepens its exploration of the bounty of the mountains. Through bold new delicacies, Chef Viraf Patel and Prakriti Lama pay homage to Himalayan traditions while embracing contemporary techniques. Must-try dishes include the Mustang Black Dal, Meatless Momo, Aloo Fing Duck, and Timur Crispy Jackfruit, among others. The new cocktails complement the menu’s earthy, vibrant flavours, with options such as the herbaceous Roll in the Field (soju, Himalayan gin, arugula), and the refreshing Citrus Sunrise (Himalayan gin with Malta orange and kaffir lime).
What: New Menu At Across
Where: Hari Chambers, 5, 58/64, Shahid Bhagat Singh Road, Kala Ghoda, Fort, Mumbai.
4. Journal, Santacruz
Located in Santacruz, Journal recently celebrated its first anniversary with the launch of a revamped menu by Chef Ayush Khandelwal. We had the chance to drop by and taste some of the dishes. We highly recommend the juicy Teriyaki chicken skewers, the nourishing Roasted Pepper and Carrot Hummus and the satisfying Chicken sandwich with Hot Halloumi. There are good options for eggs, salads and other cafe-style classics. The new menu also includes wholesome toasts, indulgent burgers, wood-fired panuozzos, and pizzas with fresh buffalo mozzarella. Journal’s coffee program continues to emphasise quality and innovation, featuring beans sourced from Chikmagalur and Ratnagiri. New options include the Rosemary and Raspberry Pour Over and the Sunrise Brew with pineapple juice and jaggery. Among the non-coffee drinks, we especially loved two mocktails: the Malta Mint and the Floral Coco. With its new menu, Journal reinforces its focus on comfort, community, and relaxed dining. Whether you want a quiet space to work from or a cosy nook for a catch-up with friends, this cafe offers an inviting setting.
What: New Menu at Journal
Where: Journal, 396-3, North Ave, Potohar Nagar, Santacruz (West).
5. Silk Road Coffee Company, Versova
Versova’s Silk Road Coffee Company is giving mornings a delicious upgrade with the launch of its all-day breakfast menu. Various dishes have been added to the existing menu, designed to pair well with their expertly sourced, small-estate single-origin coffees. Highlights include Halloumi Toast, Mushroom & Spinach Toast, Burrata Shakshuka, three-cheese Mac & Cheese, Avocado & Arugula Salad and Salmon Caesar Salad. Also not to be missed are the breakfast pizzas, topped with coriander pesto or pork chorizo. Among the drinks, keep an eye out for their newly introduced MSP Naturals coffee, sustainably grown in the Shevaroy Hills and prized for its unique flavours.
What: New All-Day Breakfast Menu at Silk Road Coffee Company
In order to celebrate its 100 weeks of operation, Neuma in Colaba has launched a refreshed food and drinks menu. The kitchen, led by Chef Suvir Saran, presents an exquisitely crafted lineup of new dishes. Highlights include the Tuscan Strawberry Gnudi, Truffled Capellini, Paella Classica, Braised Lamb Shank, Burnt Basque Cheesecake and others. At the bar, Feruzan Bilimoria’s cocktails echo the same refined spirit. New drinks include the Kashmiri Winters and the Granny Spice. With its effortless blend of heritage charm and modern creativity, Neuma continues to evolve.
What: New Menu at Neuma
Where: Garden Chalet, 4/6, Mandlik Rd, near Regal Cinema, Apollo Bandar, Colaba, Mumbai.
7. Mirage, Santacruz
Mirage in Santacruz has launched a revamped Mediterranean menu, expertly crafted by Chefs Maher Ramzi and Bobby Recto. The new dishes offer a refined yet approachable take on classic favourites, while also introducing other lesser-known delights. Must-try dishes include the Jalapeno Hummus, Chicken Sheesh Tawook, and Falafel Smash, among the appetisers. Main courses feature slow-cooked delicacies like Braised Lamb Shank, Gamberoni, and Lemon & Olive Chicken. To conclude, the signature Kunafa Crema presents a fusion of traditional Kunafa and the beloved textures of a cheesecake.
What: New Menu at Mirage
Where: 8th floor, Krishna curve, Junction Of Linking Road, &, Juhu Tara Rd, opp. Juhu Garden, Santacruz (West), Mumbai.
8. Milagro, Prabhadevi
Milagro has introduced a new cocktail menu, thoughtfully curated by Bar Manager and Mixologist Felipe Silva. Drawing on his experience across the Caribbean and Mexico, Silva presents a selection of refined cocktails that balance bold flavours with fresh, seasonal ingredients. For example, the Sangria Breeze combines fresh watermelon and raspberry shrub for a light, crisp profile. The La Mecha is a mezcal-based cocktail subtly elevated with green chilli liqueur. For those preferring spirit-forward options, the King Romeo has mezcal, tequila, chamomile bitters and grapefruit oils, while the White Diamond features a blend of pandan-infused gin and coconut.
Hitchki has unveiled an interesting new cocktail and food menu, bringing a fresh wave of Bollywood-inspired fun to Mumbai, Bangalore, and Nagpur. Expect bold, innovative drinks like “Mexico 2 China” and “Desi Girl,” alongside reimagined classics and Instagram-worthy surprises. The revamped food menu features creative dishes like Namma Bengaluru (Masala uttapam tacos with paneer ghee roast), Saras Dabeli Kachori,” and BBQ Chicken Bruschetta, which complement the playful drinks. For your next outing, if you’re looking for a high-energy hotspot with quirky decor, tasty food and exciting cocktails, Hitchki is the place to be.
What: New Menu at Hitchki
Where: Across Hitchki outlets in Mumbai (BKC, Powai, Thane, Belapur, Ghatkopar), Bangalore (Whitefield, Sarjapur) and Nagpur.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-10/Moscow-Washington-yet-to-begin-tackling-problems-in-ties-says-Lavrov-1BDkKvOHXRm/img/5549f57dcfc0413b8c3b903d664a4890/5549f57dcfc0413b8c3b903d664a4890.png' alt='A file photo of Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov in Moscow, Russia, March 6, 2025. /VCG'
Moscow and Washington have not yet begun to work on addressing existing problems in bilateral relations, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov said on Monday.
In an interview with the press, Lavrov said that while it may be too soon to draw conclusions from statements made by the new U.S. administration, they are still promising.
Russian Foreign Ministry spokesperson Maria Zakharova confirmed on Monday that Russia and the United States are not expected to hold talks in Saudi Arabia this week.
Delegations from both countries previously met in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, on February 18 and in Istanbul, Türkiye, on February 27 to discuss bilateral ties and the Ukraine crisis, among other issues.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
Inovativne sunčane naočale osvojile su TikTok. Riječ je o modelu Chamelo Aura Rx, koji omogućuje korisnicima da jednim dodirom promijene boju stakla.
Predstavljene su na CES-u 2025. kao nasljednik modela Aura, koji je godinu ranije debitirao na istom sajmu. Nova verzija donosi unaprijeđeni dizajn s podrškom za dioptrijska stakla, uz već poznatu mogućnost trenutne promjene boje ili nijanse.
Naočale su na TikToku postale pravi hit zahvaljujući korisnici Keeping Up with Keke, čiji je video u samo tri dana prikupio sedam milijuna pregleda. U snimci pokazuje kako se boja stakla mijenja dodirom, a u opisu je navela: “Ovo sam trebala 2002.”
“Napokon živimo u 2025.”, “385 dolara? Shein, znaš što ti je činiti”, “Ovo je tehnološki napredak kakav smo čekali”, “Daju mi špijunsku vibru”, “400 eura, jao”, “Gdje ih mogu kupiti?”, “Jako kul, ali skupe”, “Odmah sam ih kupila”, “Volim ih”, “Čekaj, ovo je stvarno kul”, “E ovo je budućnost koja nam je obećana”, samo su neki od komentara ispod videa.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Dolaze u dvije boje i po cijeni od 360 eura
Aura Rx su bezokvirne sunčane naočale s prilagodljivim staklima koja mijenjaju boju ovisno o željama korisnika. Dostupne su u dvije varijante, s detaljima u sjajno bijeloj ili sjajno crnoj boji, obje s Calm staklima. Model podržava stakla s dioptrijom od ±1.00 do ±6.00 te astigmatizmom do ±3.00.
U pakiranju uz naočale dolaze zaštitna torbica, krpica za čišćenje, USB-C na Pogo Pin kabel za punjenje te kartica za jamstvo i test polarizacije. Naočale se prodaju po cijeni od 359.95 eura.
Tko stoji iza brenda Chamelo?
Brend Chamelo osnovan je 2024. godine i specijaliziran je za proizvodnju inovativnih pametnih naočala. Iako nije poznato tko je osnivač kompanije, jedan od ključnih promotora je bivši NBA igrač Stephon Marbury, koji u Chamelu obavlja funkciju chief brand officera.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Edge rusher Khalil Mack has agreed to a contract extension with the Chargers, the team announced Monday. ESPN first reported Mack will return for his 12th pro season on a one-year deal that will pay $18 million fully guaranteed.
The 34-year-old has earned Pro Bowl recognition in each of his three years with the Chargers. Last season, he helped anchor the NFL’s best scoring defense with six sacks, 39 tackles and 15 quarterback hits and missed only one game because of a groin injury, the first game absence of his Chargers career. Mack’s durability especially stood out next to fellow edge rusher Joey Bosa, who struggled with injuries in the past three years and was released last week.
After Bosa’s release saved more than $25 million in salary-cap space, Mack was one of the Chargers’ top offseason priorities. General manager Joe Hortiz said at the NFL scouting combine he hoped the team could re-sign Mack before NFL free agency officially begins Wednesday.
Mack was slated to be an unrestricted free agent for the first time in his illustrious career this week and said he would prioritize the opportunity to compete for a championship when considering his next destination.
The Chargers, who also released running back Gus Edwards on Monday, went 11-6 in the first year under coach Jim Harbaugh and defensive coordinator Jesse Minter and will return almost the entire defensive coaching staff to build upon that success.
The Chargers haven’t won a playoff game since 2018, and Mack is 0-5 in the playoffs in his career.
Travellers beware: IMD issues yellow alert, predicts thunderstorm and lightning in parts of Himachal from Wednesday to Friday.
The Shimla centre of India Meteorological Department (IMD) has issued a yellow alert, predicting thunderstorms and lightning at isolated places in Himachal Pradesh on Monday, and from Wednesday to Friday.
Himachal travel Alert: IMD predicts snow and storms; should you cancel your plans?(Picture only for representational purpose/HT_PRINT)
Isolated places in the higher reaches of the state received mild snowfall on Monday, the MeT office said.
Keylong received 1 cm of snow, while Gondla witnessed traces of it, it said.
Meanwhile, police in Lahaul and Spiti have asked commuters to avoid unnecessary travel and stay away from the sensitive areas as snowfall has been reported from near the Atal Tunnel in Rohtang.
The weather remained mainly dry in the state since Sunday evening, barring mild spells of snow at isolated places.
Tabo in the tribal Lahaul and Spiti district recorded a minimum temperature of minus 3.1 degrees Celsius, the lowest in the state.
Himachal Pradesh received 50.4 mm rainfall, as against a normal of 34.9 mm, in the pre-monsoon season from March 1 to 10, marking an excess of 44 per cent, the Met office said.
Recommended Topics
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
See More
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / Himachal travel alert: Yellow alert in state ahead of snowfall and thunderstorms; is your trip at risk?
See Less
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
A month ago, Daily Express was lucky enough to attend opening night of Churchill in Moscow.
The new production takes place at the intimately sized Orange Tree Theatre in the round, so it’s no wonder it was sold out even before reviews, including ours, were published.
Nevertheless, there is a unique opportunity to stream the World War 2 play, which starts Roger Allam as Winston Churchill during his 1942 visit to Stalin, at home on demand.
Four performances from Tuesday to Friday this week are being filmed live and you can watch one of your choice any time between 7:30pm on March 11 and 11:59pm on March 14.
And if that wasn’t enough, the theatre asks that folks pay whatever they’re happy to give starting from just £15.
The play official synopsis reads: “The Kremlin, Moscow, 1942. A top-secret meeting between Winston Churchill and Joseph Stalin: one, a wealthy aristocrat from a blue-blooded line of English nobility, the other a Georgian peasant, hell-bent on destroying capitalism and the class system. Can Churchill and Stalin find common ground? As diplomats struggle to control the escalating chaos, two interpreters find themselves caught in the eye of the storm. The world premiere of Howard Brenton’s gripping drama imagines the meeting of two unpredictable titans as history teeters on a knife-edge.”
Churchill in Moscow – OT On Screen tickets can be purchased here.
The MG S5 EV is arriving soon as a replacement for the ZS EV, and government documents show there could be a wide range of variants on offer.
The new electric SUV, based on the same platform as the MG 4, is due in Australia during the second quarter (April to June inclusive) of 2025.
It could be one of several vehicles MG will reveal in Melbourne in April, and is one of a bevy of new vehicles the brand plans to launch in Australia this year as it plots a path to becoming a top-three brand by the end of the decade.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Chinese-market models shown
The approval documents show the single-motor, rear-wheel drive S5 EV, which unlike its predecessor rides a dedicated electric vehicle (EV) platform, will be offered with a range of batteries.
There are 49kWh and 62kWh lithium iron phosphate (LFP) batteries, which are paired with a 125kW electric motor.
A 64kWh nickel manganese cobalt (NCM) battery is also available, paired with a 170kW electric motor.
According to the documents, each battery option is available with a choice of two different trim levels, and there’s a choice of 17- or 18-inch wheels.
It’s worth noting government approval documents may list variants that don’t end up being offered.
While WLTP range figures aren’t yet available, in China the 49kWh battery offers a claimed range of 425km on the more lenient CLTC cycle.
The 62kWh battery offers a claimed range of 515km or 525km, depending on the variant.
All models have vehicle-to-load (V2L) capability, allowing you to power external appliances.
The S5 EV measures 4476mm long, 1849mm wide and 1621mm-1626mm tall on a 2730mm wheelbase. That makes it 21mm longer than a BYD Atto 3 on a 10mm longer wheelbase.
According to local documents, tare mass is between 1635kg and 1725kg, depending on the variant.
In China, the S5 EV – known there as the ES5 – can be had with features such as a power tailgate, a panoramic sunroof with a sunshade, as well as heated, ventilated and power-adjustable front seats.
All models come standard with a 10.25-inch digital instrument cluster and 15.6-inch touchscreen infotainment system.
Available safety equipment includes adaptive cruise control, autonomous emergency braking, blind-spot monitoring, lane-keep assist, rear cross-traffic alert, and safe exit warning.
The S5 EV arrives after the new-generation ZS launched late last year, with a hybrid powertrain replacing the previously available electric powertrain and therefore giving the new S5 EV some breathing room.
MG had Australia’s third best-selling EV last year with the MG 4 hatchback, with 6934 examples sold.
The S5 EV will take aim at not only the BYD Atto 3, which was Australia’s fifth best-selling EV last year, but also the likes of the Hyundai Kona Electric and Chery Omoda E5.
For the vegetarian thali, the decline was driven by lower vegetable prices, particularly of onions, tomatoes and potatoes, while for a non-vegetarian thali, the cost eased with a decrease in broiler prices, says Crisil Intelligence.
On an annual basis, the cost of a home-cooked vegetarian thali declined 1 per cent in February. (Representative/AP File)
The cost of vegetarian and non-vegetarian thali declined by 5 per cent on-month in February due to lower vegetable and broiler prices, an arm of domestic rating agency Crisil said on Monday. Onion, potato and tomato prices were down 7 per cent, 17 per cent and 25 per cent on-month, respectively, amid fresh arrivals, said Crisil Market Intelligence and Analysis in its monthly ‘Roti Rice Rate’ report.
Also, broiler prices declined by an estimated 5 per cent on-month because of lower demand amid bird flu scare in Southern India, it said.
“For the vegetarian thali, the decline was driven by lower vegetable prices, particularly of onions, tomatoes and potatoes, while for a non-vegetarian thali, the cost eased with a decrease in broiler prices,” said Pushan Sharma, Director- Research, Crisil Intelligence.
On an annual basis, the cost of a home-cooked vegetarian thali declined 1 per cent in February, while that of a non-vegetarian thali grew by about 6 per cent, the report said.
The on-year decline in the cost of a vegetarian thali was because of a fall in prices of tomato and liquid petroleum gas (LPG) cylinders, the report said.
Tomato price declined 28 per cent on-year to Rs 23/kg in the month, from Rs 32/kg a year ago, owing to a 20 per cent increase in arrivals on-year.
The increase in the cost of a nonvegetarian thali was driven by an estimated 15 per cent on-year rise in the price of broiler. The surge in the price of broiler, which accounts for about 50 per cent of the cost of a non-vegetarian thali, is attributable to a low base of last year when the price had declined owing to excess supply.
Elevated feed cost, owing to a 6 per cent on-year rise in the price of maize, also contributed to the increase, according to RRR.
Crisil said the average cost of preparing a thali at home is calculated based on input prices prevailing in north, south, east and west India. The monthly change reflects the impact on the common man’s expenditure.
The data also reveals the ingredients (cereals, pulses, broilers, vegetables, spices, edible oil and cooking gas) driving the change in the cost of the thali.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
News business » economy Prices Of Vegetarian, Non-Vegetarian Thali Decline 5% In February: Crisil
In case, you are looking for a cool and interesting way to earn a quick buck, Here’s a platform that pays you for filling out simple surveys. Toluna Group lets you take surveys for forming a database for market research.
Toluna is a worldwide survey technology provider and claims to be the “ World’s Largest social voting community” which has more than nine million survey takers.
In this review, you will get a detailed insight into Toluna, Let’s look into this review article now:
Overview
Name
Toluna
Owner
Frederic-Charles Petit
Founded Year
2000
Headquarters
Paris, France
Type
Online Surveys
Apps
iPhone & Android Devices
Support
Email, Phone
Website
www.toluna.com
What is Toluna?
Toluna is a community survey platform that offers online surveys in return for rewards. This is a Paris( France) based company, managed by the Toluna Group and a well known market research company preferred by brands around the world. With more than 9 million survey takers, for the people who want to make money by taking surveys, Toluna is a preferred option.
The users that register on Toluna and take up these surveys are known as “Toluna Influencers”. These surveys completed are used by the major brands to help them figure out their business plan. It is one of the world’s most popular survey sites which has a very strong subscriber base and an effective portfolio of clients.
With 16+ offices globally, Toluna team aims to provide better products and quality to the consumers. They do it by surveying for the brands and thus it helps in dealing with customer satisfaction and to improve their business plan.
How to Register on Toluna?
Toluna provides its membership to 49 countries. The number of surveys that are available depends on your location.
Step 1: You can fill up the registration form online and sign up for Toluna.
Step 2: After the Toluna login, you will be asked to verify your account by providing your personal details. Further, you are good to take the online surveys.
Toluna Influencers are paid in the form of points which can be redeemed further in the form of gift cards, vouchers, etc. There are two types of Toluna surveys available listed below:
Profile Surveys: These surveys take a short period of time to complete where you are rewarded with 100 points.
Longer Surveys: These surveys take a longer duration to complete typically about 10 to 30 minutes with much higher rewards
You can update your personal information by logging into your account. Select “Account” in the top right corner and then click the Edit option. You can also view your account activity such as credits purchased, surveys launched, and the current status of your subscription.
In cases where you forget your password, you can do it by Clicking the Sign in button at the top right side. Then click the “forgot your password” option and follow the instructions further which you will be able to retrieve your password.
How to make money in Toluna?
There are 8 ways to earn in Toluna which are as follows:
Toluna Surveys: They are the most effective way of earningToluna points. There are multiple surveys available online to complete at any point of time. Usually the majority of the surveys pay 1000-2000 points which lasts for about 20 minutes. 5500 Toluna points are roughly equivalent to 1 pound.
Completing Profile Surveys: You will find the “Profile Surveys” under the surveys option at the top of the screen. Each profile consists of 14 Surveys each and you will get 100points for each survey.
Participate in Polls: In this you will usually earn a points reward of 15 points per poll, usually takes seconds to complete
Post in the Toluna community: You can also earn points by posting your content in the Toluna Community. You may win up to 1000 points per post if your post gets qualified.
Participate in the Contest: Toluna offers launch contests to encourage the users to post more in the community. Inreturn they are rewarded with some points and other prizes.
Start your own contest: you will also be rewarded with points and prizes if you start your own contest.
Refer a friend to Toluna: you can share your referral link with your friends and you will get 500 bonus points for each friend upto 10 months
Play Toluna Games:You can also win points by playing games. You can win about 80-1000 points by spinning the wheel.
How to redeem points in Toluna?
There are 3 ways to redeem the points in Toluna which are listed below:
Rewards:It offers a variety of gift cards with an option to cashout by Paypal. The cheapest gift card costs around 30,000 points
Gifties: These are the tickets you can buy to win a range of rewards
Sweepstakes: You can also exchange your points to get a chance to join the monthly sweepstakes where you can buy branded items
You need to reach of minimum of 30,000 points which are listed below:
$10 gift card for Starbucks- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Cheesecake factory- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for Redbox- 30,000 points
$10 gift card for JiffyLube- 30,000 points
$25 gift card for Restaurants.com-45,000 points
$25 gift card for Walmart- 45,000 points
$25 gift card for Fandango- 45,000 points
Toluna is it Legit or Scam?
As per the Toluna reviews, it has been found that Toluna is a legitimate business. Despite its long wait times, it has a noted record of paying its clients and further issuing them good rewards.
It is a company that offers to pay on each survey you take. It has been very popular and has become one of the people’s number one choices regarding online surveys. They also have a base of around 13 million users and is on a rapid expansion
Toluna also has an A+ rating in the Better Business Bureau(BBB) with only around 31 customer complaints. Further, it has a 3.8 rating on the Trustpilot with more than 2,100 Toluna reviews.
There are a lot more positive reviews compared to the criticism. It has great customer service for which it accounts as one of the legit organizations that pay people in response to the online surveys.
Conclusion
It is to be acknowledged that Toluna is a legitimate business which pays its users based on the surveys they take.It is one of the top rated companies with a trusted community of 1+ million members which make it highly recommended.
It is an honest way to make full time income on the internet by taking surveys. It has no hidden costs and in turn you will learn how to build a flourishing business online in Toluna. It also allows you to choose surveys in categories which you are interested in.
Thus finally it is advisable that Toluna is worth giving a try. You can take it as a fun experience and further you will enjoy it a lot. If you are looking to earn income by taking up online surveys, then Toluna is definitely on the top lists which are trusted.
FAQ
How much does it cost to join Toluna?
No, Signing up for Toluna is completely free. Sign up today and access its features free of cost
Does Toluna pay in cash?
Toluna Influencers are compensated in points, which can be exchanged for a variety of items such as gift cards, competition entries, or plain old cash.
How long do the surveys take to complete?
It is dependent on the targeting and the screening questions. The more of these questions you have, the longer your survey may take to complete.
How do I cash out my Toluna points?
You need to have at least 60000 points. Go to rewards, convert your points into cash through, 60000points=$20.
Is Toluna Survey Legit?
Toluna is a safe and reliable platform. It is not a scam, and millions of people from all over the world have taken their surveys for over ten years. However, your experience with the site may vary from that of other survey takers.
Toluna Ratings
User Review
1.12 (354 votes)
Pros
It is a very reputed company which is operating.
It is completely free to join and features are free to use
Modern and user-friendly interface
You can earn money by answering the surveys on the go while on the phone
Interesting Surveys
Get a consolation prize even if any disqualified
Cons
The disqualifications can be frustrating
There is a minimum cashout of $30 which is hard to reach
Some of its surveys take time to complete
Some users complain about the long wait times for payments or rewards
I meet regularly with a group of seasoned professionals to explore big ideas, emerging trends, and how we might anticipate what’s coming next in the business world.
The insights and learning from these meetings are invaluable. But the real magic isn’t in the ideas. It’s in the shared stories, the deep relationships, and the friendships that have grown over the years.
Our facilitator likes to say, “It’s not networking; it’s community-ing.” And, honestly, that’s what makes these discussions different. They’re not just about tossing around theories — they’re about challenging each other, sharpening perspectives, and realizing that the future might be much weirder than we thought.
Recently, we tackled a big question that led to some fascinating discussions: “How will AI reshape leadership?”
We explored this from every angle: political leadership, corporate leadership, and even leadership within small groups and communities.
But as the conversation unfolded, it became clear that this question extends beyond traditional leadership roles. It also touches on a topic that’s top of mind in marketing: thought leadership content.
AI is transforming how people influence, inspire, and communicate. I share insights from the discussion about how this shift affects the nature of leadership and thought leadership content in the video and in even more detail below.
What happens when everyone knows everything?
For centuries, leadership was built on two key advantages:
An asymmetry of information
The ability to craft and express a visionary narrative — a compelling story that inspires people to follow
Those who led in business, politics, or warfare did so, in part, because they had access to knowledge that others didn’t. Better intelligence (sharper insights and exclusive information) created opportunities for power.
Leadership relied on knowing more than anyone else and telling a compelling story about it.
Thought leadership, in particular, involved leveraging that asymmetric access to information — taking what few knew, shaping it into an approachable, persuasive argument, and using it to educate, engage, and rally people toward a shared goal (which, if we’re honest, was usually the sale of some product or service).
However, the asymmetric knowledge advantage is fading fast as AI levels the playing field.
When artificial intelligence can instantly gather, analyze, and synthesize more data than any human mind could ever process, knowledge is no longer exclusive nor difficult to obtain.
That means access to information and insights is no longer a differentiator. The edge that once separated leaders from followers — the ability to see what others miss — is disappearing.
When anyone can access the same insights, when every decision can be optimized and stress-tested by algorithms, and when the execution can be handled by autonomous systems, the question becomes, “What’s left?”
Universal access to AI-driven knowledge seems to suggest two competing outcomes:
Greater consensus. If everyone sees the same reliable information, people might converge on shared truths, allowing reason and evidence to guide decisions. This outcome requires a critical-minded society that can separate credible data from unreliable sources.
Post-truth polarization. Conversely, if the volume of “facts” becomes overwhelming, leaders (and their followers) can cherry-pick data that support preconceived beliefs. This outcome fosters a post-truth environment in which factual consensus becomes nearly impossible. When each faction claims to espouse the “real facts,” truth becomes contested — and the loudest or most persuasive voice may win.
Early results point toward the latter outcome. Today, the loudest person in the room isn’t necessarily the one with the best information — just the one with the biggest megaphone, the hottest take, or the most unhinged presentation.
The paradox of AI-driven leadership
AI won’t just change how decisions are made — it will alter what leadership requires. Leadership was never just about access to information. It also depended on persuasion, storytelling, and charisma — qualities that aligned people toward a shared vision.
But what happens when AI reduces the need for people to execute tasks?
We’re already seeing workforce reductions in information-based roles, with AI increasingly positioned as the replacement. If future AI agents churn out thought leadership content and carry out executive decisions without question or pushback from humans, does leadership shift from inspiring and mobilizing people to merely making wise decisions?
Whether hitting publish on AI-generated thought leadership or making high-stakes business decisions, a lack of human challenge increases the risk from a single point of failure. Without pushback, scrutiny, or debate, even the best-intentioned decisions go untested — opening the door to blind spots and systemic failures.
This creates an intriguing leadership paradox:
The rise of low-ego, highly analytical leaders. As AI takes over execution, leadership may become less about charisma, emotion, and persuasion and more about wisdom, ethics, and discernment (precision decision-making). These leaders will succeed not because they can captivate a room or rally a team but because they consistently make sound, well-reasoned choices.
A greater need for deeply human, charismatic leaders. As AI renders decisions increasingly cold and clinical, people may crave the opposite — leaders who make them feel something. In a world drowning in data, trust in a leader’s judgment and integrity may become more important than their knowledge or abilities. People might ask, “Do I believe you are using this information in my best interest?” rather than “What information do you have that I don’t?”
Think about it: On one end, you get hyper-logical, Vulcan-like leaders who are efficient and precise but detached from human emotion. On the other, you get magnetic, larger-than-life personalities who captivate and inspire but prioritize charisma over substance.
Maybe the real challenge is finding something that blends the best of both without falling into either trap.
The future of thought leadership: What can we do?
AI has further democratized information. So, the future of thought leadership can’t simply be about unique insights. It has to involve unique perspectives that foster trust and build deeper relationships.
To stay relevant, thought leaders should consider shifting their focus in three crucial ways.
Stop delivering merely facts and start shaping meaning. AI can generate endless information, but leadership won’t be about producing more information – it will be about guiding interpretation. The true value of thought leadership will lie in helping different groups contextualize and synthesize insights in ways that create shared understanding and deeper meaning. It’s not just about presenting data; it’s about framing it in a way that fosters trust, alignment, and action.
Trust in the storyteller is the foundation of belief in the story. John Maxwell once wrote, “People buy into the leader before they buy into the vision … leaders cannot take their people to places they haven’t yet traveled to themselves!” In other words, the story creates value and builds trust, but if an audience doesn’t believe in the storyteller, the message loses its impact.Elevating trusted voices within your brand and helping them grow into the thought leaders of tomorrow is one of the most crucial content tasks. Thought leadership is no longer just about great content — it’s about the credibility, integrity, and authenticity of the people behind it.
Create more interactive and community-driven content. The new thought leadership objective isn’t just attention — it’s engagement. Interactivity over traffic. Loyalty over transactions. Depth over virality. Instead of simply broadcasting insights, thought leaders must foster conversations, cultivate communities, and create collaborative spaces where ideas don’t just spread but also evolve.
The asymmetry of relationships: The new leadership advantage
If AI reduces friction in execution, it also strips away the moments where leaders prove their worth through debate, persuasion, and the art of overcoming resistance.
Without these natural checks, leadership shifts from the person who is the sole strategist to the one who is the ethical anchor (the connective force that holds an organization or community together).
If this turns out to be true, then the future of sustained leadership won’t rest on an asymmetry of information — because information is now universally accessible. Nor will it rely solely on charisma or broad influence.
Instead, leadership will hinge on the ability to create an asymmetry of relationships in which leaders not only broadcast insights but also imbue them with deeper meaning, context, and trust and find ways to co-create within varied and specific communities. It’s not about having exclusive knowledge and making it widely available; it’s about shaping understanding in a way that resonates, builds credibility, and fosters genuine connection in very specific contexts.
Leadership in this new era won’t involve commanding authority. It will require leaders to earn it one community at a time. The ones who thrive won’t be those who control but those who connect.
Leadership isn’t about seeing the path anymore. It’s about making the journey matter.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
New season, new me? With daylight saving time having just happened, we now have more daylight to enjoy, along with the beautiful spring weather and blossoming flowers. This new season makes it the perfect time for a fresh start, and a great way to boost your mental health is by trying new hobbies or restarting hobbies you once loved.
Though hobbies aren’t a replacement for professional help, they do offer mental health benefits such as improved mood, a sense of accomplishment and a redirection for negative thoughts. For inspiration, we outlined some great hobbies you can start this spring.
Why are hobbies good for mental health?
Hobbies make you feel good. They help you relax and unwind from your day, with the added benefit of lowering your stress levels and blood pressure. Hobbies can help ease existing depression symptoms and decrease your risk of developing depression by up to 30%.
Ways that hobbies improve your mental health:
Improve neuroplasticity: According to StatPearls, neuroplasticity describes our brain’s ability to adapt its activity and structure by forming and using new synaptic connections. You can think of your brain as a big map — there are many ways to get to your destination, and sometimes you have to change which way you’re going. Hobbies and habits require you to form new neural pathways, which provide new reference points for the brain to recognize.
Reduce stress: Many people use hobbies to decompress from stressful days. When you do something you like, you’re allowing your body to relax and cortisol levels to drop, which lowers your heart rate and blood pressure while your mood increases.
Help self-esteem: Everyone likes to complete things. It brings a self of accomplishment that feels great. As you master your hobby more and more, your confidence and self-esteem build.
Everyone is busy. It’s nearly impossible not to feel like you’re bouncing from one thing to the next. But when you feel like you don’t have time to dedicate to your hobbies, remember, they’re good for you.
Luis Alvarez/Getty Images
Which hobbies are the best for boosting mental health?
There is no one reigning champ of hobbies for mental health. We’re all different, so we will choose different things to help us relax. What works for you may not yield the same results for someone else. It’s about finding the right hobby that you find value in.
Here are some common options people use to elevate their mental health and why it works.
1. Journaling
Regularly journaling is a powerful tool that allows you to work through feelings and reflect on events you experience. It’s often recommended for those with anxiety, depression and PTSD. You don’t have to write a novel; research has shown that journaling for as little as fifteen minutes daily can help reduce anxiety.
Read more: iOS 17.2: What You Should Know About Apple’s Journal App
You don’t have to search to solve a problem while journaling. It’s also something you can do just for fun. The benefits come either way. Common types of journaling include reflective journaling — which involves writing about your day and what you thought about it — and gratitude journaling.
No matter what type of journaling you choose, it’s a great hobby that allows you to highlight your wins and challenge negative thoughts and feelings.
2. Cooking
Everyone knows that eating can be therapeutic. But so can cooking. Besides the benefits that can affect your physical health, like being in control of the ingredients, there are several reasons why cooking is one of the best hobbies for mental health. It offers a level of emotional relief that other hobbies may not.
According to a study published in Frontiers in Psychology, cooking can help you relax and boost your happiness. It’s not hard to see why. With each dish, you feel more self-reliant and confident, not to mention the social connections you can make when serving it to others. And for the record, yes, baking counts too.
3. Spending time in nature
Hobbies that involve going outside — like hiking or gardening — can be great for mental health. Studies show that being in sunlight can help boost the body’s serotonin production. Serotonin is the naturally occurring neurotransmitter that plays a part in regulating our moods, according to Harvard Health Publishing. It’s called the “feel-good” chemical for a reason. When our body produces the right amount of serotonin, we feel happy and calm. Lower levels of serotonin are associated with mood disorders like depression.
So if you’re someone who goes outside, you’re helping your body combat depression without even knowing it. Being outside in nature can also reduce stress and lower your heart rate.
4. Art
When I say art, I’m talking about everything creative you can think of — painting, drawing, sculpting, embroidery and woodworking. The list goes on. No matter where your hobbies fall in the lineup, you get tangible mental health benefits from them.
Art lets you express your feelings and channel your creativity. You may also use it as a way to work through things that are tough to talk about. It’s a tactic used often in art therapy sessions.
Art may also relieve stress and improve self-confidence. You do not need to be “good” at painting to do it. There is no bar to meet for quality. The only thing that matters is that you enjoy what you’re doing.
5. Music
You get a sense of accomplishment and enjoyment from playing an instrument. Making something feels good, and your body responds to those positive feelings. But if you’re not musically inclined, don’t worry; listening to music also derives similar benefits by lowering stress and anxiety levels. It also can boost your mood.
Getty Images/Westend61
6. Reading
Reading is the ultimate form of escapism. You can jump into a whole new world and live a thousand different lives — or as many books as you can read. It also happens to be a great hobby if you have anxiety. Reading can help distract you from negative or intrusive thinking you may be experiencing. It also can help lower your heart rate and help you relax.
You’ll get the same benefits from listening to books too. So if you can’t carve out the time to read, try listening while walking your dog or cleaning your house.
7. Strategy games
Strategy games and puzzles — like chess, crosswords and sudoku — are other hobbies that are good for your mental health. Studies have found that strategy games improve brain functioning, problem-solving skills and memory. Puzzle games also can help those with ADHD hone their concentration.
Given their ability to strengthen cognition, strategy games and puzzles may also reduce the risk of developing dementia and Alzheimer’s in older adults. However, experts are divided on whether they are truly a preventative measure or if they help cope with the disease. More research is needed to determine strategy games’ role in age-related cognitive decline.
8. Exercise
Whether you work out alone or participate in team sports, exercise is one of the best hobbies to have — both physically and mentally. When we exercise, our brains flood with endorphins that boost mood, per Johns Hopkins Medicine.
Exercise is an outlet to let out frustrations and navigate emotions. By exercising, you’re lowering your risk for anxiety and depression. Team sports give you the extra edge by filling up your social meter while moving your body.
Virginia officials announced there was a confirmed case of measles at Washington Dulles International Airport last week, and now they are trying to track down anyone who may have been exposed to the highly contagious virus.
The Virginia Department of Health said Sunday that it was notified of the confirmed case, which involved an individual returning from an international trip on March 5.
Officials added that the potential exposure site includes Terminal A, transportation to the main terminal and the baggage claim area, all between 4 p.m. and 9 p.m. that day.
Health officials are working to identify anyone who may have been exposed to the virus, which involves individuals at the airport and passengers on specific flights.
The Virginia Department of Health said it received a confirmed case of measles at Dulles International Airport, saying a traveler coming off an international flight on March 5 may have exposed other travelers to the highly contagious virus.(iStock)
This is the latest incident involving measles, which is spreading across the U.S.
A student in Miami-Dade County, Florida, tested positive for the disease last week, and on Wednesday, Florida Surgeon General Dr. Joseph Ladapo said it was possible there “may be more” cases.
RFK RECOMMENDS MEASLES VACCINES FOR COMMUNITY IMMUNITY WHILE SUPPORTING PERSONAL CHOICE
Meanwhile, Texas has reported the highest number of measles cases since January, marking 198 infected people as of Friday morning, which includes 23 hospitalizations, according to the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS).
One child in Texas and one adult in New Mexico have died from measles.(iStock)
Most of the cases were detected in unvaccinated, school-aged children — which included one child who died from the disease.
New Mexico also reported its first measles death on Thursday in an unvaccinated adult, according to state officials.
In a recent Fox News Digital op-ed, HHS Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. shared his “deep concern” about the measles outbreak and its rapid escalation.
IS MMR VACCINE SAFE FOR KIDS? DR. NICOLE SAPHIER ADDRESSES CONCERNS AS MEASLES CASES RISE
Kennedy noted that while there is no approved antiviral for measles, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) released a statement last week supporting the administration of vitamin A under physician supervision as supportive care.
Previous research published in the International Journal of Epidemiology has shown that vitamin A, in conjunction with the measles vaccine, can be an effective intervention in preventing measles mortality in children.
An international traveler who flew into Dulles Airport in Virginia on March 5 may have exposed other passengers and travelers to measles.(iStock)
Kennedy reiterated the importance of maintaining good nutrition and consuming various vitamins — like A, B12, C, D and E — as the “best defense against” chronic and infectious illness.
He also told Fox News that he recommends measles vaccines for community immunity during the outbreak, but he also continues to advocate for personal choice.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“We’re going to do what’s right for the American people,” Kennedy told Dr. Marc Siegel, Fox News’ senior medical analyst.
“We’re going to be honest with the American people for the first time in history about all the tests, about all the studies, what we know, what we don’t know, and that’s going to anger some people who want an ideological approach to public health,'” the HHS secretary continued.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Still, the CDC recommends “all children get two doses of MMR (measles-mumps-rubella) vaccine,” according to its website, adding that adults who don’t have “presumptive evidence of immunity should get at least one dose of MMR vaccine.”
Fox News Digital’s Brie Stimson and Angelica Stabile contributed to this report.
Greg Wehner is a breaking news reporter for Fox News Digital.
Story tips and ideas can be sent to [email protected] and on Twitter @GregWehner.
India’s food scene is more dynamic than ever, with new restaurants, innovative menus, and bold fusion experiments redefining culinary boundaries. From global brands setting up shop to homegrown chefs pushing the limits of creativity, there’s never been a better time to be a food lover. Our country’s diverse culinary traditions continue to evolve, blending heritage flavors with modern techniques. And what better way to experience this evolution than at food festivals? As March and April bring a lineup of must-visit gastronomic events, prepare to feast on everything delicious! Ready to indulge? Let’s dive in!
Here Are Some Must-Attend Food Festivals In India In March-April 2025:
Delhi-NCR
Thai Culinary Festival Comes To Erawaan, The Claridges New Delhi
Experience Thailand’s lively streets right from your seat at Erawaan, The Claridges New Delhi! Embark on an epicurean journey where the country’s rich culinary heritage is reimagined through an exclusive menu. This immersive experience captures the artistry of time-honored techniques, authentic flavors, and innovation, bringing the bustling Thai streets to life. Some highlights from the menu include Street Style Mixed Noodle Soup Bowl, Mee Grob, Poa Pia Tod, Peek Gai Thod Namn Pla and Pad See Eww. The traditional bamboo cooking method is another star feature of this exclusive menu, honoring the creativity and resourcefulness of the technique’s originators. Bamboo infuses each dish with a subtle sweetness that ties the whole meal together. To complement your dining experience, Erawaan introduces a selection of Thai-inspired cocktails. Patrons can expect Thai Chilli Margarita, Lyco Highball, Thai Galangal Mule, Kaffir Collins, etc.
When: 24th February 2025 to 14th March 2025
Where: 12, Dr APJ Abdul Kalam Rd, Tees January Road Area, Motilal Nehru Marg Area, New Delhi, Delhi 110011
CHO – Asian Terrace & Cocktail Bar Brings Dragon Festival To The Town
Step into a world of bold flavors and authentic delicacies at CHO – Asian Terrace & Cocktail Bar in New Delhi unveils its exclusive Dragon Festival, a limited-period Chinese Menu. Inspired by the bustling flavours of Chinatown, this meticulously curated menu is a gastronomic tribute to the rich culinary heritage of China, offering an exquisite selection of handcrafted dim sum, soulful broths, wok-tossed specialities, and decadent desserts. Begin your journey with a refined selection of Dim Sum & Small Plates, featuring delicacies such as Crystal Shrimp Dumplings and Szechuan Spicy Chicken Dumplings, each bite delivering a delicate balance of texture and taste. The experience deepens with warming Soups & Broths, from the comforting Hot & Sour Soup to the nourishing Double-Boiled Herbal Chicken Soup, a testament to time-honoured Chinese culinary traditions. For those seeking heartier fare, the Wok & Rice Specialties promise an explosion of flavours-think Street-Style Spicy Noodles and Golden Fried Rice with Truffle, each dish crafted to satisfy the most discerning palates. Elevate your dining experience with signature mains such as Crispy Fried Chicken Fingers and Grilled Salmon Fillet in XO Sauce, where premium ingredients meet expert craftsmanship. And, for a sweet finale, indulge in Crispy Fried Ice-Cream and the indulgent Banana Toffee, a perfect harmony of crunch and caramelized richness.
When: February 21 to March 23, 2025
Where: 5/1, 1st Floor, Ambawatta One complex, LHS kalkadas Marg, Mehrauli, New Delhi
Discover the Rich Flavours of Northeast India at Tamra, Shangri-La Eros New Delhi
Shangri-La Eros New Delhi in collaboration with Chef Pin, presents an incredible culinary experience celebrating the indigenous flavours of Northeast India. The restaurant will serve an authentic selection of regional specialities crafted by Chef Mary Lalboi. This exclusive pop-up highlights the soul of Northeast India with a meticulously curated menu featuring signature dishes that complement the region’s bold and earthy flavours. Guests can savour Kelsa, a mutton curry infused with exotic Northeast herbs; Kanga, a flavoursome goose curry with Manipuri wild roots and leaves; and Kolposola, a notable Assamese banana trunk curry. The experience continues with comforting delights like Bai, a Mizo-style seasonal mixed curry. Sanpiau, a delicate Northeast rice porridge, and Chow Satui, a soulful mutton noodle soup, complete this delightful journey. To conclude the overall experience on a sweet note, the rich and aromatic Chakhao Kheer, a black rice pudding, offers the perfect finish.
Where: Shangri-La Eros New Delhi
When: 6th to 8th March 2025
Kashmiri Wazwan Awaits You at Crowne Plaza Greater Noida
Crowne Plaza Greater Noida is proud to present the Kashmiri Wazwan Feast at Spice Art. This exclusive, week-long event invites food enthusiasts to immerse themselves in the grandeur of Kashmiri cuisine, offering a rare opportunity to experience the legendary Wazwan – a multi-course feast that is a hallmark of Kashmiri culture and hospitality.
The Kashmiri Wazwan Feast at Crowne Plaza Greater Noida features a carefully curated menu that highlights the rich flavours of Kashmiri cuisine. The appetizers include Tabak Maaz, Kokar Kanti and Kashmiri Paneer Tikka. For the main course, guests can enjoy Rogan Josh, a flavourful lamb curry cooked in a rich, aromatic gravy, and Rista, tender meatballs made from minced mutton simmered in a fragrant spice blend. The meal concludes with Kong Firin, a traditional dessert made from milk, saffron, and nuts, offering a sweet and silky finish. Each dish reflects the slow-cooked techniques and aromatic spices that define Kashmiri cuisine.
Where: Spice Art, Crowne Plaza Greater Noida
When: 5th March – 11th March 2025
Photo: Crowne Plaza Greater Noida
Mumbai:
South of Vindhyas: A Time-Honored Sea Food Festival Returns To The Orchid Hotel
Get ready to embark on an extraordinary culinary voyage as South of Vindhyas hosts its annual SeaFood Festival. This specially curated festival pays homage to the ocean’s finest bounty, with a delectable selection of seafood dishes crafted with authenticity and passion. Guests can relish an exclusive ala carte menu featuring a variety of prawn, fish, squid, crab, and lobster preparations infused with the robust flavors of Andhra Pradesh, Telangana, Kerala, Karnataka, and Tamil Nadu. A highlight of the festival is the Sit-Down Fish Buffet and Sit-Down Seafood Buffet, where guests can savor an elaborate spread that includes tantalizing starters like Chepla Vepudu (spicy fried Surmai), Meen Moilee (delicate Pomfret cooked in coconut milk), and Nandu Masala (succulent crab in a spiced masala). Complementing the main dishes are traditional accompaniments such as Appam, Kal Dosa, Ponni Rice, and a selection of rich, comforting curries like Meen Kozhambu and Malabar Meen Curry. To conclude the meal, guests can indulge in a variety of traditionally made Payasam, each prepared with age-old recipes and the freshest ingredients, offering a sweet and satisfying end to the culinary experience.
For those who prefer an ala carte experience, the festival menu offers an enticing selection of delicacies, from the fiery Prawn Rava Fry and the signature Meen Pollichathu, to the aromatic Crab Chettinad and the indulgent Golden Lobster Fry. The carefully crafted dishes promise to transport diners straight to the coastal kitchens of South India, where seafood is not just food, but a way of life.
When: February 28th to March 9th
Where: 70-C, Nehru Road, Hotel Near Mumbai Domestic Airport, Vile Parle (E), Mumbai – 400099
Photo: The Orchid Hotel
Bengaluru:
Michelin Star Chef Adam Gray Brings a Global Culinary Experience to The Leela Bhartiya City Bengaluru
Michelin Star Chef Adam Gray brings a global culinary affair to The Leela Bhartiya City Bengaluru. The globally celebrated Chef Gray will bring a meticulously curated 6-course menu paired with selected wine to the restaurant. This menu boasts Chef Gray’s signature dishes in the non-vegetarian section, which highlight fresh seafood and premium meats with items such as gin-cured salmon with tonic cucumber and dill salsa. The vegetarian section celebrates the seasonal produce and bold pairings with dishes like leek terrine with Saffron-marinated vegetables and Butternut Squash. Each course is thoughtfully paired with fine wines, elevating the dining experience.
When: March 19, 2025
Where: The Leela Bhartiya City Bengaluru, 6/2, Thanisandra Main Road, Bengaluru 560064
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-03-09/Minister-China-to-step-up-resources-funding-to-support-employment-1BBjrAQrlHq/img/a8479387f1f9481e8b3c7c62db6820b8/a8479387f1f9481e8b3c7c62db6820b8.jpeg' alt='A job fair for 2025 graduates takes place at Tianjin Medical University in Tianjin, north China, March 8, 2025. /VCG'
China will step up resources and funding to support employment in 2025, and strive to build an employment-friendly development model, Minister of Human Resources and Social Security Wang Xiaoping said on Sunday.
Wang made the remarks during a press conference on people’s livelihood held by the third session of the 14th National People’s Congress in Beijing.
This year’s government work report arranges and implements more proactive macroeconomic policies, and promotes more financial resources to “invest in people,” which will provide stronger support to economic growth and employment, she stated.
Along with the steady advancement of China’s high-quality development, a large number of new technologies, products and scenarios are being applied, diversifying a differentiated consumption potential and effectively stimulating the vitality of various business entities and innovative entrepreneurship. All of these have laid a solid foundation for stabilizing and expanding employment, Wang said, adding that China’s employment has got off to a good start this year, as data from the first two months of this year reveals.
In 2025, there will be 12.22 million college graduates, while the number of people lifted out of poverty needs to be maintained above 30 million, Wang said, adding that a large number of rural migrant workers need to achieve stable employment.
Wang urged efforts to build an employment-friendly development model, organize and implement employment support programs, and effectively improve the efficiency of matching people with jobs.
Calling for driving employment through promoting entrepreneurship, she said China will focus on supporting young people’s innovative entrepreneurship, and migrant workers returning to their hometowns to start businesses, so as to better unleash the multiplier effect of entrepreneurship in driving employment.
China will roll out a new round of policies this year to support the employment of young people, including college graduates, Wang said, adding that the country will strengthen service training and support for elder migrant workers to promote employment and increase their income.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
Krešimir Blažev ima više od 20 godina iskustva u telekomunikacijama i pratećoj industriji. Za Index je recenzirao Xiaomi 15 Ultra.
XIAOMI na MWC sajmu u Barceloni redovito predstavlja svoje top modele za globalno tržište, a ove godine na red je došao model Xiaomi 15 Ultra, s kojim sam se družio proteklih desetak dana. Riječ je o zaista impresivnom uređaju, koji po mnogim kriterijima, kako mu i ime sugerira, spada u najvišu klasu mobilnih telefona i izravno konkurira Samsungu Galaxy S25 Ultra.
Za razliku od Samsunga, Xiaomi očito ima slobodu pristupiti ovom cjenovnom rangu s najsnažnijim hardverom, bez previše brige koliko će nesvakidašnji dizajn utjecati na kupce. Ovaj telefon definitivno nije samo za surfanje, usputno fotkanje i društvene mreže već cilja na publiku koja će iz njega izvući maksimum, posebice kad je fotografija u pitanju.
Dok sam ga koristio, mnogi su gledali s divljenjem, ali i u čudu zašto je grba kamere toliko velika. Razlog za to je jasan i zapravo vrlo jednostavan. Da je manja, ovako moćne kamere fizički ne bi bilo moguće smjestiti u kućište.
Dizajn modula kamere vuče inspiraciju iz Leicinih fotoaparata, svjetski poznate njemačke tvrtke za izradu leća i fotografske optike, s kojom Xiaomi već nekoliko godina usko surađuje. Tako je upravo ona zaslužna za vrhunske fotoperformanse ovog telefona.
Xiaomi i Leica pobrinuli su se da svaka leća ugrađena u ovu kameru bude iznimno visoke kvalitete, kao i da samo fotografiranje uređajem asocira na baratanje pravim Leicinim fotoaparatom.
Kućište i zaslon
Xiaomi 15 Ultra nije ni mali ni lagan telefon, dapače. Dimenzijama se smjestio među najveće na tržištu i oni koji ga kupuju sasvim sigurno su spremni na takav ergonomski kompromis. U odnosu na većinu drugih telefona, pomalo ga je neobično držati u ruci, i to upravo zbog spomenute grbe koja nosi dobar dio težine cijelog uređaja.
Dvobojna poleđina testiranog primjerka izrađena je od različitih materijala. Tamniji dio na izgled i opip podsjeća na imitaciju kože, dok je svjetliji izrađen od brušenog aluminija. Korišteni su vrhunski materijali, pa tako uređaj i vizualno i u ruci ostavlja onaj “premium” dojam. Svaki spoj između bilo koja dva materijala izveden je iznimno precizno.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Grba kamere se blagim prijevojem donekle stapa s poleđinom, a njezin okvir ima posebnu hrapavu teksturu koja opet podsjeća na Leicine objektive. Zanimljivo je da i tipka za uključivanje ima istu teksturu, a slične obrade pronaći ćemo i na nekim prekidačima Leicinih kamera.
U doba kad većina telefona izgleda isto, Xiaomi 15 Ultra je jedan od onih koji se baš izdvajaju, kako samim izgledom tako i tom posvećenošću detaljima. Zaslon je, primjerice, ravan, ali staklo koje ga prekriva je taman toliko blago zaobljeno da prsti ne zapinju prilikom prelaska po njegovim rubovima.
Mogao bih reći da baš lijepo klize. Zbog tog zakrivljenog zaštitnog stakla, koje je po riječima Xiaomija otpornije na padove nego ikad, i razgovori bi trebali biti ugodniji jer se rub neće “urezati” u uho.
Možda na prvu ne izgleda tako, ali već nakon pola sata korištenja postaje vidljivo da je zaista velika pažnja posvećena izradi detalja i završnoj obradi.
Zasloni u pametnim telefonima su po pitanju kvalitete prikaza danas dovedeni na nevjerojatnu razinu, dok se najveći prigovori upućuju na štetnost plavog svjetla za oči. S ovim uređajem možete biti mirni jer za razliku od Samsunga, titranje zaslona (PWM dimming) je neusporedivo bolje riješeno.
Softver
Ta skladnost se prenosi i na sam softver, koji je ovoga puta HyperOS 2.0, temeljen na najnovijem Androidu 15. Najveće novosti su u optimizaciji cijelog sustava, ali i u animacijama koje su suptilno skrivene u svakom dijelu sučelja.
Svaki virtualni gumb, počevši od Bluetootha, WiFi-ja, bljeskalice ili bilo čega drugog, ima svoju malu animaciju koja se pokreće kad odaberete konkretnu funkciju. Sve su animacije glatke i fluidne, kao da osjetite kako klize pod prstima.
Danas je u trendu umjetna inteligencija, pa je tako i Xiaomi u suradnji s Googleom svojim kupcima ponudio 3 mjeseca besplatnog Gemini Advanced AI alata. Inače, Gemini je i u osnovnoj verziji vrlo sposoban. Pozivate ga duljim pritiskom na tipku uključivanja.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Možete s njim pričati kao s prijateljem ili savjetnikom, a odnedavno radi i na hrvatskom jeziku, i to ne samo za tekstualne unose nego i za glasovne upite, na koje dobivate isto tako glasovne odgovore.
Podržan je i Googleov Circle to Search, inače iznimno zgodan i koristan dodatak, a pristupate mu zadržavanjem prsta na home tipki. Nakon što ga pozovete, na zaslonu jednostavno zaokružite ono što vas zanima, odnosno ono što želite da vam analizira. Google će vam brzo pronaći i ponuditi rezultate pretraživanja, bilo da ste zaokružili cipele koje ste fotografirali, lokaciju s fotografije koju vam je netko poslao ili ste samo kopirali tekst.
Naravno da su i u galeriji podržani razni AI alati, koji će s fotografija vašeg poziranja ispred Eiffelovog tornja izbrisati sve osobe osim vas, proširiti fotografiju ili eventualno nacrtati ono čega nije bilo.
Ništa od toga ne bi tako savršeno radilo da tu nije trenutno najsnažniji procesor na tržištu – Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite. Za razliku od mnogih izravnih rivala, u ovom telefonu već je u startu uparen sa 16 GB radne i 512 GB interne memorije.
Kamere
No nemojmo se zavaravati, najveći adut ovog uređaja su njegove kamere. Glavna donosi iznimno velik 1-inčni senzor, a ako vam to ne znači puno, mogli bismo reći da je fizički oko 50% veći od onog ugrađenog u najnovije i najskuplje Appleove ili Samsungove modele. Podsjetimo, što je senzor fizički veći, to više svjetla može upiti i u konačnici bi trebao dati bolju fotografiju.
Već prvim primjercima fotografija ostao sam oduševljen. Bila noć ili dan, Xiaomi 15 Ultra se podjednako dobro nosi sa žarkim suncem i lošim uvjetima. Svaka fotografija koju ovim telefonom okinete ostavit će poseban dojam, što je inače česta karakteristika Leicinih kamera.
Manje iskusnima u fotografiji najveći bi problem moglo biti to što je osnovni senzor toliko velik. U kombinaciji s f/1.6 otvorom blende, dubina fokusa će biti vrlo plitka. Naime, kod mnogih rivala ovo nije slučaj, tako da kod fotografiranja izbliza morate paziti.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ako krivo tapnete na nešto što vam ne treba biti u fokusu, motiv bi vam mogao ispasti mutan. Kod telefona s manjim senzorima ovo neće toliko doći do izražaja. Radi se o zakonima fizike, inače prisutnima i u profesionalnim DSLR fotoaparatima.
S druge strane, kad se malo uvježbate, svaka će fotografija izgledati posebno. Taj fokus će na neki način izdvojiti motiv od pozadine, pa će razlika u odnosu na rivale i laicima biti vidljiva već na prvi pogled.
Ako je motiv lijepo osvijetljen, i portreti će biti vrhunski, s iznimno dobrim bokeh efektom.
No nije samo glavna kamera izvrsna. Odlične su sve četiri na poleđini, od kojih je ona posljednja iznimno sposobna, a to je telefoto kamera s 1/1.4″ senzorom. Usporedbe radi, ovo je otprilike ista veličina senzora koju mnogi rivali donose na primarnoj kameri. To bi u prijevodu značilo da ćete ovom telefoto kamerom dobiti jednako kvalitetne fotografije kao one okinute glavnom kamerom mnogih konkurentskih proizvođača.
Najveći faktor optičkog povećanja je 4.3x, ali sve do 8.6x možete dobiti savršeno čiste i oštre detalje. Xiaomi kaže da nema nikakve razlike u kvaliteti, u što sam se i sam mogao uvjeriti. Fotografija zumirana faktorom 10-20x po kvaliteti je vidljivo iznad onih koju nude najskuplji Samsung i iPhone.
Snimanje videa također nudi širok spektar mogućnosti. Uređaj dopušta da podesite gotovo sve parametre kao na profesionalnim kamerama, a uz to donosi i snimanje u LOG formatu, koji je u zadnje vrijeme postao vrlo popularan na društvenim mrežama. Radi se o hvatanju sjena i bijelih površina s velikim naglaskom na preciznost.
Ponuđenih opcija snimanja videa zaista je mnogo, a rezultati će zbog ogromnog senzora nerijetko više podsjećati na filmske uratke nego na one snimljene telefonom. Naravno, ovo podrazumijeva da takve snimke znate iskoristiti.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Baterija i punjenje
Ako ste pomislili da će mana biti lošija baterija, prevarili ste se. Xiaomi 15 Ultra dolazi s velikom 5410mAh baterijom, i to silicij-karbonskom, dakle, onom nove generacije. Podržano je 90 W brzo punjenje, koje će omogućiti da se od 0-100% napuni za nešto manje od sat vremena.
Iako je ovo zapravo lošiji rezultat od nekoliko prethodnih generacija i rivala sa 120 W punjačima, i dalje je brže od onoga što na iPhoneu nudi Apple. Ono što bi vas moglo ugodno iznenaditi je brzina bežičnog punjenja. Ako koristite 80 W indukcijski punjač s PD standardom, razliku u brzini u odnosu na žično punjenje praktički nećete ni primijetiti.
Ukupan dojam trajanja baterije je nešto više od Samsunga Galaxy S25 Ultra i mrvicu manje od iPhonea 16 Pro Max. Cijeli dan ne bi trebao biti problem osim ako se ne zaigrate snimanjem videa u visokoj rezoluciji ili izgubite samokontrolu kod igranja grafički zahtjevnih igara. No čak da je to i slučaj, brzo punjenje će odraditi svoj dio posla.
Zaključak
Xiaomi 15 Ultra nije jeftin telefon, dapače. Startna cijena od 1500 eura je u rangu Samsunga Galaxy S25 Ultra ili iPhonea 16 Pro Max. Međutim, dolazi s 512 GB interne memorije, što će vas u slučaju Samsunga koštati dodatnih stotinjak eura, odnosno čak do 300 kod iPhonea. Isto tako, ako ga kupite u promotivnom razdoblju, na poklon dobivate električni romobil u vrijednosti 350 eura.
Neodgovorno bi bilo reći da se radi o savršenom pametnom telefonu, ali u domeni fotografije malo koji mu trenutačno može stati uz bok.
PHOENIX — Right-hander Michael Grove won’t pitch for the Dodgers this year after undergoing season-ending surgery last week to repair his right labrum.
Grove walked into the Dodgers clubhouse with his right arm in a sling Sunday morning but quietly declined to speak with reporters. He threw a couple of bullpen sessions this spring but hasn’t pitched in a game since injuring his shoulder in the second game of the Division Series against the Padres. In that playoff appearance, he gave up a home run to Xander Bogaerts then struck out Jake Cronenworth. He was removed from the roster following that game.
“It’s been a shoulder issue that’s been bothering him for, I don’t know how far back,” Dodgers manager Dave Roberts said. “He tried to pitch through it and the recovery wasn’t what any of us would have liked. We tried the rest approach and we just felt that we had to get the surgery done.”
Grove had Tommy John surgery in 2017.
“He’s disappointed,” Roberts said. “He didn’t want to do another surgery, and he tried to, you know, tough it out and pitch through it, but it was just compromising his performance and recovery. He was ready to kind of compete for a job this year.”
Grove, 28, was bidding for a spot in the bullpen after going 4-4 with a 5.12 ERA in 51 innings, mostly in relief, last year. He struck out 54 batters and walked 16. A second-round pick in the 2018 draft, Grove made his big-league debut in 2022 then pitched in 18 games, throwing 69 innings, a year later. He was re-signed this month to a one-year contract for the major league minimum of $760,000.
Snell making progress with new team
Dodgers starting pitcher Blake Snell delivers against the Athletics on Sunday.
(Ross D. Franklin / Associated Press)
Left-hander Blake Snell struggled through a shaky 3 2/3 innings Sunday, giving up four runs on five hits, including a solo home run to Drew Avans, in the Dodgers’ 7-5 Cactus League loss to the Athletics. But that counted as progress since the outing was the longest of the spring for Snell, who made 67 pitches, striking out five, walking one and hitting 97 mph with his fastball.
“I’m happy with that,” he said of the velocity. “Towards the end there, I was just trying to get a strike. I kind of lost feel. But overall I felt good.”
A two-time Cy Young Award winner, Snell signed a five-year $182-million free-agent in November, making the Dodgers the fourth team he has pitched for since 2020. He said getting adjusted to new teammates and a new environment has been easier this year.
“The first time I did it, it was pretty difficult for me,” said Snell, who spent the last two seasons with San Diego and San Francisco. “Learning myself, learning coaches, learning players, not going there to, you know, try to impress people.
“[It’s] just more so proving myself, that I’m doing the right things.”
Snell is scheduled to make his next appearance in one of the Dodgers two spring training exhibitions in Japan next weekend.
You’re going out there and getting reps, so you’re just learning,” he said. “You you give up a hit, it’s like OK, what did I do right? What did I do wrong? Do I like that? Was that a good swing, or was that a bad pitch?
“You’re just kind of calibrating everything. By the time the season starts, then you have a better idea of what you’re doing. But you’re still learning and calibrating. It just takes a while. That’s kind of where I’m at. I continue to get better.”
Scheduling notes
Although Roberts is giving Mookie Betts and Michael Conforto a day off before the team leaves for Japan on Wednesday, he’s planning to stick with most of his regulars in the Dodgers’ final two games in Arizona.
“Mookie is going to be off tomorrow, and then he’ll play Tuesday. Conforto is going to play tomorrow; he won’t play on Tuesday,” Roberts said. “But I think for the most part you’ll see the regular guys.”
Denmark’s self-governing territory of Greenland, which votes Tuesday in legislative elections, has been propelled into the political spotlight because of its natural resources and strategic geographic location.
Houses covered by snow are seen on the coast of a sea inlet of Nuuk, Greenland.(AP Photo/Evgeniy Maloletka)
Here are five things to know about Greenland:
– ‘Green land’ –
Inhabited by Inuits on and off for almost 4,500 years, the island was originally dubbed ‘Green land’ by Erik the Red, a Viking explorer who landed on the far southern edge of the island in the 10th century.
That was a less-than-fitting name, since around 80 percent of its more than two million-square-kilometre (772,204 square-mile) surface is covered by ice.
Colonised by Denmark 300 years ago, it was integrated into the Kingdom of Denmark in 1953.
In 1979, Copenhagen granted Greenland home rule and its autonomy was further extended in a 2009 law, though Copenhagen still decides on foreign policy and military matters.
The economy, based primarily on the fisheries industry, is heavily dependent on subsidies from Copenhagen of more than $565 million, equivalent to a fifth of the island’s GDP.
Contrary to Denmark, Greenland is not a member of the European Union after withdrawing in 1985, three decades before Brexit. More than 90 percent of its 57,000 inhabitants — some 19,000 of whom live in the capital Nuuk — are Inuits.
– Coveted by US –
President Donald Trump has repeatedly stated since December that the United States plans to take over Greenland, raising his tone in a March 4 speech to Congress.
“We need it really for international world security. And I think we’re going to get it,” he said.
US interest in the territory is not new: In the 1823 Monroe Doctrine, the US claimed Greenland was part of its “sphere of interests”.
Almost a century later, in 1917, Washington acquired the Virgin Islands from Denmark and recognised Denmark’s sovereignty over Greenland.
During World War II, when Denmark was occupied by Germany, Greenland came under US protection and was returned to Denmark at the end of the war.
The US maintained several large military bases; One of them, Pituffik — in the island’s northwest — is still in use.
The US also has a consulate in Nuuk.
– Minerals in spades –
Greenland’s soil is rich in untapped mineral and oil reserves, but on a global scale the amounts are modest.
And there are currently only two mines in use.
Greenland’s rare earths — demand for which is expected to surge in the future — are estimated at 36.1 billion tonnes by the Geological Survey of Denmark and Greenland (GEUS).
But its rare earths reserves — those that are economically and technically recoverable — amount to only about 1.5 million tonnes, according to the latest report from the US Geological Survey (USGS).
Public opposition to uranium mining in southern Greenland has also led to legislation banning any mining of radioactive materials.
The island is also believed to be sitting on an abundance of oil and gas but has suspended exploration out of concern for the climate and aims to develop hydropower instead.
Melting glaciers are also releasing a mineral-rich rock flour that can be used as a fertiliser in depleted or arid soil in Africa and South America.
– Front line of global warming –
The massive territory is experiencing firsthand the effects of global warming, with the Arctic heating up four times faster than the rest of the planet since 1979, according to a study in US journal Nature.
Numerous studies have also shown that the melting of Greenland’s ice sheet has picked up speed.
If the ice mass, the second largest in the world after Antarctica, were to melt completely it could cause sea levels to rise by more than seven metres (23 feet), according to simulations.
– Northern routes –
Greenland lacks a road or rail network, so people rely on helicopters, planes and boats to get around.
Rising temperatures and melting ice are meanwhile opening new and shorter shipping routes, reinforcing the territory’s strategic position.
It is counting on growing tourism to boost its economy.
In November, the Nuuk airport opened to long-haul flights, making international access to the territory easier. Twice weekly direct flights to New York are due to start this summer.
Rod Stewart has always had a deep love for soul music. While best known for his raspy rock vocals and chart-topping hits like ‘Maggie May’ and ‘Da Ya Think I’m Sexy?’, the singer has long drawn inspiration from the greats of R&B and soul.
Rod Stewart’s career has spanned more than five decades, but his love for soul music goes back even further. Growing up in London in the late 1950s and early ‘60s, he was drawn to American rhythm and blues.
The records coming out of Motown, Stax, and Atlantic found their way into his record collection, shaping the sound that would later make him one of the biggest stars of the 1970s.
Though he started out in rock bands like The Jeff Beck Group and Faces, Stewart was always looking for ways to bring soul influences into his work. He covered Sam Cooke’s ‘Twistin’ the Night Away’, tackled ‘(I Know) I’m Losing You’ by The Temptations, and filled his early solo records with tracks that echoed the bluesy sound of the American greats.
But when it comes to personal favourites, ‘Lookin’ for a Love’ is one of the songs that has stuck with him the most.
Originally released in 1962, ‘Lookin’ for a Love’ was recorded by The Valentinos, a group made up of Bobby Womack and his brothers under the guidance of Sam Cooke. It was a lively, gospel-infused track with harmonies that lifted it beyond the standard R&B fare of the time. The song had an infectious rhythm, driven by handclaps and a steady groove, but it was Womack’s delivery that made it shine.
At just 18 years old, Bobby Womack had a voice that carried a weight beyond his years. He sang with a depth that made the lyrics feel like more than just another love song.
The song later found success again in 1974 when Womack re-recorded it as a solo artist. The new version was smoother, polished for radio, and climbed to No. 1 on the Billboard R&B chart. But for Stewart, both versions captured the magic that made Womack’s music special.
Stewart wasn’t just a fan from afar—he and Womack had a strong mutual respect. While they came from different musical worlds, their paths crossed multiple times throughout their careers.
In a 2008 interview, Stewart recalled being in awe of Womack’s ability to pour emotion into every line. He admired the way Womack could take a song and make it feel personal, as if he was living every word as he sang it.
Womack, on the other hand, recognized Stewart’s appreciation for soul and saw him as someone who understood what made the genre special. Though Stewart had rock star status, his roots in blues and soul were clear, and that wasn’t lost on Womack.
Perhaps the most interesting link between Stewart and Womack is found in one of Stewart’s biggest hits, ‘Da Ya Think I’m Sexy?’. Released in 1978, the song was a major shift in Stewart’s sound, blending rock with disco and funk. It became a global success, reaching No. 1 in multiple countries, but it also sparked controversy due to its similarity to other songs.
One of the key influences on the track was Womack’s ‘If You Want My Love, Put Something Down On It’. While ‘Da Ya Think I’m Sexy?’ had its own melody and structure, Stewart borrowed elements from Womack’s string arrangement, using a similar lush orchestration in his own track.
This wasn’t an uncommon practice in the ‘70s, especially in the disco era when producers often lifted ideas from soul and funk records. Stewart, however, never shied away from acknowledging Womack’s impact. He openly credited Womack’s sound as an influence on his work, reinforcing the deep admiration he had for him as an artist.
It might look much the same externally, but the 2025 GWM Tank 300 has received significant updates inside.
However, it’s unclear when the refreshed off-roader will come here.
“At this stage, there are no confirmed plans to introduce this revised version to the Australian market,” said a spokesperson for GWM Australia.
“We will continue to offer the current version, which was recently introduced with a new diesel powertrain.”
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
It’s worth noting GWM Australia launched its updated and renamed Cannon ute earlier this year, after this model was previewed in China in early mid-2023. It’s unclear if we’re in for a similar wait for the refreshed Tank 300.
GWM says the Tank 300’s shape is timeless, which is why exterior changes are largely limited to a new Dune Beige exterior finish and headlights that are claimed to be 25 per cent brighter.
Inside, there are much more substantial changes, with the cabin previewed with both white and red colourways.
There’s still a 12.3-inch digital instrument cluster, but the 12.3-inch touchscreen has been replaced by a 14.6-inch unit running the firm’s latest Coffee OS 3.0 operating system.
The touchscreen now juts out of the redesigned dashboard, and features a row of physical switches below it.
There are now three fewer round air vents, with more conventionally shaped ones now found on the centre stack.
A redesigned centre console sees the gear selector moved to the steering column, freeing up space for an array of rocker switches. There’s also now a second 50W wireless phone charger.
There’s a new “D-shape” steering wheel, while a translated press release says the Tank 300 has an “interior wrapped in leather material above the waistline”.
The front seats have a longer, softer cushion, along with backrest (instead of just cushion) ventilation, while the sound system gets four extra speakers for 12 in total.
Chinese-market petrol models also now have the option of semi-autonomous parking assist, previously exclusive to hybrid models.
GWM’s Chinese site mentions the updated Tank 300 range will only be offered there with a choice of 2.0-litre turbo-petrol, 2.4-litre turbo-diesel and 2.0-litre turbo ‘Hi4-T’ plug-in hybrid powertrains.
On its Weibo, GWM also says petrol models now also use a nine-speed auto like the rest of the range. Outgoing petrol models used an eight-speed.
In Australia, the Tank 300 is currently offered with a choice of 2.0-litre turbo-petrol or 2.0-litre turbo-petrol hybrid (not plug-in hybrid) powertrains.
2025 Tank 300 interior
2024 Tank 300 interior
The 2.4-litre turbo-diesel recently arrived at dealers, but the Hi-4T plug-in hybrid is still not confirmed for our market.
The Tank 300 arrived here early in 2023, and last year sales were up by 105.4 per cent to 3968 units.
It outsold rivals like the LDV D90, SsangYong Rexton and Toyota Fortuner despite lacking a turbo-diesel engine or a third row of seating like all of them.
Taxpayers can reduce tax liabilities by claiming House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemptions. Salaried individuals can claim HRA for rent paid to parents if conditions are met.
Income Tax Return: HRA Exemption.
Taxpayers are always keen on minimizing their tax liabilities. The Income Tax Act 1961 offers various tax benefits, including House Rent Allowance (HRA), which can significantly reduce your tax burden.
The ITR filing is set to start on April 1, 2025 for AY 2025-26. When the offline utilities and online forms are enabled on the e-filing portal, the income tax department will notify on its website.
The last date to file the income tax return will be July 31, 2025, for those who do not require audit.
Claiming HRA Exemption For Rent Paid To Parents
Salaried individuals receiving HRA as part of their Cost To Company (CTC) can claim exemptions on rent paid to their parents. However, certain conditions must be met:
– Proof of Residency and Rent Payment: You must reside at the property owned by your parents and make timely rent payments.
– Valid Rental Agreement: A legally binding rental agreement should be in place, and rent payments should be transferred to your parents’ bank account.
– Declaring Rental Income: Your parents are required to declare the received rent as income while filing their Income Tax Return (ITR).
– Rent Alignment with Market Rates: The rent amount should be in line with prevailing market rates. Inflated rent amounts may attract scrutiny from tax authorities.
Calculating Your HRA Exemption
The HRA exemption you can claim is the lowest of the following three amounts:
1. Actual HRA received from your employer.
2. 50% of (Basic Salary + DA) for residents of metro cities (Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata, Chennai) OR 40% of (Basic Salary + DA) for residents of non-metro cities.
3. Actual rent paid – 10% of (Basic Salary + DA).
Example Calculation
Let’s assume:
– Basic Salary = ₹50,000 per month
– DA (Dearness Allowance) = ₹5,000 per month
– HRA received from employer = ₹25,000 per month
– Rent paid = ₹20,000 per month
– City = Bangalore (Non-Metro)
Step-by-Step Calculation
1. Actual HRA received = ₹25,000 × 12 = ₹3,00,000
2. 40% of (Basic + DA) as Bangalore is a non-metro city: (₹50,000 + ₹5,000) × 40% = ₹22,000 × 12 = ₹2,64,000
3. Actual rent paid – 10% of (Basic + DA): (₹20,000 × 12) – (10% of (₹50,000 + ₹5,000) × 12) = ₹2,40,000 – ₹66,000 = ₹1,74,000
Therefore, the HRA Exemption = Lowest of ₹3,00,000, ₹2,64,000, and ₹1,74,000 = ₹1,74,000
The remaining HRA (₹1,26,000 = ₹3,00,000 – ₹1,74,000) will be taxable.
News business » tax Paying Rent To Parents? Here’s How To Claim HRA Exemption And Save Tax
The crypto market never stands still, and this week, three major projects are making waves. Hedera Hashgraph just allocated 4.86 billion HBAR tokens to drive network expansion, reinforcing its position as a leader in decentralized governance. Meanwhile, Chainlink’s DeFi integrations continue to strengthen its role as the backbone of blockchain-based financial services, even as its price struggles to find momentum.
But among the biggest movers, one name is stealing the spotlight—Qubetics ($TICS). As the world’s first Web3 aggregator, Qubetics is eliminating blockchain fragmentation and simplifying decentralized development with its QubeQode IDE. With its Stage 24 presale currently priced at $0.0976, Qubetics is fast becoming the best crypto investment opportunity for those looking to secure early-stage gains before the next major price hike.
Let’s break down why Qubetics, Hedera, and Chainlink are dominating headlines and why Qubetics’ presale is catching fire among early buyers.
Qubetics’ Web3 Innovation: A Seamless Future for Blockchain Developers
Blockchain innovation is moving fast, but let’s be honest—it’s still way too complicated for the average person to build on. If you’re a developer, launching a smart contract requires extensive coding knowledge, expensive developers, and complex integrations. Even for businesses looking to tokenize assets, create NFT collections, or set up DeFi solutions, the technical hurdles are often overwhelming.
That’s where Qubetics’ QubeQode IDE steps in to simplify blockchain development. Imagine you’re a small business that wants to implement a blockchain-based loyalty program. Normally, you’d need an entire development team to write smart contracts and ensure everything runs smoothly. But with QubeQode’s drag-and-drop interface, anyone can deploy blockchain solutions without needing to code.
Or picture an indie game developer wanting to integrate NFT-based in-game assets. Instead of spending months learning Solidity or Rust, they can use QubeQode’s pre-built smart contract templates and deploy blockchain features in minutes. This isn’t just a minor improvement—it’s a game-changer for Web3 adoption.
Qubetics Presale: The Best Crypto Investment Before Prices Surge
The Qubetics presale is on fire, and with each stage lasting only 7 days, early participants are seeing massive upside potential. Every Sunday at 12 AM, the token price jumps by 10%, making timing critical for those looking to maximize gains.
Latest Qubetics Presale Details (Updated March 07, 2025):
Current Stage: 24th
Current Price: $0.0976
Presale Tally: Over $14.7 million raised
Token Holders: 22,500+
Coins Sold: Over 497 million $TICS tokens
Potential ROI Projections for $TICS:
$0.25 at presale end: 155.93% ROI
$1 after presale: 923.72% ROI
$5 post-presale: 5,018.58% ROI
$10 after mainnet launch: 10,137.16% ROI
$15 after mainnet launch: 15,255.75% ROI
A $1,000 investment at today’s price ($0.0976) could turn into $100,000+ if $TICS reaches $10 after launch. With Q2 2025 set for the mainnet launch, this is a rare early opportunity. Qubetics is shaping up to be the best crypto investment before its price explodes.
Hedera’s Billion-Dollar Expansion: Powering the Next Wave of Blockchain Innovation
Hedera Hashgraph has been making big moves to expand its ecosystem. The Hedera Council recently approved a 4.86 billion HBAR token allocation to support network development and decentralized governance initiatives. This massive funding boost will be distributed to key entities, including the HBAR Foundation and the Hashgraph Association, to drive adoption and ecosystem growth.
But Hedera isn’t just throwing money around—it’s also strengthening its governance model. With Google, University College London, and Wipro joining its governing council, Hedera is proving that it’s serious about decentralized decision-making. By bringing in major players from tech and academia, the network is ensuring that its development remains transparent, efficient, and innovative.
The question now is whether this funding injection will drive new momentum for HBAR’s price. If Hedera can successfully deploy its $4.86 billion allocation, we could see a significant uptick in adoption and market confidence.
Chainlink’s DeFi Integration: Securing Smart Contracts and Real-World Data
If there’s one name that DeFi can’t function without, it’s Chainlink (LINK). The platform has been providing secure, real-world data feeds to smart contracts, making it an indispensable player in the decentralized finance space. But despite its tech dominance, LINK has struggled in the market recently.
The reason? Chainlink’s integrations are growing stronger by the day. Its decentralized oracles are used in DeFi, NFTs, gaming, and even traditional finance to provide accurate, tamper-proof data to smart contracts. As more real-world assets get tokenized on-chain, Chainlink will likely see rising demand for its services. The question is whether its price will catch up with its fundamental value.
Conclusion: Which Crypto Holds the Biggest Potential?
There’s no shortage of exciting projects in crypto right now, but Qubetics, Hedera, and Chainlink are leading the charge in innovation. Hedera’s $4.86 billion expansion fund is setting the stage for major network growth, and its governance structure ensures long-term sustainability. Chainlink continues to dominate DeFi infrastructure, and despite recent price struggles, its long-term outlook remains strong.
If you’re looking for the best crypto investment right now, Qubetics’ crypto presale offers a rare opportunity to get in before the market catches up. With prices increasing weekly, now’s the time to join the Qubetics presale before the next major jump.
For More Information:
FAQs
1. Why is Qubetics considered the best crypto investment right now?
Qubetics is solving one of crypto’s biggest adoption barriers—blockchain complexity. With its QubeQode IDE, anyone can build and deploy smart contracts without deep coding knowledge. Combined with its multi-chain compatibility and strategic partnerships, Qubetics is positioned for mass adoption.
2. How does the Qubetics presale work?
The Qubetics presale operates in 7-day stages, with a 10% price increase every Sunday at midnight. Currently in Stage 24, $TICS is priced at $0.0976, with 496 million tokens already sold. The presale allows early participants to secure tokens before they hit exchanges.
3. What is Hedera’s $4.86 billion fund being used for?
Hedera is allocating these funds to its HBAR Foundation, Hashgraph Association, and ecosystem partners to accelerate adoption, network growth, and decentralized governance initiatives. This could drive new development, partnerships, and real-world use cases for the Hedera network.
T-Mobile is the best internet provider in Boise for most households, according to our CNET experts. It takes the top spot thanks to a combination of affordability, reliable speeds and high customer satisfaction. With limited options in the area, T-Mobile stands out by offering competitive pricing and speeds that meet the needs of most households. Plans start at $50 per month, but eligible mobile customers can get coverage for as low as $35 per month.
Other providers may be worth considering. Sparklight starts at $36 a month for 100 Mbps, though the price rises to $55 after a year. CTC Telecom’s Wilderness Wireless plan is another budget-friendly option at $49 a month, making it the second most affordable in the region. Mobile internet from Verizon can also be a cost-effective alternative, offering stable pricing without the fluctuation of introductory rates.
For those seeking the fastest speeds, Quantum Fiber’s 2-gig plan is the top choice, though it’s only available in select areas. Both Quantum Fiber and Sparklight offer 1-gig plans citywide, but Quantum Fiber stands out with symmetrical upload and download speeds.
Customer satisfaction plays a key role in CNET’s ranking, with T-Mobile earning the highest marks, further cementing its position as Boise’s best overall internet provider.
Best internet in Boise, Idaho
Boise internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Download speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
CenturyLink Read full review
DSL
$55-$75
100-940Mbps
$15 modem
None
None
6.7
CTC Telecom/Wilderness Wireless
Fixed Wireless
$76-$134
100-1,000Mbps (varies by location)
None
None
None
N/A
EarthLink Home Internet Read full review
DSL/Fiber
$59-$190
150Mbps-5,000Mbps
None
None
1-year (optional)
6.3
Quantum Fiber
Fiber
$50-$95
500-2,000Mbps
None
None
None
6.7
Sparklight Read full review
Cable
$36-$70 ($55-$85 after 12 months)
100-940Mbps
$14 modem
None
None
6.9
SpeedyQuick Networks
Fixed Wireless
$60-$165
10-40Mbps (varies by location)
None
None
1-year
N/A
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with cellular plan)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for qualifying Verizon 5G mobile customers)
50-20Mbps (varies by location)
None
None
None
7.2
White Cloud
Fixed wireless
$55-$150
10-200Mbps
Free modem, $8-$12 router
None
None (but installation fee is charged if you cancel before 12 months)
N/A
Show more (4 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data
Other available internet providers in Boise
Satellite Internet: These services are available virtually everywhere. Two options for this type of provider are Hughesnet and Viasat. Most locations we checked for Viasat in Boise topped off at 12Mbps speeds with 35-65GB of data allocation. Prices ranged between $70 to $150 monthly. Unlike Hughesnet, Viasat customers can enjoy their plans without being tied down by contracts. Hughesnet plans will run from $75 to $90 monthly, discounted down to a range of $50 to $65 monthly for the Boise area with available speeds from 50 to 100Mbps. The higher-end $120 plan discounted to $95 combines satellite and wireless internet for lower latency. This also requires a two-year contract and equipment rental or purchase.
SpeedyQuick Networks: This is another wireless provider serving the Boise region, with plans costing anywhere between $60 and $165 per month. Download speeds range from 10 to 40Mbps but will vary based on your address.
White Cloud: This Idaho-based company offers residential internet in Boise. It’s a wireless connection and plans range from $55 to $150 monthly.
CTC Telecom/Wilderness Wireless: This company provides internet service to customers in Idaho and Eastern Oregon. There are no contracts required, but you will need to pay a $129 installation fee. The base plan is $49 per month, and the top-tier plan is $95 monthly. It’s available in the extreme outskirts of the city.
Anna Gorin/Getty Images
Cheap internet options in Boise
Most of the internet options in Boise start around $50 per month. The cheapest internet plan in town is $36 monthly from Sparklight with 100Mbps download speed. That’s a 12-month introductory rate that changes to $55 per month after the promo period ends. The best value for speed in Boise is Quantum Fiber, whose 1-gigabit plan is a monthly fixed price of $75 and is currently priced for life in the Boise market.
How many members of your household use the internet?
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Boise?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Sparklight Read full review
$36 ($55 after 12 months)
100Mbps
$14 modem
Sparklight Read full review
$40 ($60 after 12 months)
300Mbps
$14 modem
CTC Telecom/Wilderness Wireless
$75
100Mbps
None
Quantum Fiber
$50
500Mbps
None
EarthLink Home Internet Read full review
$60
100GB
None
White Cloud
$55
10Mbps
$8-$12 router
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50
245Mbps
None
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data
How to find internet deals and promotions in Boise
The best internet deals and top promotions in Boise depend on what discounts are available during that time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
Boise internet providers, such as Sparklight and T-Mobile Home Internet, may offer lower introductory pricing for a limited time. Others, including Quantum Fiber, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Boise broadband?
Boise didn’t distinguish itself too well among the top 100 cities in the US, per Ookla’s most recent speed test data. Boise’s median download speed was just shy of 188Mbps, which was good for 83rd place. That’s not great, but it’s better than the 140Mbps that Idaho scored as a state. Overall, the results you’ll see at home will vary based on your location, equipment, internet connection type and network congestion. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
What are the fastest internet plans in Boise?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
Quantum Fiber Internet
$95
2,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Quantum Fiber Internet
$75
940Mbps
940Mbps
None
Fiber
Sparklight Read full review
$70 ($85 after 12 months)
1,000Mbps
50Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email and streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Boise
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. What’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answers to those questions are often layered and complex, but the providers that come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Boise?
Boise has a good range of internet providers, meeting lots of different customer preferences. You can opt for a cheap wireless plan or go all in on a top-of-the-line fiber plan. Either way, you’re likely to find reliable, fast service for your home in the metro area.
Internet providers in Boise FAQs
What is the best internet service provider in Boise?
Our best overall pick for internet in Boise is T-Mobile Home Internet. It has a great mix of perks (no contracts or data caps), and the pricing is simple and affordable. It’s not the fastest or cheapest plan out here, but it’s likely to work for most people.
Yes, but it depends on where exactly you live. Quantum Fiber is likely your best bet and offers some of the fastest fiber plans. Check the Quantum Fiber site to see if it’s available at your specific location.
The cheapest plan in town is Sparklight’s base plan, which is $36 per month for 100Mbps. Expect that price to go up dramatically after the first year. For eligible mobile customers, fixed wireless providers such as Verizon and T-Mobile offer reduced prices on select mobile plans that can drop your monthly bill down by $15 to $25.
Which internet provider in Boise offers the fastest plan?
Quantum Fiber offers the fastest internet plan in the city at 2,000Mbps download speed. However, the upload speed maxes out at 1,000Mbps. This plan is available for $95 a month.
What internet provider has the best coverage in Boise?
Sparklight is the wired internet provider with the deepest coverage in Boise. It’s available to 97% of addresses in the city, according to the FCC’s National Broadband Map.
The causes of death have been revealed for actor Gene Hackman, 95, and his wife Betsy Arakawa Hackman, 65.
Hackman was found to have atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease along with advanced Alzheimer’s disease, while his wife likely passed away first from “hantavirus pulmonary syndrome” (HPS), according to New Mexico authorities.
Hantaviruses include a group of viruses primarily carried by rodents that can cause severe respiratory or renal diseases in humans, according to Dr. Rhys Parry, a molecular virologist at the University of Queensland in Australia.
GENE HACKMAN DEATH TIMELINE: ACTOR’S FINAL DAYS WITH WIFE
Most hantaviruses that are found in North, Central and South America can cause HPS, the condition that Hackman’s wife was found to have, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).
“The hantaviruses that are found throughout the United States are not known to spread between people,” the CDC stated.
Causes of death have been revealed for actor Gene Hackman, 95, and his wife Betsy Arakawa Hackman, 65.(Getty Images)
HPS has a nearly 40% fatality rate in those who are infected, according to the above source.
How hantavirus spreads
“Hantaviruses typically spread when humans breathe in virus particles from disturbed rodent urine, droppings or nesting materials,” Parry told Fox News Digital.
DEADLY VIRUS SAMPLES WENT MISSING FROM LAB IN ‘MAJOR BIOSECURITY BREACH,’ SAY AUTHORITIES
The CDC lists the following potential mechanisms of spread:
Breathing in contaminated air when cleaning up after rodents
Touching contaminated objects and then touching the nose or mouth
Getting bitten or scratched by an infected rodent
Eating food contaminated with the virus
Hackman was found to have atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease along with advanced Alzheimer’s disease, while his wife likely passed away first from hantavirus pulmonary syndrome.(Donaldson Collection/Michael Ochs Archives/Getty Images)
Dr. Marc Siegel, clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Health and Fox News senior medical analyst, agreed that hantavirus can spread via dust from rodents’ saliva, urine and places they touch.
The most common type of rodent to carry it in the U.S. is the deer mouse, the doctor noted.
Early symptoms of hantavirus include fever, muscle aches, fatigue and gastrointestinal issues.
Most hantavirus cases are seen in rural areas, where it is more likely for rodents to get into homes or barns, the CDC noted.
Hantavirus infections are “incredibly rare,” both experts agreed.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“This is a pretty sad set of circumstances,” Parry noted. “I’m honestly impressed they were able to determine it was HPS after the fact.”
Siegel added that it rarely affects humans “because only some of the rodents have it, and they don’t all come into contact — but one-third to one-half of cases are fatal.”
Symptoms and treatment
Early symptoms of hantavirus include fever, muscle aches, fatigue and gastrointestinal issues that appear anywhere from one to eight weeks after exposure, according to Parry.
“These progress to serious respiratory symptoms like coughing, shortness of breath and fluid in the lungs four to 10 days later,” he said.
Hantaviruses include a group of viruses primarily carried by rodents that can cause severe respiratory or renal diseases in humans.(iStock)
Sin Nombre virus is the most common hantavirus in the United States, which causes hantavirus pulmonary syndrome with a mortality rate of approximately 38%.
“It typically becomes fatal when the lungs fill with fluid, leading to respiratory failure and insufficient oxygen reaching vital organs,” Parry noted.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
There is no specific antiviral treatment for hantavirus, the expert said, although early intensive care with oxygen therapy and supportive measures is crucial.
“Early intensive medical care is critical because patients who have sudden acute disease can rapidly become severely sick and die,” the CDC states.
Hantaviruses can cause severe illnesses, hemorrhagic fever, renal disease or hantavirus pulmonary syndrome.(iStock)
“If a patient is experiencing full distress, it is less likely the treatment will be effective.”
Supportive care can include monitoring heart function, administering fluids and oxygen, and placing the patient on a ventilator as needed. Patients may also receive broad-spectrum antibiotic therapy, fever reducers and pain relievers.
“Even with medical care, 30% to 40% of people who develop hantavirus pulmonary syndrome will not survive.”
“Although there is no cure for hantavirus pulmonary syndrome, it is important to seek medical care when short of breath, because the patient may need support from a mechanical ventilator or extra-corporal membrane oxygenator (ECMO) machine to deliver enough oxygen to their body,” Dr. Sonja Bartolome, an expert in pulmonology and critical care at UT Southwestern Medical Center, told Fox News Digital.
“Even with medical care, 30% to 40% of people who develop hantavirus pulmonary syndrome will not survive.”
Prevention of hantavirus
Bartolome offered some tips for preventing this rare infection.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“It can be prevented by keeping wild mice and rats out of your home, cleaning up rodent waste quickly when encountered, and staying away from areas infested with rodents,” she told Fox News Digital.
“When cleaning up rodent waste, it is important to wear rubber gloves, use disinfectant and wash your hands afterward.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
“Daaru” and “Chakna” are essential terms associated with Indian drinking culture. The first is a colloquial term for any type of alcohol, while the latter refers to the snacks/sides often served along with the drinks. One may draw a comparison to the combo of cocktails and small plates frequently found at popular bars nowadays, but the essence of “daaru chakna” is decidedly desi and diverse – and this is what is celebrated at Bombay Daak. This bar in Bandra is helmed by Chef Niyati Rao and Sagar Neve (the duo behind the award-winning Ekaa), with Yathish Bangera as the Head Mixologist.
The menus feature regionally inspired delicacies, and most have anecdotes associated with them. “I have always been enamoured with the drinking ‘kissa’s’ [stories] of many relatives and close friends and people in general – and how different yet vibrant they all are,” reveals Chef Niyati. Many of these discoveries sourced from her community have informed the curation of the menu. The team also conducted months of research across the country to understand the intricacies of regional drinking traditions, their ingredients and their history. And they focused not only on the alcohol but also on the numerous types of dishes it is commonly paired with. The bar’s name contains a travel motif too. It is a reference to Bombay Duck or ‘Bombil’ – a local fish often consumed along with alcohol in pre-colonial times by people belonging to the Koli community. The fish used to be transported to Kolkata (then Calcutta) via a train service known as Bombay Daak (‘Daak’ means ‘mail’ in Hindi).
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
Bombay Daak blends pre-colonial Indian charm, Japanese izakaya seating and a homely ambience. It’s not just the food and drink – every element of the decor and ambience evokes nostalgia and enhances the overall charm of the bar: sugarcane juice glasses, engraved aluminium bill boxes from Gujarat, custom ceramic cups crafted by local artists, rustic steel plates, hand painted kitchen tiles, etc. Other unique elements include a Gymkhana club-style “donor board” (with names of those who contributed to the bar’s vision) and vintage lamps sourced from Chor Bazar – the latter used to be a feature at British gentleman’s cigar whiskey bar in the 1900s.
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
Bombay Daak’s drinks tasting menu offers an interactive and immersive experience, allowing guests to engage with the chefs and mixologists in an open kitchen setting. The a la carte menu includes hyper-local drinks as well as “Swadeshi Sips” – house-made spirits that pay tribute to traditional Indian liquors in a creative way. Each option has been carefully sourced, crafted and presented. “One of the most fascinating discoveries during our travels was in Coorg, where locals craft Bird’s Eye Chili Wine – a fiery yet fruity concoction that inspired our Parangi Malu cocktail, paired with jackfruit and coffee bitters for depth. And from Nagaland, we bring you Zutho – a drink inspired by a family-guarded recipe made with rice, ranu, and water, offering a taste of the region’s rich fermentation culture,” Yash explains. Other highlights include cocktail versions of iconic local delicacies. For instance, The Whistle Podu (gin, Rasam Powder Hydrosol, Amaro, Caramalised Tomato) is a ‘savoury’ alcoholic take on South Indian Rasam. Similarly, the Pahadi (with Tequila, Spiced Gin, Whey, Cucumber Juice, Buransh, Clarified Mint Cordial, Mustard Hydrosol) has been inspired by Kumaoni raita!
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
The chakna menu is an equally rich tapestry of flavours and stories from across the country. Chef Niyati deftly transforms traditional forms of these bar bites while striking a balance between authenticity and adaptability. She explains, “We start by respecting the integrity of regional flavours – the spices, techniques, and pairings that define them – while thoughtfully reinterpreting them to resonate with a cosmopolitan palate. This means refining textures, calibrating spice levels, and sometimes deconstructing traditional elements.”Every guest is offered some free chakna to start with: crisp potato papad dusted with a special masala made by Chef Niyati’s mother and crushed schezwan chakli which is another kind of nostalgic nod. There’s ample variety not just in terms of vegetarian and non-vegetarian ingredients, but also in terms of other preferences.
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
If you can handle fiery delights, the potent Zhanzanit Kakdi should be no challenge. Instead, if you need something calming and wholesome, go for the Tangra Hangover. This vegan offering features soy-stuffed wontons enveloped in an aromatic sesame emulsion. We’re told it has been inspired by Chef Niyati’s stepfather, who used to head to Tangra at 3 am to relish wontons and noodle soup as his preferred “hangover breakfast” after drinking. The Wai-Wai is another noteworthy snack and it’s made with 23 different ingredients. The team calls it “A Manipuri teenager’s rite of passage to adulthood and drinking.” More specifically, it was inspired by Singju, a kachumber often enjoyed with the local liquor over there.
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
Among the seafood, don’t miss the signature Bombil, Bumaloo, Bombay Duck. The bar’s eponymous ingredient is plated as crisp fried bites topped with kismoor and crushed nori. Meat lovers can discover the distinctive texture of Meghalayan Smoked Pork by ordering the hearty Pork & Smoke. If you’re just dropping by for a quick bite and drink, savour Chef’s twist on Parsi bakery chicken puffs – Bombay Daak’s Duck Puff with a unique duck ghee roast filling. Some of these calibrations of strong flavours – while fascinating – can get rather overwhelming if you try too many in a single sitting. If you face such a dilemma, take comfort in the warm morsels of Maska Bread – a gorgeously soft and buttery 110% Hydration bread enhanced by green mango and three types of cheese. If you’re in need of a sweet fix, opt for the Cheese Cherry Pineapple. Here, the iconic skewers have been reimagined as a dessert featuring cheese biscuit, pineapple softie and Luxardo cherries.
Photo Credit: Nikhil Vaidya
“Indian drinking culture has long been overshadowed by international influences, but at Bombay Daak, we aim to shift that narrative,” says Yathish Bangera. So if you’re stopping by Bombay Daak, you can expect a delicious adventure. You get a marvellous opportunity to discover India through sips and bites that combine novelty and familiarity.
China will resolutely restore stability in the real estate market, with efforts to provide strong financing support for eligible housing projects and ensure timely delivery of homes to buyers, Minister of Housing and Urban-Rural Development Ni Hong said on Sunday.
Ni made the remarks at a press conference on people’s livelihood held by the third session of the 14th National People’s Congress in Beijing.
According to this year’s government work report, it is imperative to stabilize the property sector, Ni said, pledging to work with relevant departments to achieve that end.
He called for fully unleashing the effects of policies such as interest rate cuts, loan increases, and tax cuts to benefit more people, along with providing strong financing support to guarantee project construction and delivery.
Ramping up efforts to renovate urban villages and dilapidated houses, the ministry will continue to expand the scale of renovation based on the one million units added last year, he said.
The renovation of dilapidated houses should be accelerated through various methods such as reconstruction on the original site, renovation and expansion, and earthquake-resistant reinforcement, so as to eliminate safety hazards as soon as possible and improve the living environment, Ni said.
Ni also said the country will speed up the construction of a new model of real estate development to meet the people’s needs for high-quality housing, promote the construction of safe, comfortable, green and smart houses, and promote the stable and healthy development of the real estate market.
(Cover: Dozens of residential buildings are under construction in Jinan, east China’s Shandong Province, January 23, 2025. /VCG)
-0.43% 
